Geomatica® Focus - UNBC GIS Lab

Geomatica® Focus
User Guide
Version 10.1

© 2007 PCI Geomatics Enterprises Inc.®. All rights reserved.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
Software copyrighted © by PCI Geomatics, 50 West Wilmot St., Suite 200, Richmond Hill,
ON CANADA L4B 1M5 Telephone number: (905) 764-0614
RESTRICTED RIGHTS
Canadian Government
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in
DSS 9400-18 "General Conditions - Short Form - Licensed Software".
U.S. Government
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in
subparagraph (b)(3) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of
DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraph (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights clause at 48 CFR 52.227-19 as amended, or any successor
regulations thereto.
PCI, PCI Geomatics, PCI and design (logo), Geomatica, Committed to GeoIntelligence
Solutions, GeoGateway, FLY!, OrthoEngine, RADARSOFT, EASI/PACE, ImageWorks,
GCPWorks, PCI Author, PCI Visual Modeler, and SPANS are registered trademarks of PCI
Geomatics Enterprises, Inc.
Sentinel is a registered® trademark of SafeNet, Inc.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Geomatica® Focus
Table of Contents
Using the Focus online help ................................................................................................................................................................ 23
Using technical references ........................................................................................................................................................... 23
Using the GDB formats reference ................................................................................................................................................ 23
Working with Focus .............................................................................................................................................................................. 25
Opening a file ................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
Adding data to a project ................................................................................................................................................................ 26
Using the Add Layer wizard .......................................................................................................................................................... 26
Understanding the Focus control pane ....................................................................................................................................... 27
Using the Maps and Files trees .................................................................................................................................................... 28
Changing the layer priority........................................................................................................................................................ 28
Viewing layer properties............................................................................................................................................................ 28
Viewing auxiliary data............................................................................................................................................................... 28
Adding image channels............................................................................................................................................................. 29
Combining layers ...........................................................................................................................................................................30
About the Combined Layer dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 30
About the Select Layer dialog box............................................................................................................................................ 31
Working with project files ............................................................................................................................................................. 31
Saving a project........................................................................................................................................................................ 31
Using the Layer Manager .............................................................................................................................................................. 31
Changing layer properties......................................................................................................................................................... 32
Using the Zoom Scale Active feature........................................................................................................................................ 33
About rotated rasters .....................................................................................................................................................................34
Managing data properties ............................................................................................................................................................. 35
About the Map Properties dialog box .......................................................................................................................................... 35
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 35
Page Setup tab......................................................................................................................................................................... 36
Default RST tab........................................................................................................................................................................ 37
About the Area Properties dialog box ..........................................................................................................................................37
General tab ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 37
Layout tab .......................................................................................................................................................................................38
Projection/Extents tab ................................................................................................................................................................... 38
Using a math model with images ................................................................................................................................................. 40
Using the math model for georeferencing ...................................................................................................................................41
PCI Geomatics
i

Geomatica® Focus
About the Math Model Area Properties dialog box .....................................................................................................................42
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Layout tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
Projection/Extents tab............................................................................................................................................................... 43
About the RGB Layer Properties dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 44
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Source Images tab.................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Source LUTs tab....................................................................................................................................................................... 46
Display tab................................................................................................................................................................................ 46
Display within Zoom Scale tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 47
About the Grayscale Layer Properties dialog box..................................................................................................................... 47
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Source Images tab.................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Source LUTs tab....................................................................................................................................................................... 48
Display tab................................................................................................................................................................................ 49
Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 49
Labels tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 50
About the PCT Layer Properties dialog box ................................................................................................................................50
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Source Image tab...................................................................................................................................................................... 50
Display tab................................................................................................................................................................................ 51
Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 51
Labels tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 51
About the Bitmap Layer Properties dialog box ...........................................................................................................................52
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Source Images tab.................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Display tab................................................................................................................................................................................ 53
Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 53
About the Vector Layer Properties dialog box ............................................................................................................................53
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 54
Labels tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 54
About the Thematic Layer Properties dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 54
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Display tab ................................................................................................................................................................................ 55
Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 55
Labels tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 55
About the RST Properties dialog box .......................................................................................................................................... 55
About the Modify dialog box...................................................................................................................................................... 56
About the Symbol Properties dialog box .....................................................................................................................................56
Using the File Properties dialog box ............................................................................................................................................57
PCI Geomatics
ii

Geomatica® Focus
About the Bitmap Properties dialog box ..................................................................................................................................... 57
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 57
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 57
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 57
About the File Properties dialog box ........................................................................................................................................... 58
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 58
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 59
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Projection tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 59
About the Ground Control Points dialog box ..............................................................................................................................61
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 61
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 61
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 62
About the Look-up Table Properties dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 62
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 62
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 63
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 63
About the Orbit Properties dialog box ......................................................................................................................................... 63
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 63
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 64
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 64
About the Pseudo-color table properties .................................................................................................................................... 64
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 64
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 65
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 65
About the Raster Properties dialog box ...................................................................................................................................... 65
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 65
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 66
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 66
About the Signatures Properties dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 67
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 67
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 67
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 67
About the Text Properties dialog box .......................................................................................................................................... 68
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 68
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 68
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 68
About the Vector Properties dialog box ...................................................................................................................................... 69
General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 69
History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 70
MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 70
PCI Geomatics
iii

Geomatica® Focus
Projection tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 70
About the Other Projections dialog box.................................................................................................................................... 71
Color mapping and image profiles ............................................................................................................................................... 71
About the RGB Mapping dialog box.......................................................................................................................................... 71
Creating an image profile.......................................................................................................................................................... 72
About the Profile Table dialog box............................................................................................................................................ 72
About the Profile Options dialog box......................................................................................................................................... 74
About the Profile Graph dialog box........................................................................................................................................... 74
About the Graph Controls dialog box........................................................................................................................................ 76
Using the graph controls........................................................................................................................................................... 77
Exporting profiles...................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Printing your graph without showing the mensuration bars...................................................................................................... 78
Using the View tools ...................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Using the Zoom window............................................................................................................................................................ 78
Using a Clone view................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Chaining clone views................................................................................................................................................................ 79
Zooming using the Overview window....................................................................................................................................... 79
Creating named regions ................................................................................................................................................................ 79
Removing named regions......................................................................................................................................................... 80
Creating named regions using coordinates.............................................................................................................................. 80
Panning an image .......................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Zooming an image with zoom tools.......................................................................................................................................... 81
Viewing a 1:1 image resolution................................................................................................................................................. 81
Using a layout grid .........................................................................................................................................................................81
Grid spacing.............................................................................................................................................................................. 81
Index spacing............................................................................................................................................................................ 82
Visualizing your data ..................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Enhancing images.................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Using the Attribute Manager..................................................................................................................................................... 83
Importing XML metadata using the METAIN algorithm .............................................................................................................. 83
Opening an image data set ........................................................................................................................................................... 84
Viewing global metadata ............................................................................................................................................................... 84
Viewing band-specific metadata ...................................................................................................................................................85
Enabling and disabling panes ...................................................................................................................................................... 85
Changing the units for the cursor position................................................................................................................................ 85
Using the Visualization tools ........................................................................................................................................................ 85
About the Visualization Tools dialog box ....................................................................................................................................86
Using the Flicker tool................................................................................................................................................................ 86
Using the Swipe tool................................................................................................................................................................. 86
Using the Blend tool.................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Using the Loop tool................................................................................................................................................................... 88
PCI Geomatics
iv

Geomatica® Focus
Using the Cycle tool.................................................................................................................................................................. 89
Using the Band Cycling tool...................................................................................................................................................... 90
Opening the Thumbnails viewer ...................................................................................................................................................92
About the Thumbnails viewer.................................................................................................................................................... 92
Using the Thumbnails viewer.................................................................................................................................................... 94
Selecting grayscale and RGB layers ............................................................................................................................................95
Visualizing data with the 3-D data cube .......................................................................................................................................95
About the 3-D data cube controls............................................................................................................................................. 96
About the Select PCT Layer dialog box.................................................................................................................................... 98
Selecting colors ............................................................................................................................................................................. 99
Color palettes............................................................................................................................................................................ 99
Color models .................................................................................................................................................................................. 99
Setting options and preferences ................................................................................................................................................ 101
General interface.................................................................................................................................................................... 101
Warnings................................................................................................................................................................................. 102
Layers..................................................................................................................................................................................... 103
Default representation............................................................................................................................................................. 103
Vector editing ............................................................................................................................................................................... 104
Memory cache .............................................................................................................................................................................. 105
Optimizing the Undo/Redo options......................................................................................................................................... 106
Optimizing the tiling cache...................................................................................................................................................... 106
Setting the total cache limit..................................................................................................................................................... 107
Setting the vector read cache................................................................................................................................................. 107
Overview window .........................................................................................................................................................................107
Zoom window ............................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Layer Manager ..............................................................................................................................................................................107
Open GL settings ......................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Setting shape and color preferences ......................................................................................................................................... 108
Modifying a selected line......................................................................................................................................................... 108
Modifying a selected polygon.................................................................................................................................................. 109
Applying preferences to selected text..................................................................................................................................... 109
Changing the style for hatches ...................................................................................................................................................109
Changing the raster color........................................................................................................................................................ 110
Changing the raster size......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Setting up a digitizing tablet using Wintab ................................................................................................................................110
Setting up a digitizing tablet using a driver............................................................................................................................. 110
Testing the digitizing tablet connection................................................................................................................................... 111
Assigning text actions and modifiers....................................................................................................................................... 111
Setting up a GPS receiver ........................................................................................................................................................... 111
Testing the GPS connection................................................................................................................................................... 112
Measurement tools ...................................................................................................................................................................... 112
PCI Geomatics
v

Geomatica® Focus
Changing display options ........................................................................................................................................................... 112
About the Display Options dialog box..................................................................................................................................... 113
Customizing the Focus toolbars ................................................................................................................................................ 113
About the Toolbar Configuration dialog box............................................................................................................................ 113
Supported layer types .........................................................................................................................................................................115
Focus and raster layers ...............................................................................................................................................................115
Metadata ........................................................................................................................................................................................116
Segment organization ..................................................................................................................................................................116
Topological layers ........................................................................................................................................................................120
Arc layers................................................................................................................................................................................ 120
Node layers:............................................................................................................................................................................ 120
Area layers.............................................................................................................................................................................. 120
Representation Style Tables (RST)........................................................................................................................................ 121
Importing, linking, and translating data .....................................................................................................................................121
Importing files to the PCIDSK format...................................................................................................................................... 122
Building raster overviews........................................................................................................................................................ 123
Deleting raster overviews........................................................................................................................................................ 123
Linking PCIDSK and other databases.................................................................................................................................... 123
Translating file formats............................................................................................................................................................ 124
Importing and converting ASCII files ......................................................................................................................................... 125
Using the Import ASCII Table/Points wizard........................................................................................................................... 125
Formating fixed width files...................................................................................................................................................... 126
Opening data from a remote data source .................................................................................................................................. 126
Using undefined image data ....................................................................................................................................................... 127
Image metadata support ..............................................................................................................................................................129
Working with projections ............................................................................................................................................................ 129
Understanding PCIDSK projection definition.......................................................................................................................... 130
Supported projections............................................................................................................................................................. 130
Defining a new projection........................................................................................................................................................ 131
Defining datums and ellipsoids............................................................................................................................................... 133
Reprojecting files .........................................................................................................................................................................134
About the Reproject dialog box............................................................................................................................................... 134
Reprojection bounds............................................................................................................................................................... 135
Selectable layers and reprojection.......................................................................................................................................... 136
Setting reprojection bounds.................................................................................................................................................... 137
Specifying a coordinate system.............................................................................................................................................. 137
Selecting an ellipsoidal earth model .......................................................................................................................................... 137
Selecting the earth model....................................................................................................................................................... 138
Selecting the SPCS coordinate system ..................................................................................................................................... 138
Selecting a different coordinate system.................................................................................................................................. 138
Maximum bounds and resampling methods ............................................................................................................................. 138
PCI Geomatics
vi

Geomatica® Focus
Selecting database layers for reprojection ................................................................................................................................139
Organizing and editing layers .....................................................................................................................................................139
Adding and removing imagery................................................................................................................................................ 140
Creating a new raster layer..................................................................................................................................................... 141
Creating a new bitmap layer................................................................................................................................................... 141
Creating a new vector layer.................................................................................................................................................... 141
Setting vector layer attributes .................................................................................................................................................... 142
Setting vector layer properties ................................................................................................................................................... 142
Transferring layers .......................................................................................................................................................................143
Working with data tools ...............................................................................................................................................................144
Changing data formats ................................................................................................................................................................ 144
About the Bitmap Save As dialog box..................................................................................................................................... 144
About the Vector Save As dialog box..................................................................................................................................... 145
Selecting GDB format options................................................................................................................................................. 145
About the Grayscale Save As dialog box................................................................................................................................ 146
About the Output Layer Properties dialog box........................................................................................................................ 147
About the PCT Output Layer Properties dialog box................................................................................................................ 147
About the RST Save As dialog box......................................................................................................................................... 147
About the RGB Save As dialog box........................................................................................................................................ 148
About the PCT Save As dialog box......................................................................................................................................... 149
About the LUT Save As dialog box......................................................................................................................................... 150
Opening the Clipping/Subsetting panel .....................................................................................................................................151
Clipping and subsetting images.............................................................................................................................................. 152
Defining the clip region with user-entered coordinates ........................................................................................................... 153
Defining the clip region by selecting a file............................................................................................................................... 153
Defining the clip region by selecting a layer............................................................................................................................ 154
Defining the clip region by selecting a named region............................................................................................................. 154
Defining the clip region by selecting a script subset file.......................................................................................................... 154
Creating the text file for the Script Subset File method........................................................................................................... 155
Defining the clip region using the Zoom tools......................................................................................................................... 158
Creating multiple subset tiles.................................................................................................................................................. 158
Selecting a clip region............................................................................................................................................................. 158
Opening the Data Merge wizard ..................................................................................................................................................159
Choosing an input layer.......................................................................................................................................................... 159
Naming the output file............................................................................................................................................................. 159
Setting up output layers.......................................................................................................................................................... 160
Data Merge wizard - Set Bitmap Parameters dialog box .......................................................................................................... 161
Data Merge wizard - Set Image Parameters dialog box......................................................................................................... 161
Opening the Algorithm Librarian ....................................................................................................................................................... 163
About the Algorithm Librarian dialog box ................................................................................................................................. 163
Algorithm licensing ......................................................................................................................................................................163
PCI Geomatics
vii

Geomatica® Focus
Algorithm categories ................................................................................................................................................................... 164
Algorithm sub-categories........................................................................................................................................................ 164
Finding an algorithm ....................................................................................................................................................................166
Using the Find Algorithm utility............................................................................................................................................... 166
Searching for an algorithm by category.................................................................................................................................. 167
Creating user-defined categories ............................................................................................................................................... 167
Adding algorithms to the user defined folder.......................................................................................................................... 168
Using an algorithm .......................................................................................................................................................................168
About module control panels.................................................................................................................................................. 169
Finding help topics for all algorithms ........................................................................................................................................ 170
Finding help from the Algorithm Librarian dialog box.............................................................................................................. 170
Finding help from a Module Control Panel.............................................................................................................................. 170
Working with an algorithm MCP ................................................................................................................................................. 170
Working with an example ............................................................................................................................................................ 171
Using the ASP algorithm ............................................................................................................................................................. 171
Setting up the input port.......................................................................................................................................................... 171
Setting up output ports............................................................................................................................................................ 171
Setting up input parameters.................................................................................................................................................... 172
Running the ASP algorithm..................................................................................................................................................... 172
Viewing the results ...................................................................................................................................................................... 172
Understanding the results ...........................................................................................................................................................173
Adding functions to the algorithm library ................................................................................................................................. 173
Starting a classification session ........................................................................................................................................................175
Unsupervised classification ........................................................................................................................................................175
Configuring a new classification session................................................................................................................................ 175
Initializing unsupervised classification.................................................................................................................................... 176
Reading a classification report................................................................................................................................................ 176
Supervised classification ............................................................................................................................................................177
The supervised classification process.................................................................................................................................... 177
Initializing a supervised classification..................................................................................................................................... 178
Specifying the reference image.............................................................................................................................................. 178
Specifying the input channels .................................................................................................................................................... 179
Training sites and ground cover ................................................................................................................................................ 180
Drawing a class training site .......................................................................................................................................................180
Making corrections.................................................................................................................................................................. 181
About the Erase Settings dialog box....................................................................................................................................... 181
Changing training site colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 181
Importing training sites ............................................................................................................................................................... 181
Importing vectors.................................................................................................................................................................... 182
Opening the Import Bitmaps dialog box ....................................................................................................................................183
About the Import Bitmaps dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 183
PCI Geomatics
viii

Geomatica® Focus
Importing a specified bitmap as its training site...................................................................................................................... 183
Importing signatures from the training site editor ....................................................................................................................183
Filling polygons using the Raster Seeding function ................................................................................................................ 184
About the Raster Seeding dialog box ........................................................................................................................................ 184
Filling a polygon ...........................................................................................................................................................................185
Merging classes ........................................................................................................................................................................... 185
Analyzing training sites ...............................................................................................................................................................185
Testing signature separability .................................................................................................................................................... 186
Testing separability with a scatter plot ......................................................................................................................................186
Creating a scatter plot ................................................................................................................................................................. 187
Adjusting scatter plot threshold values................................................................................................................................... 187
Altering the view range for the X and Y axes ............................................................................................................................ 187
Exporting the scatter plot file................................................................................................................................................... 187
Displaying the color scale legend........................................................................................................................................... 187
Printing the scatter plot........................................................................................................................................................... 188
Previewing the classification ...................................................................................................................................................... 188
Setting the Maximum Likelihood classification preview.......................................................................................................... 188
Removing the preview classification from the metalayer........................................................................................................ 188
Creating a separability report.................................................................................................................................................. 188
Saving the separability report to an existing file ......................................................................................................................189
Running a supervised classification ..........................................................................................................................................189
Testing accuracy with signature statistics............................................................................................................................... 189
Viewing signature statistics..................................................................................................................................................... 190
Viewing a matrix report........................................................................................................................................................... 190
Comparing signature statistics................................................................................................................................................ 190
Saving the signature statistics report...................................................................................................................................... 190
Post-classification editing ...........................................................................................................................................................191
Improving classification results............................................................................................................................................... 191
Initialize post-classification editing.......................................................................................................................................... 191
Setting up a bitmap mask....................................................................................................................................................... 191
Opening a bitmap mask.......................................................................................................................................................... 192
Saving a bitmap mask............................................................................................................................................................. 192
Masking an image area........................................................................................................................................................... 192
Opening an aggregation session ............................................................................................................................................... 192
Opening the Aggregate dialog box in an unsupervised session............................................................................................. 193
Setting up an aggregation....................................................................................................................................................... 193
Setting up a new aggregate class........................................................................................................................................... 193
Creating an aggregate from a set of input classes................................................................................................................. 195
Changing the input and output channel assignments............................................................................................................. 195
Assigning a new PCT to the current session.......................................................................................................................... 195
Generating a PCT................................................................................................................................................................... 196
PCI Geomatics
ix

Geomatica® Focus
Importing a PCT...................................................................................................................................................................... 196
Saving the aggregate session................................................................................................................................................. 196
Starting an aggregate session................................................................................................................................................ 196
Importing other classes........................................................................................................................................................... 197
Setting up for class labelling ...................................................................................................................................................... 197
About the Class Labelling dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 198
Initializing classes from a classification channel..................................................................................................................... 199
Initializing classes from a text file............................................................................................................................................ 199
Launching the Accuracy Assessment dialog box.................................................................................................................... 200
Using the Accuracy Assessment dialog box ............................................................................................................................ 200
Selecting a classified image.................................................................................................................................................... 201
Selecting a reference image................................................................................................................................................... 201
Generating a random sample................................................................................................................................................. 201
Assigning a reference class to a sample................................................................................................................................ 202
Opening samples from a vector segment............................................................................................................................... 202
Launching the Accuracy Report dialog box............................................................................................................................ 202
Producing a random sample report......................................................................................................................................... 203
Producing an error report........................................................................................................................................................ 203
Producing an accuracy statistics report.................................................................................................................................. 203
Saving an accuracy report...................................................................................................................................................... 203
Information tools .................................................................................................................................................................................205
Opening the Information report .................................................................................................................................................. 205
Viewing information for a selected vector .................................................................................................................................205
Viewing information for vectors under the cursor ....................................................................................................................205
Showing information for raster data .......................................................................................................................................... 206
Displaying the attributes from a chart ....................................................................................................................................... 206
Specifying the units of measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 206
Selecting a Measure tool........................................................................................................................................................ 206
Measuring a line...................................................................................................................................................................... 207
Measuring a polygon............................................................................................................................................................... 207
Measuring a rectangle or ellipse............................................................................................................................................. 207
Reading the Measure tool report............................................................................................................................................ 208
Viewing histograms and statistics ............................................................................................................................................. 208
Viewing a histogram................................................................................................................................................................ 208
Viewing histogram statistics.................................................................................................................................................... 209
Viewing Mask contents........................................................................................................................................................... 209
Viewing histograms under a bitmap mask.............................................................................................................................. 210
Zooming into and out of a histogram...................................................................................................................................... 210
Printing a histogram................................................................................................................................................................ 210
Exporting a histogram............................................................................................................................................................. 210
Working with numeric values ..................................................................................................................................................... 211
PCI Geomatics
x

Geomatica® Focus
Opening the Numeric Values dialog box................................................................................................................................. 211
Exporting the numeric values to a text file.............................................................................................................................. 212
Change a color channel DN value.......................................................................................................................................... 212
Interpreting the values............................................................................................................................................................ 212
Making an image profile .............................................................................................................................................................. 212
Using the mensuration bars.................................................................................................................................................... 214
Selecting vector profiles.......................................................................................................................................................... 214
Using the spectra extraction tools ............................................................................................................................................. 214
Extracting spectra from a region of interest............................................................................................................................ 215
About the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog box.......................................................................................................... 215
Configuring a hyperspectral metalayer................................................................................................................................... 215
About the Spectra Extraction dialog box................................................................................................................................. 216
Region menu ................................................................................................................................................................................ 216
Edit menu................................................................................................................................................................................ 217
Tools menu............................................................................................................................................................................. 217
Spectra extraction table.......................................................................................................................................................... 217
About the Import Vectors dialog box....................................................................................................................................... 218
About the Import Bitmaps dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 219
Merging a spectra channel ..........................................................................................................................................................220
Saving a spectral extraction.................................................................................................................................................... 220
Plotting spectra ............................................................................................................................................................................221
About the Spectra Plotting dialog box .......................................................................................................................................221
Radiometric quantity vs. wavelength graph............................................................................................................................ 221
Displayed spectra................................................................................................................................................................... 222
Graph options......................................................................................................................................................................... 224
Plotting ranges........................................................................................................................................................................ 224
Report..................................................................................................................................................................................... 225
Selecting a spectra library....................................................................................................................................................... 225
Changing the graph options.................................................................................................................................................... 226
Saving a spectra plot.............................................................................................................................................................. 226
Opening the DEM Editing dialog box ......................................................................................................................................... 227
Editing a DEM......................................................................................................................................................................... 227
Opening an existing mask....................................................................................................................................................... 227
Creating a mask...................................................................................................................................................................... 228
Replacing the elevation values under a mask ........................................................................................................................ 228
Filtering and interpolating DEM values................................................................................................................................... 229
Applying tool strategies for common situations in digital elevation models ........................................................................ 230
Adjusting pixel values for a lake.............................................................................................................................................. 230
Adjusting the pixel values for multiple lakes........................................................................................................................... 230
Compensating for forests and urban areas............................................................................................................................. 230
Neutralizing cloud-covered areas........................................................................................................................................... 231
PCI Geomatics
xi

Geomatica® Focus
Removing noise from a DEM.................................................................................................................................................. 231
Selecting the DEM layer......................................................................................................................................................... 231
Viewing the scatter plot for a layer .............................................................................................................................................232
Changing the input channel for the X and Y axes: ..................................................................................................................233
Using the Scatter Plot dialog box............................................................................................................................................ 233
Zooming into and out of a scatter plot..................................................................................................................................... 234
Using the graph controls .............................................................................................................................................................234
Changing the x and y view ranges.......................................................................................................................................... 234
Exporting a profile................................................................................................................................................................... 235
Working with legend and color controls.................................................................................................................................. 235
Interpreting a profile table ...........................................................................................................................................................235
Changing the color of a channel ................................................................................................................................................ 236
Changing the profile vector color ...............................................................................................................................................236
About the Change Color dialog box ...........................................................................................................................................237
Printing without the mensuration bars showing .......................................................................................................................237
Using the profile statistics .......................................................................................................................................................... 238
Controlling the cursor ................................................................................................................................................................. 238
Opening the GPS tool .................................................................................................................................................................. 239
Using the GPS tool................................................................................................................................................................. 239
Updating the cursor position using the GPS receiver............................................................................................................. 239
Inputting vector point data using the GPS receiver................................................................................................................. 239
Inputting vector line or polygon data using the GPS receiver................................................................................................. 240
Using the ADAPT algorithm ........................................................................................................................................................ 240
Converting RGB to pseudo-color............................................................................................................................................ 241
Converting RGB to pseudo-color............................................................................................................................................ 241
Opening the PCT Editing dialog box....................................................................................................................................... 241
Adjusting the pseudo-color for single values.......................................................................................................................... 241
Editing a value........................................................................................................................................................................ 241
Selecting a basic color value.................................................................................................................................................. 242
Customizing range-based pseudo-color tables ........................................................................................................................ 242
Using standard mode.............................................................................................................................................................. 242
Keeping the original color values............................................................................................................................................ 242
Selecting colors within the range............................................................................................................................................ 242
Applying pseudo colors to pixel values in a raster.................................................................................................................. 243
Opening the Raster Editing dialog box ......................................................................................................................................243
Specifying a value ........................................................................................................................................................................244
Changing a default enhancement ...............................................................................................................................................244
Applying a linear enhancement .................................................................................................................................................. 244
Zooming an image feature with an enhancement................................................................................................................... 245
Adjusting toolbar enhancements............................................................................................................................................. 246
Applying the Tail Trim option.................................................................................................................................................. 246
PCI Geomatics
xii

Geomatica® Focus
Adjusting the amount of Tail Trim........................................................................................................................................... 246
Decreasing the image contrast............................................................................................................................................... 247
Decreasing the image brightness........................................................................................................................................... 247
Enhancing images from the shortcut menu............................................................................................................................ 247
Opening the LUT editor ............................................................................................................................................................... 247
Displaying a histogram in the LUT Editor................................................................................................................................ 248
Moving an entire histogram..................................................................................................................................................... 248
Using the LUT tools................................................................................................................................................................ 248
Using the LUT enhancement options...................................................................................................................................... 248
Trace-editing a LUT histogram............................................................................................................................................... 249
Comparing custom enhancements......................................................................................................................................... 249
Applying a new look-up table to the corresponding image plane............................................................................................ 249
Working with spatial filters ......................................................................................................................................................... 250
Opening the Filter dialog box.................................................................................................................................................. 250
Filtering under a mask............................................................................................................................................................ 251
Using low-pass filters.............................................................................................................................................................. 251
Applying a gamma filter.......................................................................................................................................................... 253
Using high-pass filters............................................................................................................................................................. 254
Creating custom filters............................................................................................................................................................ 256
Saving a filtered image to a new file....................................................................................................................................... 257
Scaling images .............................................................................................................................................................................257
Scaling output data using Save As......................................................................................................................................... 258
Available scaling methods...................................................................................................................................................... 258
Scaling output data................................................................................................................................................................. 259
Fusing image data ........................................................................................................................................................................260
Running the FUSE algorithm.................................................................................................................................................. 260
Running IHS and RGB............................................................................................................................................................ 263
Using the PANSHARP algorithm............................................................................................................................................ 263
Using the raster calculator ..........................................................................................................................................................265
About the raster calculator ......................................................................................................................................................... 265
Expression.............................................................................................................................................................................. 266
Edit.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 266
View........................................................................................................................................................................................ 267
Raster Calculator toolbar........................................................................................................................................................ 267
Expression.............................................................................................................................................................................. 267
Calculator keys....................................................................................................................................................................... 268
Output parameters.................................................................................................................................................................. 268
Using the Raster Calculator to set output parameters............................................................................................................ 269
Opening the EASI Modeling dialog box ..................................................................................................................................... 269
About the EASI Modeling dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 270
Adding image and bitmap layers to a .pix file......................................................................................................................... 271
PCI Geomatics
xiii

Geomatica® Focus
Using simple image models.................................................................................................................................................... 271
Understanding the basic modeling logic................................................................................................................................. 272
Adding a bitmap layer to irvine.pix.......................................................................................................................................... 273
Image layer variables.............................................................................................................................................................. 274
Creating an EASI bitmap mask ................................................................................................................................................... 276
Understanding atmospheric correction ............................................................................................................................................ 283
Preparing data ..............................................................................................................................................................................283
Transfer data to PCIDSK........................................................................................................................................................ 283
Reprojecting data.................................................................................................................................................................... 284
Assembling data into a file...................................................................................................................................................... 285
Opening the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box ............................................................................................ 285
Setting up atmospheric correction parameters....................................................................................................................... 286
About aerosol types .....................................................................................................................................................................287
About standard atmospheres ..................................................................................................................................................... 287
Opening the elevation information setup dialog box ............................................................................................................... 288
Calculating slope, aspect, sky view, and shadow................................................................................................................... 289
Opening the band setup dialog box ........................................................................................................................................... 289
Matching band numbers to channel numbers......................................................................................................................... 290
Opening the Solar Calculations dialog box ...............................................................................................................................290
About Solar Zenith and Azimuth............................................................................................................................................. 290
Calculating the solar zenith and azimuth................................................................................................................................ 290
About visibility ............................................................................................................................................................................. 291
About adjacency..................................................................................................................................................................... 291
Determining the offset to surface temperature value.............................................................................................................. 291
Editing an existing calibration file to create a new file .............................................................................................................292
Opening the Define Haze and Cloud dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 293
Automatically creating a mask................................................................................................................................................ 293
Importing the masks from a file............................................................................................................................................... 294
Editing the Cloud mask ............................................................................................................................................................... 294
Editing the Haze mask ................................................................................................................................................................. 294
Editing the Visibility layer ........................................................................................................................................................... 294
Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box ............................................................................................................. 294
Running the correction............................................................................................................................................................ 295
Deriving additional data from the corrected imagery.............................................................................................................. 295
Opening the Leaf Area Index Model dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 296
Selecting the equation for calculating the Leaf Area Index..................................................................................................... 297
Changing the values for the fraction of photosynthetically active radiation (FPAR) equation ............................................297
Opening the Advanced Option dialog box ................................................................................................................................ 297
Setting the parameters............................................................................................................................................................ 298
Setting the thresholds for the reference pixels .........................................................................................................................299
Opening the Empirical BRDF Correction dialog box ................................................................................................................299
PCI Geomatics
xiv

Geomatica® Focus
Selecting the BRDF equation.................................................................................................................................................. 300
Understanding vector layer types ..................................................................................................................................................... 301
Unstructured vector layers ......................................................................................................................................................... 301
About topological layers ............................................................................................................................................................. 301
Thematic rasters .......................................................................................................................................................................... 302
Understanding vector editing in a math model area ................................................................................................................ 302
Adding a new vector layer ...........................................................................................................................................................303
Adding points to an active layer .................................................................................................................................................303
Adding a line or a polygon to an active layer ............................................................................................................................303
Adding a rectangle or ellipse to an active layer ........................................................................................................................304
Tracing a line on an active layer .................................................................................................................................................304
Digitizing 3-D vectors .................................................................................................................................................................. 304
Performing tasks in the Attribute Manager ............................................................................................................................... 304
About the Preferences dialog box ..............................................................................................................................................305
Controlling the Attribute Manager cursor ..................................................................................................................................305
Setting a selected record statistics display .............................................................................................................................. 306
Creating an unconnected table ...................................................................................................................................................306
Restricting the layer so you cannot add shapes to it ...............................................................................................................306
Viewing records ........................................................................................................................................................................... 307
Opening a file saved as an attribute ...........................................................................................................................................307
Selecting and clearing records and fields ................................................................................................................................. 307
Understanding vector layer type default fields ......................................................................................................................... 307
Adding records to the Attribute Manager .................................................................................................................................. 309
Adding new fields ........................................................................................................................................................................ 309
Setting the field definitions ......................................................................................................................................................... 309
Changing an existing field to a geometry field ......................................................................................................................... 310
Adding all appropriate geometry fields ..................................................................................................................................... 311
Updating the geometry ................................................................................................................................................................ 311
Using find and replace in the Attribute Manager ...................................................................................................................... 311
Creating a relational database .................................................................................................................................................... 312
Selecting all records that match a value in the current cell .....................................................................................................312
Selecting all records that do not match a value in a selected field .........................................................................................313
Making a query by example ........................................................................................................................................................ 313
Limiting the query to selected records ...................................................................................................................................... 314
Using the compute function ........................................................................................................................................................314
Opening the Aggregate Attributes dialog box .......................................................................................................................... 315
Performing a calculation ............................................................................................................................................................. 315
Opening the Area Neighbors dialog box ................................................................................................................................... 315
Reporting bordering areas .......................................................................................................................................................... 315
Creating a chart from the Attribute Manager .............................................................................................................................316
Opening the Z-value Transfer dialog box .................................................................................................................................. 317
PCI Geomatics
xv

Geomatica® Focus
Transferring Z-values from the vertices to a field .....................................................................................................................317
Transferring Z-values from a field to the vertices .....................................................................................................................318
Exporting layer attributes to a file .............................................................................................................................................. 318
Exporting the attributes to a text file ..........................................................................................................................................318
Opening GeoRasters from the Attribute Manager .................................................................................................................... 319
Dissolving a boundary .................................................................................................................................................................319
Adding function fields to output layers ..................................................................................................................................... 320
Working with shapes ................................................................................................................................................................... 320
Selecting a single shape ............................................................................................................................................................. 321
Selecting shapes within or partially within a circle .................................................................................................................. 321
Selecting shapes within or partially within a polygon ..............................................................................................................321
Grouping shapes ..........................................................................................................................................................................321
Ungrouping shapes ..................................................................................................................................................................... 321
Attaching shapes ......................................................................................................................................................................... 322
Separating shapes ....................................................................................................................................................................... 322
Creating buffers ........................................................................................................................................................................... 322
Creating buffers - step 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................322
Creating buffers - step 2 ..............................................................................................................................................................323
Editing vectors using the vector editing tools .......................................................................................................................... 323
About the Vector Editing tool bar ...............................................................................................................................................324
Selecting a shape .........................................................................................................................................................................325
Moving a vertex ............................................................................................................................................................................325
Moving several vertices together while maintaining their form .............................................................................................. 325
Reversing vector direction ..........................................................................................................................................................326
Adding vertices ............................................................................................................................................................................ 326
Connecting lines .......................................................................................................................................................................... 326
Connecting polygons .................................................................................................................................................................. 326
Cutting a line ................................................................................................................................................................................ 326
Cutting a polygon .........................................................................................................................................................................327
Extending a line ............................................................................................................................................................................327
Merging segmented lines ............................................................................................................................................................ 327
Changing a line into a polygon ...................................................................................................................................................327
Flipping a shape to its mirror image .......................................................................................................................................... 327
Spinning a shape free hand ........................................................................................................................................................ 328
Spinning the shape precisely ..................................................................................................................................................... 328
Separating overlapping shapes ..................................................................................................................................................328
Moving the cursor to the start vertex .........................................................................................................................................328
Moving the cursor to the end vertex: ......................................................................................................................................... 329
Moving the cursor along vertices ...............................................................................................................................................329
Moving the cursor to a vertex ..................................................................................................................................................... 329
Displaying vertices ...................................................................................................................................................................... 329
PCI Geomatics
xvi

Geomatica® Focus
Adding and removing: vertices .................................................................................................................................................. 329
Switching between coordinate systems .................................................................................................................................... 330
Selecting vectors using spatial query tools .............................................................................................................................. 330
Including an original selection in a spatial query ..................................................................................................................... 330
Selecting fully contained shapes ............................................................................................................................................... 330
Selecting partially contained shapes ......................................................................................................................................... 330
Selecting all shapes within a specified distance ...................................................................................................................... 331
Selecting all shapes fully within a distance .............................................................................................................................. 331
Selecting intersecting shapes .................................................................................................................................................... 331
About the Overlay wizard ............................................................................................................................................................ 331
Combining layers with a spatial overlay ....................................................................................................................................332
Using a statistical overlay ...........................................................................................................................................................333
Adding attributes to the statistical overlay output ................................................................................................................... 333
Using a suitability overlay ...........................................................................................................................................................334
Understanding weights in the suitability overlay ..................................................................................................................... 336
Viewing data as a chart ............................................................................................................................................................... 337
About chart types .........................................................................................................................................................................337
Creating a chart from the layer ................................................................................................................................................... 339
Defining the data to chart ............................................................................................................................................................340
About Series In .............................................................................................................................................................................340
Designing the chart surround .....................................................................................................................................................341
About the category field .............................................................................................................................................................. 342
Resetting the chart to defaults ................................................................................................................................................... 343
Using the Chart Viewer ................................................................................................................................................................343
Designing the chart legend ......................................................................................................................................................... 345
Opening the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box .................................................................................................................345
Customizing the axis heading .................................................................................................................................................... 346
Customizing the axis tick labels .................................................................................................................................................346
Opening the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box .................................................................................................................346
Displaying grid lines along the axis ........................................................................................................................................... 347
Displaying ticks ............................................................................................................................................................................347
Opening the Title or Subtitle Properties dialog box ................................................................................................................. 347
Customizing the title or subtitle of the chart .............................................................................................................................347
Opening the data labels properties ............................................................................................................................................ 347
Customizing the data labels ........................................................................................................................................................348
Saving a chart ...............................................................................................................................................................................348
Opening and deleting a chart ......................................................................................................................................................348
Digitizing vectors with peripheral devices ................................................................................................................................ 349
Registering a digitizing tablet ..................................................................................................................................................... 349
Importing and exporting tablet registration .............................................................................................................................. 350
Using a digitizing tablet ...............................................................................................................................................................350
PCI Geomatics
xvii

Geomatica® Focus
Using the GPS tool .......................................................................................................................................................................351
Inputting vector point data using a GPS receiver .....................................................................................................................351
Inputting vector line or polygon data using the GPS receiver ................................................................................................ 352
Understanding representation ....................................................................................................................................................352
Types of representation style tables ..........................................................................................................................................353
Generating an indirect representation style table .................................................................................................................... 354
Editing the representation styles ............................................................................................................................................... 354
Selecting a style ...........................................................................................................................................................................354
Changing style appearance ........................................................................................................................................................ 355
Changing style parts ....................................................................................................................................................................355
Using an attribute as part of the style ........................................................................................................................................355
Opening the Set Style Attribute dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 356
Setting the style attribute ............................................................................................................................................................ 356
Selecting a symbol .......................................................................................................................................................................356
Labelling shapes ..........................................................................................................................................................................356
Managing the labels .....................................................................................................................................................................356
Adding labels to a layer ...............................................................................................................................................................357
Setting label representation ........................................................................................................................................................357
Changing labels ........................................................................................................................................................................... 357
Defining the design and layout for labels ..................................................................................................................................358
Defining which attribute to use for the label ............................................................................................................................. 358
Setting the position for point layer labels ................................................................................................................................. 359
Setting the position for line layer labels .................................................................................................................................... 359
Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels ..........................................................................................................360
Designing a symbol ..................................................................................................................................................................... 360
Understanding the symbol working area ...................................................................................................................................360
Creating a symbol ........................................................................................................................................................................361
Creating a multi-part symbol ...................................................................................................................................................... 361
Selecting a symbol from the symbol file ................................................................................................................................... 362
Setting symbol representation ................................................................................................................................................... 362
Editing the symbol RST ...............................................................................................................................................................362
About the symbol file Save As dialog box .................................................................................................................................362
Saving a project file ............................................................................................................................................................................ 365
Renaming a map .......................................................................................................................................................................... 365
Starting a new map ...................................................................................................................................................................... 365
Working with map properties ......................................................................................................................................................365
Changing the paper size by dragging a resize handle ............................................................................................................. 365
Changing the paper size from the Map Properties dialog box ................................................................................................ 366
Working with areas ...................................................................................................................................................................... 366
Scaling an area .............................................................................................................................................................................367
Rescaling an area .........................................................................................................................................................................367
PCI Geomatics
xviii

Geomatica® Focus
Setting area properties ................................................................................................................................................................ 368
Setting area properties ................................................................................................................................................................ 368
Opening the Math Model Area Properties dialog box ...............................................................................................................369
Setting Math Model Area properties ...........................................................................................................................................370
Working with surrounds ..............................................................................................................................................................371
Creating a surround .....................................................................................................................................................................371
Setting a default surround element ............................................................................................................................................372
Setting a default quick style ........................................................................................................................................................372
Setting surround element properties ......................................................................................................................................... 372
About neatlines ............................................................................................................................................................................ 372
Setting the position of a neatline in relation to an area ........................................................................................................... 372
Setting specific extents for a neatline ........................................................................................................................................373
About borders .............................................................................................................................................................................. 373
Changing border style and proximity to neatline ..................................................................................................................... 374
About grids ...................................................................................................................................................................................374
Changing grid pacing and proximity to neatline .......................................................................................................................375
Changing the style and layout of the grid ................................................................................................................................. 376
Changing the location and style of the grid headings ............................................................................................................. 377
Changing the location and style of the grid labels ................................................................................................................... 377
About legends .............................................................................................................................................................................. 379
Setting the number of columns and designing a border for a legend .................................................................................... 380
Adding a title to the legend ......................................................................................................................................................... 380
Adding styles to a legend ............................................................................................................................................................381
Organizing sections in a legend ................................................................................................................................................. 382
Creating a design for sections in a legend ................................................................................................................................383
Customizing a section layout ..................................................................................................................................................... 384
Organizing legend columns ........................................................................................................................................................ 384
Adding a picture to a map ........................................................................................................................................................... 385
About north arrows ......................................................................................................................................................................386
Setting the angle and style for a true North arrow ....................................................................................................................386
Adjusting the position of a north arrow label ............................................................................................................................387
Setting the angle and style for the magnetic north arrow ........................................................................................................387
Setting the angle and style for the grid north arrow .................................................................................................................388
About scale bars .......................................................................................................................................................................... 388
Determining the style and position of the title for the scale bar ............................................................................................. 389
Selecting a scale bar type ........................................................................................................................................................... 390
Setting the divisions for the scale bar ....................................................................................................................................... 390
Labeling a scale bar with a unit of measurement and setting a zero tick .............................................................................. 391
Setting subdivisions for a scale bar ...........................................................................................................................................392
Specifying which divisions to subdivide ................................................................................................................................... 392
Designing a Line and Tick scale bar .......................................................................................................................................... 393
PCI Geomatics
xix

Geomatica® Focus
Designing a single, double, or triple scale bar ..........................................................................................................................393
Adding a map title to an area ...................................................................................................................................................... 394
Adding text to a surround ........................................................................................................................................................... 395
Setting the updating behavior .................................................................................................................................................... 395
Setting the offset (not available for neatline, border, and grid) ...............................................................................................396
Setting a grid starting point ........................................................................................................................................................ 396
Selecting an existing quick style ................................................................................................................................................397
Removing a custom quick style from the list ............................................................................................................................397
Creating a custom quick style .................................................................................................................................................... 397
Creating an index for a project, you must provide ................................................................................................................... 397
Adding a default index to a map .................................................................................................................................................398
Indexation properties ...................................................................................................................................................................398
Setting general parameters for an index ................................................................................................................................... 398
Adding or change the index title ................................................................................................................................................ 399
Opening an indexation parameter file ........................................................................................................................................399
Setting up an index ...................................................................................................................................................................... 400
Setting the spacing for rows and columns ................................................................................................................................400
Setting the count for rows and columns ................................................................................................................................... 400
Setting headings for rows and columns ....................................................................................................................................401
Setting a RepCode for a grid heading ........................................................................................................................................401
Setting a RepCode for grid lines ................................................................................................................................................ 401
Filtering an index ......................................................................................................................................................................... 401
Making a word exclusion list ...................................................................................................................................................... 401
Generating an index list .............................................................................................................................................................. 402
Using the Verification Mode option ............................................................................................................................................402
Setting advanced indexation properties ....................................................................................................................................402
The prefixes list follows a set of rules ....................................................................................................................................... 403
Creating or editing a prefixes list ............................................................................................................................................... 403
Using the Swap Prefixes option ................................................................................................................................................. 404
Saving an indexation file ............................................................................................................................................................. 404
Adding text to an index ............................................................................................................................................................... 404
Setting the text color ................................................................................................................................................................... 404
Setting the text style .................................................................................................................................................................... 404
Using the New Text tool .............................................................................................................................................................. 404
Printing a map .............................................................................................................................................................................. 404
Selecting printer options .............................................................................................................................................................405
Selecting page layout options .................................................................................................................................................... 405
Printing color separations ...........................................................................................................................................................405
Opening the Export Map dialog box ...........................................................................................................................................407
Exporting a map or chart as an Adobe Illustrator file .............................................................................................................. 408
Exporting a map or chart as a JPEG .......................................................................................................................................... 408
PCI Geomatics
xx

Geomatica® Focus
Exporting a map or chart to a JPEG 2000 file ........................................................................................................................... 409
Exporting a map or chart to PCIDSK ..........................................................................................................................................409
Exporting a map or chart to TIFF ................................................................................................................................................409
Exporting a map or chart to BMP ............................................................................................................................................... 410
Exporting a map or chart to an HP RTL file ...............................................................................................................................410
Exporting a map or chart to EMF ................................................................................................................................................411
Viewing overlapping layers from a Web mapping service .......................................................................................................411
PCI Geomatics
xxi

Geomatica® Focus
PCI Geomatics
22

Geomatica® Focus
Focus and the other Geomatica applications.
Chapter 1
Using the Focus online help
The Focus HTML online Help system provides basic Help
topics for using Focus and online references for the
Focus tools and processes you will need to use when you
do your work. Geomatica Help includes a technical
reference library for background information and
extensive online list of data formats you can use with the
many PCI GeoGateway features in Focus. You can also
contact PCI or visit the PCI Geomatics Corporate Web
site for more specific help and support.
Using technical references
The Geomatica online Help system includes Technical
References you can access from Focus online Help.
Technical references are available for:
GeoGateway formats:
Provides information on working with large files, the
PCIDSK file structure, and supported file formats.
Projection Reference:
Provides a complete list of projections supported by
PCI Geomatics
Advanced Hyperspectral:
Contains detailed technical information on hyperspectral
data and how you can use it with Focus and the other
Geomatica applications. For information on using the
Focus hyperspectral visualization tools, see the Focus
Online Help and the Focus User Guide.
Using the GDB formats reference
GeoGateway (GDB) is a technology allowing programs to
uniformly access data in many different geomatics file
formats without having to translate them before you use
an application. GeoGateway lets you access imagery,
vectors, attributes, projections and auxiliary information.
All important data types, and access approaches from the
generic GeoGateway Data Model are implemented within
the GeoGateway library.
Not all file formats support all data types, or access
approaches. Only PCIDSK, the format on which the
GeoGateway Data was modelled, supports all possible
data types. Many formats have limitations that may effect
your productivity when using Focus and other Geomatica
applications.
The GDB Formats reference topics describe each format,
including any limitations. The complete list of DGB
formats is included in the Geomatica online Help system
under the Supported File Formats topic. You can open a
Help screen for a specific format from the main
23

Geomatica® Focus
Supported File Formats screen by clicking the name of
the format in the supported formats list.
PCI Geomatics
24

Geomatica® Focus
Chapter 2
Working with Focus
Like all PCI Geomatics products, Focus is designed to
work with dozens of data formats through GeoGateway
and to take advantage of the PCIDSK file format. There
are several instances when you should change your data
to PCIDSK so you can take advantage of all of the
features offered in Geomatica.
under both the Files tab and the Maps tab. You can
choose files from the File Selector dialog box, which is a
standard Windows panel that also allows you to choose
from data types in the GeoGateway file list (GDB
formats). For more information on the File Selector dialog
box, see "Common Utilities" in the Geomatica online
Help.
The following image shows the main Focus interface:
You should convert your data files to PCIDSK format
when:
• The original format does not support auxiliary
information, such as georeferencing, look-up tables,
pseudo-colour tables, and vectors.
• The original format cannot be updated.
• You want to use your files in PACE or XPACE
programs.
Geomatica also contains a certified implementation of the
NITF standard enabling you to view, to format, and to
export digital imagery and imagery-related products;
Geomatica is, however, not NITF certified.
Opening a file
You can open files in Focus from the File menu, from the
toolbar, or from shortcut menus in the Focus control pane
PCI Geomatics
When you open data files, they are listed in the Files tree
in the control pane and all files and layers are available.
For more information about elements in the Focus
25

Geomatica® Focus
interface, see Understanding the Focus control pane on
page 27 .
1. From the File menu, click Open.
You can also right-click in the Maps control pane
and click Open.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
your data files.
3. Click Open.
The image data opens in the view pane. The first
three image channels are automatically selected.
The file components are listed in the Maps and
Files control panes. If the file you opened does not
have raster data, the first vector layer opens in a
new map.
Note: For colour images, TM Bands 1, 2, and 3
representing the red, green, and blue (RGB) image
channels, are listed in the Maps tree under New Area.
When you open an image containing a math model
segment, you can choose to use the a georeferencing or
math model. For more information, see Using a math
model with images on page 40 .
Adding data to a project
You can add data to a project in several ways. The
method you use may depend on your objectives. You can
use the Files menu to add as many new files to a project
as you want in the same way as you would any other
PCI Geomatics
Windows-based application. Focus also provides an Add
Layer Wizard to make adding data easier, see Using the
Add Layer wizard on page 26 .
You can also add files to open data. For example, you
can add new vectors to an Area already in use or you can
create a new empty layer and add new data to it by
dragging data from another Area or from a different
database using the Add Layer Wizard.
When you add more data to a project, it is automatically
added to the Focus Maps tree in an active Area.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a Map and click New
Area.
2. Drag the data you want to move into the new Area.
3. Save the project.
You can also add files from the Files tree to the
Maps tree from an open database.
Using the Add Layer wizard
When you want to add layers from other
GeoGateway-supported data sets, you can add vector,
RGB, grayscale, pseudo-color, and bitmap layers to a
project with the Add Layer Wizard. The Add Layer Wizard
helps you locate the exact layers you want and guides
you through the process of adding the layer types you
specify.
When you move to the next step in the wizard, the
commands shown in the lower part of the dialog box
change according to the data type you are adding. When
26

Geomatica® Focus
you use the Add Layer Wizard, you do not need to have
an active Area in the Maps tree; the Wizard creates a
new layer automatically.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click the area where you
want to add a layer and click Add.
You can also click Add from the Layer menu.
2. From the Add Layer Wizard, choose a layer type
option and click Next.
3. From the Files available list, select the data file
containing the raster channels you want to use.
If the raster file you want to use is not listed, click
Browse, navigate to the file you want, and click OK.
When you have selected a file in the Files available
list, only channels of the specified type are listed in
the The following vector segments are available
list. For example, only bitmap channels are listed if
you have selected bitmaps as the layer type you
want to add.
4. From the The following vector segments are
available list, select the channel you want to use in
your layer.
5. Click Finish.
Understanding the Focus control
pane
When you begin a work session, a Map, Area, and layer
are automatically listed in the Maps tree using default file
names and paths. By default, new Map layers are
labelled Unnamed Map. Both the Map and layer levels
PCI Geomatics
show the name and path of the file you have opened. The
Area level is named New Area by default. You can
rename each level and each layer as needed. You can
include files of almost any format in your project. In some
cases, you may need to convert your file formats to the
PCIDSK.
Maps
Are the element at the top of the hierarchy. This is the
workspace that holds all of the data for your work, such
as the image, surrounds, and indexes. You can have
more than one map in a project. The Map represents the
extents of the print page for your project. You can adjust
the map size to control the size of your printed output or
adjust the size and position of the image relative to the
canvas.
Areas
Hold the file boundaries for either image or vector layers.
You can include several layers and segments for a
geographical region and you can have many areas in a
Map. Each Area has a unique georeference system.
When an image or vector layer is added to an area, it is
automatically scaled and georeferenced to that Area.
Layers
Hold the data displayed in the view pane. Layers are
composed of segments and can be rearranged in the
Maps tree to change the image in the view pane. You can
change the order of layers by dragging them up or down
the Maps tree. When you move a layer, you also move
27

Geomatica® Focus
the segments within it.
Segments
Are all of the components that make up a layer, such as
rasters, vectors, bitmaps, and look-up tables (LUT).
The files, listed in the Maps tree, are a hierarchy of
elements that make up a project. Maps tree elements
have common properties that you can control from the
Maps and Files tree, menu bars, and shortcut menus.
Using the Maps and Files trees
You can create, select, read, and write both image and
auxiliary information to the items listed in the Maps and
Files trees. The control pane uses the GeoGateway
library to access both image and auxiliary information
within your data files. GeoGateway makes it possible for
you to interchange different file types, including
third-party file formats. To access a file, select it in the
Files tree.
Changing the layer priority
The Maps tree lists the areas, layers, channels, and
segments that make up the image in the view pane. The
Maps tree components are stored in your system
memory. You can hide an item in the Maps tree by
disabling the check box to the left of the item. You can
also change the priority of a layer by dragging it up or
down the Maps tree. Layer priority can cause one layer to
mask another in the view pane. If you cannot see a layer
PCI Geomatics
that should be visible, check the layer priority.
1. In the Maps tree, click an Area layer.
2. Drag the layer up or down the Maps tree.
A black line shows the layer position.
You can move an entire area, including associated
components, in the same way.
Viewing layer properties
You can view the properties for any Map, Area, or layer.
For more information about properties, see the following:
• Managing data properties on page 35
• Using the File Properties dialog box on page 57
1. In the Maps tree, click a Map icon.
2. From the View menu, click Properties.
For information on working with layers, see Using the
Layer Manager on page 31 .
Viewing auxiliary data
The figure below shows some of the contents of a .pix
file, grouped by data type, in the Files tree. You can show
or hide the vector and bitmap segments, listed in the
Files tree, in the view pane.
28

Geomatica® Focus
The Add Image Channels dialog box opens when you
right-click an unlocked file in the Files tree and lets you
set the following attributes:
The Files tree lists data saved to your hard disk
Like the PCIDSK format, Focus keeps image channels
and auxiliary data segments in the same place. The data
listed in the Files tree is stored in the source file on your
system hard disk.
Some of the data types, listed in the Files tree, are not
viewable as image components. The same list can
contain other auxiliary data types such as LUTs,
pseudo-color tables (PCT), and signatures. You can use
the Focus software tools and dialog boxes to work with
these data types.
Adding image channels
You can add 8-bit, 16-bit signed, 16-bit unsigned, or
32-bit real image channels to a selected PCIDSK file. Bit
depth (also called pixel depth) refers to the range of
numeric values stored in image layer data. The range of
numbers each pixel can store increases with bit depth.
About the Add Image Channels dialog box
PCI Geomatics
Supported bit depths are:
• 8-bit: 0 to 255
• 16-bit signed; -32,768 to + 32,786
• 16-bit unsigned: 0 to 65,535
• 32-bit real: approximately +/-1.2E-38 to 3.4E+38
Channel Types:
Lists the supported image pixel depths.
Existing:
Displays the number of image channels for each pixel
depth in the selected file.
Channels to Add:
Lets you specify the number of image channels of each
type that you want to add to the source file.
When your source PCIDSK file channels are arranged as
either band sequential or file interleaved, new channels
are added to the end of the file. When your files are pixel
interleaved, the new channels are added in groups of
pixel depth. Pixel depth groups are ordered by size.
For example, when you add 8-bit channels to an existing
pixel interleaved file with 16-bit unsigned channels, the
8-bit channels are listed first. Existing 16-bit unsigned
channels are renumbered as subsequent channels.
29

Geomatica® Focus
Combining layers
A combined vector layer amalgamates several vector
layers into one. For example, one vector layer covering
the eastern US can be combined with another layer
covering the western US to produce a virtual single layer
for all of the US. When you combine layers, data is not
duplicated, it is linked. The combined layer does not store
data but acts as a pointer to the source data.
You can combine vector layers from your current data
files and from other source files with a two-part process
to locate and choose the data you want to combine.
1. With at least two PCIDSK files open in the control
pane, click the Files tab.
2. In the Files tree, right-click the file folder icon and
click New and then click Combined Vector Layer.
3. In the Combined Layer dialog box, click Browse.
4. From the Select Layer dialog box, select a file from
the File list box.
5. Select an available layer from the Layers available
list.
6. Click OK.
The layers and common columns are listed in the
Combined Layer dialog box.
The Layer list shows two or more entries that you
can combine.
The Common attributes list identifies the columns
(fields/attributes) that will make up the combined
layer doesn't require any action. Only columns that
PCI Geomatics
are present in all layers of your inputs are listed.
7. In the Combined Layer dialog box, select a layer
and click OK.
A new layer is added under the files listed in the Files
tree. You can view the new layer and see the combined
data in the view pane. You can also open the Attribute
Manager to see all of the combined shapes. Layers
common to both input layers are listed twice.
For more information, see the following:
• About the Combined Layer dialog box on page 30
• About the Select Layer dialog box on page 31
About the Combined Layer dialog box
The Combined Layer dialog box provides a list of layers
and common columns in separate windows that allow you
to combine layers.
Layer List:
Shows the layers you have chosen from the Select Layer
dialog box.
Browse:
Opens the Select Layer dialog box, allowing you to
choose layers and source files. (See About the Select
Layer dialog box on page 31 )
Remove:
30

Geomatica® Focus
Removes a selected layer from the Layer list.
Common Columns List:
Shows columns that are common to layers in the Layer
list.
About the Select Layer dialog box
The Select Layer dialog box lets you choose the files
containing the layers you want to combine.
File List:
Shows the files currently in a project from which you can
select layers.
Layer List:
Shows the layers within selected files in the Files list.
Working with project files
Focus project files (.gpr files) provide a way for you to
organize data for complex projects in one large file. A
.gpr file not only stores Maps, Areas, and layers, but also
includes all path information to data, viewing preferences,
such as the last zoom level you worked at, and all
associated Map elements. A .gpr file can also include
multiple Maps, Areas, and all associated layers.
Files included in a project are listed in the Files tree in the
control pane. All files and layers are available for use in a
PCI Geomatics
project at any time. You can use any of the Focus
viewing and editing options when working with .gpr files.
You can also manage RGB and grayscale layers within
project files with shortcut menus in the Maps and Files
panes.
When you right-click an object in the Files tree, a shortcut
menu lists the available commands for working with that
data type. For example, right-clicking a file folder icon
opens a shortcut menu listing several commands for
managing files. Right-clicking an RGB or grayscale layer
opens a shortcut menu listing commands for managing
the layers as a data file and for adjusting attributes,
statistical properties, and overviews for that layer.
Saving a project
When you work with multiple files, you can save your
work as a project using the file name of your original data
files or save your project under a new file name.
1. From the File menu, click Save Project or Save
Project As.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, navigate to the
folder where you want to store the project file.
3. Type a name for the project in the File name box.
4. Click Save.
To save your project while you are working on it,
click File and then click Save Project.
Using the Layer Manager
31

Geomatica® Focus
The Layer Manager lists layer properties in a table format
that shows properties for each object in the map and the
hierarchical structure of Maps, Areas, and layers. For
surrounds, the Layer Manager only displays the surround
elements. This tool is useful when you are trying to
manage a large combination of data layers, rasters, and
vectors when making a map. Using the Layer Manger,
you can control the vector layer hierarchy to ensure that
one project layer does not cover another.
• In the Layers menu, click Layer Manager.
Changing layer properties
In the Layer Manager table, object names are listed in
rows. Object properties are listed in the table columns.
Like the Maps and Files trees, icons are shown beside
each object in the Name column. Properties in the Layer
Manager show the state of layers in the current project.
They can be changed according to the editable items for
the specific layers you are using.
Changes in the Layer Manager are automatically shown
in the Maps tree. A layer must be open and the Map must
be active to make changes. The check box indicates
active layers and maps. The following lists the Layer
Manager table columns and explains the property cells
you use to show, edit, open, and active properties for
layers.
Name:
You can edit this column and change the names of your
layers.
Layer Visible:
Checked cells are visible layers. When the check box is
disabled, the layer is not visible.
Legend Items Visible:
Checked cells are Legend items that are visible. They are
similar to the Layer Visible column but only apply to
layers in the legend.
Read Only:
Checked layers are read-only. When a layer is read-only,
a red x will appear beside the layer under the Maps tab.
Layer Priority:
Cell numbers show the layer priority. A layer that is
assigned a higher priority will be displayed on top of a
layer with a lower priority. (See Changing the layer
priority on page 28 )
Zoom Scale Active:
Checked layers can be assigned zoom scale values.
Min Zoom Scale:
Minimum zoom scale value. As map scales go, this
parameter, X, is considered to be 1: X.
Max Zoom Scale:
PCI Geomatics
32

Geomatica® Focus
Maximum scale zoom value. As map scales go, this
parameter, X, is considered to be1: X.
Selectable:
Objects are selectable
Transparency Active:
Checked cells can be assigned a transparency value.
When this check box is enabled, the values in the
Transparency Value columns are active and the results
are shown in Focus.
Transparency Value:
The pixel value entered here will become transparent,
allowing you to see imagery under it. To properly assign
transparent values to a three-channel RGB image, use
the following format: R10G20B100. In this example, pixel
value 10 will become transparent for the red band, 20 for
the green band, and 100 for the blue band. For grayscale
images, you need only specify a singe value. For
example: 10. The pixel value of 10 would become
transparent in your grayscale image.
Opacity Active:
When this check box is enabled, the values in the
Opacity% column become active and the results are
shown in Focus.
Opacity%:
PCI Geomatics
Sets the opacity level. For example, 100% opacity shows
the entire image. Layers beneath cannot be seen. With a
setting of 0%, none of the image is shown. You can see
all of an image beneath the layer.
View No Data Value:
Shows Null values.
No Data Color:
When there are #No Data# values in your working file,
The No Data Color column lets you assign a color for
viewing your No-Data pixels.
Using the Zoom Scale Active feature
When image data is opened, it is viewed at a specific
scale (for example, 1:150000). The Zoom Scale function
lets you specify the resolution for activating specific
layers of imagery. When the current viewing resolution is
in between the minimum and maximum values that you
have set for a layer, the image becomes visible. When
the current viewing resolution is outside the minimum and
maximum range you have set, the layer is not visible.
The Zoom Scale tool is useful when looking at both
high-resolution and low-resolution imagery of the same
area. For example, if you have a 30m Landsat image, a
10m SPOT image and 1m aerial photo, all covering the
same area, you can view the Landsat image in Focus,
but the aerial photo cannot be used because its pixels
are too small to render an accurate image. When you are
zoomed into a ground feature using the aerial photo, the
33

Geomatica® Focus
Landsat and SPOT scenes cannot be used because their
pixels are too large.
Using the Zoom Scale function you can set the zoom
scale to deactivate the Landsat image when you are
zoomed into the aerial photo, or deactivate the aerial
photo when you zoomed out looking at the Landsat
scene. The following table shows the settings to use for
the example above.
Table 1.
When you open a raster that contains a rotation, you will
be prompted to choose whether you want the raster to
display as a rectangular grid (Raster Up) aligned with the
Area or with the rotation from the file (North Up).
With the North Up option, the rotated raster opens as any
other raster. In the Focus view pane the raster may
appear turned in the Area since it has been corrected so
North is at the top of the viewer.
A rotated raster as North Up
Image
Min Zoom Scale
Landsat (30m) 1:10 000 1:50 000
Spot (10m) 1:50 001 1:75 000
Max Zoom
Scale
Aerial Photo (1m) 1:75 001 1:120 000
About rotated rasters
Most raster (image) formats consist of a rectangular grid
of pixels. However, some formats support raster rotation,
which can display the raster as spun in a particular
position, usually so North is at the top of the viewer.
Currently, PIX, GeoTIFF, MrSID and JPEG2000 can
store rotations internally. TIFF (with .tfw), JPEG (with
.jpw), BIP (with .biw), BIL (with .blw) and NITF (with .niw)
support rotations via their associated world file. Other
formats may support rotations via a PCI Geomatics .pox
file.
With the Raster Up option, the Area is rotated to
counteract the effect of the rotation in the file so the first
pixel in the data is in the top left corner of the Area. In the
Focus view pane the raster appears squared to the Area.
A rotated raster as Raster Up
PCI Geomatics
34

Geomatica® Focus
When you create a map with a rotated Area (Raster Up),
two surround elements are affected: Grid and North
Arrow. You cannot create a grid in a rotated Area. When
you create a North Arrow in a rotated Area, the North
Arrow will be rotated by the amount set in the Area
properties.
Managing data properties
Properties are applied to data elements you have added
to your work and file elements that are saved to your hard
disk. New and saved elements are listed under the Maps
tree. Files, saved to disk, are listed under the Files tree.
(See Using the File Properties dialog box on page 57 )
Properties are also applied to metadata files such as
look-up tables, pseudo-color tables, ground control
points, and signatures. When you are working with either
project files or .pix files, you can use the properties to
carry out basic operations like renaming and removing
data.
PCI Geomatics
Properties dialog boxes have tabs with layer-specific
settings that you can adjust for the data type you are
working with. Properties dialog boxes always show
information specific to the file and the file type you have
chosen. Information and inputs vary depending on the
type of layer you have chosen.
1. In the control pane, click the Maps tab and select a
layer.
2. From the View menu, click Properties.
You can also right-click a layer and click
Properties, or you can double-click a layer.
About the Map Properties dialog box
The Map properties dialog box allows you to change
several attributes for your Map. You can re-name maps,
review file information, and a select paper size and
orientation for your map. You can also choose a
Representation Style Table (RST).
(See General tab on page 35 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic
information about your Map and read other file
information. (See Working with map properties on page 365
)
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
35

Geomatica® Focus
the Maps tree.
File Name:
Reports the name of the Map file for the properties you
are viewing.
Created:
Reports the date the file was created.
(See Page Setup tab on page 36 )
Page Setup tab
Under the Page Setup tab you can make page selections
that change the Map page orientation and size. You can
see your changes in the view pane from the Map view
mode. Your changes also affect the way your page is
printed. For more information, see the following:
• Changing the paper size by dragging a resize
handle on page 365
• Printing a map on page 404
Orientation:
Lets you select the way your Map appears on paper.
Choose either the Portrait or the Landscape option.
Portrait:
Orients the map vertically
Landscape:
PCI Geomatics
Orients the map horizontally
Paper Size:
Allows you to choose from a list of standard paper sizes
or lets you create a custom size.
You can choose from the following paper size
options:
• US Letter
• US Legal
• A0
• A1
• A2
• A3 Tabloid
• A4 Tabloid
• A4 Letter
• A5 Letter
• B1 (ISO)
• B4 (ISO)
• B5 Letter
• B 11" X 17"
• C 17" X 22"
• D 22" X 34"
• E 34" X 44"
• Custom
Width:
The Width box shows the dimensions of the standard
paper size you have chosen or allows you to enter a
custom paper width of your own.
Height:
36

Geomatica® Focus
The Height box shows the dimensions of the standard
paper size you have chosen, or allows you to enter a
custom paper height of your own.
(See Default RST tab on page 37 )
Default RST tab
Under the Default RST tab you can select a
Representation Style Table to use as the default for your
map. RSTs that are associated with the map are listed in
the window. You can browse to locate and add an RST to
your map. (See Understanding representation on page 352
)
About the Area Properties dialog box
The Area properties dialog box allows you to change
several attributes for an Area. You can re-name maps,
review file information, and change the Area scale,
layout, and projection. You can also choose a new earth
model for the Area projection. (See Setting Math Model
Area properties on page 370 )
Changing the values on the Area properties dialog box
does not change the data in the file on disk, it changes
the properties of the Area only.
(See General tab on page 37 )
General tab
Under the General tab you can change generic
PCI Geomatics
information about your Area and preview the position of
your area in relation to your map.
Description:
The Description box lets you change the Area name or
description appearing in the Maps tree.
Show Outline:
The Show Outline option outlines the Area in the view
pane.
Scale:
The Scale box allows you to change the scale of your
Area to several standard scales or to a custom scale.
You can choose from the following scale options:
• 1:20000
• 1:50000
• 1:100000
• 1:1000000
• Custom
When you choose Custom from the scale list, you enter
your custom scale in the scale box.
Preview:
The Preview area allows you to see the scale and
orientation of your Area relative to your map.
(See Layout tab on page 38 )
37

Geomatica® Focus
Layout tab
The Layout tab lets you change the Area representation,
position, and size. You can also view position and size
changes in a preview window.
Representation:
Lets you change the Area scale factor and the Area
priority.
Scale Factor:
Changes the Area scale factor. (See Scaling an area on
page 367 )
Priority:
Changes the Area priority relative to other Areas in your
project or file. (See Changing the layer priority on page
28 )
Position:
Allows you to move your Area relative to the Map and to
select a unit of measure for your Area.
Left:
Allows you to change the Area position left or right.
Bottom:
Allows you to change the Area position up or down.
Size:
Allows you to control the width and height of your Area.
Width:
Changes the width of the Area.
Height:
Changes the height of the Area.
Automatic resize:
Resizes your Area automatically.
Preview:
Allows you to see the position and width and height
changes for your Area relative to your map.
(See Projection/Extents tab on page 38 )
Projection/Extents tab
The Projection/Extents tab allows you to change the
definition of the Area#s projection, change the bounds of
the Area, and rotate the Area. Changing the projection's
definition does not change the projection of the Area. To
change the projection, see Reprojecting files on page 134 .
PCI Geomatics
38

Geomatica® Focus
Coordinate System:
The Coordinate Systems list displays the coordinate
system for your area.
Other
This Projection
Opens this panel
Set the Projection
Definition
The available coordinate systems are
• Pixel
• UTM
• Long/Lat
• Meter
• Foot
• SPCS
• Other
Earth Model:
The Earth Model button opens the Earth Model dialog
box, where you can choose from a list of data and
ellipsoids to define a coordinate system for an area.
More:
The More button opens projection definition dialog boxes,
where you can select a projection definition for the Area.
The More button is active if you select UTM, SPCS, or
Other from the Coordinate System box. A different
projection panel opens under different conditions.
Table 2.
Bounds:
The Bounds box allows you to show the bounding
coordinates of you file in either geocoded (Eastings and
Northings) or geographic (latitude and longitude) units for
UTM, SPCS and Other coordinate systems. Bounding
coordinates are not shown with the Pixel option. Long/Lat
displays the bounding coordinates in geographic units
only. Meter and Foot displays the bounding coordinates
in geocoded units only.
Upper left:
The Upper Left boxes show the X, Y coordinates for the
upper left corner of the Area. Values are in the units of
the selected coordinate system.
Lower Right:
The Lower Right boxes indicate the X, Y coordinates for
the lower right corner of the Area. Values are in the units
of selected coordinate system.
Rotation:
This Projection
UTM
SPCS
PCI Geomatics
Opens this panel
Zone and Row
State Plane Zone
The Rotation boxes indicate the amount the Area is
rotated to display a rotated raster so the first pixel in the
data is in the top left corner. For more information, see
About rotated rasters on page 34 .
39

Geomatica® Focus
Visual Clipping:
The visual clipping section lets you choose a clip region
from a list of clips that fall within your Area.
Define Clip Region:
The Define Clip Region button opens the Define Clip
Region dialog box.
Enable:
The Enable option is available after you have chosen a
clip region from the Define Clip Region dialog box.
The Define Clip Region Panel:
Allows you to choose a clip region from a list of data that
falls within the area.(See Opening the
Clipping/Subsetting panel on page 151 )
1. Right-click New Area and click Properties.
2. In the Area Properties dialog box, click the
Projection/Extents tab.
3. Click Define Clip Region.
4. From the Define Clip Region dialog box, choose
the layer that you want to use to define the extents
of the clip region from the Clipping Layer list box.
5. Click OK.
6. From the Visual Clipping area of the Area
Properties dialog box, enable the Enable check
box.
7. Click OK.
PCI Geomatics
Using a math model with images
A math model is a mathematical relationship used to
correlate the pixels of an image to correct locations on
the ground accounting for known distortions. Different
sensors require different math models to correct the
distortions.
Math models can come from a number of sources.
QuickBird, Ikonos, and OrbView imagery can come with a
text file that contains rational function coefficients called
Image Geometry Model (IGM) or Rapid Positioning
Capability (RPC), which Focus uses to define a Rational
Functions math model. You can build a math model in
OrthoEngine and export it as a segment in the file
containing a raw image. Geomatica also contains
algorithms that can build math models. These algorithms
can be run in Modeler, EASI, or in the Algorithm
Librarian:
• SATMODEL: to compute Toutin's Model, which is a
rigorous satellite math model.
• RSMODEL: to compute the ASAR and
RADARSAT-specific math model.
• RFMODEL to compute the Rational Functions math
model.
• AVMODEL: to compute the math model for AVHRR
imagery.
• OEMODEL: to compute any model from an
OrthoEngine project file.
When you open an image containing a math model
segment, you can choose to use the file georeferencing
or math model. When you choose file georeferencing, the
40

Geomatica® Focus
image opens in a layer in an Area using the
georeferencing saved in the file or pixel-based
georeferencing if no georeferencing is available. When
you choose the math model, the image is displayed as a
layer and the Area is changed to a Math Model Area. In
the Math Model Area the image is displayed without
correction in the viewer, but accurate ground coordinates
are calculated for each pixel using the pixel and line
coordinates, the math model, and the digital elevation
model (DEM), or an approximate elevation value that you
provide.
The advantage of using the math model is that you can
display geocoded coordinates, overlay geocoded vectors,
and digitize geocoded three-dimensional vectors on the
raw image instead of going through the potentially
time-consuming, labor-intensive process of
orthorectifying or geometrically correcting the imagery.
This process is also known as mono-restitution.
1. Open an image, see Opening a file on page 25 .
2. If you want to use the georeferencing saved in the
file, click File.
3. If you want to display the image using the math
model associated to the file, click Math Model.
4. Click OK.
Using the math model for
georeferencing
When a math model is used to set the georeferencing,
the Area becomes a Math Model Area. In a Math Model
Area, the image is displayed without correction in the
viewer; accurate ground coordinates are calculated for
PCI Geomatics
each pixel using the pixel and line coordinates, the math
model, and the digital elevation model (DEM), or an
approximate elevation value that you provide. For more
information, see Using a math model with images on
page 40 .
1. In the Source of georeferencing list, select the
segment containing the math model that you want
to use in the Area.
The projection, bounds, upper-left coordinate,
lower-right coordinate, and pixel sizes are displayed
under Georeferencing Information
2. To use a DEM as the source for your elevation
values, click DEM.
In the File box, type the path and file name of the
DEM or click Browse to select the file.
In the Layer list, select the layer that contains the
DEM.
In the NoData (background) value box, type the
value that represents the pixels that lie outside the
DEM area so they are not mistaken for elevation
values.
3. To use an estimate of the elevation instead of the
DEM, click Approximate elevation.
In the Elevation value box, type the elevation value
that you want to use. If you do not enter an
elevation value, a value of 0 meters (Mean Sea
Level) is used by default.
4. In the Elevation reference box, select Mean Sea
41

Geomatica® Focus
Level (MSL) if the elevation values were calculated
based on the geoid; select Ellipsoid (ELL) if the
elevation values were calculated based on an
ellipsoidal model of the Earth.
5. In the Elevation units box, select a measurement
unit for the elevation values.
6. Click OK.
About the Math Model Area Properties
dialog box
The Math Model Area properties dialog box allows you to
review file information and change the scale and layout of
a Math Model Area. The georeferencing of the Math
Model Area is based on a math model segment
associated with a raw image rather than remaining
pixel-based. For more information, see Setting Math
Model Area properties on page 370 ).
(See General tab on page 37 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic
information about your Math Model Area and preview the
position of your area in relation to your map.
Name:
The Name box lets you change the Math Model Area
name or description appearing in the Maps tree.
Show Outline:
The Show Outline option outlines the Math Model Area in
the view pane.
Scale:
The Scale box allows you to change the scale of a Math
Model Area to several standard scales or to a custom
scale.
You can choose from the following scale options:
• 1:20000
• 1:50000
• 1:100000
• 1:1000000
• Custom
When you choose Custom from the scale list, you enter
your custom scale in the scale box.
Preview:
The Preview area allows you to see the scale and
orientation of your Math Model Area relative to your map.
(See Layout tab on page 38 )
Layout tab
The Layout tab lets you change the Math Model Area
representation and position. You can also view position
changes in a preview area.
Representation:
PCI Geomatics
42

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you change the Math Model Area scale factor and
the Math Model Area priority.
Scale Factor:
Changes the Math Model Area scale factor. (See Scaling
an area on page 367 )
Priority:
Changes the Math Model Area priority relative to other
Math Model Areas in your project or file. (See Changing
the layer priority on page 28 )
Position:
Allows you to move your Math Model Area relative to the
Map and to select a unit of measure for your Math Model
Area.
Left:
Allows you to change the Math Model Area position to the
left or right.
Bottom:
Allows you to change the Math Model Area position up or
down.
Size:
The Size section is always disabled in a Math Model
Area. The width and height of your Math Model Area are
determined by the file.
Automatic Resize:
Automatically enlarges the extents of the Area to
accommodate the extents of the data.
Preview:
The Preview area allows you to see the position and
width and height changes for your Math Model Area
relative to your map.
(See Projection/Extents tab on page 38 )
Projection/Extents tab
The Projection/Extents tab allows you to view the Math
Model Area projection and select a clip of image data that
falls within the area. It lists the file that contained the
math model segment, the name of the segment, and the
source for the elevation values.
Projection
The coordinate system used in your Math Model Area is
displayed.
Bounds
The Bounds list allows you to show the bounding
coordinates of your file in either geocoded (Eastings and
PCI Geomatics
43

Geomatica® Focus
Northings) or geographic (latitude and longitude) units for
UTM, SPCS, and other coordinate systems.
Upper left
The Upper Left boxes show the X, Y coordinates for the
upper-left corner of the file. Values are in the units of the
selected coordinate system.
Lower Right
The Lower Right boxes indicate the X, Y coordinates for
the lower-right corner of the file. Values are in the units of
selected coordinate system.
Visual Clipping
The Visual Clipping section lets you choose a clip region
from a list of clips that fall within your Math Model Area.
Define Clip Region
The Define Clip Region button opens the Define Clip
Region dialog box, which allows you to choose a clip
region from a list of data that falls within the Math Model
Area. (See Selecting a clip region on page 158 )
Enable:
The Enable option is available after you have chosen a
clip region from the Define Clip Region dialog box.
About the RGB Layer Properties
PCI Geomatics
dialog box
The RGB Layer Properties dialog box allows you to
change general properties, switch source images and
lookup tables, adjust display properties, and set a zoom
scale for your RGB layers.
(See General tab on page 44 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change general
information about your file and read other file information.
Description:
The Description box lets you change the file name or
description appearing in the Maps tree.
Read Only:
The Read Only option lets you change the Read/Write
properties of the RGB layer.
Visible:
The Visible option makes the RGB layer visible in the
view pane.
Priority:
The Priority box changes the priority of the RGB layer in
your project or file. (See Changing the layer priority on
44

Geomatica® Focus
page 28 )
Resample Method:
Allows you to select a resampling method for displaying
the raster in the Focus view pane. The resampling does
not change the data itself, it is only used to determine
how to display the raster on your screen.
You can choose from the following resample
methods:
• Nearest Neighbor
• Bilinear Interpolation
• Cubic Convolution
Layer Enhancement:
Reports enhancements associated with the RGB layer.
(See Changing a default enhancement on page 244 )
(See Source Images tab on page 45 )
Source Images tab
Under the Source Images tab, you can select a new file
and a new image for the red, green, and blue channels.
RedImage:
Lets you select a new file and layer for the red image
channel.
File:
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you
have open in Focus.
Layer:
Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from
the RedImage File box.
GreenImage:
Lets you select a new file and layer for the green image
channel.
File:
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you
have open.
Layer:
Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from
the GreenImage File box.
BlueImage:
Lets you select a new file and layer for the blue image
channel.
File:
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you
have open.
PCI Geomatics
45

Geomatica® Focus
Layer:
The layer list lets you to choose a layer from the file you
chose from the BlueImage File box.
(See Source LUTs tab on page 46 )
Source LUTs tab
Under the Source LUTs tab, you can select a new file
and a new look up table for the red, green, and blue
channels.
RedLut:
Lets you select a new file and look up table for the red
image channel.
File:
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of open
files.
Layer:
Lets you to choose a LUT from the file you chose from
the RedLut File box.
GreenLut:
Lets you select a new file and look up table for the green
image channel.
File:
The File list allows you to choose a different file from a
list of files you have open in Focus.
Layer:
Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from
the GreenLut File box.
BlueLut:
Lets you select a new file and look up table for the blue
image channel.
File:
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you
have open.
Layer:
Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from
the BlueLut File box.
(See Display tab on page 46 )
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the
transparency and opacity of the RGB layer and for
viewing #No data# values when they are included in an
RGB layer.
PCI Geomatics
46

Geomatica® Focus
Vector layers placed below a raster transparency in the
Maps tree appear in the view pane but are not supported
for printing.
Transparency:
Makes the Value boxes available.
Red Values:
Lets you enter a value or a range of values for red
channel transparency.
Green Values:
Lets you enter a value or a range of values for green
channel transparency.
Blue Values:
Lets you enter a value or a range of values for blue
channel transparency.
Opacity:
Makes the Opacity slide control available for changing
the opacity of the RGB layer.
View 'No Data Value':
When an RGB layer contains 'no data' values, the View
'No Data Value' option is available. When you choose the
View 'No Data Value' option, you can select a color from
PCI Geomatics
the color list for displaying them in the view pane.
(See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 47 )
Display within Zoom Scale tab
The Display within Zoom Scale tab allows you to set
independent zoom limits for your RGB layer. When you
zoom the view pane above the maximum scale or below
the minimum scale, your RGB layer is no longer visible in
the view pane.
Minimum Scale:
Lets you enter a minimum zoom scale.
Maximum Scale:
Lets you enter a maximum zoom scale.
Current Zoom Scale:
Reports the current zoom scale for the RGB layer.
About the Grayscale Layer Properties dialog
box
The Grayscale Layer Properties dialog box allows you to
change general properties, switch source images and
lookup tables, adjust display properties, and set a zoom
scale for a grayscale layer.
(See General tab on page 48 )
47

Geomatica® Focus
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic
information about your file and read other file information.
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description for the
grayscale layer appearing in the Maps tree.
Read Only:
Lets you change the Read/Write properties of the
grayscale layer.
Visible:
Makes the grayscale layer visible in the view pane.
Priority:
Changes the priority of the grayscale layer in your project
or file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 )
Resample Method:
Allows you to select a resampling method for displaying
the raster in the Focus view pane. The resampling does
not change the data itself, it is only used to determine
how to display the raster on your screen.
You can choose from the following resample
methods:
PCI Geomatics
• Nearest Neighbor
• Bilinear Interpolation
• Cubic Convolution
Layer Enhancement:
Reports the enhancements associated with the grayscale
layer. (See Changing a default enhancement on page 244 )
(See Source Images tab on page 48 )
Source Images tab
Under the Source Images tab, you can select a new file
and a new image for the grayscale channels.
File:
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you
have open.
Layer:
Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from
the grayscale file box.
(See Source LUTs tab on page 48 )
Source LUTs tab
Under the Source LUTs tab, you can select a new file
and a new look up table for the grayscale channel.
LUT:
48

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you select a new file and look up table for the
grayscale layer.
File:
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of open
files.
Layer:
Lets you to choose a LUT from the file you chose from
the LUT file box.
(See Display tab on page 49 )
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the
Transparency and Opacity of the grayscale layer and for
viewing #No data# values when they are included in a
grayscale layer.
Vector layers placed below a raster transparency in the
Maps tree appear in the view pane but are not supported
for printing.
Transparency:
Makes the Value box available.
Values:
Lets you enter a value or a range of values for grayscale
channel transparency.
Opacity:
Makes the Opacity slide control available for changing
the opacity of the grayscale layer.
View 'No Data Value':
When a grayscale layer contains 'no data' values, the
View 'No Data Value' option is available. When you
choose the View 'No Data Value' option, you can select a
color from the color list for displaying them in the view
pane.
(See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 49 )
Display within Zoom Scale tab
The Display within Zoom Scale tab allows you to set
independent zoom limits for your grayscale layer. When
you zoom the view pane above the maximum scale or
below the minimum scale, the grayscale layer is no
longer visible.
Minimum Scale:
Lets you enter a minimum zoom scale.
Maximum Scale:
Lets you enter a maximum zoom scale.
PCI Geomatics
49

Geomatica® Focus
Current Zoom Scale:
Reports the current zoom scale for the RGB layer.
Labels tab
The Label tab on the Properties dialog box for the layer
contains the label files associated with the project. For
more information about labels see Managing the labels
on page 356 .
About the PCT Layer Properties
dialog box
The PCT Layer Properties dialog box allows you to
change general properties, switch source images and
pseudo-color tables, adjust display properties, and set a
zoom scale for the PCT layers.
(See General tab on page 50 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic
information about your PCT layer and read other file
information.
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description for the PCT
layer appearing in the Maps tree.
Read Only:
Lets you change the Read/Write properties of the PCT
layer.
Visible:
Makes the PCT layer visible in the view pane.
Priority:
Changes the priority of the PCT layer in your project or
file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 )
(See Source Image tab on page 50 )
Source Image tab
The Source Image tab allows you to select a new PCT
image file and layer and a new pseudo-color table file
and layer.
PCTImage:
Lets you select a new file, layer, and PCT.
File:
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you
have open.
Layer:
PCI Geomatics
50

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from
the PCTImage file box.
PCT:
Lets you select a new pseudo-color table file and layer.
File:
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you
have open.
Layer:
Lets you choose a new pseudo-color table from the file
you chose In the PCT file box.
(See Display tab on page 51 )
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the Opacity of
the PCT image layer and for viewing #No data# values
when they are included in a PCT image layer.
Opacity:
Makes the Opacity slide control available for changing
the opacity of the PCT image layer.
View 'No Data Value':
When a PCT image layer contains 'no data' values, the
PCI Geomatics
View 'No Data Value' option is available. When you
choose the View 'No Data Value' option, you can select a
color from the color list for displaying them in the view
pane.
(See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 51 )
Display within Zoom Scale tab
The Display within Zoom Scale tab allows you to set
independent zoom limits for your PCT layer. When you
zoom the view pane above the maximum scale or below
the minimum scale, your PCT layer is no longer visible in
the view pane.
Minimum Scale:
Lets you enter a minimum zoom scale.
Maximum Scale:
Lets you enter a maximum zoom scale.
Current Zoom Scale:
Reports the current zoom scale for the RGB layer.
Labels tab
The Label tab on the Properties dialog box for the layer
contains the Label files associated with the project. For
more information about labels see Managing the labels
on page 356 .
51

Geomatica® Focus
About the Bitmap Layer Properties
dialog box
The Bitmap Layer Properties dialog box allows you to
change general properties, switch source files segment
numbers and colors, adjust display properties, and set a
zoom scale for your bitmap layers.
(See General tab on page 52 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic
information and read other file information about a bitmap
layer.
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description for the
bitmap layer appearing in the Maps tree.
Read Only:
Lets you change the Read/Write properties of the bitmap
layer.
Visible:
Makes the bitmap layer visible in the view pane.
Priority:
Changes the priority of the bitmap layer in your project or
file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 )
(See Source Images tab on page 52 )
Source Images tab
Under the Source Images tab you can change your
bitmap layer source file and change your bitmap segment
and colors.
File:
Lets you choose a file from the list of open files.
Segment Number:
Lets you choose from the list of bitmap segments
available in your open files.
Color:
Lets you change the color of the bitmap segment. You
can choose from the following color options:
• Red
• Blue
• Cyan
• Yellow
• White
• Black
• More
The More option opens the Change Color dialog box,
PCI Geomatics
52

Geomatica® Focus
which lets you create a custom color.
(See Display tab on page 53 )
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the Opacity of
the bitmap segment.
Opacity:
Makes the opacity slide control available. You can
change the opacity of a bitmap segment when you want
to see data from another layer through the bitmap in the
view pane.
(See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 53 )
Display within Zoom Scale tab
The Display within Zoom Scale tab allows you to set
independent zoom limits for your bitmap segment. When
you zoom the view pane above the maximum scale or
below the minimum scale, your bitmap segment is no
longer visible.
Minimum Scale:
Lets you enter a minimum zoom scale.
Maximum Scale:
Lets you enter a maximum zoom scale.
PCI Geomatics
Current Zoom Scale:
Reports the current zoom scale for the bitmap segment.
About the Vector Layer Properties
dialog box
The Vector Layer Properties dialog box allows you to
change general properties, adjust display properties, set
a zoom scale, and label vector layers. You can also add
and remove metadata.
(See General tab on page 53 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic and
display information and read other file information about a
vector layer.
Generic:
Lets you change generic attributes of your vector layer.
Description:
Lets you change the layer file name or description of the
vector layer shown in the Maps tree.
Read Only:
Makes the file read only. When you select this option you
53

Geomatica® Focus
cannot save changes to the vector layer.
Visible:
Makes the vector layer visible in the view pane.
Selectable:
Allows you to select a vector in the view pane using the
selection tools.
(See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 54 )
Display within Zoom Scale tab
The Display within Zoom Scale tab allows you to set
independent zoom limits for your vector layer. When you
zoom the view pane above the maximum scale or below
the minimum scale, your vector layer is no longer visible.
Minimum Scale:
Lets you enter a minimum zoom scale.
Maximum Scale:
Lets you enter a maximum zoom scale.
Current Zoom Scale:
Reports the current zoom scale for the bitmap segment.
(See Labels tab on page 54 )
PCI Geomatics
Labels tab
The Label tab on the Properties dialog box for the layer
contains the label files associated with the project. For
more information about labels see Managing the labels
on page 356 .
About the Thematic Layer Properties
dialog box
The Thematic Layer Properties dialog box allows you to
change general properties, adjust display properties, and
set a zoom scale for the layers containing rasters with an
RST.
(See General tab on page 50 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic
information about your thematic layer and read other file
information.
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description for the
thematic layer appearing in the Maps tree.
Read Only:
Lets you change the Read/Write properties of the
thematic layer.
54

Geomatica® Focus
Visible:
Makes the thematic layer visible in the view pane.
Selectable:
Allows you to select a thematic in the view pane using the
selection tools.
Priority:
Changes the priority of the thematic layer in your project
or file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 )
(See Display tab on page 51 )
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the Opacity of
the thematic image layer and for viewing #No data#
values when they are included in a thematic image layer.
Opacity:
Makes the Opacity slide control available for changing
the opacity of the thematic image layer.
View 'No Data Value':
When a thematic image layer contains 'no data' values,
the View 'No Data Value' option is available. When you
choose the View 'No Data Value' option, you can select a
color from the color list for displaying them in the view
PCI Geomatics
pane.
(See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 51 )
Display within Zoom Scale tab
The Display within Zoom Scale tab allows you to set
independent zoom limits for your thematic layer. When
you zoom the view pane above the maximum scale or
below the minimum scale, your thematic layer is no
longer visible in the view pane.
Minimum Scale:
Lets you enter a minimum zoom scale.
Maximum Scale:
Lets you enter a maximum zoom scale.
Current Zoom Scale:
Reports the current zoom scale for the thematic layer.
Labels tab
The Label tab on the Properties dialog box for the layer
contains the Label files associated with the project. For
more information about labels see Managing the labels
on page 356 .
About the RST Properties dialog box
55

Geomatica® Focus
The RST Properties dialog box lets you change several
aspect of an RST.
General Tab
Under the General tab, you can change the name of the
RST file and change the current units of measure used
by the RST.
Description:
Lets you change the name of the RST.
Units:
Reports the units of measure used by the RST.
Modify:
Opens the Modify dialog box. (See About the Modify
dialog box on page 56 )
File Information
The File information section shows the current path of the
RST file and reports last date the file was modified.
File Name:
Reports the name and path of the RST.
About the Modify dialog box
From Ground To:
Lets you choose a different unit of measure, select a
standard scale from a list, or create a custom scale.
Scale 1:
Lets you enter a custom scale when you choose Custom
from the From Ground To list.
About the Symbol Properties dialog
box
The Symbol Properties dialog box lets you change the
description of a symbol file and view the symbol file
information.
General Tab
Under the General tab, you can change the name of the
symbol file and view the file information.
Description:
Lets you change the description of the symbol file.
File Information
The File information section shows the current path of the
symbol file and reports last date the file was modified.
File Name:
PCI Geomatics
56

Geomatica® Focus
Reports the name and path of the RST.
Using the File Properties dialog box
Characteristics of the data files that are saved to a hard
disk are listed under the Files tab in the control pane. You
can access the file information through a file Properties
dialog box, which shows similar information for all file
properties. The available information may differ
depending on the file type you are viewing.
You open a Properties dialog box for data items under
the Files tree the same way as items under the Maps
tree. (See Managing data properties on page 35 )
About the Bitmap Properties dialog
box
The bitmap Properties dialog box allows you to view and
change several of the attributes for you bitmap files. You
can review the file history, and add or remove metadata.
(See General tab on page 57 )
General tab
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
the Files tree.
Type:
PCI Geomatics
Reports the layer type.
Size on Disk:
Reports the size of the file on disk.
Creation Date:
Indicates when the layer was created.
Last Update:
Shows the last time the raster file was changed.
Raster Size:
Reports the size of the bitmap layer in pixels and lines.
(See History tab on page 57 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the image channel.
(See MetaData tab on page 57 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with
metadata names and values associated with the Raster
file.
57

Geomatica® Focus
Name:
Shows the name of the metadata file.
Value:
Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file.
Add:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
About the File Properties dialog box
The Files Properties dialog box allows you to review
general file attributes, review the file processing history,
manage file metadata, and view and change the file
projection.
(See General tab on page 58 )
General tab
Description:
PCI Geomatics
Allows you to enter detailed information about a file. The
description is shown in the Properties dialog box for the
file.
Type:
Reports the file format.
Size on disk:
Reports the disk size of the file.
Creation date:
Indicates when the file was first created.
Last updated:
Shows when the last edit was made to the file.
Raster Size:
If applicable, reports the size of the raster in pixels and
lines.
Interleaving type:
Reports the type of interleaving used in the file.
The following interleave methods are reported:
BAND interleaved:
58

Geomatica® Focus
Stores all data for one band together. Gives superior
performance when bands are not accessed continuously.
Not supported for files larger than 2 GB.
PIXEL interleaved:
Stores data for all bands at a particular pixel. May give
better performance when all bands are accessed at the
same time.
FILE interleaved:
Similar to BAND interleaved, but image channel data is
stored in external files, one file per band.
Tiled:
Files have image data organized in many square sub
images. Tiling provides faster access when a sub-area is
extracted for file viewing, and supports compression
formats.
Pathname:
Reports the full path and name of the file.
(See History tab on page 59 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the image channel.
(See MetaData tab on page 59 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab has a table that displays metadata
associated with the file.
Add:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
(See Projection tab on page 59 )
Projection tab
The Projection tab allows you to view and change the
projection of your files.
Coordinate System:
Allows you to select a coordinate system for a file.
The available systems are:
PCI Geomatics
59

Geomatica® Focus
• Pixel
• UTM
• Long/Lat
• Meter
• Foot
• SPCS
• Other
Earth Model:
Opens the Earth Model dialog box, where you can
choose from a list of datum and ellipsoids to define your
coordinate system.
More:
Opens the UTM, State Plane Zones, or the Projection
definition panel if you chose UTM, SPCS, or Other from
the Coordinate System box.
UTM panel:
Lists the following choices depending on the type of
coordinate system you chose:
Table 3.
UTM
SPCS
Other
This Projection
Opens this panel
Zone and Row
State Plane Zone
Set the Projection
Definition
Bounds:
Allows you to show the bounding coordinates of your file
in either geocoded (Eastings and Northings) or
geographic (latitude and longitude) units for UTM, SPCS,
and other coordinate systems. Bounding coordinates are
not shown for the Pixel option. Long/Lat displays the
bounding coordinates in geographic units only. Meter and
foot displays the bounding coordinates in geocoded units
only.
Upper left:
The Upper Left boxes show the X, Y coordinates for the
upper left corner of the file unless the file contains a
rotated raster. If the file contains a rotated raster, the
Upper Left boxes indicate the coordinates of the first pixel
in the file, which is not necessarily the upper left corner.
For more information, see About rotated rasters on page
34 . Values are in the units of the selected coordinate
system.
Lower Right:
The Lower Right boxes show the X, Y coordinates for the
lower right corner of the file unless the file contains a
rotated raster. If the file contains a rotated raster, the
Lower Right boxes indicate the coordinates of the last
pixel in the file, which is not necessarily the lower right
corner. For more information, see About rotated rasters
on page 34 . Values are in the units of the selected
coordinate system.
PCI Geomatics
60

Geomatica® Focus
Rotation:
The Rotation boxes indicate the amount the data is
rotated. For more information, see About rotated rasters
on page 34 .
Pixel Size X:
Reports the horizontal pixel size in the units of the
selected coordinate system.
Pixel Size Y:
Reports the vertical pixel size in the units of the selected
coordinate system.
About the Ground Control Points
dialog box
The Vector Properties dialog box allows you to view the
properties and history of vector files. You can also
change read/write attributes of the vector file, and add or
remove metadata.
(See General tab on page 61 )
General tab
You can change information about your Ground Control
Point (GCP) file and read other file information.
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
the Files tree.
Type:
Reports layer type.
Size on disk:
Reports the disk size of the layer.
Creation date:
Reports when the layer was created.
Last updated:
Reports the last time the GCP file was changed.
Number of GCPs:
Reports the number of GCPs in the layer.
(See History tab on page 61 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the image channel.
(See MetaData tab on page 62 )
PCI Geomatics
61

Geomatica® Focus
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with
metadata names and values associated with the
pseudo-color table file.
Name:
The name column shows the name of the metadata file.
Value:
The value column lets you enter a new value for the
metadata file.
Add:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
About the Look-up Table Properties
dialog box
The Look-up Table Properties dialog box allows you to
PCI Geomatics
change several of the attributes for look-up table (LUT)
files. You can review the file history, and add or remove
metadata.
(See General tab on page 62 )
General tab
The General tab allows you to change generic
information about your file and read other file information.
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
the Files tree.
Type:
Reports layer type.
Size on disk:
Reports the disk size of the layer.
Creation date:
Reports when the layer was created.
Last updated:
Reports the last time the LUT file was changed.
(See History tab on page 63 )
62

Geomatica® Focus
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the table.
(See MetaData tab on page 63 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with
metadata names and values associated with the Look-up
Table (LUT) file.
Name:
The name column shows the name of the metadata file.
Value:
The value column lets you enter a new value for the
metadata file.
Add:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
PCI Geomatics
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
About the Orbit Properties dialog box
The Orbit Properties dialog box allows you to change
several orbit file attributes. You can change the name of
the file, review the file history, and add or remove
metadata.
(See General tab on page 63 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change the description of
an orbit file layer and read other file information.
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
the Files tree.
Type:
Reports layer type.
Size on Disk:
Reports the size of the layer in bytes.
Creation date:
Reports the layer creation date.
63

Geomatica® Focus
Last updated:
Reports the last date the file was changed.
(See History tab on page 64 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the image channel.
(See MetaData tab on page 64 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with
metadata names and values associated with an orbit file.
Name:
The name column shows the name of the metadata file.
Value:
The value column lets you enter a new value for the
metadata file.
Add:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
PCI Geomatics
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
About the Pseudo-color table
properties
The Pseudo-color Table Properties dialog box allows you
to change several of the attributes for you pseudo-color
table files. You can review the file history, and add or
remove metadata.
(See General tab on page 64 )
General tab
You can change information about your file and read
other file information.
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
the Files tree.
Type:
Reports layer type.
Size on disk:
64

Geomatica® Focus
Reports the disk size of the layer.
Creation date:
Reports when the layer was created.
Last updated:
Reports the last time the pseudo-color table file was
changed.
(See History tab on page 65 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the image channel.
(See MetaData tab on page 65 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with
metadata names and values associated with the
pseudo-color table file.
Name:
Shows the name of the metadata file.
Value:
Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file.
Add:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
About the Raster Properties dialog
box
The Raster Properties dialog box allows you to change
several of the attributes for your Raster files. You can
give a raster file read-only status, review the file history,
and add or remove metadata.
(See General tab on page 65 )
General tab
You can change generic information about your file and
read other file information.
Description:
PCI Geomatics
65

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
the Files tree.
Type:
Reports layer type.
Size on disk:
Reports the size of the layer in bytes.
Creation date:
Reports when the layer was created.
Last updated:
Reports the last time the raster file was changed.
Locking Status:
Gives the raster layer read only status. Read-only Raster
layers appear in the Files Tree with a red #X# next to the
raster icon.
Raster Size:
Reports the size of the raster layer in pixels and lines.
Data Type:
Reports the bit depth of the of the raster layer as one of
the following data types:
PCI Geomatics
• 8-bit unsigned
• 16-bit signed
• 16-bit unsigned
• 32-bit real
Overviews:
Reports available overviews in the raster file.
(See History tab on page 66 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the image channel.
(See MetaData tab on page 66 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with
metadata names and values associated with the Raster
file.
Name:
Shows the name of the metadata file.
Value:
Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file.
Add:
66

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
About the Signatures Properties
dialog box
The Signatures Properties dialog box allows you to
change several of the attributes for the pseudo-color
table files. You can review the file history, and add or
remove metadata.
(See General tab on page 67 )
General tab
Under the General tab you can change information about
your file and read other file information.
Description:
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
the Files tree.
Type:
PCI Geomatics
Reports layer type.
Size on disk:
Reports the disk size of the layer.
Creation date:
Reports when the layer was created.
Last updated:
Reports the last time the Signatures file was changed.
(See History tab on page 67 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the image channel.
(See MetaData tab on page 67 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with
metadata names and values associated with the
pseudo-color table file.
Name:
Shows the name of the metadata file.
67

Geomatica® Focus
Value:
Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file.
Add:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
About the Text Properties dialog box
The Text Properties dialog box allows you to change
several text file attributes. You can change the name of
the file, review the file history, and add or remove
metadata.
(See General tab on page 68 )
General tab
You can change the description of your file and read
other file information.
Description:
PCI Geomatics
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
the Files tree.
Type:
Reports layer type.
Size on Disk:
Reports the size of the layer in bytes.
Creation date:
Reports the layer creation date.
Last updated:
Reports the last date the file was changed.
(See History tab on page 68 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the image channel.
(See MetaData tab on page 68 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with
metadata names and values associated with a text file.
68

Geomatica® Focus
Name:
Shows the name of the metadata file.
Value:
Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file.
Add:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
About the Vector Properties dialog
box
The Vector Properties dialog box allows you to view the
properties and history of vector files. You can also
change read/write attributes of the vector file, and add or
remove metadata.
(See General tab on page 69 )
General tab
PCI Geomatics
Description:
Lets you change the file description appearing in the Files
tree.
Name:
Lets you change the name of the vector layer appearing
in the Files tree.
Type:
Reports layer type.
Size on disk:
Reports the disk size of the layer.
Creation date:
Indicates when the vector file layer was created.
Last updated:
Shows the last time the vector file layer was changed.
Data Type:
Reports the type of vector data.
Shape Count:
Reports the number of shapes in the vector file layer.
69

Geomatica® Focus
(See History tab on page 70 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing
history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been
applied to the data contained in the image channel.
(See MetaData tab on page 70 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with
metadata names and values associated with the vector
file.
Name:
Shows the name of the metadata file.
Value:
Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file.
Add:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table.
Delete:
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table.
Delete All:
PCI Geomatics
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the
table.
(See Projection tab on page 70 )
Projection tab
The Projection tab allows you to change the vector
projection and select an Earth model and a UTM zone for
the vector layer.
Projection:
Allows you to choose a different projection for the vector
file layer.
You can choose the following projections from the
list box:
• Pixel
• UTM - Opens the UTM Zones dialog box.
• Lat/Long - Makes the Earth Model button available
and reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid.
• Meter - Makes the Earth Model button available and
reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid.
• Foot - Makes the Earth Model button available and
reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid.
• SPCS - Makes the Earth Model button available,
reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid, and opens
the State Plane Zones dialog box.
• Other - Makes the Earth Model button available,
reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid, and opens
the Other Projections dialog box. (See About the
Other Projections dialog box on page 71 ).
70

Geomatica® Focus
Earth Model:
Opens the Earth Model dialog box.
More:
Opens the State Plane dialog box.
About the Other Projections dialog box
The Other Projections dialog box lets you choose a
projection other than Pixel, UTM, Lat/Long, Meter, Foot,
and SPCS. The Other Projections dialog box is available
when you choose Other from the projections list under
the Projection tab in any Properties dialog box. (See
Reprojecting files on page 134 )
Color mapping and image profiles
Focus lets you map individual color elements and
combinations of red, green, and blue (RGB) color
elements to the channels in data with the RGB Mapping
dialog box. You can also generate an image profile graph
and a numeric table of profile values for your active
images. The Profile Table and Profile Graph dialog boxes
are used together when working with profiles and they
allow you to print and save information.
About the RGB Mapping dialog box
The RGB Mapping dialog box shows the color content of
red, green, and blue data in a multi-spectral data file
PCI Geomatics
table. The RGB Mapping dialog box lets you change or
map the channel data to a color element and show the
changes in the view pane.
Target Map Layer:
Reports the source file that contains the image layers
listed in the RGB Mapping dialog box.
Red:
Lists the channels available for red mapping.
Green:
Lists the channels available for green mapping.
Blue:
Lists the channels available for blue mapping.
Image Layers:
Lists the data layers in the target Map layer that can be
mapped to red, green, and blue color elements.
1. Select an image layer in the Maps tree.
2. From the Layer menu, click RGB Mapper.
3. Click in the Red, Green, and Blue columns next to
the image channel to which you want to apply that
filter.
You can assign only one color to a channel. The
image in the view pane changes according to the
new mapping.
71

Geomatica® Focus
4. Click Close.
Note: Changing band combinations cancels
enhancements you have applied. To maintain an
enhancement, you must enhance the image again.
Remove an applied enhancement and then re-apply it.
Creating an image profile
Focus lets you generate a spectral plot and a table of
numeric values across an overlaid vector that shows
image information related to the RGB input channels. The
resulting image profile gives a cross section of the pixel
values under the vector. Focus automatically generates a
table of pixel values for the vector. Pixel values in the
profile table are across three image planes. You can save
the table values as a text file and you can save and print
the profile graph.
Vector Profiles:
If a vector is not open, a line is automatically generated
and used to calculate the profile. You may want to create
a vector profile under a specific area of your image or
select an existing vector for the profile. You can modify
the profile or draw a new one.
To create an automatic image profile:
1. With a raster file open, do one of the following:
• Click Layer and then click Profile.
• Right-click a raster layer in the Maps tree and
click Profile.
PCI Geomatics
Focus automatically adds a new vector layer to the
Maps tree and a new vector to the view pane to
calculate the vector profile. The Profile graph and
table also appear.
To create a new image profile:
1. With a raster file open, open a vector segment or
add a new vector layer and draw a vector using the
Vector Editing tools.
2. Select the image layer and click Layer and then
click Profile.
You can also right-click a raster layer in the Maps
tree and click Profile.
Focus automatically adds a new vector layer to the
Maps tree and a new vector to the view pane to
calculate the vector profile. The Profile graph and
table also open.
To display the image profile of the vector from the
vector layer, select the vector layer in the Map tree.
3. Click the Vector Editing button.
4. Click the vector for which you want to make a
profile.
About the Profile Table dialog box
The Profile Table dialog box lists the RGB values, X/Y
positions, and scaled distances for each pixel included in
the overlaid vector segment. Pixels are incremented
automatically and several statistical and graphical
72

Geomatica® Focus
adjustments can be made.
Sample:
Reports an automatic increment for each pixel along the
vector. Pixel 1 is the first pixel at the vector point of origin.
Channel 1:
Lists all of the pixel values for the color you have mapped
to channel 1.
Channel 2:
Lists all of the pixel values for the color you have mapped
to channel 2.
Channel 3:
Lists all of the pixel values for the color you have mapped
to channel 3.
Pixel/Line:
Lists a pixel and line coordinate location for each pixel
along the vector.
X position:
Lists the X coordinate for each pixel along the vector.
Y position:
Lists the Y coordinate for each pixel along the vector.
Distance:
Lists the scale distance for each pixel relative to the
image scale. Distances are expressed in units of
measure corresponding to the image in the view pane.
Close:
Closes the Profile Table dialog box.
Graph:
Brings the Profile Graph dialog box to the front of your
desktop.
Statistics:
Opens the Profile Statistics dialog box. (See below)
Save:
Opens the Save Table dialog box.
Options:
Opens the Profile Options dialog box. (See About the
Profile Options dialog box on page 74 )
About the Profile Statistics Dialog Box:
The Profile Statistics dialog box is opened from the
PCI Geomatics
73

Geomatica® Focus
Profile Table dialog box and shows the statistics for each
channel in a selected layer.
The following statistics are calculated automatically:
• Sample Min
• Sample Max
• Sample Avg
• Weighted Avg
Statistics are a summary for the sample gray values
along the profile. The weighted average is the most
accurate measure of central tendency among the sample
points. The weight of a sample gray value is the ratio of
the length of a sample interval over the total distance of
all the sample intervals.
About the Profile Options dialog box
The Profile options dialog box allows you to make
changes to the profile graph and the profile table. You
can simultaneously change information reported in the
Profile Table and Profile Graph dialog boxes. You open
the Profile Options dialog box with the Options button in
the Profile Table dialog box.
Color:
Reports the colors used to plot the channels in the Profile
Graph. Clicking in a Color column cell opens the Line
Color dialog box.
Visible:
PCI Geomatics
Reports the channels shown as plot lines in the Profile
Graph and as channel columns in the Profile Table.
Enabling a Visible column cell shows the corresponding
line and column in the Profile Graph and the Profile Table
dialog boxes.
Current Channel:
Lets you change the focus of the Profile Graph to the
channel you want.
Profile View:
Lets you choose between a graph showing grayscale
values along either a georeferenced or a sample point
scale.
Georeferenced:
Switches the X axis of the graph to the linear scale view
of your image.
Sample Points:
Switches the X axis of the graph to the pixel number view
of the vector profile.
1. In the Profile Options dialog box, click a color chip
for the corresponding channel.
2. In the Color Panel dialog box, make any changes to
the basic color, color continuum, or intensity.
3. Click OK.
About the Profile Graph dialog box
74

Geomatica® Focus
The Profile Graph dialog box lets you view the graph
plotted from the information corresponding to the overlaid
vector and the values listed in the Profile Table dialog
box. You can zoom in the graph to look at a segment of
the plot.
Sample Profile of Selected Channels:
Contains the graph with a profile of the channels you
have chosen in the Visible column of the Profile Options
dialog box. (See About the Profile Options dialog box on
page 74 )
The vector profile is interpreted from left to right;
however, if the end points of the vector occupy the same
X position, the profile is interpreted from the top down.
With closed shapes, the profile is interpreted in a
clockwise direction from the start/end node.
Gray-value changes are shown as a function of distance
along the vector. The graph gives a profile of the image
layer and the distance along the vector on the X axis.
Gray Values:
green, and blue input channels. Both 16-bit and 32-bit
real raster data can be graphed showing the 16-bit and
32-bit range of values.
Distance:
When you choose the Georeferenced option in the Profile
Options dialog box, the X axis is measured in meters and
represents the distance between the end points of the
vector. The range of the X axis depends on the length of
the vector and the scale of the area or the ground
distance covered by the image.
Mensuration Bars:
Reports the position of the measuration bars in pixels or
in scale distance along the vector, depending on the
Profile View option, selected in the Profile Options dialog
box.
You can move the measuration bars on the graph by
dragging the left side of the graph to the right.
Left Bar X:
Shows the input channels plotted with the gray values
along the Y axis of the graph.
Sample Points:
When you choose the Sample Points option in the Profile
Options panel, an 8-bit RGB image layer shows a range
along the X axis of 0 to 255 and represents the 256
possible gray-level values for each pixel of the red,
PCI Geomatics
Reports the X position of the left measuration bar.
Left Bar Y:
Reports the Y position of the left measuration bar.
Right Bar X:
Reports the X position of the right measuration bar.
75

Geomatica® Focus
Right Bar Y:
Reports the Y position of the right measuration bar.
Difference X:
Reports the difference between the left and right
measuration bars along the X axis of the graph.
Difference Y:
Reports the difference between the left and right
measuration bars along the Y axis of the graph.
Close:
Closes the Profile Graph dialog box.
Show All:
Restores the graph to a full view after the graph has been
zoomed.
Graph Controls:
Opens the Graph Controls dialog box.
About the Graph Controls dialog box
The Graph Controls dialog box allows you to change the
viewable range for both the X and Y axes, export the plot
to a graphic file, change the background color for the plot,
and print the plot.
X View Range:
Allows you to set the minimum and maximum ranges of
the X axis of the profile graph.
Min:
Allows you to enter a minimum range for the X axis of the
profile graph.
Max:
Allows you to enter a maximum range for the X axis of
the profile graph.
Y View Range:
Allows you to set the minimum and maximum ranges of
the Y axis of the profile graph.
Min:
Allows you to enter a minimum range for the Y axis of the
profile graph.
Max:
Allows you to enter a maximum range for the Y axis of
the profile graph.
Export:
Allows you to choose a file and a format for exporting
PCI Geomatics
76

Geomatica® Focus
your graph.
File:
Opens a File Selector dialog box, where you can choose
a target file for exporting your graph.
File Format:
Lets you choose a file format for exporting your graph.
Options:
Lets you show a legend on your graph, lock the aspect
ratio of the X and Y axes, and change the background
color of the graph.
Show Legend:
Shows or hides the legend on the Profile Graph dialog
box. The legend is printed with the graph when this
option is checked.
Fix Aspect Ratio:
Locks the aspect ratio of the X and Y axes of the graph.
Background:
Lets you change the background color of the graph.
Using the graph controls
The Graph Controls allow you to edit the X and Y axis of
a profile. You can also change the graph colors. You can
control the range with the Min. and Max arrows. The Fix
Aspect Ratio option holds the X and Y axis to the original
relationship.
The range varies depending on the ground distance
covered by the image and the length of the vector. The
range default value depends on the image bit depth (for
example, 8-bit, 16-bit, and so on).
At the bottom of the Profile Graph dialog box, click Graph
Controls. You can also right-click in the profile and click
Graph Controls.
Range Controls:
The range of the graph is controlled with the Min. and
Max arrows. The Fix Aspect Ratio option holds the X and
Y-axis to the original relationship. To adjust the X and Y
axis independently, make sure this option is disabled.
You can return to the original values by clicking Show All
at the bottom of the Profile Graph dialog box.
The range varies depending on the ground distance
covered by the image and the length of the vector.
You can also interactively draw a box on your vector
profile graph to zoom into an area of interest on the graph
by dragging a box around the area of the graph into
which you want to zoom. You can zoom back out to the
original X and Y range by clicking Show All.
PCI Geomatics
77

Geomatica® Focus
Legend and Color Controls:
You can show he legend for the color channels by
enabling the Show Legend check box.
• Select a color from the Background list.
Exporting profiles
To export your profile information, you can:
• Save your graph as a PCIDSK (.pix), TIFF (.tif),
bitmap (.bmp), or PostScript (.ps) file through the
Graph Controls dialog box.
• Print the profile graph by clicking Print at the bottom
of the Graph Controls dialog box.
• Save your profile table to a text file through the
Profile Table dialog box. This text file can be
imported to any spreadsheet for editing or analysis.
You can change the file format before selecting the
output file.
1. In the Export area of the Profile Graph dialog box,
select a format from the Format list box.
2. Click File.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, navigate to and
select a file.
4. Click Save.
5. In the Profile Graph dialog box, click Export.
Printing your graph without showing the
mensuration bars
1. From the Profile Table dialog box, click Options.
PCI Geomatics
2. In the Profile Options dialog box, click the field with
an X in the Current Channel column.
3. Click Close.
4. In the Profile Table dialog box, click Graph.
5. In the Profile Graph dialog box, click Graph
Controls.
6. In the Graph Controls dialog box, click Print.
7. In the Print dialog box, click OK.
Using the View tools
Focus offers several tools to view, create, and save
custom views of specific regions in your image data. This
section covers the methods and tools for focusing on
specific parts of an image.
Using the Zoom window
The Zoom Window lets you see a linked copy of your
image data in a separate viewer. You can zoom the
images independently, using one image to locate
features and the other to zoom in for a closer look. You
open the Zoom Window from the View menu. When you
click the Lock command, you can move the cursor in the
view pane without changing the image in the Zoom
Window.
Using a Clone view
You can use the Clone View feature for several tasks.
For example, if you want to compare classified images
with reference images or if you want to analyse
multi-temporal imagery, you can use Clone View to open
several independently enhanced versions of the same
78

Geomatica® Focus
image to help discriminate certain features.
The clone view command opens a second window for the
current project. A copy of the project opens in the Maps
and Files trees in the view pane.
Clone views are independent of the source view showing
in the original project window. Changes made to the
project are not reflected in the cloned window. Once a
Clone View is open, a new image can be opened in the
project window with no effect on the cloned view.
Chaining clone views
When you have an open Clone View, you can use the
Chained Window command to have the cursor position in
the Focus view pane automatically control the cursor
position in the Clone view, vice versa, or have both
cursors affect each other.
1. From the View menu of the project window, click
Clone View.
2. If you want the cursor in the Focus view pane to
follow the cursor in the Clone view, click the
Chained Window button on the Focus toolbar.
3. If you want the cursor in the Clone view to follow the
cursor in the Focus view pane, click the Chained
Window button on the Clone view toolbar.
Zooming using the Overview window
If you have a very large image file open or if your image
is zoomed in, you can pan around the image in the view
pane. There are two ways to pan around images: you can
click the Pan button in the Focus toolbar or you can use
the bounding outline in the overview window. The extents
for the overview window are based on the extents of all
data loaded in the main viewer regardless of what data
types you set to be shown.
When you open image data in Focus, the overview
window shows a smaller version of the image in the view
pane. The overview window has a bounding outline that
you can use to control the view in the view pane. You can
click the bounding outline to pan around the image in the
view pane and you can resize the bounding outline to
zoom the image in the view pane.
1. In the overview window, pointer to a corner of the
bounding box.
2. Drag the bounding box to a new size.
Dragging the box in the overview window moves the
image in the view pane without changing the zoom level.
Creating named regions
You can create a custom view of your map or image with
the Named Regions tool. When you create a named
region, the viewer can move to it in the view pane.
New named regions are defined by upper-left and
lower-right corner coordinates. You can define the
boundaries of a new region by using either the zoom
tools on the Focus toolbar or by using the advanced
features of the Named Regions dialog box. You can save
PCI Geomatics
79

Geomatica® Focus
your named regions when you save the current project. If
you add, remove, or edit the name of a Map or Area in
the Maps tree, the information is updated in the Named
Regions tree.
The Named Regions dialog box has a tree similar to the
one in the control pane. In the Named Regions tree, only
the named regions are listed. New named regions are
shown by either an Area-named regions icon or a
Map-named regions icon.
1. In the Maps tree, choose an Area or a Map for
defining your named region.
2. Use any of the zoom tools, including the bounding
outline in the overview window, to define your
region.
3. From the View menu, click Named Regions.
4. In the Named Regions dialog box, click the +
button.
5. Type a name of the selected region in the Named
Region 1 box.
6. Click OK.
Removing named regions
1. From the View menu, click Named Regions.
2. In the Named Regions dialog box, select a region.
3. Click the - button.
You can also right-click a named region in the Named
Regions tree and click Remove.
You can define a named region using coordinate
information and you can edit your coordinates. By default,
PCI Geomatics
the advanced features show raster coordinates for the
image data open in the view pane. You can describe the
bounds of your named region in Raster, Geocoded,
Geographic, or MGRS units.
Creating named regions using coordinates
1. In the Named Regions dialog box, click Advanced.
2. Select a reference system from the Bounds list
box.
3. Type the coordinates of your named region in the
appropriate boxes, based on the selected reference
system.
4. Click the + button.
5. Type a name of the selected region in the Named
Region 1 box.
6. Click OK.
Panning an image
There are many ways to visualize image data in the view
pane. This section covers all of the various methods and
tools for looking at the parts of your image data that you
want.
Panning
When you have a very large image file open or when
your image is zoomed in, you can pan around the image
in the view pane. There are two ways to pan around
images: you can click the Pan tool in the Focus toolbar or
you can use the bounding outline in the overview window.
80

Geomatica® Focus
1. On the Focus toolbar, click the Pan button.
2. Drag the image where you want to go.
You can also scroll an image using the standard scroll
bars along the horizontal and vertical edges of the view
pane.
Zooming
You can zoom in or out to a particular location even when
you have multiple images opened.
Zooming an image with zoom tools
1. In the view pane, click a location or feature in the
image.
2. On the Focus toolbar, click the Zoom In button.
The image is enlarged by a factor of 2.
To zoom out, click the Zoom Out button.
Viewing a 1:1 image resolution
1. In the view pane, click the image.
2. On the Zoom toolbar, click the Zoom to 1:1 Image
Resolution button.
Note: When more than one image is open, the zoom
tools apply to all images in the view pane.
Using a layout grid
The Layout Grid can use dots or lines to help you draw
and lay out items in the view pane. You can align or
position any map element relative to the grid. There are
grid properties for Show Grid and Snap to Grid that can
be turned on or off. You cannot print a Layout Grid.
There are two options for displaying the grid: the first
option shows the grid as dots; the second option shows
the grid as lines. The index for the grid is displayed as a
cross or wider line. All map objects can snap to the grid.
• For areas, the handles of the bounding box are
used for snapping. The closest handle to the cursor
click position snaps to a grid point.
• For Points, either text or symbols, the insertion point
snaps to the grid point.
• For shapes, snapping is the same as snapping an
area.
A grid point is the intersection of a horizontal and a
vertical grid line. When the grid is displayed as dots, each
dot is placed at a grid line intersection point.
Grid spacing
The Grid Spacing section sets the spacing for both the
dots and lines.
Horizontal:
The default spacing is 1.00 Millimetre
PCI Geomatics
81

Geomatica® Focus
Vertical:
The default spacing is 1.00 Millimetre.
The unit options for spacing are in standard paper units:
millimetre, inch, point, and pica.
The Keep Equal option forces the grid spacing to be
equal in both directions. You can disable the option if you
want different horizontal and vertical spacing. This option
is checked by default.
Index spacing
Index spacing is based on your grid spacing.
Horizontal:
Spacing for the index is in grid units. The default is 10.
Every tenth dot or line is an index dot or line.
Vertical:
Spacing for the index grid is also in grid units. The default
is 10. Every tenth dot or line is an index dot or line.
The Keep Equal option forces the index spacing to be
equal in both directions. You can disable this option if you
want different horizontal and vertical spacing.
Show Grid:
Switches the grid off or on in the view pane. Enable this
PCI Geomatics
option to show the grid.
Snap to Grid:
Switches the grid snapping behavior off or on. Enable the
check box to make map elements snap to the grid.
1. From the View menu, click Layout Grid Setup.
2. In the Layout Grid Setup dialog box, click either
the Dots or the Lines option.
3. Select a color for your grid from the Color list.
4. Select grid and index spacing by entering values in
the Grid Spacing and Index Spacing spin boxes.
If you want to display the grid in the view pane,
enable the Show grid check box.
If you want new objects in the view pane to snap to
your grid, enable the Snap to grid check box.
5. Click OK.
Visualizing your data
Focus provides a set of active visualization tools that can
automate your work. The visualization tools are ideal for
work requiring change detection between images
recorded at different times. You can also use the
visualization tools to ensure accuracy in your
cartographic projects when you use imagery as a
background layer to update vector or bitmap data.
Enhancing images
Images can be processed at several levels, from
82

Geomatica® Focus
standard enhancements that filter images to fully
customized enhancements using look-up tables and
histograms. Unenhanced image files are often impossible
to understand visually when they are opened in an image
viewer. Enhancements make imagery clearer and easier
to interpret. When you open an image file, it is
automatically enhanced in the view pane. You can
change the default enhancement. (See Changing a
default enhancement on page 244 )
Using the Attribute Manager
The Attribute Manager produces a table showing all pixel
values for raster attributes. You can select vectors,
search for segments, and locate records. You can also
edit vector attribute records and fields. (See Performing
tasks in the Attribute Manager on page 304 )
• From the Maps or Files tree, right-click a layer and
click Attribute Manager.
Importing XML metadata using the
METAIN algorithm
When you import data, you can also import image
metadata from an XML-format text file and examine both
global and band-specific metadata during the operation.
Importing metadata is important when working with
hyperspectral data. Many hyperspectral data sets include
additional information about the mission and the sensor
used to acquire the data.
The first step in a project is to import data. If the data files
are not in .pix format, you must obtain the data format. If
the data is partitioned into different files, importing it in
.pix format may require separate imports, transferring
layers from one file into the final output file, or a single
import.
Mission and sensor metadata must be attached to the
image data to make processing and analyzing it more
efficient. The metadata must be formatted as an XML
document in a text file. Metadata is read into the .pix file
containing the image data as a metadata segment using
the METAIN program. This can be opened through EASI
or the Algorithm Librarian in Focus. Conversely, the
METAOUT program will read the information in the
metadata segment and export it as an XML document.
The algorithm METAIN reads image metadata from an
XML document that is stored in a text file, reformat the
data, and stores them in a GDB file. The required format
for an XML file can be found in the document
PCIImageMetadata.xsd in the $PCIHOME\etc folder.
The XML document file must be in the same folder and
have the same base name as the GDB file. The XML
document file must have an .xml file name extension.
Global Metadata
Many global metadata items are optional and can be
absent from the data files you are working with. The
following table is a list of both required and optional
metadata items.
PCI Geomatics
83

Geomatica® Focus
Table 4.
Required
Text data set descriptions
Number of image bands
Number and sequence of
radiometric
transformations stored as
band-specific metadata.
Band-specific Metadata
Optional
Name of the sensor model
Name of the sensor type
Location of image
acquisition
Time of image acquisition
Heading of the platform
Fore-aft sensor tilt relative
to gravity vector
Total sensor field-of-view
Some band-specific metadata is also optional. The
following table shows a list of both required and optional
band-specific metadata items
Table 5.
Required Band-Specific
Metadata Items
Band ID number
The number of the file
channel that stores the
band
PCI Geomatics
Optional Band-Specific
Metadata Items
Band quality
Radiometric transformation
sequence
Required Band-Specific
Metadata Items
Optional Band-Specific
Metadata Items
Response profile
The METAIN is in the Algorithm Librarian. The Algorithm
Librarian lists algorithms in a tree of file folders. The
folders are organized by algorithm category. Some
category folders contain a sub-category of algorithms.
1. From the Tools menu, click Algorithm Librarian.
2. In the Select Algorithm dialog box, expand the
Analysis folder.
3. Expand the Hyperspectral Analysis folder.
4. Double-click the METAIN algorithm.
5. In the METAIN Module Control Panel, click the
Input Params 1 tab and click Browse.
6. Navigate to the file you want, select it, and click
Open.
7. In the METAIN Module Control Panel, click Run.
Opening an image data set
1. In the Files tree, right-click anywhere in the white
area and click Add.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a
data file, and click Open.
Viewing global metadata
1. In the Files tree, right-click the file you want to view
and click Properties.
84

Geomatica® Focus
2. In the Properties dialog box, click the MetaData
tab.
The global metadata is listed.
Viewing band-specific metadata
1. In the Files tree, expand the list of raster layers in
your file.
2. Right-click a raster layer and click Properties.
3. In the Properties dialog box, click the MetaData
tab.
The band-specific Metadata is listed.
Enabling and disabling panes
The status bar contains several panes that communicate
information from the viewer. Panes identified by a check
mark are enabled.
1. On the status bar, click the down arrow on the left.
2. Select the pane of your choice:
• Messages: displays brief text messages to
communicate ScreenTips, explanations, and
instructions.
• Progress: displays a progress indicator that
shows how much of a process is completed.
• ZoomScale: displays the scale at the zoom
level used in the viewer.
• ZoomImagePixel: displays the magnification
factor used in the viewer.
• CursorPosition: displays the coordinate of
the cursor in the viewer. You can also select
PCI Geomatics
the unit for the coordinate#s display.
• SelectionValue: displays the pixel value at the
cursor.
Changing the units for the cursor position
1. On the status bar, click the down arrow on the
CursorPosition bar.
2. Select the unit of your choice:
• Paper: displays the coordinates in millimeters.
• Raster: displays the coordinates in image
pixels and lines measured from the upper left
corner of the image.
• Geocoded: displays the coordinates in
Easting and Northing values.
• Geographic: displays the coordinates in
Longitude and Latitude values.
• MGRS: displays the coordinates using the
Military Grid Reference System.
• Screen: displays the coordinates in screen
pixels measured from the upper left corner of
the viewer.
Using the Visualization tools
The visualization tools let you view and compare multiple
image layers simultaneously. You can automatically
browse a set of image layers or blend different images to
see specific parts of one image through another. The
tools can also be used with any of the enhancements or
filters.
Some visualization modes have different data
requirements. For example, the Flicker, Blend, and Swipe
85

Geomatica® Focus
tools require files with more than one image layer to be
visible. The Loop tool requires a minimum of three layers
to be open and the Cycle tool requires either an RGB or a
hyperspectral file. The following screens provide
information for using each of the visualization modes that
are available. (See About the Visualization Tools dialog
box on page 86 )
About the Visualization Tools dialog
box
The Visualization Tools dialog box provides controls for
the Flicker, Swipe, Blend, Loop, and Cycle tools. The
controls for each visualization mode are separated by a
tab at the top of the panel. You can set frame rates,
image positions, mode orientation, and you can start and
stop each visualization operation with the controls under
the corresponding panel tab.
For more information, see the following:
• Using the Flicker tool on page 86
• Using the Swipe tool on page 86
• Using the Blend tool on page 87
• Using the Loop tool on page 88
• Using the Cycle tool on page 89
• Using the Band Cycling tool on page 90
Using the Flicker tool
The Flicker tab controls the flicker visualization mode.
Speed [frame/sec]:
PCI Geomatics
Allows you to change the frame rate of the flicker action.
Actual:
Reports the actual frame rate of the flicker when it is
running.
Control:
Allows you to start and stop automatic flicker and to
manually cycle through the flicker visualization mode.
Current Top Layer:
Reports the name of the active layer in the view pane.
Using Flicker:
Switches your view between two layers within the same
Map. When you select any two layers in the Maps tree,
the associated images flicker from the front to the back of
the view pane, making it easier to see subtle differences
between them.
1. From the View menu, click Visualization Tools.
2. In the Visualization Tools dialog box, click the
Flicker tab.
3. In the Maps tree, select two layers by holding the
Ctrl key while clicking the layers you want to view.
4. Type a value for the flicker rate in the Speed
[frame/sec] box.
5. Click the Start Automatic Flicker button.
Using the Swipe tool
86

Geomatica® Focus
The Swipe tab controls the swipe visualization mode.
Horizontal:
Changes the swipe to a horizontal direction.
Vertical:
Changes the swipe to a vertical direction.
Position [%]:
Allows you to step through a swipe cycle while reporting
the portion of the cycle as a percentage of the swiped
images.
Auto Mode
The Auto Mode area lets you set and operate the
automatic swipe features.
Speed [frame/second]:
Sets the frame rate of the image swipe.
Actual:
Reports the actual frame rate for the swipe operation.
Control:
Allows you to start and stop the automatic image swiping.
PCI Geomatics
Step Size [%]:
Lets you adjust the size of the swiped portion of the
image in each step.
Using Swipe:
Displays a file in increments across another; at any point
during the process, you can look at a specific percentage
of the swiped file.
1. In the Visualization Tools dialog box, click the
Swipe tab.
2. Click one of the following options:
Horizontal: changes the swipe to a horizontal
direction.
Vertical: changes the swipe to a vertical direction.
3. Type a value for the size of the swipe percentage in
the Position box.
4. Type a value for the flicker rate in the Speed
[frame/sec] box.
5. Type a value for the step size in the Step size box.
6. Click the Start Automatic Swipe button.
The swipe operation continues until you click the
Stop Automatic swipe button.
Using the Blend tool
The Blend tab controls the blend visualization mode.
Position [%]:
87

Geomatica® Focus
Allows you to step through a blend cycle while reporting
the portion of the cycle as a percentage of the blended
images.
Auto Mode
The Auto Mode area lets you set and operate the
automatic blend features.
Speed [frame/second]:
Sets the frame rate of the image blend.
Actual:
Reports the actual frame rate for the blend operation.
Control:
Allows you to start and stop the automatic image
blending.
Step Size [%]:
Lets you adjust the size of the blended portion of the
image in each step.
Using Blend:
Merges two layers together at a specified rate. The
transition from one view to another helps you see
changes between layers.
1. In the Visualization Tools dialog box, click the
PCI Geomatics
Blend tab.
2. Type a value for the position of the blend in the
Position box.
3. Type a value for the flicker rate in the Speed
[frame/sec] box.
4. Type a value for the step size in the Step size box.
5. Click the Start Automatic Blend button.
The blend operation continues until you click the
Stop Automatic Blend button.
Using the Loop tool
The Loop tab controls the loop visualization mode.
Forward:
Cycles the data forward from the lowest to the highest
priority.
Backward:
Cycles the data backward from the highest to the lowest
priority.
Continuous Loop:
Cycles the data continuously according to the direction
option you choose.
Speed [frame/second]:
Sets the frame rate of the image blend.
88

Geomatica® Focus
Actual:
Reports the actual frame rate for the blend operation.
Control:
Allows you to start and stop the automatic image
blending.
Current Top Layer:
Reports the name of the active layer in the view pane.
Using Loop:
Loop mode is a multi-view tool that extends automatic file
comparison capabilities to include three or more files.
You must have at least three layers open to enable the
Loop tab. To use the Loop tool, click the Loop tab.
Specify the desired flicker speed (frames/sec) and click
the Start Automatic Loop button.
You can specify a forward (starting with the first file and
ending with the last file in the maps tree) or backward
loop by clicking in the Forward or Backward options. If
the Continuous Loop option is enabled the files will
continually flicker. If the Continuous Loop option is
disabled the files will loop only once.
Using the Cycle tool
The Cycle tab controls the cycle visualization mode.
Color Channel
The Color Channel section provides options for viewing
channels and channel combinations you want to cycle.
Red:
Lets you cycle only the red channels in your data file.
Green:
Lets you cycle only the green channels in your data file.
Blue:
Lets you cycle only the blue channels in your data file.
File:
Reports the color channel source data file.
Cycle Through All Files:
Lets you cycle through all of the color channels in your
image data.
Channel:
Changes the file report to show the channel currently
being cycled.
Display Ranges:
PCI Geomatics
89

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you enter a range or series of channel ranges to be
cycled in the view pane.
Forward:
Cycles your data forward from the lowest to the highest
priority.
Backward:
Cycles your data backward from the highest to the lowest
priority.
Speed [frame/second]:
Sets the frame rate of the image cycle.
Actual:
Reports the actual frame rate for the cycle operation
Control:
Allows you to start and stop the automatic image cycling.
Current Top Layer:
Reports the name of the active layer in the view pane.
Using Cycle:
Cycle mode displays image data through the color
component you specify. The color that image channels
cycle through is set using the red, green, or blue color
channel options. You can select image channels to use
with the Display Ranges text box.You can also specify
whether the image layers will be cycled through the color
component forward, starting with the first image channel
you specify or backward, starting with the last image
channel specified. (See Using the Band Cycling tool on
page 90 )
Using the Band Cycling tool
The cycle tool can be used with hyperspectral data to
view different channel and wavelength ranges in a
specified color component to create new color
composites. You can cycle two color channels in the view
pane and control the speed and range of channels that
you are cycling through.
1. With image data open, click View and then click
Visualization Tools.
2. In the Visualization Tools dialog box, click the
Cycle tab.
3. Click a Color Channel option. The color you
choose is the layer through which the hyperspectral
channels cycle.
4. Enable a range of either channels or wavelengths to
cycle using a selected color channel.
To select a range of wavelengths, there must be
associated metadata for each channel in the
hyperspectral file. (See Importing XML metadata
using the METAIN algorithm on page 83 )
5. Enter a display range in the Display range box.
PCI Geomatics
90

Geomatica® Focus
More than one channel or wavelength range can be
entered. Ranges are shown using a dash between
the beginning and end of the range; multiple ranges
are separated by a comma.
For example 1-5, 15-20, 30-35 are valid entries for
channel display ranges.
6. Select a cycle direction by enabling either the
Forward or Backward option.
If forward cycling is selected, the channel cycling
order is 1-5, 15-20, and then 30-35; if reverse
cycling is selected, the channel cycling order is
35-30, 20-15, and then 5-1.
7. Click the Start Automatic Cycle button.
The cycling continues until you click Stop
Automatic Cycle.
The number at the bottom of the Visualization Tools
dialog box represents the displayed channel. If you do
not click Apply prior to clicking Close, the dialog box
closes and the RGB layer reverts back to the original
combination. Clicking Apply updates the RGB layer to
reflect the new channel in the identified element and the
layer name is updated. The following is a list of Band
Cycling dialog box controls with details about what they
do.
Select Color Channel:
Lets you specify the color of the view channel. The
channels in the two colors that are not selected will not
change. Next to the color is the file of the channel
currently mapped to the color. If all the colors are
mapped to a channel in the same file, these labels will
not appear.
Cycle through all files:
Enable this check box when the active RGB layer
contains channels from multiple files and you want to
cycle through all the channels in all files mapped to the
RGB layer. This function is only available when the colors
of the active RGB layer are mapped to more than one
file.
Display Range:
You can specify ranges of channels to cycle through a
specified color component and you can specify either the
channel number or wavelength. The system cycles
through all available channels by default.
Speed & Actual:
Sets the channel cycle speed through the color element.
The actual speed at which the channels are being cycled
is also the speed they are displayed.
Forward & Backward:
Allows you to set the direction of cycling, either forward or
backward.
Control:
PCI Geomatics
91

Geomatica® Focus
Stop and play buttons activate the cycling. You can also
step through the channels one channel at a time. The
direction of the stepping is set by the Forward and
Backward options selections.
Current Channel:
The current channel being cycled through the identified
color element is displayed. When you presses the stop
button, the last channel cycled through is displayed.
Opening the Thumbnails viewer
You must have a file open before the Thumbnails viewer
commands are available from both the Tools menu and
the shortcut menu. A new map and area are added when
you select layers from the Thumbnails viewer.
The Thumbnails viewer works for multispectral and
hyperspectral data, but displays raster layers only. If a file
contains no channels, the Thumbnails command is not
available. You can view images across several spectral
bands in a tiled rectangular array. You can then display
the images corresponding to several or all of the bands in
the cube side by side.
The Thumbnail viewer is available from the Maps tree
and the Files tree. When you open the Thumbnail viewer
from the Files tree, thumbnails of the full extents of the
image are created for each channel. When you open the
Thumbnail viewer from the Maps tree, thumbnails of a
section of the image are created for each channel. The
section used for the thumbnail is a 256-by-256 pixel area
PCI Geomatics
centered on the cursor in the image.
In Black and White mode, you can click on an individual
image from the tiled image array. Your image is then
highlighted in white and displayed, full size, in the view
pane as a black-and-white image.
You can also work in RGB mode to select three images
from the tiled image array, which are then outlined in red,
green, or blue respectively. The corresponding composite
RGB image is displayed, full size, in the Focus window.
You then have the option of clamping and stretching the
tiled image, or each of the RBG images individually to
produce an optimal RGB image.
With the Reload button you can limit the contents of the
Thumbnails viewer to only the thumbnails that interest
you. You can create thumbnails of a feature by
magnifying the feature in the Focus view pane and then
click Reload. Focus will recreate the thumbnails using the
extents visible in the Focus view pane. You can set the
options in the Thumbnails viewer and then click Reload.
Focus will load the thumbnails according to the option
that you set. For example, you can enter specific
channels in the Display ranges box and when you click
Reload only thumbnails of those channels will appear in
the Thumbnails viewer.
1. Open a file that contains raster channels.
2. Click the layer in the Maps tree or in the Files tree.
3. From the View menu, click Thumbnails.
About the Thumbnails viewer
92

Geomatica® Focus
The following is a list of the controls in the Thumbnails
viewer:
Display Range:
Allows you to specify the channels to be viewed. The
default is all channels. You can either specify the channel
number or the wavelength. The wavelength is available
only if the metadata contains band centers.
Channel:
Allows you to control the entries in the panel. If this is
selected, then all of the entered values (display range,
color components) correspond to channel numbers in the
file.
Wavelength:
Allows you to control the entries in the panel. When
selected, all of the entered values (display range, color
components) correspond to wavelengths stored in the
metadata segment in the file. When selected, the channel
number has to be passed in order for the images to be
displayed properly.
Intensity Normalization:
When selected, the LUT applied to each thumbnail is
calculated using the histogram for that thumbnail (for
example, the first thumbnail is channel 1 and the LUT
applied to it will use the minimum and maximum from that
channel. The second thumbnail is channel 2 and the LUT
applied will use the minimum and maximum from channel
PCI Geomatics
2, and so on). If the option is disabled, the minimum and
maximum of the entire range of spectral bands in the file
are used to apply the LUT.
Grayscale:
Allows you to display a single thumbnail. This thumbnail
is highlighted by a white box. Only one thumbnail in the
viewer can be highlighted at a time. The channel number
of the selected thumbnail displays in the box next to the
Grayscale option. When the option is enabled, the Red,
Green, and Blue buttons are unavailable.
RGB:
Allows you to select three thumbnails to display in an
RGB format. This works in the same manner as the Add
Layer Wizard. If you enable the RGB option, the Red box
is active and the first thumbnail selected is assigned to
the red color component and is highlighted with a red
box. The number of the channel is displayed in the box
next to the Red button. The second thumbnail selected is
assigned to the green color component and is highlighted
with a green box. The third thumbnail selected is
assigned to the blue color component and is highlighted
with a blue box. If you want to change a thumbnail in one
of the color components, you must click the color
component and select a new thumbnail.
OK:
Adds the selected thumbnails to the Maps tree. If no Map
or Area is present, the thumbnails are added to the Map
tree list. If you have only selected one thumbnail, it is
93

Geomatica® Focus
displayed as a black-and-white layer. If you have
selected three thumbnails, the layer displays as an RGB
image layer.
View:
Allows you to view the selected thumbnails as full images
in the view pane without closing the Thumbnails viewer.
For each new selection, a new layer is added to the Maps
tree. If no Map or Area is present, the thumbnails are
added to the Map tree list. If you have selected one
thumbnail, it is displayed as a black-and-white layer. If
you have selected three thumbnails, the layer displays as
an RGB image layer.
Cancel:
Closes the panel without saving.
Help:
Opens the Help for the panel.
The Thumbnails tool bar has the following command
buttons
Zoom to Overview:
allows you to zoom to the overview of the entire tiled
image (all thumbnails).
Zoom Interactive:
lets you zoom into the tiled image.
PCI Geomatics
Zoom In and Zoom Out
zooms in to and out of the tiled image.
Thumbnail Overview:
allows you to zoom to the overview of an individual tile
within the tiled image.
Pan:
pans the tiled image.
Select Channel:
Selects a thumbnail for display. It is automatically active
when you choose either the Grayscale or RGB option.
1. In the Thumbnails viewer, click Pick BW.
2. Click a thumbnail.
3. Click OK.
Layer Selection
When you have several layers in a file, you can quickly
pick a single layer for input, output, or display with the
Layer Selection tool.
Using the Thumbnails viewer
1. In the Thumbnails viewer, type in the Display
ranges box the band or channel numbers that you
want to view to view.
94

Geomatica® Focus
2. Click Channel if the values in the Display ranges
box represent channel numbers or click
Wavelength if the values represent wavelengths
stored in the metadata segment in the file.
3. Enable the Intensity Normalization check box to
use the minimum and maximum values in the image
to calculate a histogram and apply it to the
thumbnail. When the Intensity Normalization
check box is disabled, the histogram includes the
entire range of values from all the channels.
4. Click Grayscale if you want to view the image as a
grayscale layer and click the thumbnail that you
want to view.
5. Click RGB if you want to view the image as an RGB
layer. Click in order the thumbnails that you want to
use for the red, green, and blue channels.
The thumbnail is highlighted in the color of the
corresponding channel and the channel number is
displayed in the corresponding box.
6. Click View.
Selecting grayscale and RGB layers
To change the displayed raster layer in a map:
1. In the Thumbnail viewer, right-click a layer in the
red, green, blue, or grayscale color component.
2. Click More.
3. In the Layer Selection dialog box, select a new
layer and click OK.
PCI Geomatics
To select input or output layers:
1. Select More from the Input list box.
2. In the Layer Selection dialog box, type a layer
number in the Layer number box.
3. Click Enter.
4. Click OK.
You can also select output layers by following this
procedure with the Output list box. The Layer List
displays all of the channels in the file. When you
click a layer, the layer is highlighted and the number
of the layer is identified in the Layer Number box.
The OK button accepts the layer as the new input.
Visualizing data with the 3-D data
cube
The 3-D Data Cube is an independent graphical tool that
displays a three-dimensional data model. You can work
in the view pane while the 3-D display is active. You can
work with any multi-layer data, including hyperspectral
data.
The 3-D Data Cube helps you to get a sense for the
structure of the data you are working with by allowing you
to assess the number and nature of spectra endmembers
present in a scene. Hyperspectral data often achieves
very large file sizes. You can see the spectral bands
where there is high atmospheric absorption and thus very
little signal reaching the sensor - black layers. In large
files, to facilitate faster rendering, rotation, and
excavation of the data cube, you must create a subset if
95

Geomatica® Focus
the data is not v-cube compressed data.
You can use all data bit depths, but the 3-D Data Cube is
optomized for 16-bit data. The 3-D Data Cube accepts
compressed, decompressed, and raw hyperspectral files.
Files must contain wavelength information. You can use
the cube even if only one image channel has wavelength
information.
The 3-D Data Cube can display, rotate, and excavate
three-dimensional data. The tool displays the cube in an
arbitrary orientation, with a rectangular cutout, using
parallel projection.
1. Select an image file in the Maps tree.
You can use B&W, multispectral, and hyperspectral
data.
2. From the View menu, click 3-D Data Cube.
By default, enhancements applied to data layers in
the view pane are applied the top layer in the 3-D
Data Cube.
About the 3-D data cube controls
The 3-D Data Cube viewer has a menu bar and toolbar
that are independent of the view pane. The viewer also
includes controls that let you zoom, rotate, and excavate
the cube image.
3-D Cube Menu Bar
The 3-D Cube menu bar lets you control several aspects
of the 3-D viewer and the data you are viewing.
PCI Geomatics
File:
The File menu lets you import image files, load PCT
layers, and exit the 3-D Data Cube.
Import Image:
Opens the Import Image dialog box.
Load PCT:
Opens the Select PCT Layer dialog box. (See About the
Select PCT Layer dialog box on page 98 )
Exit:
Closes the 3-D Data Cube.
Edit:
Lets you edit a PCT and change the background color of
the 3-D viewer.
Edit PCT:
Opens the PCT Editing dialog box. (See Adjusting the
pseudo-color for single values on page 241 )
Background Color:
Opens the Change Color dialog box.
View:
96

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you show or hide the image layer and the cube
sides, and allows you to zoom the image in the viewer.
Image Layer:
Shows or hides the image portion of the data cube.
Cube Sides:
Shows or hides the cube sides portion of the data cube
excavation.
Zoom To:
Opens the Zoom sub-menu.
3-D Data Cube Toolbar
The 3-D Data Cube toolbar lets you save files, edit
pseudo-color tables, zoom and pan your image, and
enable the cube rotation.
Save:
Opens the Export Image dialog box, which lets you save
the file you are viewing to a new location.
Pseudo-color Table:
Opens the PCT Editing dialog box. (See Adjusting the
pseudo-color for single values on page 241 )
Overview:
Displays an overview of the 3-D image.
Zoom Window:
Lets you zoom the image by clicking in the 3-D image in
the 3-D window.
Zoom In:
Makes the 3-D image larger.
Zoom Out:
Makes the 3-D image smaller.
Zoom 1:1:
Shows the 3-D image at 1:1 scale ratio.
Pan:
Lets you pan the 3-D image within the 3-D window.
Rotate:
Lets you rotate the 3-D image along the X, Y, and Z axis.
Cube Excavation
The Cube Excavation Area has text and slide controls
that let you view a rectangular section of the layers in the
cube. You can change the shape and the depth of the
excavation using the slide controls. When you use a
PCI Geomatics
97

Geomatica® Focus
wheel mouse, you can lock the excavation of the X, Y, or
Z plains of the cube. You can also lock all three at once
and change the view of the excavation with your wheel
mouse.
X:
Changes the horizontal axis of the cube excavation. The
X option box lets you lock the horizontal axis excavation
when you use a wheel mouse.
Y:
Changes the vertical axis of the cube excavation. The Y
option box lets you lock the vertical axis excavation when
you use a wheel mouse.
Z:
Changes the depth of the cube excavation. The Z option
box lets you lock the depth excavation when you use a
wheel mouse.
Flip Controls
The Flip controls change the orientation of the
excavation.
Flip X:
Flips the X axis from right to left.
Flip Y:
PCI Geomatics
Flips the Y axis from right to left.
Flip Z:
Flips the Z axis from top to bottom.
Using the Excavation Controls:
You can control height, width, and depth of the excavated
portion of the cube. When you use the slide control, the
image and the number above the slide control are
automatically updated. The minimum for each box is 1;
the maximum number is the number of layers in the data
set. The maximum for the X axis is the maximum number
of pixels displayed in the Focus view pane. The
maximum for Y is the maximum number of lines
displayed in the Focus view pane, and the maximum for
Z corresponds to the number of image channels in the
file. If the image is at Zoom to Overview, the maximum X
and Y are the extents of the image. Each single-digit
increment removes one pixel, line, or channel from the
display.
The excavation is determined and applied by default
when the cube is opened. The starting point of the
excavation is the lower-right corner, X max and Y max,
and the top most image layer Z min. You can flip the
excavated area a full 180-degrees in the X, Y, or Z
dimensions using the Flip buttons.
About the Select PCT Layer dialog box
The Select PCT Layer dialog box lets you choose an
alternative pseudo-color table (PCT) for the data
98

Geomatica® Focus
displayed in the 3-D Data Cube viewer.
Input:
Provides a way to locate and apply a different PCT layer.
File:
Lets you choose a file where the PCT layer is located.
Browse:
Opens a File Selector dialog box to locate files not listed
in the file box.
Layer:
Lets you choose a PCT layer from the file selected in the
File box.
Selecting colors
There are several cases where you need to create
custom colors. For example, you can choose custom
colors for vectors, points, polygon fills, training areas, and
more. In each case a color selection panel is available for
creating custom color. The color panel may differ,
depending on the task you are performing. Custom colors
are created using a combination of three basic color
palettes.
Color palettes
PCI Geomatics
Basic Colors:
This is a palette of 49 basic colors that are preset and
cannot be modified.
Color Continuum:
This is the palette of infinite colors in the middle of the
dialog box. This palette is made up of all the possible
hue/saturation combination of values.
Lightness/Intensity Scale:
This palette controls the brightness of the color you
create. When you choose the Gray color model, the
Lightness/Intensity Scale is the only available palette.
The color you create using the palettes is displayed
alongside the color that is being replaced. The numeric
representation of the new color appears in a series of
data entry fields. You can edit the entries in these fields
and the new color changes accordingly. The number of
fields present corresponds to the chosen color model.
Color models
RGB:
This is one of the Additive Color models and is based on
light emitted from a source, such as a computer monitor.
It has three primary colors: red, green, and blue. All the
colors on a screen are produced by combining these
three colors in various proportions.
99

Geomatica® Focus
CMYK:
This is one of the Subtractive Color models and is based
on light being absorbed and reflected by paint and ink.
This model is often used when printing. The primary
colors are cyan, magenta, yellow, and key (black).
HLS/IHS:
This is a more intuitive model based on the way we
perceive color. The primary components are hue,
lightness or intensity, and saturation.
Gray:
This is a continuum of gray values. The gray scale
ranges from pure black to pure white.
To select a basic color value
1. In the Basic Colors palette, click a tile.
The Red, Green, and Blue values change to match
the selected color. In addition, the color appears in
the New box and the slider control changes position
to show the value for the lightness and intensity of
the new color.
To obtain a more precise color in terms of shade
and strength
1. In the Color Continuum, click a value.
PCI Geomatics
To control the brightness of the color
1. Click the slide control and move the arrow up or
down to increase or decrease the lightness and
intensity of the color.
To control color values at the pixel level in the
RGB model
1. Click the arrows for the Red component.
This increases or decreases the numeric value of
the red pixels.
2. Click the arrows for the Green component.
This increases or decreases the numeric value of
the green pixels.
3. Click the arrows for the Blue component.
This increases or decreases the numeric value of
the blue pixels.
To change the color model
1. Click the Model arrow and choose one of the
following:
• RGB: changes to a red, green, and blue color
model
• CMYK: changes to a cyan, magenta, yellow,
and black color model
• HLS/IHS: changes to a 3-D color model
• Gray: changes to a grayscale model
100

Geomatica® Focus
2. Click OK.
Setting options and preferences
You can customize how Focus handles certain features
and how it uses your system resources with the Options
dialog box opened from the Tools menu. The Options
dialog box is divided into two parts. On the left is a list of
options. When you select an option, the right side of the
dialog box changes to give you access to the preferences
for that option. The Options dialog box lets you customize
the following features:
Table 6.
Option
Layer Manager
OpenGL settings
Setting shape and color
preferences
Setting up a digitizing
tablet using Wintab
Setting up a GPS receiver
Measurement tools
Controls
Visible column options
3-D Data Cube
preferences
View pane selection
preferences
Tablet setup
Receiver setup
Units and report
preferences
Option
General interface
Warnings
Layers
Default representation
Vector editing
Memory cache
Overview window
Zoom window
PCI Geomatics
Controls
Cursor and menu
preferences
Interface warning
preferences
Zoom and raster
preferences
Default data-type
representations
Vector editing tolerances
Undo, tiling, total, and
vector caching
Rasters, vectors, and
colors
X and Y sizes, tools, and
status bars
General interface
The General interface option includes a Warnings
preferences sub-category. General interface options
include:
Render white tiles
Delays the rendering of the image when you pan until you
release the pointer. When Render white tiles is enabled,
previously unviewed sections of the image appear white
as you pan until you release the mouse button. When
Render white tiles is disabled, you can pan with
continuous rendering of the image, which can result in
decrease in performance depending on the size of the
image.
Reload previous project on startup
101

Geomatica® Focus
Reloads the previous project on start-up.
Show
Shows and hides tabs, message bars, the overview
window, the legend in the Maps tab, and ToolTips.
Cursor
Customizes the shape, size, and color of the cursor. You
can choose from none, cross, empty cross, target,
bracket target, and dot cursors.
Warnings
The Warnings option allows you to disable common
warning messages. By default, all warning messages are
enabled. To deactivate a particular warning message,
disable the check box next to it.
You can choose from the following Warning
messages:
Attempting to view data with METER projection:
This message appears each time you open a layer if
Focus which has METER projection assigned. Some file
formats do not save projection information but do have
bounding coordinates. Such layers are assigned a
METER projection by default. This warning message can
be useful for remembering to assign the appropriate
projection to the data.
PCI Geomatics
Attempting to view data that has to be reprojected:
This message appears when you try to add data to a
project that is not the same projection as the active map.
When you do this the new data is reprojected to the
active Map projection. This warning message can remind
you that the project has not been saved in the same
projection.
Creating a new area in order to view data that can#t
be reprojected:
This warning message appears when data that cannot be
reprojected is added to an active Map that already has an
assigned projection. Data that cannot be reprojected
includes layers or files that have METER or PIXEL
georeferencing assigned to them. In this case, a New
Area is created for the layer.
Modifying a layer's representation if it may affect
other layers:
This warning message appears when a representation
that is linked to more than one layer is edited. By editing
the representation style of one layer that is linked to an
RST, the representation style of another layer that is also
linked to the same RST may be changed if the same
REPCODE is used by both layers. This warning message
can let you know that the representation changes being
made to one layer may also affect another layer.
Required input is missing in the Layer Manager:
This warning message appears when information for a
102

Geomatica® Focus
particular Layer Manager operation is missing and the
system cannot carry out the operation you have
requested.
Fully within spatial operator not available for
thematic rasters:
This warning message appears as a reminder that you
are attempting to use the Fully Within tool on a thematic
raster.
Layers
The Layers option allows you to specify various
preferences for opening and displaying layers in Focus.
For example, you can change the zoom level when
adding a new layer to a project. This is controlled by the
When Loading menu. The following zoom levels are
available:
Zoom to Overview
Displays an overview of the map each time a new layer is
opened.
Zoom to Full Extents of Layer
Displays the full extents of the newly opened layer.
Don't Change the Zoom
The current zoom level is maintained when a new layer is
opened.
PCI Geomatics
When a new raster layer is opened, you can have a 1:1
zoom level applied by default. This is specified by
enabling the Load Rasters at 1:1 resolution check box. If
you open several rasters at the same time, the default
enhancement may be unsatisfactory for all rasters. If you
intend to regularly open several rasters at the same time,
it may be advisable to clear the Load Rasters at 1:1
resolution check box.
There are two menus in the Rasters area that specify the
display properties of rasters when they are opened into
Focus: the Default resampling method and Default visual
enhancement.
The Default resampling method specifies how the raster
will be resampled for viewing when at greater than 1:1
resolution. The resampling options are Nearest
neighbour, Bilinear interpolation, and Cubic convolution.
The Default visual enhancement menu specifies the
default visual enhancement that will be applied to a newly
opened raster. The default visual enhancements offered
are None, Linear, Root, Adaptive, Equalization, and
Infrequency.
The Default overview area contains a menu that allows
you to specify the preferred overview generation method.
The overview generation methods offered are Nearest
neighbour, Block average and Block mode.
Default representation
The Default representation option consists of a Data
Type area and a Preview pane. You can change the
103

Geomatica® Focus
default point, line, and polygon representations for vector
layers.
When you open a vector layer, the default representation
set in the Options dialog box is applied to the layer. This
default remains a property of the layer while the layer is
open.
Changing the default representation in the Options dialog
box does not affect the vector layers that are currently
opened in the viewer. Changes to the settings in the
Options dialog box affect only those layers that are
subsequently opened.
Changes to the default representation for vector layers
currently open in the viewer are made in the Default
representation area of the Vector Layer Properties dialog
box. You can also change the default point, line, and
polygon representations for your vector layers, just like
the Data Type area. The changes are applicable to the
current session only. When you open the layers in a new
session, the default representation set up in the Vector
Layer Properties dialog box is lost and replaced with the
settings in the Options dialog box.
To make your settings permanent, set the default
representation in the Options dialog box; also, set up the
default representation before you open any vector layers.
Vector editing
The controls in this option are used for creating and
editing vectors. The Vector editing option sets the units
PCI Geomatics
and tolerances for Search, Snap, and Weed vertices
tolerances in either pixels, meters, or feet. By default, the
tolerances are measured in pixels. This option also sets
the snap feature for digitizing operations.
Snap Tolerance:
The snap operation is only used on a line or at the start of
an area edit function. When the choice is to snap a line or
area start to a vertex or a line, the snap tolerance is used
to limit the lines or vertices that are available to snap to,
given the cursor's current position.
Snap Automatically:
Is only used in a line or at the start of an area edit
function. The snap default dictates whether a line or an
area is started or ended with a snap when you want to
start or end the line, or begin the area while still within the
distance specified by the Snap Tolerance.
Search Tolerance:
Limits the cursor search for a vector feature to select.
Weed Vertices Tolerance:
Is used when digitizing line and area data. The value of
the weed vertices tolerance specifies the minimum
distance between the last vertex digitized and the current
pointer position within which another vertex can be
digitized.
104

Geomatica® Focus
To set the snap tolerance
1. Type a value in the Snap tolerance box.
2. Choose a measurement unit from the Snap
tolerance list box.
The default unit is pixels.
To activate the snap operation
1. Enable the Snap check box.
When digitizing, you can still activate or deactivate
the snap operation by holding the Alt key while
starting or ending a line or starting an area.
To set the tolerance for a vector search
1. Type a value in the Search tolerance box.
2. Choose a measurement unit from the Search
tolerance list box.
The the default unit is pixels. Clicking the cursor
within this tolerance of a feature selects it. Clicking
within this tolerance of a vertex or node that is on a
previously selected line highlights the vertex or
node.
To set the tolerance for weed vertices
1. Type a value in the Weed vertices tolerance box.
2. Choose a measurement unit from the Weed
vertices tolerance list box.
The default unit is pixels.
Memory cache
The Memory cache preferences let you configure system
memory for various memory cache options. You can
adjust for Undo/Redo, Tiling, Total limit, and Vector read
cache.
The memory cache panel provides a way to limit system
memory usage for the current application. The total limit
is the maximum amount of memory caching available on
your system.
Undo/Redo:
The Undo/Redo box lets you specify, in kilobytes (1024
KB = 1 MB), the amount of memory up to 25 MBs
available for undo and redo steps. (See Optimizing the
Undo/Redo options on page 106 )
Clear Undo/Redo cache:
Clears all cached undo and redo operations from your
system.
Tiling:
Lets you specify, in kilobytes, the amount of memory
available for raw image inputs and display caching
output. (See Optimizing the tiling cache on page 106 )
PCI Geomatics
105

Geomatica® Focus
Clear tiling cache:
Clears all cached tiling operations from your system
cache.
Total limit:
Lets you specify, in kilobytes, the limit of memory
allocation. When zero is entered, the system uses all of
the available system memory as the memory cache limit.
(See Setting the total cache limit on page 107 )
Default memory usage:
Re-sets the total limit of cache to the default level. The
default memory usage is one-half of the system memory.
For example, if a system has total memory of 500 MB,
the default memory usage command sets the cache to
250 MB.
Vector read cache:
Lets you enter a value for the number of lines, polygons,
and points that can be cached by the system. The vector
read cache is independent of values set in the Total limit
box. (See Setting the vector read cache on page 107 )
Default read cache:
Re-sets the default number to 4,000 cached shapes.
Optimizing the Undo/Redo options
PCI Geomatics
You can control how much memory Focus allocates to
undo and redo operations. For example, when you are
burning a shape within a raster image, the old state of the
application is kept in memory. The size of the bounding
box of the new shape, in pixels and lines for raster data
types, and the number of input channels are all stored
temporarily as an undo/redo step. This can use a lot of
system memory. The number of undo steps cannot be
computed based on the size of the undo/redo cache.
Each undo step requires varying amounts of memory.
The Undo/Redo box lets you enter a value in kilobytes.
This setting is affected by the total limit setting which is
composed of both undo/redo and tiling settings. Adjusting
the undo/redo setting lets you make sure that the total
limit is divided, based on the way you work, between
undo/redo and tiling.
Optimizing the tiling cache
The larger the data set, the more memory a system
needs to function effectively. For example, an 8-bit image
measuring 512 pixels x 512 lines requires 1 byte for each
pixel, or 1 MB of information for each 8-bit raster layer.
With very large files, you can experience memory deficits
requiring more memory to display requested data. If the
tiling cache is set too low, a system will swap data
because it is designed to de-allocate and then re-allocate
memory to stay within the limits of your data.
The tiling cache changes the way you can render an
image in the view pane. When you work with very large
images, you can increase the memory allocated to tiling,
which has a direct impact on rendering. By increasing the
106

Geomatica® Focus
size of the tiling cache, you increase the speed of image
rendering.
Setting the total cache limit
The total cache limit is the sum of the undo/redo and the
tiling cache. If both are set to zero, the limit becomes the
total limit for the sum of the two. You can specify, in
kilobytes (1024 KB = 1 MB), the limit of memory
allocation. When zero is entered, the system allocates
1/3 of the RAM installed on the system as the total limit of
memory cache.
Setting the vector read cache
The vector read cache increases performance with very
large data sets. This is a GDB vector cache and is
independent of the value set in the Total limit box. When
you increase the vector-read cache value, the system
does not need to access the data from the shapes saved
in the data files on your hard disk. The result is an
improvement in overall system performance.
Overview window
The Overview window option allows you to set the display
properties of the overview window. For more information
on the overview window, see Zooming using the
Overview window on page 79 .
In the Show area there are check boxes for both Raster
and Vector. These control which type of data will be
displayed in the overview window. A check mark
PCI Geomatics
indicates that the data type will be shown in the overview
window.
The View box color list box controls the color of the view
box in the overview window. The View box color list box
contains a color palette with 49 available colors.
Additional colors are available by clicking More.
Zoom window
The Zoom Window option allows you to set the display
properties of the zoom window.
The default size of the zoom window that is launched is
controlled by the Default X-size and Default Y-size spin
boxes. These sizes can be adjusted by using the arrow
keys in the Default X-size and Default Y-size spin boxes.
Alternatively, you can type a desired default size directly
into the boxes.
If the Keep equal check box is enabled, the value of the
X-size and Y-size of the zoom window will be the same.
The Icon toolbar check box controls the Icon toolbar in
the zoom window. If enabled, the Icon toolbar displays at
the top of the zoom window.
The Show status bar check box controls the status bar in
the zoom window. If enabled, the status bar displays at
the bottom of the zoom window.
Layer Manager
107

Geomatica® Focus
The Layer Manager option allows you to specify the fields
appearing in the Layer Manager. By default, all of the
columns in the Layer Manager display. You can remove
fields in the Layer Manager display by disabling the
appropriate check box. (See Using the Layer Manager on
page 31 )
Open GL settings
The Open GL settings has preferences for setting the
maximum texture size of the 3-D Data Cube. The system
can determine the maximum texture size or you can set
the maximum texture size manually.
Setting shape and color preferences
The selection preference option lets you change the
default condition of selected points, lines, polygons, text,
and rasters. To set selection options, click the + next to
the Selection option. When you choose Selection in the
option list, there are two initial options.
Consider interior of polygon:
Lets you select a polygon by clicking inside the polygon
boundaries, even if it is not a closed figure.
Select only if fully contained:
Lets you select a polygon by clicking inside the polygon
boundaries only if the polygon is a closed figure.
PCI Geomatics
Points:
Allows you to change how selected points associated
with a layer appear. The color option allows you to
change the highlight color of selected points. The Width
option is used to specify the width of the outline that
appears around the points. The default value is 1.
1. With several points selected, choose a color from
the Color palette.
2. Enter a value that represents the width of the outline
that appears around the points from the Width spin
box.
3. Click Apply.
Lines:
Allows you to change the color and width of a selected
line associated with a layer.
The Width option is used to specify the width of the line
used to highlight one or more selected lines. The default
value of the highlight width is 1.
Modifying a selected line
1. Choose a color from the Color palette.
To select a color other than those displayed in the
color blocks, click More and create a new color.
2. Enter a value that represents the width of a line in
the Width spin box.
3. Click Apply.
108

Geomatica® Focus
Polygons:
Allows you to change the outline and fill of a selected
polygon.
Opacity refers to the degree of opaqueness. A value of
100%, means that you cannot see another object through
the fill color. An opacity value of 0% means you can see
through the fill color completely.
Modifying a selected polygon
1. In the Outline area, choose a color from the Color
palette.
To select a color other than those displayed in the
color blocks, click More and create a new color.
2. Enter a value that represents the width of the
polygon outline in the Width spin box.
3. In the Fill area, choose a color from the Color
palette.
To select a color other than those displayed in the
color blocks, click More and create a new color.
4. Enter a value that represents the percentage of the
fill opacity in the Opacity spin box.
5. Click Apply.
Texts:
There are three Texts preference options.
PCI Geomatics
The Color option allows you to the change the insertion
point and highlighted text color.
The Highlight insertion point option allows you to see
where text associated with a layer is inserted.
The Highlight text option allows you to highlight the
selected text.
Applying preferences to selected text
1. Choose a color from the Color palette.
To select a color other than those displayed in the
color blocks, click More and create a new color.
If you want to highlight the text insertion point,
enable the Highlight insertion point check box.
If you want to highlight the selected text, enable the
Highlight text check box.
2. Click Apply.
Changing the style for hatches
You can change the style, color, and size of raster
hatches.
• Choose a hatches style from the Hatches palette.
To select a style other than those displayed in the
hatches blocks, click More and choose a new
symbol.
109

Geomatica® Focus
Changing the raster color
• Choose a color from the Color palette.
To select a color other than those displayed in the
color blocks, click More and create a new color.
Changing the raster size
• Enter a value that represents the raster size in the
Size spin box.
Setting up a digitizing tablet using
Wintab
You can connect a digitizing tablet to your system and
use it with Focus. The Digitizing Tablet option lets you set
up a digitizing tablet.
Before using a digitizing tablet, you must connect it to the
computer and set up the software to communicate with
the tablet. Focus supports Wintab and provides several
other tablet drivers.
1. Ensure the digitizing tablet is connected according
to the manufacturer instructions.
2. From the Tools menu, click Options.
PCI Geomatics
3. Select Digitizing Tablet.
4. Enable the Wintab device option.
If your device is Wintab enabled, The Wintab
device option is enabled by default, and the Device
setup area is populated with the Wintab settings.
5. Enter the values of components by reading them
from Wintab.
6. Click Test Connection.
The Digitizing Tablet Connection Testing dialog
box opens. See Testing the digitizing tablet
connection on page 111
Setting up a digitizing tablet using a driver
1. Ensure the digitizing tablet hardware is connected
according to the manufacturer instructions.
2. From the Tools menu, click Options.
3. Select Digitizing Tablet.
By default, the Generic device option is selected,
and the Wintab device option is unavailable. The
Device setup area is populated with default
settings.
4. Choose a hardware communication port from the
Device list box.
5. Choose a driver that matches your device from the
Tablet list box. Note that the SummaSketch III
digitizer is no longer supported, however, the ASCII
BCD report format is supported.
6. In the Communication settings area, choose a
baud-rate, data-bit, parity, and stop-bit value from
the appropriate list boxes, according to the digitizing
110

Geomatica® Focus
tablet manufacturer specifications.
7. Click Test Connection. See Testing the digitizing
tablet connection on page 111
The setup is successful if a device string appears in
the Device String box in the Digitizing Tablet
Connection Testing dialog box. If no device string
displays, click OK to reset the device setup and
communication settings.
Testing the digitizing tablet connection
The Digitizing Tablet Connection Testing dialog box
shows information to help you determine if the computer
is properly communicating with the tablet and to help PCI
Support diagnose digitizer problems.
When the dialog box is opened, all of the boxes are
blank. When you click the digitizer puck, these boxes are
populated with device string information. The device
string is not visible when using Wintab.
Assigning text actions and modifiers
When you have successfully connected the digitizing
tablet, you can assign actions to the puck buttons on your
digitizer. In the Puck button assignment area, the first
four buttons have the following default assignments:
Table 7.
Button Action Modifier
1 Mouse Click None
PCI Geomatics
2 Enter None
3 Escape None
4 Delete None
1. Enter a puck button number in the Button spin box.
If an action is already associated with this button,
you can update both the Action and the Modifier
list boxes. The Action and Modifier list boxes are
set to None when neither an action nor a modifier
are associated with a button number.
2. Choose an action from the Action list box.
3. Choose a modifier from the Modifier list box.
4. Click Apply.
Setting up a GPS receiver
The GPS receiver option lets you set up a GPS receiver
to use with Focus. You can set up the serial port
connections and parameters to connect a compatible
GPS receiver. Only GPS receivers that support the
NMEA protocol are supported. Most GPS receivers
support this protocol, which allows devices from different
vendors to communicate over a serial connection in a
marine setting. NMEA is used across the GPS industry.
The supported formats in the setup panel are based on
common data output formats. For example, the
NMEA-0183 (ASCII) format. Focus reads only the X, Y,
and Z coordinates from the NMEA format. Coordinates
supplied by the NMEA format are latitude and longitude,
using a WGS84 ellipse.
Before setting up a GPS receiver, make sure a GPS
111

Geomatica® Focus
device is connected to a serial port on your computer.
Device settings:
The GPS receiver options are specifically related to
setting up the GPS that you are using. The Device box
specifies the port where you have attached your GPS. By
default, this option is set to COM1. See the information
provided with your GPS unit about which port to use.
1. Enter the connection port that will be used in the
Device box.
2. Choose a baud rate, data bit, parity, and stop bit
from the appropriate list boxes in the
Communication settings area.
You can change values back to the default values
by clicking Restore defaults.
3. Enter a value that represents how frequently the
points should be captured from the GPS, from four
to 300 seconds, in the Capture every spin box.
4. Click Test connection.
The GPS connection is automatically tested in the
GPS Connection Testing dialog box.
Testing the GPS connection
The GPS Connection Testing dialog box opens when you
click Test connection. You can determine if the
connection to your GPS has been made correctly. The
connection is tested automatically each time you click the
Test Connection command button in the GPS receiver
pane. You can also manually test the connection by
clicking the Try Again button at the bottom of the GPS
PCI Geomatics
Connection Testing pane.
If the GPS connection is successful, the Device String
box displays the current geographic coordinates from the
receiver. The Location area shows the elevation as long
as the GPS can display elevation.
If the GPS connection is unsuccessful, an error message
is generated. If an incorrect device (for example, a
digitizing table) has been connected, the panel will show
a device string. The location information will not be
displayed.
If you want to manually re-test the connection, click Try
Again.
Measurement tools
You can set the behaviour of the Measurement tools in
the view pane. Linear, Area, and Angle options are
available. To read the measurements from the view pane,
enable the Generate Report to Window check box. See
Reading the Measure tool report on page 208
Changing display options
When you print a map, it is identical to the map on your
computer screen by default. There may be times when
you do not want your printed work to look exactly like
your screen. The display Options panel lets you turn off
the default WYSIWYG feature. There are several reasons
for disabling the WYSIWYG feature. For example, your
software performance may improve when WYSYWYG is
112

Geomatica® Focus
turned off and the view pane appears less cluttered. (See
About the Display Options dialog box on page 113 )
About the Display Options dialog box
The Display Options dialog box lets you turn off the
default WYSIWYG feature. It also provides WYSIWYG
options for width/fill, pattern, text, and zoom scaling.
WYSYWYG Options:
Allows you to switch the WYSYWYG feature on or off, or
to choose from a set of custom WYSYWYG options.
On:
Enables WYSYWYG for map publishing.
Off:
Disables WYSYWYG for map publishing.
Custom:
Enables the width/fill, pattern, and text options.
Width Fill:
Displays the map with WYSIWYG line weights and
polygons filled.
Pattern:
PCI Geomatics
Displays the map with all the patterns visible. For
example, a pattern can be a broken line or other symbol,
such as sand, transmission lines, or forest.
Text:
Displays the map with its text attributes applied (for
example, font, height, and so on).
Scale representation when zooming:
Changes the vector display size relative to the zoom
level. When you zoom in, symbols get bigger and lines
get wider.
Customizing the Focus toolbars
You can customize the Focus toolbars to show or hide
specific tool groups from the Toolbar Configuration dialog
box.
1. From the View menu, click Toolbars and then click
Customize.
2. Click in the Visible column next to a toolbar to show
or hide it.
A check mark indicates that the toolbar is available.
3. Click OK.
About the Toolbar Configuration dialog box
The Toolbar Configuration dialog box contains a table
with a list of toolbar options. You can select the tool
groups you want to see from the table.
113

Geomatica® Focus
Toolbar:
Lists the available toolbars.
Visible:
Shows the option box for the toolbar listed in the Toolbar
column. A check mark indicates that the toolbar is
available.
PCI Geomatics
114

Geomatica® Focus
Chapter 3
Supported layer types
Generic Database (GDB) technology is available in
Focus. You can work with dozens of file formats and
convert them to PCIDSK. The following section outlines
technical information for layers supported by GDB in
Focus.
Focus and raster layers
In Focus, a GDB can have any number of raster image
layers. Also referred to as channels or bands, a raster
layer consists of a rectangular grid or array of pixels.
Each pixel has associated digital numbers indicating its
display brightness. Digital values can also represent
attributes other than radiometry.
A thematic raster layer can have a set of values,
representing a crop type or a forest type, corresponding
to the ground truth for a scene or image. Raster layers
can also contain values for continuous fields of data
relating to temperature, proximity to fire stations, or
probability of erosion. You can assign raster layer values
manually, automatically, or from the metadata associated
with the raster layer.
In Focus, all raster layers have a data type and must
PCI Geomatics
have the same width, measured in pixels, and height,
measured in lines. Layers are presumed to correspond to
the same real-world region.
Focus supports four raster data types:
• 8-bit unsigned (8U): Each pixel is stored as one
byte of data, and can have an integer value from 0
to 255.
• 16-bit signed (16S): Each pixel is stored in two
bytes of data, and can have an integer value from
-32768 to 32737.
• 16-bit unsigned (16U): Each pixel is stored as two
bytes of data, and can have an integer value from 0
to 65535.
• 32-bit real (32R): Each pixel is stored as four bytes
of data, and can have an IEEE floating point value
between -1.2 x 1038 and 3.4 x 1038.
Focus can also use bitmaps as 1-bit raster layers. When
bitmaps are used as graphic masks, they are stored as
separate layers.
File formats supported by GDB are mapped to one of the
four data types they most closely resemble. In some
cases, mapping leads to loss of precision. For example, a
file format that supports double precision (64-bit) floating
point values is mapped to 32R with a corresponding loss
of precision. A data type with 4-bit integers in TIFF files,
are mapped to 8-bit unsigned format with no loss of
precision.
Raster layers are automatically numbered starting at 1. A
24-bit TIFF file is represented as a three-channel raster
containing the following assigned channels:
115

Geomatica® Focus
• channel 1 - red
• channel 2 - green
• channel 3 - blue
Raster pixels are addressed as pixel and line locations in
the pixel array. The top-left corner is addressed (1,1) and
appears at offset (0,0) from the origin. Pixel values
increase to the right, along the X axis, and line values
increase downwards along the Y axis.
Some calculations require operations at a finer level.
Pixel values are divided to allow for more data. For
example, the upper-left corner of the upper-left pixel is at
0.0 and 0.0, and the lower-right corner of the upper-left
pixel is at 1.0 and 1.0. The centre of the upper-left pixel is
at 0.5 and 0.5. The centre of the lower-right pixel of a
1000 x 1000 image is at 999.5 and 999.5.
Metadata
Focus uses the following metadata tags for raster layers:
• DEFAULT_PCT_REF - Reference to the
pseudo-color table (PCT) segment for displaying an
image in pseudo-color mode. This entry defaults the
image to pseudo-color display mode.
• DEFAULT_LUT_REF - Reference to a look-up table
(LUT) segment for a default enhancement when
displaying an image.
• SCALING_MIN - Default value to use as a minimum
for scaling an image channel to 8-bit for display
purposes.
• SCALING_MAX - Default value for maximum
scaling in an image channel to 8-bit for display
purposes.
PCI Geomatics
• NO_DATA_VALUE - Image value indicating no data
is available.
• ELEVATION_UNITS - May be UNKNOWN (implicit
default), FEET, or METRES. Primarily intended for
use with elevation channels and should be
UNKNOWN for non-elevation data.
• Class_n_Name - Short name for a theme class in a
raster with #n# being the class number. Should be
less than 9 characters.
• Class_n_Desc - Longer description for a class in a
raster.
• Class_n_Color - Color for displaying a particular
theme class. Value is the color encoding using the
RGB (rrr ggg bbb) convention as seen in the
PCLColor class.
• ACQUISITION_DATE - Date and time an image
was acquired. The format of date is YYYY/MM/DD
HH:MM:SS.
Segment organization
PCIDSK is a data structure for holding digital images and
related data, such as LUTs, spectral signatures, ground
control points, and other data types. Each PCIDSK
database is a separately named disk file. You can have
any number of PCIDSK files, limited only by the disk
capacity of the computer. PCIDSK files can be shared
with users on different computer platforms.
Segments are the parts of a PCIDSK database which
hold data related to the imagery in the database. Unlike
image channels, disk space is not allocated for segments
at the time the database is created; rather, disk space is
dynamically allocated whenever a segment-generating
program is executed. A database can store up to 1024
116

Geomatica® Focus
segments, provided you have enough disk space. Twelve
kinds of information are stored as segments, namely:
Bitmaps [Type 101:BIT]
Bitmap segments are pseudo-images. They have the
same pixel and line dimensions as the image data on the
PCIDSK file; however, each pixel of a bitmap is only 1-bit
deep. In other words, the gray value of a bitmap pixel can
be either zero (pixel not #on#) or 1 (pixel #on#). For
viewing purposes, bitmaps are opened to video in graphic
(or bitmap) planes. Bitmap pixels with a value of 1 are
visible (they take on the color of the graphic plane).
Bitmaps are used most commonly for delineating masks
or training areas.
Vectors [Type 116:VEC]
Vector segments hold lists of (X,Y,Z) vertices, which
define point and line structures representing river
networks, political divisions, and so on. These segments
also contain attribute information in a number of different
formats and projection information.
Signatures [Type 121:SIG]
Signature segments hold statistical data that describe the
spectral behaviour of a particular image feature (object).
Signature segments are used as input during minimum
distance, parallelepiped, and maximum likelihood
classification.
Text [Type 140:TEX]
PCI Geomatics
Text segments hold attribute data (some quality, such as
land use, or quantity, such as temperature) linked to the
gray levels of a particular image channel or free-form text
(legend information used during map generation or
commands to implement an analysis model). Other
specifically formatted text segments include an AVHRR
segment containing calibration and orbital data, including:
• Satellite ID (name), orbit ID, year, day of year.
• Spatial extent information.
• A single GCP corresponding to the exact center of
the middle pixel from the first line of the output
image.
• Orbital element/ephemeras data: epoch, inclination,
right ascension, argument of perigee, eccentricity,
mean motion, mean anomaly.
• Ascending/descending orbit flag.
• Platinum resistance temperatures.
• Internal target values for channels 3,4,5.
• Gray level of space values for channels 3,4,5.
• Up to 5 LUTs used to compress 10-bit data to 8-bit.
If a particular output channel is not 8-bit, no LUT for
that channel will be created. These LUTs are used
by the program named SST.
Georeferencing [Type 150:GEO]
Georeferencing segments hold mathematical transforms
that map all pixel locations in the database image to a
georeferenced coordinate system (such as UTM).
Orbit [Type 160:Orbit]
Orbit segments hold satellite ephemeras data, used in
the orthorectification process. This information is read
117

Geomatica® Focus
from the original data source, or from a text file.
Look-up Table [Type 170:LUT]
LUT segments hold numerical tables that map image
gray levels to new gray levels.
Pseudo-Colour Table [Type 171:PCT]
Pseudo-colour segments hold numerical tables which
map image DN values to a specific color. Colors are
defined by an intensity value (between 0 and 255) for
each of a red, green, and blue component.
Binary [Type 180:BIN]
Binary segments are created and used by PACE
programs. These contain internal-only information, such
as orthorectification models and neural networks.
Array [Type 181:ARR]
Array segments hold an array of numbers. They are
created and used by PACE programs. They contain
information such as SAR-gain offsets and gain-scaling
tables.
System [Type 182:SYS]
The system segment is used to hold binary information
that you should not normally access directly. System
segments are not displayed by utility programs and are
used to hold information such as metadata, overviews,
and tiled-image data.
PCI Geomatics
Ground Control Points [Type 214:GCP]
GCP segments hold pairs of (X,Y) coordinate positions
that locate a point in an image and some other frame of
reference (either a vector segment, a map, another
image, or keyboard input of coordinates) for purposes of
image correction, registration, and mosaicking.
Each segment has a numeric-type code. For example,
GCP segments are type 214. This numeric code helps
you locate a particular segment in a database. When
listing segments with the program ASL, you can create a
listing by segment type. If you do not know the numeric
code for a particular segment type, consult the list above
or use:
AST
Database Segment Type Codes
Pseudo-color Tables
A PCT segment contains an array of 256 colors and
assigns color values to 8-bit images. A PCT always
contains exactly 256 entries. File formats, such as TIFF,
which may have color tables with less than 256 colors,
assigns a value of zero to unused colors. There is no
support for alpha channels in the table.
Look-up Tables
The LUT segment consists of 256 8-bit values, between 0
and 255. It is used to apply enhancements to raster data.
It can also be used to encode thematic class mapping.
118

Geomatica® Focus
Ground Control Points
GCP segments contain up to 256 GCPs, which are used
to associate projection coordinates with locations on an
uncorrected raw image.
GCPs can also be used to relate locations in any two
georeferencing systems: in raw image coordinates and in
a georeferencing projection system. The definitions of the
georeferencing systems are kept as 16-character map
unit strings.
Projection parameters are not stored. Only projections
that are fully defined by the map unit string can be used;
for example, UTM, Long/Lat, or METRE. Complex
projections, such as Transverse Mercator, cannot be
used.
Each control point can have an elevation associated with
the location in an image. An elevation unit string is kept
for each system with values in meters or feet.
GCPs have the following associated values:
Id:
Unique numeric control point identifier.
System 1 X:
The X coordinate in the first georeferencing system and
is a pixel located in the image.
System 1 Y:
PCI Geomatics
The Y coordinate in the first georeferencing system and
is a line location in the image.
System 1 Elevation:
The elevation of the location in the first georeferencing
system. This has a zero value and is ignored by
applications.
System 2 X:
The X coordinate in the second georeferencing system
and is a location described in projection coordinates.
System 2 Y:
The Y coordinate in the second georeferencing system
and is a location described in projection coordinates.
System 2 Elevation:
The elevation in the second georeferencing system. This
has a zero value when it is not used.
Bitmap (BIT):
A bitmap segment is a raster layer where pixels have a
value of 0 or 1. Bitmap segments are typically used to
mask images when creating training areas in
classification.
Bitmaps are raster grids, similar to image layers, and
must have the same number of pixels and lines as other
raster layers in the database. The georeferencing
119

Geomatica® Focus
associated with the raster layers is assumed to apply to
bitmap layers.
Vector (VEC)
Vector layers or segments hold a set of related vectors
and can be points, polylines (arcs), whole polygons,
topological polygons, or additional database records.
Vector objects in Focus are called shapes. A shape has a
unique numeric identifier (ShapeId) greater than or equal
to zero. A ShapeId is assigned chronologically beginning
at zero.
Each shape has an associated record of attributes stored
in the layer as part of the shape. Each shape has a list of
vertices recorded in double precision IEEE floating point
numbers and has an X, Y, and Z value. Vertices are
coordinates in the vector georeferencing system.
Topological layers
Focus lets you work with the layer attributes for several
topological file formats. The following information shows
the required attributes for different formats:
Arc layers
Arc layers must contain the following attributes:
StartNodeId:
Contains the GDBShapeId of the starting node.
PCI Geomatics
EndNodeId:
Contains the GDBShapeId of the ending node for this
arc.
LeftAreaId:
Contains the GDBShapeId of the left area polygon, or
GDBNullShapeId if there is no area.
RightAreaId:
Contains the GDBShapeId of the right area polygon, or
GDBNullShapeId if there isn#t such an area.
Node layers:
Node layers must contain the following attribute:
ArcIdList:
(GDBFieldTypeCountedInt) List of arc ShapeIds starting
or ending at this node.
Each node should also have one vertex defining the
position of the node. A node layer must have ARC_REF
and AREA_REF metadata pointing to the related arc and
area layers. It must also have a LAYER_TYPE of
TOPO_NODES indicator in metadata.
Area layers
Area layers must contain the following attribute:
120

Geomatica® Focus
ArcIdList:
(GDBFieldTypeCountedInt) List of arc ShapeIds forming
the border of this area in clockwise order. Each ring is
separated by a GDBNullShapeId entry in the ArcIdList.
A topological area shape should have either zero or one
vertex. If it has one, it will be presumed to be an internal
label point for the area. An area layer must have
NODE_REF and ARC_REF metadata pointing to the
related node and arc layers. It must also have a
LAYER_TYPE of TOPO_AREAS indicator in metadata.
Representation Style Tables (RST)
The Representation Style Table (RST) is used to
describe and store the graphical attributes of a vector
layer.
Each element is assigned an integer value called a
representation code or RepCode. The representation
consists of a series of parts describing a drawing method
for a shape.
Each part has the following information:
Priority:
Used to indicate how vector drawing components are
layered. Higher priority layers are drawn over lower
priorities. This applies to different parts in a
representation. It also applies to different shapes in a
layer, and sometimes between vector layers in a view.
PCI Geomatics
GeoGateway has the following drawing elements:
• Simple-line
• Dash-line
• Spaced-symbol
• Simple-point
• Point-symbol
• Vector-text
• Solid-polygon
• Patterned-fill
• Transparent-polygon
Parameters:
Each element has a set of parameters affecting the
display. For example, the parameters of the Simple-line
element are width and color.
Importing, linking, and translating
data
Although GDB operates behind Focus, there are times
when you need to work with more than one file format.
The import, link, and translate utilities expand your ability
to read, view, and process distribution formats, and read,
edit, and write exchange formats. Use these utilities when
you need to import different file formats to a PCIDSK file,
link files, translate data across different formats, transfer
layers, import ASCII files into your project, or export your
project as an XML file.
With some geospatial file formats, the size and
configuration of the data may cause slow-downs when
operations and algorithms are applied to the data. Focus
121

Geomatica® Focus
is optimized to use the PCIDSK format. Focus has
utilities to import, link, and translate file formats to let you
get the most out of both PCIDSK- and GDB-supported
file formats.
Importing files to the PCIDSK format
The import utility lets you work with any GDB-supported
format in Focus by automatically converting it to a
PCIDSK file. When the format is not supported by GDB,
you must define the raw data with the Raw File Definition
tools. (See Using undefined image data on page 127 )
To import files into Focus using the Import File utility, you
must select a source and a destination file. The Import
file utility also has Interleaving and Overview options.
The Browse button opens the File Selector dialog box.
Use this dialog box to select the file you want to import
into PCIDSK format.
Destination File:
Specifies the new PCIDSK version of the source file.
Enter the file name and path directly in the Destination
File box, or click Browse to launch the File Selector
dialog box. The output file must not exist before importing
the file.
Format Options:
You can improve the performance of a file and save disk
space when you are using large files. There are several
PCI Geomatics
interleaving and compression methods available for
raster data.
Overview Options:
An overview is a reduced-resolution version of the
imported image. Focus can open overviews faster than
full resolution images and automatically creates a set of
overviews for an imported image. Overviews can
increase the required disk space by as much as 15
percent.
1. From the File menu, click Utility and then click
Import to PCIDSK.
2. From the PCIDSK Import dialog box, click Browse
for the source file.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate the file you
want to import and click Open.
4. From the PCIDSK Import dialog box, click Browse
for the destination file.
5. Choose a location for your destination file.
Note:You can also type the name of the file directly
in the Destination File box.
6. Type a name for your file in the File name box.
7. Click Save.
8. Select a format from the Format Options list box.
9. Select a downsampling option from the Overview
Options list box.
If you want to disable the overview, select Disable
Overview.
10. Click Import.
The file is not opened in the view pane. You must
122

Geomatica® Focus
open the file separately.
Building raster overviews
The Build Raster Overviews dialog box lets you choose
target files and layers, resample methods, and overview
levels.
You can create overview levels in powers of 2, which lets
you obtain a minimum image size of 64 pixels in one
dimension. Overviews can be created for file formats that
do not natively support overviews. Overviews cannot be
created for a layer if one of its dimensions is less than 8
kB.
1. In Focus, click the File tab if it is not already
displayed.
2. Right-click a raster layer.
3. From the menu, choose Overview Manager.
The Build Raster Overviews dialog box is displayed.
4. In the Build Raster Overviews dialog box, in the
General Information section, do one of the
following:
• click the File arrow and choose a file.
• click Browse and choose a file.
5. Click the Layer arrow and choose a layer.
You can build an overview for all layers or for a
single layer, which lets you create different
overviews for different layers.
The raster size and type are automatically displayed
for the selected layer.
6. In the New Overviews section, click the
Resampling type arrow and choose one of the
following resampling types:
• Nearest neighbour downsampling
• Block averaged downsampling
• Block mode downsampling
7. Do one of the following:
• Click Number of Levels and choose a level.
• Click Overview Decimation Levels and type
a number in the box.
The maximum number of overview levels that can
be created are displayed.
8. Click Run.
The Existing Overviews section shows all overviews
associated with a layer. The section lists the type of
sampling, the associated number of levels, and the
overview decimation levels.
Deleting raster overviews
You can delete raster overviews associated with a layer.
1. In the Build Raste Overviews dialog box, click the
Delete Overviews check box.
2. Click Run.
Linking PCIDSK and other databases
PCI Geomatics
123

Geomatica® Focus
The Link utility protects source data by creating an empty
PCIDSK database and allowing indirect access to
imagery on both GDB-supported and PCIDSK files.
Auxiliary information, such a LUTs or bitmaps are
transferred to the newly created PCIDSK file. Linking files
allows several users to work with data while preserving
the integrity of the source files. You can access data
across a network or on the same system disk without
duplicating large files. Imagery is not copied or
transferred; instead, pointers are created to describe the
directory location and layout of data. Changes are saved
to the linked file only.
The link file copies auxiliary information such as LUTs,
PCTs, bitmaps, vectors, and georeferencing information.
You can link to a remote source file, select a destination
file, and set overview options.
Source File:The Browse button beside the Source File
box opens a File Selector dialog box. Use it to select the
file you want to link to.
Destination File:Specifies the new version of the
PCIDSK source file. Enter the file name directly in the
Destination File box, or click Browse to open the File
Selector dialog box and create a new path and directory
for the link.
Overview Options: Produces a reduced-resolution
overview of the imported image. You can choose an
option for creating overviews. You can also choose to
disable the overviews.
PCI Geomatics
1. From the File menu, click Utility and then click
Link.
2. In the PCIDSK Link dialog box, click Browse next
to Source file.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, navigate to and
select the source file for linking and click Open.
4. In the PCIDSK Link dialog box, click Browse next
to the Destination file box.
5. In the File Selector dialog box, choose a location
for your destination file. If necessary, create a new
file folder.
6. Type a file name in the File name box.
7. Click Save.
8. In the PCIDSK Link dialog box, select an overview
option from the Overview options list box.
9. Click Link.
Translating file formats
The Translate utility can translate from one GeoGateway
supported file format to another or create a new PCIDSK
file from a GeoGateway format using only the layers you
specify. In the Translate File dialog box you select
similarly georeferenced source and destination files and
then share layer information between the two files.
After choosing source and destination files you can
specify source layers in the source file to include in the
translation.
1. From the File menu, click Utility and then click
Translate.
2. In the Translate (Export) File dialog box, click
Browse next to the Source file.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, navigate to and
124

Geomatica® Focus
select the source file and click Open.
4. In the Translate (Export) File dialog box, click
Browse next to the Destination file box.
5. In the File Selector dialog box, choose a location
for your destination file, type a file name in the File
name box, and click Save.
If necessary, create a new file folder.
6. In the Translate (Export) File dialog box, select the
format you want to use from the Output format list
box.
7. In the Source Layers area, select the data files that
will make up your destination file from the View list
box.
8. Select an item from the Source Layers list and click
Add.
You can remove a layer from the Destination
Layers list by selecting it and clicking Remove.
9. Click Translate.
Importing and converting ASCII files
The Import ASCII Table/Points Wizard can import ASCII
files into a project and convert them into vector-point
data. Table values that combine coordinates with field
research data can be imported to the Attribute Manager
spreadsheet and converted into vector-point files that you
can add to a project and open as layers in the view pane.
Using the Import ASCII Table/Points wizard
You can use the Import ASCII Table/Points wizard to
import and convert tabular ASCII data. You can format
PCI Geomatics
your ASCII data the same way you would when using a
common spread sheet application. In the wizard,
selecting the Delimited option from the Data Format area
allows you to specify a formatting character for the table
columns. You can either select a delimiter or specify
another delimiter by enabling the Other check box and
identifying the character in the Other box.
The Data PreView area displays an updated version of
information. The wizard detects delimiters and file
formats when you open a text file. When you select the
Fixed Width data format and click Next, the dialog box
allows you to identify the number of characters in a
column within a fixed width formatted file.
The Import ASCII Table/Points Wizard has three steps
1. Import and format delimited or fixed width ASCII
files. When you select a file, you can overwrite an
existing layer or create a new one. The Display
Result option automatically shows results in the
view pane when you have completed the step3 of
the wizard.
2. Identify delimiters or set field widths before
converting your ASCII data into tabular format.The
Data Type area allows you to identify how the ASCII
data is formatted; by a character or fixed width. In
the Import Options area you can choose to either
import all records or specify a range of records to
import.
3. Select data types for the fields in your table and
convert to vector points.
Tabular ASCII data does not require georeferencing to be
converted with the wizard. Degrees, minutes, and
seconds are not imported as coordinates but as fields
125

Geomatica® Focus
only. The wizard imports ASCII files only, but can output
to PCIDSK (.pix) format.
The preview area is similar to the Notepad text editor and
allows you to see the ASCII information table before it is
formatted.
1. Step 1
a. From the File menu, click Utility and then click
Import ASCII Table/Points.
b. In the Input area of the Import ASCII
Table/Points Wizard, click Browse.
c. In the File Selector dialog box, select an
ACSII-format file and click Open.
d. Enable one of the following options:
e. Display - vector points are opened in the
view pane and are not saved.
f. Save - click Browse next to the File list box
and choose a location for saving the output.
If you want to save your output to a specific
layer within the file, select one from the Layer
list box.
g. Enable the Delimited option in the Data
Format area.
If you want the first line of data displayed as a
header row, enter a number of 1 or higher in
the Header row spin box.
h. Click Next.
2. Step 2
a. In the Delimiters area, enable a check box
next to any correct delimiter type for your
file.You can see the required delimiter in the
preview area between each record.
PCI Geomatics
The Data preview area changes to a table
when you choose the correct option.
b. Click Next.
3. Step 3
a. In the Coordinate Fields area, select values
from the X, Y, and Z list boxes.
The remaining inputs for the Projection area
are activated and the Import attributes list is
updated.
b. Enter the projection and bounds information in
the Projection area.
c. Click Finish.
Formating fixed width files
1. With your text file open in Step 1 of the wizard,
enable the Fixed width option.
2. Set the number of records and header rows you
want in your converted file.
3. Click Next.
4. In the Data preview area, click the # of Characters
column in the Field 1 box and type the number of
characters you want to allocate to this field.
5. Press Enter.
6. Repeat step 4 and step 5 until all fields are added
and formatted properly.
7. Click Next.
8. Follow the instructions in Step 3 of the wizard.
Opening data from a remote data
source
126

Geomatica® Focus
You can open data from an Oracle database, a Web
service, a URL, and through Open Database Connectivity
(ODBC) as long as the data formats are compatible with
GDB technology.
Focus supports read and write access to Oracle8i and
Oracle 10g Spatial. For more information, refer to
#ORACLE# in Supported File Formats under Technical
References in the Geomatica Help.
A Web service provides access to data published on the
servers connected to the Web. You can access any Web
mapping service (WMS) or Web feature service (WFS)
complying with the OGC Web Mapping or Feature
Service specifications, and display the data as a layer in
the Focus project. The data is read-only. For details
about the Web services, refer to #Selecting Data from
Remote Data Sources# under Common Utilities in the
Geomatica Help and the Geomatica WebServer Suite
Installation Guide.
ODBC creates a connection between Geomatica and a
data source such as Microsoft TM Access. For more
information, refer to #ODBC# in Supported File Formats
under Technical References in the Geomatica Help.
1. From the File menu, click Open.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, click Remote Data.
Using undefined image data
You can open undefined or raw image data the same
way you would any other file. In the File Selector dialog
PCI Geomatics
box, locate and select your raw imagery and click Open.
When you open raw images the Raw Imagery File
Definition dialog box opens automatically, allowing you
to define the raw imagery file format. The following
controls are available to define data:
Header Bytes
Specifies the number of bytes to allocate for header
information. The zero value, indicates that imagery data
starts at the very beginning of the file.
Image Size
defines the X (Pixel) and Y (Line) size of the image file.
These should be the full size of the image in the file, even
if you only wish to open a sub-set of the file.
Number of Channels
Indicates the number of channels or planes of image data
stored in the file.
Data Interleaving
Indicates how multiple channels of image data are
interleaved. This field is not applicable for one channel
image files. However, single-band data can have band
interleaving.
PIXEL:
The channels are pixel interleaved. For example, in a
127

Geomatica® Focus
three-channel file, the values in the file are 123123123...,
with the channel values for a given pixel located together.
LINE:
The channels are line interleaved. The data for line 1 of
the first channel occurs first, followed by the data for line
1 of the second channel and line 1 of the third channel.
Next is line 2 of the first channel, and so on. For example,
in a three-channel file, the values in the file would be (line
1) 111...222...333, (line 2) 111...222...333, and so on.
BAND:
The channels are band sequential. All the data for the
entire first channel would be first, followed by all the data
for the second channel, and so on.
Data Type:
The set of options to define the type of data.
8-bit Unsigned
The data for each channel are 8-bit, unsigned.
16-bit Unsigned
The data for each channel are 16-bit, unsigned. Values
range from 0 to 65535, and are two bytes each.
16-bit Signed
The data for each channel are 16-bit, signed. Values
range from -32768 to 32767, and are two bytes each.
32-bit Real
The data for each channel are 32-bit IEEE floating point
numbers. Each value is 4 bytes long.
Byte Order
options for storing the order of multiple-byte data words.
Used for non-8-bit image data only, it can be ignored for
files containing only 8-bit data.
Least Significant Byte first (LSB)
This order is common on IBM computers with Intel 80 x
86 architecture. It is sometimes known as swapped or
little endian. In LSB order, a 16U-pixel value of 1 would
be expressed as two bytes, the first a 1, and the second
a 0.
Most Significant Byte first (MSB)
This is the order common on Sun, IBM, RS/6000, HP,
SGI, and Mac systems. It is also known as unswapped,
big endian, or Motorola order. In MSB order a 16U-pixel
value of one would be expressed as two bytes, the first a
zero, and the second a one. The default selected on the
panel is the byte order of the local system.
• In the Raw Imagery Definition dialog box, click
Accept. A new header file is created with the file
name extension .pox.
PCI Geomatics
128

Geomatica® Focus
The new raw configuration file is an auxiliary file that
contains layout information for the imagery that you
provide. Focus automatically recognizes the new raw file
without redefining it.
The following is an example of the file produced for a
simple 1000 x 1000 8-bit single-channel image.
Auxiliary Target:
rawimage.bil
Raw Definition:
1000 1000 1
ChanDefinition - 1:
8U 0 1 1000 Swapped
Once the .pox file is created, you cannot define the raw
file again until the .pox file is deleted. When
experimenting with possible raw file definitions, an .pox
file is not recommended.
You can work directly with all items in the control pane
under both the Maps and Files tabs. You can rename and
remove data whether or not you are working with a
project file.
Image metadata support
Metadata refers to a specific image in a PCIDSK file. All
PCI Geomatics
images and associated metadata are considered image
data sets. Channels, other than those containing image
data set bands, can exist in a PCIDSK file. Metadata is
not associated with ancillary raster data or raster maps
produced from image analysis.
Focus supports image metadata to accommodate
hyperspectral processing and analysis through PCIDSK
files. Image metadata must be formatted as an XML
document in a text file. The METAIN program reads the
metadata from the XML document and writes it to a
metadata segment in the PCIDSK file that contains the
associated image data. Existing metadata is overwritten.
The METAOUT program reads metadata from a segment
in the PCIDSK file and formats it as an XML document.
The required format of an image metadata XML
document is specified by the XML schema stored in the
PCI ImageMetadata.xsd file if the $PCIHOME/etc
directory of the Geomatica installation CD.
Working with projections
Projections are required to tie down an image to the
earth#s surface. Once the required projection information
has been defined and the image has been corrected to
overlay the projection bounds, image equirectangular
pixel and line coordinates can be transformed to produce
equirectangular projection easting and northing
coordinates which can be transformed with the projection
formulas to produce equivalent non-equirectangular
longitude and latitude coordinates. Longitude and latitude
coordinates can also be transformed to projection easting
and northings and image database pixel and line
129

Geomatica® Focus
coordinates.
Understanding PCIDSK projection definition
Projections can compensate for distortions in large-scale
imagery that cover a large earth surface, where
distortions are produced from earth curvature. These are
the same distortions that occur in projecting a spherical
surface (the Earth) onto a flat surface (the image
database). Although there are still distortions in all
projections, some are removed or compensated for
depending on the projection used.
Once an image is tied to one projection, it can
automatically be projected to overlay another projection.
This gives you options to process your data by matching
goals to the appropriate projection.
The software used for the projection transforms is the
General Cartographic Transformation Package (GCTP),
produced by the U.S. Geological Survey, and can be
used to convert:
• projection coordinates to geographic coordinates.
• geographic coordinates to projection coordinates.
• projection coordinates to coordinates in a second
projection.
• Transforms between different earth models is
discussed under the EARTH MODELS sub-topic.
Supported projections
The following table lists the projections supported in
Focus. The information for each projection is repeated at
PCI Geomatics
the top of the projection sub-topic in the PROJECTION
section.
Table 8. Supported Projections
Code Class Name Earth Model
ACEA
AE
CASS
EC
ER
GNO
conic
azimuthal
cylindrical
conic
cylindrical
azimuthal
GOOD pseudocylindric
GVNP
azimuthal
Albers Conical
Equal Area
Azimuthal
Equidistant (or
Zenithal
Equidistant)
Cassini (or
Cassini-Soldner)
Equidistant
Conic (or Simple
Conic, or Conic)
Equirectangular
(or Equidistant
Cylindrical, or
Simple
Cylindrical, or
Rectangular, or
Plate Carree)
Gnomonic (or
Gnomic)
Goode#s
Homolosine
Gen Vert
Near-Side
Perspective
ellipsoid or
sphere
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
sphere
sphere
sphere
sphere
130

Geomatica® Focus
Code Class Name Earth Model
KROV conic Krovak Bessel 1841
LAEA
LCC
LONG/
LAT
azimuthal
conic
not a
projection
Lambert
Azimuthal
Equal-Area (or
Zenithal
Equal-Area)
Lambert
Conformal Conic
Longitude/
Latitude (or
Geographic)
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
MC cylindrical Miller Cylindrical sphere
MER
MSC
cylindrical Mercator
modif
azimuthal
Modif
Stereographic
Conformal (or
Alaska Grid)
ellipsoid or
sphere
Clarke 1866
(NAD27)
OG azimuthal Orthographic sphere
OM
cylindrical
Oblique Mercator
(or Oblique
Cylindrical, or
Orthomorphic, or
Hotine)
PC conic Polyconic
PS
PCI Geomatics
azimuthal
Polar
Stereographic
ellipsoid or
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
Code Class Name Earth Model
ROB
RSO
cylindrical
Robinson
Rectified Skew
Orthomorphic
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
SG azimuthal Stereographic sphere
SIN
SOM
SPCS
TM
UPS
UTM
VDG
pseudocylindric
pseudocylindric
modif
cylindric
usually
conic or
cylindrical
cylindrical
azimuthal
cylindrical
Sinusoidal (or
Sanson-
Flamsteed)
Space Oblique
Mercator
State Plane
Coordinate
System
Transverse
Mercator (or
Gauss-Krueger)
Universal Polar
Stereographic
Universal
Transverse
Mercator
miscellaneous Van der Grinten
Defining a new projection
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
Clarke 1866
(NAD27) or GRS
1980 (NAD83)
ellipsoid or
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
ellipsoid or
sphere
sphere
A set of parameters can be specified for projections
supported as generic and opened using the name of the
131

Geomatica® Focus
projection set. User-defined projections are shown under
the User Projections tab in the Other Georeference Units
dialog box. By accepting a user projection, the supported
projection and the associated parameters are recognized.
You can view the parameters for the projection by
clicking More after accepting the User Projection that has
been selected.
New projections are stored in a text file named
userproj.txt that may exist either locally or in the
$PCIHOME/etc subdirectory, or both. New user
projections may be brought into the system by editing
userproj.txt with a text-editor and adding the parameters
for the projection. A template of the fields supported is
included in userproj.txt that exists in the etc
sub-directory in the comment lines at the top of the file.
When working with new projects, keep these rules in
mind:
• Each non-comment line will consist of a field
identifier (e.g. ProjectionName) and a value for the
field (e.g. 'UKNatGrid'). There would be one or more
spaces separating the field identifier and the field
value. The field identifier and value must fit on one
line. Although the present user projection examples
have the field identifier first followed by the field
value, the field value followed by the field identifier
is also supported.
• Processing for the field identifiers is not
case-sensitive, so it doesn#t matter if upper or lower
case or some combination of the two is used.
• Blank lines are acceptable in the file and will be
skipped.
• If a field value has spaces in it, it should be
PCI Geomatics
enclosed in double-quotes. For example,
ProjectionDescription 'British National Grid.'
• Comments follow an exclamation mark. If the line
begins with an exclamation mark, the whole line is a
comment. Trailing comments in a given line are
acceptable.
• Processing for a given projection begins when a
'ProjectionName' record is read and ends with the
next 'ProjectionName' record or when the end of the
file is reached. Other than that the order of the other
records for the projection does not matter.
• Different projections require different parameters.
These fields can be defined for any user-defined
projection set:
ProjectionName:
This is the user-defined name that will be presented for
the projection set. This can be 11 printable characters at
most. For example, ProjectionName 'UKNatGrid.'
ProjectionDescription:
This is the descriptive text to present with the
ProjectionName. Although there is no maximum size, the
ProjectionDescription should be short and no more than
64 characters. If there are spaces in the description, it
should be enclosed in double-quotes. For example,
ProjectionDescription 'British National Grid.'
MapUnits:
These are the actual units of the projection set and would
correspond to the units string built up by using the
'Generic Projections'. This can be 16 characters at most.
132

Geomatica® Focus
For example, you can use either MapUnits 'tm e9' or
MapUnits 'TM E009.'
Defining datums and ellipsoids
Ellipsoids:
Using ellipsoids rather than datums is still valid as long as
there are not different horizontal datums involved in
reprojecting between different map projections.
If there are different horizontal datums that use the same
ellipsoid, datum codes should be used. If ellipsoid codes
are used, the software incorrectly assumes that the
ellipsoid is for the same datum.
The following defaults are provided where there is a
reprojection involving datum shifts:
• For #E000# (Clarke 1866) or #E008# (GRS 1980):
• Areas within Canada, Bulk of Canada: 141 W to 44
W; 49 N to 84 N; Western Ontario: 95 W to 85 W;
48 N to 49 N Southern Ontario, West: 85 W to 79
W; 42 N to 49 N; Southern Ontario, East: 79 W to
74 W; 42d30# N to 49 N; Southern Quebec, West:
74 W to 70 W; 45 N to 49 N; Southern Quebec,
East: 70 W to 68 W; 47 N to 49 N; Atlantic area: 68
W to 44 W; 43 N to 49 N;
• #E000# (Clarke 1866) defaults to
and#147;D-03and#148; (NAD27 (Canada, NTv1))
• #E008# (GRS 1980) defaults to #D-04# (NAD83
(Canada, NTv1))
• Areas outside Canada,
• #E000# (Clarke 1866) defaults to #D-01# (NAD27
PCI Geomatics
(USA, NADCON))
• #E008# (GRS 1980) defaults to #D-02# (NAD83
(USA, NADCON))
• #E019# (Normal Sphere) defaults to #D800#
• #E012# (WGS 84) defaults to #D000#
• #E005# (WGS 72) defaults to #D186#
New Ellipsoids
A new ellipsoid not supported at present can be defined
by adding an entry in the ellipsoid text file.
To add the definition once so it is globally available to all
users (and if you have write-permission to the file), the
new definition would be added to
$PCIHOME/etc/ellips.txt.
Or the new definition may be added to a local copy of the
file. (This would not be globally available to all users.) At
the operating system level (on a Unix platform in this
example), you could copy the files as follows:
% cp $PCIHOME/etc/ellips.txt
% chmod 644 ellips.txt
A local copy of ellips.txt will be searched before (and so
has priority over) $PCIHOME/etc/ellips.txt.
To define a new ellipsoid, add the new ellipsoid definition
as one line of text to the ellips.txt file. For example:
#E910#,#ATS77#,6378135.0,6356750.305
Where the fields of the new ellipsoid record are as
133

Geomatica® Focus
follows:
• E910 - A unique code for the ellipsoid.This would be
one that does not already exist in the file. The first
character would be E (or e), for ellipsoid, followed
by an integer (maximum of 3 characters).
• ATS77 - A descriptive string for the earth ellipsoid.
This descriptive isn#t used at present in the
software but a field is expected. An empty character
string could be used.
• 6378135.0 - The ellipsoid semi-major axis in
meters.
• 6356750.305 - The ellipsoid semi-minor axis in
meters.
If datum shifts are involved, the datum that uses the new
ellipsoid would have to be defined. To do this see the
NEW DATUMS topic.
Reprojecting files
When you add new data, it is automatically reprojected
based on the data you already have open. When you
open large, secondary files of a different projection, they
are also automatically reprojected, which can make the
work slower. You may encounter this situation, for
example, when a work file has a UTM projection and you
open a file with an LCC projection. If you open the UTM
data first, Focus must reproject the LCC to UTM. In such
cases, it is recommended that you reproject the data
manually and save it as a new file.
You can reproject both raster and vector data if the data
is in a valid projection, it is in a GDB-supported format,
and you know which datums were used. A datum is a
PCI Geomatics
mathematical surface used to make geographic
computations. An ellipsoid defines the dimensions of the
earth. The datum includes the ellipsoid used and its
position relative to the center of the earth.
Each datum references one ellipsoid, but an ellipsoid can
be referenced by one or more datums. If you compare
the position of a point calculated using one datum and
then calculate the same position using a different datum,
the coordinates of the point will be different, even if the
datums refer to the same ellipsoid.
Since a datum is a mathematical surface used to make
geographic computations, it is possible to convert from
one datum to another. However, reprojecting a file from
one ellipsoid to another will not provide the correct results
because the critical information contained in a datum is
not defined in the ellipsoid.
About the Reproject dialog box
The Reproject dialog box lets you reproject data. You can
select data, set reprojection bounds, and work with
selected layers in the source and destination layers.
Destination files are automatically created in PCIDSK
format. Reprojections can be exported as any
GDB-compatible format.
Browse:
Opens the File Selector dialog box to select source data
or a destination file, depending on the button you click.
134

Geomatica® Focus
Source Files:
Reports your source files.
Destination Files:
Reports your Destination files.
Output Format
Allows you to choose a GDB file format for your output.
Options:
Lets you enter an option for your output data.
Reprojection bounds
The Reprojection Bounds area allows you to select the
combination of parameters to use for reprojection. It also
lets you add your reprojection information.
Size:
Lets you enter the size of your reprojection bounds in
lines and pixels.
Pixels:
Lets you enter the number of pixels for your reprojection.
Lines:
Lets you enter the number of lines for your reprojection.
Pixel Size:
Allows you to set the pixel size along the X and Y axes.
X:
Lets you enter a value for the pixel X size.
Y:
Lets you enter a value for the pixel X size.
Projection Method:
Lets you enter a value for the pixel Y size.
Earth Model:
Lets you select a projection method for your reprojection.
More:
Opens the Earth Models dialog box, where can select
datums and elipsoids.
Bounds:
Lets you choose either geographic or geocoded bounds
measurements.
Upper Left:
PCI Geomatics
135

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you enter either geocoded or geographic
coordinates for the upper-left corner of the reprojection.
Lower Right:
Lets you enter either geocoded or geographic
coordinates for the lower-right corner reprojection.
Pixel Size X:
Reports the size of the X pixels.
Pixel Size Y:
Reports the size of the Y pixels.
Resampling:
Lets you choose a re-sampling method.
Transform Order:
Lets you choose an order of transformation.
Sampling Interval:
Lets you enter a sampling interval value.
Selectable layers and reprojection
The Selectable Layers area allows you to choose the
source and destination layers for the reprojection.
Source Layers:
Lists the layers in your source files.
View:
Lets you choose the data types you want to include in the
reprojection.
Select All:
Selects all of the data listed in the Source Layers area.
Add:
Moves the selected layers in the Source Layers area to
the Destination Layers area.
Destination Layers:
Lists the layers that will be included in the reprojection.
Remove:
Removes selected layers form the Destination Layers list.
Select All:
Selects all of the layers listed in the Destination Layers
list.
Reprojection:
PCI Geomatics
136

Geomatica® Focus
Runs the reprojection.
1. From the Tools menu, click Reprojection.
2. In the Reproject dialog box, click Browse next to
the Source file.
3. From the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
the file that will provide the projection.
4. Click Open.
5. Click Browse next to the Destination file box and
select a destination file from the File Selector
dialog box.
6. Locate the directory where you want to save the
reprojected file.
7. Type a name for your reprojected file in the File
name box.
8. Click Save.
Setting reprojection bounds
Select one of three methods for determining the bounds
of the data that is to undergo reprojection.
Pixels/lines and bounds:
Varies the pixel size to create a file with the pixel, lines,
and bounds values that you select.
Pixels/lines and resolution:
Varies the bounds based on the resolution of the source
file.
Bounds and resolution:
Inputs the file size in pixels and lines, and changes the
PCI Geomatics
pixel size.
You can choose from either geocoded or geographic
reprojection bounds.
Geocoded:
Displays the upper-left and lower-right bounds in
northings and eastings.
Geographic:
Displays the upper-left and lower-right bounds in latitude
and longitude.
Specifying a coordinate system
When your imagery has no georeferencing, you can use
the pixels in the raster file as the coordinate system.
1. Select Pixel from the Coordinate System list box.
2. From the UTM Zones dialog box, select a zone
from the list.
3. Click Accept.
4. From the UTM Rows dialog box, select a row from
the list.
5. Click Accept.
Selecting an ellipsoidal earth model
The coordinate system defaults to the coordinate system
of the source file. For example, if UTM 11 E000 is the
coordinate system of the source file, UTM 11 refers to
137

Geomatica® Focus
UTM Zone 11 and E000 is the Ellipsoidal Earth model
E000-Clarke 1866. This is shown in the text box to the
right of the Earth Model button.
1. In the Reprojection Bounds area, click Earth
Model.
2. In the Earth Models dialog box, click the Ellipsoids
tab and select an Earth model.
3. Click Accept.
Selecting the earth model
1. In the Reprojection Bounds area, click Earth
Model.
2. In the Earth Models dialog box, click the Datums
tab and select an Earth model.
3. Click Accept.
Selecting the SPCS coordinate
system
1. Choose SPCS from the Coordinate System list
box, to the left of the Earth Model button.
2. From the State Plane Zones dialog box, choose a
zone.
3. Click Accept.
Selecting a different coordinate system
1. Choose Other from the Coordinate System list
box, to the left of the Earth Model button.
2. From the Other Projections dialog box, click the
PCI Geomatics
Generic Projections tab and choose a
georeferencing unit.
3. Click Accept.
4. In the Projection Definition dialog box, type a
longitude in the Longitude column of the True
Origin box.
5. Type a latitude in the Latitude column of the True
Origin box.
6. Click Accept.
Maximum bounds and resampling
methods
You can reset the bounds, using the Maximum Bounds
command, after the output projection has been defined
and before using the Reproject command.
The maximum bounds are derived by projecting the
upper-left and lower-right corners. The Maximum Bounds
function can also project 441 points or 21 pixel positions
by 21 scan line positions, distributed over the entire input
image. You can reset the maximum bounds to their
original values by clicking the Maximum Bounds
command.
The resampling method affects image reprojection only.
You can change the resampling method by selecting the
nearest neighbour, bilinear interpolation, or cubic
convolution. Bitmaps are automatically resampled using
the nearest-neighbor method.
You can change the resampling method by opening the
Resampling list and choosing a method you want to use.
Transformations are computed from 256 ground control
138

Geomatica® Focus
points based on the projection transformation.
Exact Transformation
The default order that performs a calculation for each
pixel in the file.
Polynomial Transformations
As the polynomial order increases, the accuracy
generally increases, but the reprojection process
becomes slower.
Thin Plate Spline Transformation
Is based on fitting splines to the ground control points.
The Thin Plate Spline method is more accurate than the
polynomial methods but results in a slower reprojection
process.
The transform order approximation is only applied when
reprojecting imagery and bitmaps. The vertices of vector
layers are transformed exactly. For sampling intervals
higher than one, the reprojected position is calculated at
every sampling interval. A linear interpolation is
performed for the in-between values.
To control the spacing in the calculation of the
reprojected position, set the sampling interval from one to
a maximum value of four.
Selecting database layers for
PCI Geomatics
reprojection
After specifying your reprojection, you can select the
layers to use for your destination file. You can list layers
of a similar type that you wish to work with; for example,
you can show all available files in the source list.
1. From the View menu, click BIT Segments.
2. In the Source File Layers list, choose a file name
and click Add.
If you want to reposition an item in the Destination
File Layers list, select it and click the up or down
arrow button.
If you want to select the entire list in the
Destination File Layers list box, click Select All.
3. Click Reproject.
The reprojected file is not opened in the view pane.
You must open the file separately.
Organizing and editing layers
In Focus, geographic features and their attributed data
are stored in layers. Each layer of information can either
represent a single set of geographic information, such as
hydrography, or a combination of information features.
In a layer, raster and vector data are stored just like
areas stored in Maps. Layer information can be displayed
and can consist of lines, polygons, and symbols that
represent project information. You can build a map by
139

Geomatica® Focus
placing each layer on top of the other. In the Maps tree,
each layer appears as a branch belonging to an area.
Layers let you organize and edit the features in a map.
You can break a map into multiple layers, each
containing a portion of the overall content. Most layer
tasks are specific to the layer type, but many functions
are common to both image and vector layers.
You can show or hide layers in the Maps tree. To work
with a layer, you must make it active.
Note: You can add new features to the active layer only.
A pencil icon indicates the layer is active.
To display a layer
1. In the Maps tree, enable the check box next to a
layer.
A check mark next to a vector layer in the Maps tree
indicates that the layer is open in the view pane. If
you cannot see an open layer, it may be covered by
another layer.
To make a layer active
1. In the Maps tree, select the layer you want to
activate.
A pencil icon indicates the layer is active.
To move a layer
1. In the Maps tree list, drag the layer up or down in
the tree.
A line indicates where the layer will be placed.
To copy a layer
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click Copy.
2. Right-click where you want to paste the layer and
click Paste.
To remove a layer
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a layer remove and
click Remove.
The layer will be removed from the map, but the
layer data is not removed from the data file.
To rename a layer
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click
Rename.
2. Type a new name and press Enter.
Adding and removing imagery
You can create a new layer for your map when you want
to add digitized map information, digitize an image file, or
create different layers of geographic information.
PCI Geomatics
140

Geomatica® Focus
You can create a new layer by right-clicking an area icon
and using the shortcut menu to add new raster, vector, or
bitmap layers. When you create a new layer, you must
set the parameters of the new area.
New layers are automatically rescaled and georeferenced
to the area. Any areas with undefined projections use the
meter projection by default. You can change the layer
type, data type, and the georeferencing when you set up
the layer parameters. When you create a new layer, the
parameters describe the amounts and kinds of data you
can use in the layer properties.
Creating a new raster layer
Raster layers are most often used as background for
vector-based maps. You can also use raster images for
thematic maps. In the Maps tree, image layers are
always a sub-level of an area. You can use several types
of image files. The table below shows a list of supported
image file types with a description of each.
Table 9.
Data Type
Description
8-bit Pixel values 0 to 255
16-bit Signed
Pixel values -32,768 to
32,767
16-bit Unsigned Pixel values 0 to 65,535
32-bit Real
PCI Geomatics
Pixel values - 1.2x1038 to
3.4x1038
1. In the Maps tree, right-click an area and click New
Raster Layer.
2. In the New Raster Layer dialog box, enable an
option in the Layer Type area.
3. In the Data Type area, enable an option for the data
type you want.
4. Enable an option in the Georeferencing area and
fill in the appropriate information.
5. Click OK.
Creating a new bitmap layer
In Focus, a bitmap layer acts as a graphical layer that
can be used to mask regions in your imagery for a variety
of purposes. You can create a new empty bitmap layer
when you want to work with raster information in a layer
of lower priority.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click an area and click New
Bitmap Layer.
2. In the New Bitmap dialog box, enable a
Georeferencing option and fill in the appropriate
information.
3. Click OK.
Creating a new vector layer
You can create a new empty vector layer when you want
to use digitized map information, break your map into
different layers with specific geographical information, or
when you want to create vectors on top of an image in
the view pane.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click an area and click New
141

Geomatica® Focus
Vector Layer.
2. In the New Vector Layer dialog box, enable a
Layer Type option.
3. Enable a Georeferencing option and fill in the
appropriate information.
4. Click OK.
Setting vector layer attributes
Layer data, such as symbols, lines, filled areas, polygons,
and text, are stored and categorized separately in
RepCodes. The RepCode defines each feature by a set
of coordinates and descriptive labels. The features are
shown as a layer within an area.
Each map element requires its own RepCode. RepCodes
also link the vector files to the RST, and tell the system
how to show each feature on the screen.
The View Attributes dialog box is a spreadsheet for
vector layer information.You can use it to view and edit
point data in vector files, and to work with RepCodes.
To view vector properties
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a vector and click
Properties.
To view vector attributes
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a vector and click
Attribute Manager.
PCI Geomatics
To change the magnification of the preview image,
click the zoom commands below the Preview area.
Setting vector layer properties
General vector layer properties define how the layer is
displayed on screen.
To set up general vector layer properties
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a vector layer and click
Properties.
2. In the Vector Layer Properties dialog box, click the
General tab.
3. In the Description field, enter a description of the
layer.
4. Enable or disable any of the following check boxes:
• Read Only: enabling this option prevents the
vector layer from being changed.
• Visible: enabling this option makes the layer
visible in the view pane.
5. Enter a value that represents the layer priority in the
Priority box.
Layer priority may cause one layer to mask another
in the Maps tree. If you cannot see a layer in your
map, check the layer priority. Changing layer priority
is necessary to present a vector layer over a raster
layer or a bitmap layer.
6. Click OK.
You can save a vector layer as part of a .pix file that
contains your work or as part of a project file.
142

Geomatica® Focus
To save a vector layer
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click Save.
2. In the New Layer Detected dialog box, choose the
Output File, the file format and, if applicable, the
channels you want to save.
3. Click Save.
Transferring layers
You can transfer layers by copying them from a source
file and saving them to a destination file. The transferred
data can either be added on to a new layer or overwritten
in the destination file.
For example, you can specify that a PCT segment in the
source file be added as a new segment in the destination
file or you can specify that a PCT segment is overwritten
in a destination file. The source file is never modified
when it is transferred; however, the destination file is
always changed.
You can transfer any GDB-supported files. Some
non-PCIDSK file formats may not be compatible.
Georeferencing cannot be transferred between files.
Input imagery is changed to match the destination file
dimensions.
Use the Transfer Layers dialog box to select similarly
georeferenced source and destination files and to share
layer information between the two files.
Source File:
Opens the File Selector dialog box where you can select
a file with the layers you want to copy.
Destination File:
Opens the File Selector dialog box where you can select
a file to receive the data layers.
Source Layers:
Shows a complete list of all channels, bitmaps, and
vectors in the source file. You can choose the layers you
want to copy to the destination file, list layers by type in
the list window, or you can select all.
Destination Layers:
Shows a list of all channels, bitmaps, vectors in the
destination file. Source layers that you have chosen to
add or overwrite also appear in this list. Click the Remove
and Select Transferred command buttons if you want to
undo transfer relationships.
1. From the File menu, click Utility and then click
Transfer Layers.
2. In the Transfer Layers dialog box, click Browse
next to the source file.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate the file with
the data you want to transfer and click Open.
4. Click Browse next to the destination file and locate
the file to where you want to transfer your layers.
5. Click Save.
PCI Geomatics
143

Geomatica® Focus
6. Choose a layer type from the View list box.
7. Select the layers that you want to transfer and click
Add.
8. Click Transfer Layers.
Working with data tools
Focus has tools designed to help you produce new files
from your existing data. You can create new data files by
saving existing files as other formats. You can also clip
images to produce new files and you can create subset
files that maintain the attributes of the original data.
Changing data formats
You can convert several file types to different formats by
saving them as the format you want directly from the
Maps tree.
The following files types can be converted:
• Bitmap
• Greyscale
• RGB
• RST
• SYM
• PCT
About the Bitmap Save As dialog box
The bitmap Save As dialog box allows you to save a
bitmap from the Maps tree. You can save the file to a
layer within the target file or to a new layer. In the Maps
tree, bitmaps are listed whether they are saved or not. In
the Files tree, however, bitmaps are listed only if they are
PCI Geomatics
saved. For each saved bitmap, both the file and layer
names are displayed.
Input:
The Input section displays the name of the layer and the
data type that you are about to save.
Output:
The Output section allows you to choose the target file
and format in which you want to save the bitmap. You
can also select a layer within the target file or create a
layer for the bitmap.
File:
The File list allows you to select the file in which you want
to save the bitmap. If the file is not listed, you can browse
and select the file.
Format:
The Format list allows you to select the format in which
you want to save the bitmap.
Options:
The Options button opens the GDB Options dialog box.
(See Selecting GDB format options on page 145 )
Layer:
144

Geomatica® Focus
The Layer list allows you to select a layer within the
target file or create a layer for the bitmap.
About the Vector Save As dialog box
The Vector Save As dialog box lets you save a vector
layer from the Maps tree as another file format. You can
save the file to the original layer or to a new layer.
Input:
Reports the location of the layer and the data type with
which you are working.
Layer:
Reports the layer type for the current layer.
Save selected shapes only:
Saves only the shapes you have selected in the view
pane or the Attribute Manager. When no shapes are
selected, the option is disabled. If you have shapes
selected and you want to overwrite the original segment,
the option is disabled.
Save selected fields only:
Saves only the selected fields. When no fields are
selected, the option is not available.
Output:
PCI Geomatics
Lets you choose a target file for saving your new vector
data, select a format for the new data, and choose or
create a layer within your target file.
File:
Lets you select a target file for your new vector data from
a list.
Browse:
Opens the File Selector dialog box, letting you choose a
different target file, not showing in the File list.
Format:
Lets you choose an output format from the list of
available formats.
Options:
Opens the GDB Options Editor. (See Selecting GDB
format options on page 145 )
Layer:
Lets you choose a target layer from a list of layers. You
can also choose to save your new file to a new layer.
Selecting GDB format options
The GDB Options Editor lets you configure the GDB
format you have chosen for your output. Some of the
145

Geomatica® Focus
GDB formats do not have data type options.
1. Click the Options button.
2. In the GDB Options Editor, choose any of the file
options you want for your output data. For more
information about the specific option for the selected
file format, click the Help button on the GDB
Options Editor.
3. Click OK.
About the Grayscale Save As dialog box
The Grayscale Save As dialog box lets you save a
bitmap from the Maps tree in another file format. You can
save the file to the original layer or to a new layer.
Input:
Reports the location of the layer and the data type with
which you are working.
Layer:
Reports the layer type for the current layer.
Raster with attribute data:
Saves the raster and its associated attribute table.
Raster only:
Saves only the raster data.
Save selected shapes only:
Saves only the records that you have selected in the
Attribute Manager. When no records are selected, the
option is not available.
Save selected fields only:
Saves only the fields that you have selected in the
Attribute Manager. When no fields are selected, the
option is not available.
Output:
Lets you choose a target file for saving the layer, select a
format for the new file, and choose or create a layer
within your target file.
File:
Lets you select a target file for your new layer. The
Browse button lets you choose a file not showing in the
File list.
Format:
Lets you choose an output format from the list of
available formats.
Options:
Opens the GDB Options editor. (See Selecting GDB
format options on page 145 )
Layer:
PCI Geomatics
146

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you choose a target layer from the list of layers. You
can also choose to save your new file to a new layer.
Properties:
Opens the Output Layer Properties dialog box.
About the Output Layer Properties dialog
box
The Output Layer Properties dialog box lets you set the
properties for your new output layers when you convert a
file to another GDB-supported format. You can select an
output type, change the layer scaling, and save original
file enhancements as an LUT.
Output Type:
Lets you change the bit depth for your output file by
choosing from a list of available bit depth values. For
example, 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit, depending on the values
shown in the list.
Scaling:
Lets you choose a scaling method for your output file.
(See Scaling images on page 257 )
Enhancement:
Lets you choose and set a default LUT.
Output Lookup Table:
PCI Geomatics
Lets you select an available LUT and gives you the
option to have no LUT for your file or to save an LUT as a
new layer.
Save as default look-up table:
Lets you choose to assign an LUT as the file default.
About the PCT Output Layer Properties
dialog box
The Output Layer Properties dialog box lets you save the
color table with the PCT layer.
Output Color Table:
Lets you save the PCT color table as a new layer.
Save as default look-up table:
Lets you choose to assign the color table as the file#s
default.
About the RST Save As dialog box
The RST Save As dialog box lets you save a copy of an
RST file from the Maps tree to another target file. You
can save the file to the original layer or to a new layer.
Input:
Reports the location of the RST file with which you are
working.
147

Geomatica® Focus
Output:
Lets you choose a target file for saving your new bitmap,
Select a format for the new file and choose or create a
layer within your target file.
File:
Lets you select a target file for your new bitmap. The
Browse button lets you choose a file not showing in the
File list.
Browse:
Opens the File Selector dialog box.
Format:
Lets you choose an output format from the list of
available formats.
Description:
Lets you change the name of the saved RST.
About the RGB Save As dialog box
The RGB Save As dialog box lets you save an RGB file
in the Maps tree to another file format. You can save the
file to the original layer or to a new layer. You can also
select channels and change channel properties.
Input:
Reports the location of the layer and the data type with
which you are working.
Output:
Lets you choose a target file for saving your new RGB
file, select a format for the new file, and choose or create
a new layer within your target file.
File:
Lets you select a target file for your new RGB file. The
Browse button lets you browse for a file not shown in the
File list.
Browse:
Opens a File Selector panel so you can choose a target
file at a different location.
Format:
Lets you choose an output format from the list of
available formats.
Options:
Opens the GDB Options Editor.
Layer:
Lets you choose a target layer from the list of layers. You
can also choose to save your new file to a new layer.
PCI Geomatics
148

Geomatica® Focus
There are three of these list boxes
Properties:
Opens the Output Layer Properties dialog box. There are
three of these buttons.
About the PCT Save As dialog box
The PCT Save As dialog box lets you save a PCT
segment in the Maps tree as a PCIDSK (.pix) file.
If you are saving a layer containing a map from a Web
mapping service to your local drive, you must also save
its color table or the map may not have the same
representation the next time you open it. To save the
color table, click Properties.
Input:
Reports the location of the layer and the data type with
which you are working.
Layer:
Reports the layer description for the current layer.
Raster with attribute data:
Raster only:
If the layer contains attributes, the Raster only option
becomes available. When it is clicked, the raster data is
saved without the attribute data.
Save selected shapes only:
If the layer contains attributes and shapes are selected,
the Save selected shapes only option is available. When
it is enabled, only the records that you have selected in
the Attribute Manager are saved in the file. If you have
shapes selected and you want to overwrite the original
segment, the option is disabled.
Save selected fields only:
If the layer contains attributes and fields are selected, the
Save selected fields only option is available. When it is
enabled, only the fields that you have selected in the
Attribute Manager are saved in the file.
Output:
Lets you choose a target file for saving the layer and lets
you choose or create a new layer within your target file.
File:
If the layer contains attributes, the Raster with attribute
data option becomes available. When it is clicked, the
raster and its associated attribute table is saved to the
file.
PCI Geomatics
Lets you select a target file for your new layer.
Browse:
Opens the File Selector dialog box, where you can
149

Geomatica® Focus
browse for a file not shown in the File list.
Format:
Contains only the PCIDSK format.
Options:
Opens the GDB Options Editor. (See Selecting GDB
format options on page 145 )
Layer:
Lets you choose a target layer from the list of layers. You
can also choose to save to a new layer.
Properties:
Opens the Output Layer Properties dialog box.
About the LUT Save As dialog box
The LUT Save As dialog box lets you save a lookup table
(LUT) in a file.
Input:
Reports the LUT with which you are working.
Layer:
Reports the LUT for the current layer.
PCI Geomatics
Raster with attribute data:
If you are saving the image with the LUT and the layer
contains attributes, the Raster with attribute data option
becomes available. When it is clicked, the raster and its
associated attribute table is saved to the file.
Raster only:
If you are saving the image with the LUT and the layer
contains attributes, the Raster only option becomes
available. When it is clicked, the raster data is saved
without the attribute data.
Save selected shapes only:
If you are saving the image with the LUT and the layer
contains attributes and shapes are selected, the Save
selected shapes only option is available. When it is
enabled, only the records that you have selected in the
Attribute Manager are saved in the file.
Save selected fields only:
If you are saving the image with the LUT and the layer
contains attributes and fields are selected, the Save
selected fields only option is available. When it is
enabled, only the fields that you have selected in the
Attribute Manager are saved in the file.
Output:
Lets you choose a target file for saving the LUT, select a
format for the file, and choose or create a new layer
150

Geomatica® Focus
within your target file.
File:
Lets you select a target file for your LUT segment.
Browse:
Opens the File Selector dialog box, where you can
browse for a file not shown in the File list.
Format:
Lets you choose an output format from a list of available
formats.
Options:
Opens the GDB Options Editor. (See Selecting GDB
format options on page 145 )
Layer:
Lets you choose a target layer from the list of layers. You
can also choose to save your LUT to a new layer.
Properties:
Opens the Output Layer Properties dialog box.
Opening the Clipping/Subsetting
panel
PCI Geomatics
Clipping and subsetting data are effective methods
working with large data sets. In research and testing
situations, you may want to create subsets of a large data
base. By working with small representative areas, you
can reduce processing times or you can use file subsets
to test an image process. When you obtain a promising
result on a subset, you can repeat the process on a
larger, more complex scene.
Before creating a subset or a clip, you should consider
the output format. A subset file is based on the file type of
the source file by default. You can change the output
format of a subset to any GDB-compatible data type. For
some file types you may want to add or remove
information. The Clipping/Subsetting process lets you
choose the file data type for a clip or subset with the GDB
Options Editor.
When you have selected a file, you can work with the
Available Layers list. The list of layers depends on the
output format you have chosen. For example, if you
select a format that only supports vector data (for
example, SHP format), only vector layers are listed.
Note: If vector georeferences are not compatible with the
source file, vectors in the segment are not clipped. A
warning message shows a list of incompatible vector
segments. Georeferencing is compatible when they are
equal, or when one is an under specified form of the
other.
• From the Tools menu, click Clipping/Subsetting.
151

Geomatica® Focus
Clipping and subsetting images
When using the Clipping/Subsetting feature, you must
specify the bounds of a clip or subset and then run the
process. For more information, see Opening the
Clipping/Subsetting panel on page 151 .
1. From the Clipping/Subsetting dialog box, choose
a file from the File list box in the Input area.
If the file is not listed, click Browse and choose a
file from the File Selector dialog box.
2. Enable the layers that you want to clip from the
Available Layers list.
• A check mark indicates the layers that will be
clipped.
3. In the Output area, choose a file from the File list
box.
• If the file is not listed, click Browse and
choose a file from the File Selector dialog
box.
• If you want to use the Select a Script Subset
File Definition Method, you can leave the File
box empty.
4. Select the file format that you want for the output
from the Format list box.
If you want to select specific options for the format,
click Options and select options from the GDB
Options Editor.
5. Enter a value that you want to use for pixels without
data in the output file in the Initialization Value spin
box. Use a value that does not occur in the image
being clipped.
PCI Geomatics
If you want to give the initialization value the
metadata tag of no data, enable the Set as No Data
Value check box.
6. If you want to save the defined clip region boundary
as a vector layer in the output file, enable the
Output Clip Boundary Vector check box.
7. Depending on how you want to use to clip the
image, select one of the following options from the
Definition Method list box:
• User-entered Coordinates: enters the corner
coordinates for the clip region. All layers will
be clipped to fit that region. See Defining the
clip region with user-entered coordinates on
page 153 .
• Select a File: uses a smaller, intersecting file
to define the bounds of a subset. See Defining
the clip region by selecting a file on page 153 .
• Select a Clip Layer: uses a smaller,
intersecting layer from a file to define the
bounds of a subset. See Defining the clip
region by selecting a layer on page 154 .
• Select a Named Region: bases the clip on a
named region you created in Focus. See
Defining the clip region by selecting a named
region on page 154 .
• Select a Script Subset File: creates several
clip regions on the same image. You can
create a text file containing the coordinates
and the output file name; Focus automatically
produces the series of subset files. See
Defining the clip region by selecting a script
subset file on page 154 .
• Use Current View: bases the clip on the
region displayed in the view pane. Only
152

Geomatica® Focus
available from Area view. See Defining the clip
region using the Zoom tools on page 158 .
8. Click Clip.
Defining the clip region with user-entered
coordinates
You can define the clip region by manually entering
coordinates for the exact area of the data you want to
save as a subset. The following procedures follow step 7
in Clipping and subsetting images on page 152 .
To set the clip region
1. In the Definition Method list box, choose
User-entered Coordinates.
2. In the Coordinate Type list box, choose one of the
following formats to define the coordinates for the
clip region:
• Raster extents: defines the clip region by
identifying upper-left and lower-right pixel and
line coordinates.
• Geocoded extents: defines the clip region by
identifying the georeferenced coordinates of
the upper-left and lower-right corners.
• Long/Lat extents: defines the clip region by
identifying the geographic coordinates of the
upper-left and lower-right corners.
• Raster offset/size: defines the clip region by
identifying the pixel and line coordinates of the
upper-left corner and providing the number of
pixels in width and the number of line in
length.
PCI Geomatics
• Geocoded offset/size: defines the clip region
by identifying the georeferenced coordinates
of the upper-left corner and providing width
and length in the units of measurement of the
input coordinate system.
3. In the Upper Left boxes, type the coordinates for
the top-left corner of the clip region.
• If you selected Raster extents, Geocoded
extents, or Long/Lat extents from the
Coordinate Type list box, type the
coordinates for the bottom-right corner of the
clip region in the Lower Right boxes.
• If you selected Raster offset/size from the
Coordinate Type list box, type a value
representing the number of pixels in the Width
box and type a value representing the number
of lines that you want to form the clip region in
the Height box.
• If you selected Geocoded offset/size from the
Coordinate Type list box, identify the size of
the clip region. Using the measurement unit of
the projection, type the distance for the width
in the Width box and type the distance for the
height in the Height box.
4. Click Clip.
To change a clip area with the bounding outline
1. In the Preview area, drag a bounding outline corner
until you have the size you want.
2. Drag the bounding outline to a new location.
3. Click Clip.
Defining the clip region by selecting a file
153

Geomatica® Focus
You can use a smaller intersecting file to define the
bounds of a subset. The Select a File Method requires
two files. You use one file as input and the other to define
the subset. The definition file must be smaller than the
source file. The following procedures follow step 7 in
Clipping and subsetting images on page 152 .
1. In the Define Clip Region area, choose Select a
File from the Definition Method list box.
2. Choose a file from the File list box.
If the file is not listed, click Browse and choose a
file from the File Selector dialog box.
3. Click Clip.
Defining the clip region by selecting a layer
You can also use a smaller intersecting layer to define
the bounds of a subset. The Select a Clip Layer method
works the same way as the Select a file method. You can
use one layer as input and another layer to define the
subset. The definition layer must be smaller than the
source layer. The following procedures follow step 7 in
Clipping and subsetting images on page 152 .
1. In the Define Clip Region area, choose Select a
Clip Layer from the Definition Method list box.
2. Choose a file that you want to use as the clip region
from the File list box.
If the file is not listed, click Browse and choose a
file from the File Selector dialog box.
3. Choose a layer from the Layer list box.
If the layer contains vectors, you can use only the
PCI Geomatics
selected shapes in the layer to define the clip
region. To use only the selected shapes, enable the
Clip using selected shapes only check box.
4. Enable one of the following options:
• Extents: uses the rectangular extents of the
vectors as the clip region.
• Shape(s) Boundary: uses the actual area
covered by the vectors as the clip region.
5. Click Clip.
Defining the clip region by selecting a
named region
You can use the bounds of a named region to define a
subset clip. You must have at least one named region in
the source data to use this method. Named regions can
only be saved as Geomatica Project (.gpr) files. The
following procedures follow step 7 in Clipping and
subsetting images on page 152 .
1. In the Define Clip Region area, choose Select a
Named Region from the Definition Method list
box.
2. Choose a named region from the Named Region
list box.
3. Click Clip.
Defining the clip region by selecting a script
subset file
You can create several clip regions on the same image.
When you create a text file containing the coordinates
and the output file name, Focus automatically produces
154

Geomatica® Focus
the series of subset files. For more information, see
Creating the text file for Script Subset File method on
page 155 .
The following procedures follow step 7 in Clipping and
subsetting images on page 152 .
1. In the Define Clip Region area, choose Select a
Script Subset File from the Definition Method list
box.
2. Choose one of the following formats from the
Coordinate Type list box:
• Raster extents: if the clip region is defined by
identifying upper-left and lower-right pixel and
line coordinates.
• Geocoded extents: if the clip region is
defined by identifying the georeferenced
coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right
corners.
• Long/Lat extents: if the clip region is defined
by identifying the geographic coordinates of
the upper-left and lower-right corners.
• Raster offset/size: if the clip region is defined
by identifying the pixel and line coordinates of
the upper-left corner and providing the number
of pixels in width and the number of line in
length.
• Geocoded offset/size: if the clip region is
defined by identifying the georeferenced
coordinates of the upper-left corner and
providing width and length in the units of
measurement of the input#s coordinate
system.
3. Choose the text file containing the coordinates and
the output file names from the File list box.
PCI Geomatics
If the file is not listed, click Browse and choose a
file from the File Selector dialog box.
4. Click Clip.
You can verify for errors in the Focus Message
Center.
Creating the text file for the Script Subset
File method
You can create several clip regions from one file by using
the Script Subset File method. With this method you
create a text file containing the bounds of the clip regions
and list the output file names for each clip. Focus uses
the text file to automatically produce separate files
containing the subset of the data.
When you create the text file, you need to define the
bounds of the clip regions and the file names using a
particular format, depending on what you selected in the
Coordinate Type box on the Clipping/Subsetting dialog
box and which file format is selected in the Format box
under Output (see Clipping and subsetting images on
page 152 ). Each line in the text file contains the data for
one clip region. The line is divided into fields separated
by spaces. Each field contains a piece of information
about the size of the clip region and where to save the
file.
Raster extents:
The clip region is defined by identifying upper-left and
lower-right pixel and line coordinates. The format for
155

Geomatica® Focus
listing the pixel and line coordinates and the file name is
as follows:
ul_x ul_y lr_x lr_y path and filename
Where:
ul_x is the pixel coordinate for the upper-left corner of the
clip region
ul_y is the line coordinate for the upper-left corner of the
clip region
lr_x is the pixel coordinate for the lower-right corner of the
clip region
lr_y is the line coordinate for the lower-right corner of the
clip region
For example:
82 115 254 302 C:\Clip1.pix
23 56 87 123 C:\Clip2.pix
Geocoded extents
The clip region is defined by identifying the
georeferenced coordinates of the upper-left and
lower-right corners.
ul_x ul_y lr_x lr_y path and filename
Where:
ul_x is the x coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip
region using the same projection as the input file
ul_y is the y coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip
region using the same projection as the input file
lr_x is the x coordinate for the lower-right corner of the
clip region using the same projection as the input file
lr_y is the y coordinate for the lower-right corner of the
clip region using the same projection as the input file
For example:
433000.000 5876000.000 443000.000 5873000.000
C:\Clip1.pix
432567.973 5876348.000 435685.342 5874343.341
C:\Clip2.pix
Long/Lat extents:
The clip region is defined by identifying the geographic
coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners. The
extents can be defined suing a number of different
formats such as the following example. For more
information, see the online help for LONG/LAT INPUT
under Projection Reference in the Technical Reference.
ul_x ul_y lr_x lr_y path and filename
Where:
PCI Geomatics
156

Geomatica® Focus
ul_x is the longitude value for the upper-left corner of the
clip region
ul_y is the latitude value for the upper-left corner of the
clip region
lr_x is the longitude value for the lower-right corner of the
clip region
lr_y is the latitude value for the lower-right corner of the
clip region
For example:
117d46'10"W 33d44'55"N 117d40'10"W 33d38'55"N
C:\Clip1.pix
117d35'22"W 33d40'30"N 117d30'22"W 33d33'30"N
C:\Clip2.pix
Raster offset/size:
The clip region is defined by identifying the pixel and line
coordinates of the upper-left corner and providing the
number of pixels in width and the number of line in
length.
ul_x ul_y width height path and filename
Where:
ul_x is the pixel coordinate for the upper-left corner of the
clip region
ul_y is the line coordinate for the upper-left corner of the
clip region
width is the number of pixels from the upper-left corner to
the upper-right corner of the clip region
height is the number of lines from the upper-left corner to
the lower-left corner of the clip region
For example
34 56 400 400 C:\Clip1.pix
135 127 300 100 C:\Clip2.pix
Geocoded offset/size:
The clip region is defined by identifying the
georeferenced coordinates of the upper-left corner and
providing width and length in the units of measurement of
the input's coordinate system.
ul_x ul_y width height path and filename
Where:
ul_x is the x coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip
region using the same projection as the input file
ul_y is the y coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip
region using the same projection as the input file
width is the distance from the upper-left corner to the
PCI Geomatics
157

Geomatica® Focus
upper-right corner of the clip region.
height is the distance from the upper-left corner to the
lower-left corner of the clip region.
For example:
433000.000 5876000.000 300.000 300.000 C:\Clip1.pix
32567.973 5876348.000 1500.000 2500.000 C:\Clip2.pix
Defining the clip region using the Zoom
tools
You create your clip from the region displayed in the view
pane. It is only available in Area view mode. The
following procedures follow step 7 in Clipping and
subsetting images on page 152 .
1. Open the file that you want to clip.
2. From the View menu, click Area View Mode.
3. Use the zoom tools to display the area that you
want to clip in the view pane.
4. From the Tools menu, click Clipping/Subsetting.
5. In the Define Clip Region area of the
Clipping/Subsetting dialog box, choose Use
Current View from the Definition Method list box.
6. Click Clip.
Creating multiple subset tiles
You can create multiple subset files using the tiling
feature on the Clipping/Subsetting dialog box. In the
PCI Geomatics
Clipping/Subsetting dialog box preview window, the
bounding outline is replaced by a grid to help you divide
the data into the number and size of tiles you want. After
you have selected and prepared the data you want to
work with, you access the tile output controls by clicking
the Tile Output command button. You can choose from
two tiling methods and you can control the amount of
overlap between each file. When you process the data,
Focus creates a new file based on each tile and the input
data you selected.
1. In the Clipping/Subsetting dialog box, click Tile
Output.
2. In the Tile Definition area, choose one of the
following options from the Definition Method list
box:
• Use tile size and overlap:creates tiles based
on the size measurement values that you
enter in the Tile Size X and Y boxes.
• Use number of tiles and overlap: creates
tiles based on the values you enter in the
Number of Tiles X and Y boxes.
3. Choose a unit of measure from the Units list box.
The Geocoded option derives the tile coordinates
from the input data.
You can move and re-size the tile bounding grid to
any location within the preview window.
4. Enter values that represent the amount of overlap
you want between each of your subset files in the
Overlap X and Y boxes.
5. Click Clip.
Selecting a clip region
158

Geomatica® Focus
A clip region focuses attention on a location by hiding the
rest of the area from view. The concealed areas remain
available and are included in any processes that you
employ. You can create a subset or clip of the data. (See
Opening the Clipping/Subsetting panel on page 151 )
1. Open the Clipping Layer list and choose the layer
that you want to use to define the extents of the clip
region.
If you want to view only the selected shapes, enable
the Clip using selected shapes only check box.
2. Click OK.
Opening the Data Merge wizard
You can combine a group of files, regardless of bounds,
projection, data type, or resolution into a single output file
with the Data Merge Wizard. When you start the Data
Merge Wizard, follow the instructions at the top of the
wizard dialog boxes for each step. The following
information gives an outline of how to add information to
each of the Data Merge Wizard dialog boxes.
If a layer does not have a proper projection, it will not be
available; however, LUT, PCT, and GCP layers can be
transferred even if the source files have no
georeferencing. A warning message opens when
georeferencing is not compatible. The Data Merge
Wizard has three steps: choosing input layers, setting the
output and georeferencing, and setting up output layers.
• From the Tools menu, click Data Merge.
Choosing an input layer
1. In the Data Merge Wizard, click Browse.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, select the file you
want to add and click Open.
If you want to view the properties of a file, right-click
the file in the Available Files/Layers list and click
Properties.
3. In the Available Files/Layers list, enable a check
mark next to any layer that you want to add as an
input layer.
4. Click Next.
Naming the output file
In this step, you can set the georeferencing and
reprojection parameters for the output. You can select a
new or existing file to receive the merged layers. You
must first name the file that will receive the merged data
layers in the name box.
1. Choose a file and path from the Name list box.
If the file is not listed, click Browse and choose a
file from the File Selector dialog box.
Existing files are not overwritten. The merged data
is added to an existing file.
2. Choose an output file format from the Output
format list box.
PCI Geomatics
159

Geomatica® Focus
For information on format options, click the ? button
next to the Options box.
When merged results are written to existing files,
associated georeferencing parameter fields are not
available in step 2 of the Data Merge Wizard.
3. In the Georeferencing Setup area, set the
following items:
• Projection: You can get the map
representation, assigned to the output file,
from an existing file by selecting a file option or
you can manually enter it.
• Extents: Are the upper-left and lower-right
corner coordinates of the output file. The
bounds can be based on an existing file,
derived from either the union or intersection
boundaries of all the input file, or it can be
entered manually.
• Union: Output file extents are large enough to
include all input file extents. No data is
cropped.
• Intersection: The output file extents are
based upon the region of overlap for all input
files.
• Resolution: Pixel dimensions can be based
on an existing file or can be entered manually.
• Reprojection Parameters have the following
settings:
• Resampling: Bitmaps are automatically
resampled using the nearest-neighbor,
bilinear-interpolation, and cubic-convolution
methods.
• Transform Order: You can choose from
Exact, Thin Plate Spline, and 1st Order to
PCI Geomatics
5th Order polynomial transformations. Each
pixel in a file is included in the calculation.
• Sampling Interval: For sampling intervals
higher than 1, the reprojected position is
calculated at each interval. A linear
interpolation is performed for the values in
between.
4. Click Next.
Setting up output layers
Focus checks each of the input layers for inconsistencies
in format and file projection. When inconsistencies are
detected, a warning message appears. All inappropriate
layers are ignored in the merge process.
You can change the following layer attributes:
Processing Order:
The layer order you see in Step 3 of the wizard is the
order in which layers are merged to the output file. By
default, the order is what was selected in the Choose
Input Layers step. To change the order, drag a layer up
or down the list.
Rename:
To rename a layer, right-click the layer and click Rename.
Remove:
To remove a layer, right-click the layer and click Remove.
160

Geomatica® Focus
Set Parameters:
To edit parameters, double-click a layer in the Select
Layer(s) list. A parameters dialog box opens for the
selected data type.
• Click Finish.
Data Merge wizard - Set Bitmap
Parameters dialog box
You can change the parameters for any data type in the
file tree.
You can change several parameters for the output
bitmap. You can identify the source file and layer, select
a target layer or create a new one, and adjust both the
order of transformation and sample interval.
Input File:
Reports the input bitmap you are working with.
Input Layer:
Reports the output layer where your input bitmap is
located.
Output Layer:
Allows you to choose an existing output layer or to create
a new one.
Transform Order:
PCI Geomatics
Lets you choose a different transformation order for the
bitmap output.
The following transformation orders are available:
• Exact
• Thin Plate Spline
• 1st order
• 2nd order
• 3rd order
• 4th order
• 5th order
Sampling Interval:
Allows you to change the sampling interval for the bitmap
file.
Data Merge wizard - Set Image Parameters
dialog box
You can change the parameters for any data type in the
file tree.
You can change several parameters for the output
bitmap. You can identify the source file and layer, select
a target layer or create a new one, and adjust both the
order of transformation and sample interval.
Input File:
Reports the input image you are working with.
Input Layer:
161

Geomatica® Focus
Reports the output layer where your input image is
located.
Output Layer:
Allows you to choose an existing output layer or to create
a new one.
No Data Value:
Transform Order:
Allows you to choose an order of transformation for your
merged output.
Sampling Interval:
Allows you to change the sampling interval for the
merged output.
Lets you use a no-data value parameter in your output
image file.
Output Type:
Lets you choose a bit-depth for your image output file.
These output types are available:
• 8-bit unsigned
• 16-bit signed
• 16-bit unsigned
• 32-bit
Scaling Function:
Lets you choose a scaling function for your output file.
(See Available scaling methods on page 258 )
Resampling:
Lets you choose a resampling method for your merged
output. (See Maximum bounds and resampling methods
on page 138 )
PCI Geomatics
162

Geomatica® Focus
Chapter 4
Opening the Algorithm Librarian
The Algorithm Library contains a set of predefined and
user-defined programs that are organized in a tree
structure. You can expand a category in the tree the way
you would any other Windows application by clicking on
the + next to a folder. When you expand a category or a
sub-category, the items inside each folder are arranged
in alphabetical order. Some folders contain sub-folders
and some contain only a list of algorithms.
The Algorithm Librarian dialog box allows you to search
the algorithm directory tree. You can also create your
own user-defined category folders to hold the algorithms
that you use most often. (See Algorithm categories on
page 164 andCreating user-defined categories on page 167
).
• From the Tools menu, click Algorithm Librarian.
You can search through the categories within each folder
using the Find utility or you can browse through the
categories based on the directory topics found in each
folder. (See Finding an algorithm on page 166 )
About the Algorithm Librarian dialog
PCI Geomatics
box
The Algorithm Librarian dialog box lets you work with the
Algorithm Library. You can search the library and open a
Module Control Panel (MCP) for the algorithms you want
to use. (See Working with an algorithm MCP on page 170 )
Algorithm Library:
Lists algorithms in a directory tree in the Algorithm Library
pane on the left side of the Algorithm Librarian dialog
box. You can expand the directory tree to browse, locate,
and select algorithms.
Open:
Lets you open the Module Control Panel (MCP) for the
algorithm you have selected in the algorithm library.(See
Working with an algorithm MCP on page 170 )
Find:
Opens the Find Algorithm dialog box. (See Finding an
algorithm on page 166 )
Selected Algorithm:
Displays the name of the algorithm and an icon
representing the algorithm you have selected.
Algorithm licensing
Some algorithms may not be available with the
163

Geomatica® Focus
Geomatica license you have purchased. Files in the
Algorithm Library that have a lock icon to the left of the
algorithm name are not available. Contact PCI Geomatics
for more information on your license package and for
advice on the best Geomatica license for your needs.
Algorithm categories
Algorithms are organized by themes or categories into a
directory tree containing two top-level categories. The
Algorithm list can appear in two different ways. If created
from a user-defined category, the Algorithm Library list
opens with the User Defined category expanded and at
the top of the directory tree. The PCI Predefined directory
is collapsed and at the bottom of the directory tree. If you
have not added a user-defined category, the Algorithm
Library list opens with the PCI Predefined directory. In the
PCI User Defined category, algorithms are listed in
sub-category folders within a top-level folder.
Moving down the directory tree, the top-level
algorithm categories are:
User Defined (top-level directory)
PCI Predefined (top-level directory)
• All Algorithms
• All Bitmap Algorithms
• All Image Algorithms
• All Vector Algorithms
• Geomatica
• Analysis
• Classification
PCI Geomatics
• Data Interchange
• Image Correction
• Image Processing
• Radar Analysis
• Spatial Analysis
• Utilities
Algorithm sub-categories
When you open the Algorithm Librarian dialog box, many
of the top-level category folders contain several
sub-category folders. The following lists show the
sub-categories for each of the top-level folders.
All Algorithms:
Lists all the algorithms available in the Algorithm Library.
All Bitmap Algorithms:
Contains all the Geomatica algorithms that can be used
with bitmap data.
All Image Algorithms:
Contains all of the Geomatica algorithms that can be
used when working with Images.
All Vector Algorithms:
Contains all of the Geomatica algorithms that can be
used with vector data.
Geomatica:
164

Geomatica® Focus
Lists algorithms on the basis of your Geomatica license.
This folder may contain a combination of six
sub-categories, depending on your license:
• Fundamentals
• Prime
• Optical
• ATCOR3
• Radar
• Hyperspectral
• Hyperspectral Image Compressor
• Pan Sharpening
Analysis:
Contains the following Geomatica algorithms for
analyzing data:
• AVHRR
• DEM Analysis
• Favorability Analysis
• Geological/Geophysical Analysis
• Hydrological Analysis
• Hyperspectral Analysis
• Multi-layer Modeling
• Vegetation Analysis
Classification:
Contains six sub-category folders:
• Advanced Classification
• Data Exploration
• Neural Networks
• Post-Classification Analysis
• Supervised Classification
• Unsupervised Classification
Data Interchange:
Contains six sub-categories of algorithms:
• CD Reading/Utilities
• Image Interchange
• Oracle Database Loading
• Tape Reading
• Tape Writing/Utilities
• Text File Interchange
• Vector Interchange
Image Correction:
Has four sub-directories:
• Atmospheric Correction
• AVHRR Orbital Navigation
• Geometric Correction
• Image Mosaicking
Image Processing:
Has seven sub-directories:
• 3-D Rendering
• Data Fusion
• Enhancements
• Frequency Transforms
• Image Filtering
• Image Operations
• Image Transformations
Radar Analysis:
Contains four sub-directories:
PCI Geomatics
165

Geomatica® Focus
• Airborne Radar Analysis
• Polarimetric SAR Analysis
• SAR Speckle Filtering
• SAR Radar Analysis
Spatial Analysis:
Has five sub-directories:
• Utilities
• Proximity Analysis
• Overlay Analysis
• Topographer
• Conversion Tools
Utilities:
Has four sub-directories of utility algorithms:
• Interpolation
• PCIDSK Reports
• PCIDSK Utilities
• Vector Utilities
Finding an algorithm
All of the algorithms listed in the Algorithm Library show
the name of an algorithm followed by a brief description
of what it does.
There are several ways to find algorithms:
• Open on page 164 the Algorithm Library and
browse for algorithms that work with basic data
types. For example, the PCI Predefined folder
contains sub-folders for bitmap, image, and vector
algorithms.
PCI Geomatics
• Browse on page 164 through the categories by
clicking the folders and sub-folders in the Algorithm
Library tree.
• Search on page 166 for an algorithm using the Find
Algorithm utility.
You can decide which method to use based on the
information you have about the algorithm and what tasks
you want to perform on your data. (See Searching for an
algorithm by category on page 167 .)
Using the Find Algorithm utility
If you know the name of an algorithm you want or you are
not sure, you can use the Find Algorithm utility to locate it
quickly. You can search through the entire library using
keywords to locate an algorithm, or you can search
through the contents of a selected folder.
1. In the Algorithm Librarian dialog box, right-click a
file folder and click Find.
2. In the Find Algorithm dialog box, type all or part of
the algorithm name in the Find what box.
3. Enable any of the following check boxes:
• Match algorithm name # searches for an
algorithm using the name of the algorithm.
• Match algorithm description using any
keyword # searches the Algorithm Library
based on any of the keywords you have
entered in the Find what box.
• Match algorithm description using all
keywords # searches the Algorithm Library
based on all of the keywords you have entered
in the Find what box.
• Wrap around searches through the Algorithm
166

Geomatica® Focus
Library continuously until you decide to stop.
4. Click Find Next.
The Algorithm Librarian automatically opens the
folder where your algorithm is located and the
algorithm is selected.
If you want to find another algorithm with a similar
name, click Find Next again.
Note: To search the entire contents right-click the All
Algorithms folder or right-click anywhere inside the
Algorithm Library other than on a file folder. You can also
use the Find button to search the entire directory tree as
well as a selected category.
Searching for an algorithm by category
The Find Algorithm dialog box lets you search through
the algorithm library using the name of an algorithm or
using keywords. You can also control the way the results
of your search are displayed.
Find what: Lets you enter either an algorithm name or a
keyword description.
Match algorithm name: Lets you search for an algorithm
using the name of the algorithm. For a list of Modeler and
Algorithm Library names and references see the
Geomatica online Help.
Match Algorithm description using any keyword: Lets
you search the algorithm library based on any of the
keywords you have entered in the Find what box.
PCI Geomatics
For example, with this option selected, a search on
#Classify report# returns any algorithm with either of the
words classify or report in the algorithm description.
Match Algorithm description using all keywords: Lets
you search the algorithm library based on all of the
keywords you have entered in the Find what box.
For example, with this option selected, a search on
'Lookup Table' returns only algorithms with both of the
words Lookup and Table in the same algorithm
description.
Wrap around: The wrap around option lets you search
through the algorithm library continuously until you decide
to stop. When this check box is enabled, the Find
Algorithm utility continues to show the results of the
search each time you click Find Next. When this check
box is disabled, the utility searches through the Algorithm
Library once. When the search is completed, the Find
Algorithm utility shows an End of search message.
1. Locate a category by scrolling down the Algorithm
Library list and select the file folder for the category
you want.
2. Click Find.
3. In the Find Algorithm dialog box, enter a name or
keyword for the algorithm in the Find what box.
4. Enable a check box for any search criteria you want
to use.
5. Click Find Next.
Creating user-defined categories
167

Geomatica® Focus
The Algorithm Library contains a top-level, user-defined
folder. You can create new folders in the User Defined
folder to hold collections of your favorite algorithms.
When you drag an algorithm icon from a PCI-predefined
folder to a User Defined folder, a shortcut to the algorithm
is created.
A shortcut menu allows you to search user-defined
folders, open and close any open MCPs, create new
categories, show and hide folders, rename individual
folders, and access online Help.
The User Defined shortcut menu has the following
options
Find: Opens the Find Algorithm dialog box. (See Finding
an algorithm on page 166 )
Close All Panels:
Closes all open MCPs in the PCI-predefined folders.
New Category:
Adds a new folder to the User Defined folder.
Hide:
Hides the User Define folder.
Show All:
Shows all of the folders in the User Defined directory,
including any folders that have been hidden using the
PCI Geomatics
Hide command.
Rename:
Lets you rename the User Defined directory.
Help:
Opens the Focus Help for the Algorithm Library.
1. From the Algorithm Librarian dialog box,
right-click the User Defined folder and click New
Category.
2. Type a name for the new category and press Enter.
3. If you want to add a second folder level to your new
User Defined folder, right-click a new category
folder and repeat the procedure.
Adding algorithms to the user defined folder
You can create a collection of shortcuts to your favorite
algorithms by dragging the algorithms from a
PCI-predefined folder to a User Defined folder. You can
also create a shortcut by right-clicking a PCI-predefined
algorithm and clicking Add to User Defined.
1. Right-click the user-defined folder and click
Rename.
2. Type a new name and press Enter.
Using an algorithm
Every algorithm in the Algorithm Library has a Module
Control Panel (MCP) that you can open from the
168

Geomatica® Focus
Algorithm Librarian dialog box. You use the MCP to
control data inputs and outputs and to assign the required
information for the results you want.
• In the Algorithm Librarian dialog box, right-click an
algorithm and click Open.
You can also double-click the algorithm.
About module control panels
Algorithm MCPs are tabbed dialog boxes. The number of
tabs and the controls they contain vary depending on the
data requirements and the number and type of
parameters available to the algorithm.
Not all algorithm MCPs look the same. You can
encounter some variation in the algorithm MCP inputs,
functions, and features. In general, a MCP has one tab
each for file selection, input parameters, and log. The
Files tab typically has a pane labelled Input Ports and
may have a pane labelled Output Ports. The Input
Params tab items vary according to the requirements of
the algorithm you are using. Some MCPs also have an
Output Parameters tab that contains controls for the
algorithm output.
Typically, an algorithm MCP has tabs and controls similar
to those shown in the following example.
Files tab
Lets you direct the data that you want to process with the
PCI Geomatics
algorithm you have selected. Most algorithm MCPs have
Input Ports panes and Output Ports panes under the
Files tabs and some MCP Files tabs have additional
controls.
Input Ports:
Allows you to select the data you want to process with
the algorithm you have selected. You can use data
already open or you can use the Browse button to select
other input data.
Browse:
Opens a file selection dialog box, where you can browse
for input data. You can open data directly from any
Algorithm MCP using the Browse button under the Files
tab.
Output Ports:
Lets you direct the output to a viewer, to a project file, or
to both. You can save the output to the location you are
already working in or you can use the Browse button to
save your output to another location.
Browse:
Opens a file selection dialog box, where you can save
your algorithm output to another location.
Input Params tab:
Lets you set the parameters for the algorithm input data.
169

Geomatica® Focus
Each algorithm has a unique set of parameters.
Output Parameters Tab:
Provides parameter controls for the output from your
algorithm. Not all MCPs have an Output Parameters tab.
Log tab:
Displays run-time progress, including any run-time errors
that occur when you run the algorithm. When you run
your algorithm a progress monitor opens indicating the
progress of the algorithm. When the algorithm has
finished running the algorithm MCP automatically
changes to show the Log tab information.
Note: Some algorithms work only on a single layer, but in
most cases algorithms can use most or all of the files and
layers in a project.
Finding help topics for all algorithms
Online Help is available for all algorithms. You can find
the details of what the algorithm does and what the input
and output requirements are for each algorithm in the
Geomatica Help.
1. From the Help menu, click General.
2. In the Geomatica Help, click the Contents tab and
expand the Geomatica Algorithm Reference topic.
3. Expand the Modeler and Algorithm Librarian
Reference topic.
PCI Geomatics
All of the algorithms for Modeler and the Algorithm
Library are listed in alphabetical order.
Finding help from the Algorithm Librarian
dialog box
1. From the main menu, click Tools and select
Algorithm Librarian.
The Algorithm Librarian dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to the algorithm.
3. Right-click the algorithm and select Help.
Finding help from a Module Control Panel
You can find help from the Module Control Panel (MCP)
of a selected algorithm.
1. From the main menu, click Tools and select
Algorithm Librarian.
The Algorithm Librarian dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to the algorithm and select it.
3. Click Open.
The MCP for the algorithm appears.
4. Click the Help button.
Working with an algorithm MCP
170

Geomatica® Focus
Algorithm MCPs provide the controls for using the
algorithms in the Algorithm Library and are linked directly
to any open data. If you have data loaded in Focus
before using the Algorithm Library, the data in the current
project is listed under the Files tab in the Input Ports pane
of the algorithm MCP. You can select the input layers you
want to process under the Files tab in the MCP Input
Ports pane before you run the algorithm.
Working with an example
In the following example, the ASP algorithm is used to
calculate the surface aspect of elevation data. This
algorithm is found in the Spatial Analysis category under
the Topographer sub-category.
The ASP algorithm calculates the surface aspect or
orientation angles from an elevation image. These angles
represent the directions the slopes are facing. The output
image contains orientation angles from 0 to 360 degrees,
relative to the top of the image, with areas of zero slope
assigned a single user-specified value.
The SLP program calculates the surface slope. Together,
the ASP and SLP programs can completely define a
surface in terms of degree of slope and direction it is
facing for every pixel in the image.
To begin this exercise, make sure you have imagery
open in the view pane and the Algorithm Library is open.
Search for and open the ASP algorithm.
Using the ASP algorithm
When the algorithm is opened from the Algorithm Library,
configure it using the ASP MCP.
Setting up the input port
The input port contains the elevation layer and must be a
raster layer. This connection is mandatory.
1. In the ASP Module Control Panel, click the Files
tab.
If necessary, expand all nodes next to Input
Elevation Layer to show all the available input
channels.
2. Enable the check box next to channel 10 [16S]
USGS Elevation Data.
Setting up output ports
The output port contains the aspect layer, which needs to
be a raster layer. This connection is optional.
1. Expand all nodes next to the Output Aspect Layer
to show Viewer and Untitled.pix as the available
output options.
For the current example, direct your output to both
the viewer and to a .pix output file of your choice.
2. Enable the check box next to Viewer.
3. If you want to select an output file as an output
port, enable the check box next to Untitled.pix.
PCI Geomatics
171

Geomatica® Focus
4. Select Untitled.pix.
5. Click Untitled.pix again, type Calculate surface
Aspect.pix, and press Enter.
Setting up input parameters
The ASP algorithm is controlled by the input parameters.
Calculation of the real and projected areas depends on
the proper specification of the following values:
Pixel X Size (m)
Specifies, in meters, the X dimension of each pixel on the
ground.
Pixel Y Size (m)
Specifies, in meters, the Y dimension of each pixel on the
ground.
Elevation Step Size (m)
Specifies, in meters, the elevation corresponding to each
gray level. A change in the size of the Elevation Step
results in a corresponding change in the gray level in the
elevation image. This parameter is mandatory.
Zero Slope Image Value
Specifies the value that will be assigned to pixels in the
output image when the intermediate slope calculation is
zero. If not specified, these pixels are assigned a value of
510 because the output channel is 32-bit.
PCI Geomatics
1. Click the Input Params 1 tab.
2. To change the Pixel X Size in meters, modify the
value in the text field for the parameter as
necessary.
The default value is 30.0 meters.
3. To change the Elevation Step Size in meters,
modify the value in the text field for the parameter
as necessary.
The default value is 1.0 meter.
4. To change the Zero Slope Image Value, modify the
value in the text field for the parameter as
necessary.
The default value is none.
Running the ASP algorithm
Once you have set up the algorithm, you can run it from
the ASP MCP.
• In the ASP Module Control Panel, click Run.
Viewing the results
After running the ASP algorithm, you can view
information about the output layer.
To view output layer information
1. Click the Maps tab in the viewer.
172

Geomatica® Focus
To view output file information
1. Click the Files tab.
2. Expand the Files node.
You should see the following information listed
under Rasters:
1[32R]ASP Aspect from elevation channel 10.
To view execution status
1. Click the Log tab.
If the algorithm ran successfully, the messages
Time of execution and Execution Successful are
displayed in the text area under the Log tab.
To view the program results
1. Study the surface aspect of the elevation data in the
viewer.
If the algorithm ran successfully, the messages
Time of execution and Execution Successful are
displayed in the text area under the Log tab.
Understanding the results
The ASP algorithm uses the elevation layer in the input
channel to calculate the corresponding aspect angles.
PCI Geomatics
The results are written to the aspect layer in the output
channel, which is either the viewer or a .pix file. The
correct calculation of the aspect values depends on the
proper specification of the Pixel X Size and Pixel Y Size.
Aspect Values:
Aspect at a point is calculated as the orientation of the
plane formed by the vector connecting the left and right
neighbours and the vector connecting the upper and
lower neighbours of the pixel or the angle between the
top of the image and the projection of the normal vector
of this plane onto the horizontal plane. True aspect
values will always range between 0 and 360 degrees.
Zero Slope Values:
Areas where the slope is zero are treated as a special
case and are assigned a user-specified aspect value
from the Zero Slope Image Value input parameter. If this
input parameter is not specified, a default value of 510 is
assigned.
Adding functions to the algorithm
library
You can create new algorithms using PACE and EASI
programming and add them to the Algorithm Library,
which uses definition files to describe available modules
and their properties. Module definition files define the
algorithms in the Algorithm Library.
You can find module definition files in the etc folder,
173

Geomatica® Focus
located in the Geomatica program folders on your hard
disk. Module definition files use the file name extension
.def. New modules must be added to a specific package
definition file in order to be accessible in the Algorithm
Library.
You can convert your PACE programs into Modeler
modules or Focus algorithms without having to write
scripts using the Geomatica Software Development Kit
(SDK). The Geomatica SDK lets you create your own
algorithms and add them to the Algorithm Library.
Information for EASI and PACE programming languages
is available in the Geomatica SDK. (See the PCI
Geomatica SDK).
PCI Geomatics
174

Geomatica® Focus
Chapter 5
Starting a classification session
To start a supervised classification session
1. From the Map tab, right-click the layer you want to
classify and click Image Classification and then
click Supervised.
To start an unsupervised classification session
1. From the Map tab, right-click the layer you want to
classify and click Image Classification and then
click Unsupervised.
To start a classification session
1. In the Session Selection dialog box, click New
Session if you want to begin a new classification.
2. If you want to choose a previous selection, click a
session in the Sessions available box and click OK
or click File to select a file.
Unsupervised classification
An unsupervised classification organizes image
information into discrete classes of spectrally similar pixel
values. To perform unsupervised classification in Focus,
you work through panels and dialog boxes to configure
your data files and to choose the number of classes that
the computer differentiates.
When you finish configuring a classification, you can run
the process. Focus automatically classifies the spectral
values in the image data. You can view the classification
results in the view pane and as a classification report.
Configuring a new classification session
You can initialize a new classification session with or
without data files open.
1. In the Session Configuration dialog box, type a
name in the Description box.
It is not necessary to identify features in the image
in unsupervised classifications. Unsupervised
classifiers do not use training sites; they divide the
image pixels into natural groupings of statistically
similar gray-level pixel values.
If you want to work with more than one algorithm in
the same session, use the Open command on the
Select Algorithm dialog box. The Select Algorithm
dialog box remains open until you click Close.
2. Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue color values to the
combination you want by clicking the appropriate
column for each channel.
PCI Geomatics
175

Geomatica® Focus
A project can contain several classifications, each
one using different sets of input channels.
3. In the Input Channels column, select channels you
need for your project.
4. Select an output channel to store your classification
by clicking in the Output Channel column for the
channel you want to use.
You can select an empty channel or you can over
write an existing channel, such as a channel
containing imagery of no consequence.
If there are no desirable or available output
channels, click Add Layer and enter values for
channels in the Channels to add boxes for the
appropriate channel types. Click Add.
5. Click OK.
The Unsupervised Classification dialog box
opens. Focus adds a classification metalayer to the
Maps tree and the RGB reference image you
specified opens in the view pane.
Initializing unsupervised classification
The Unsupervised Classification dialog box allows you to
choose the type of algorithm and the parameters you
want to use in the classification.
1. In the Unsupervised Classification dialog box,
enable one of the following algorithm options:
• K-Means
• Fuzzy K-Means
• IsoData
PCI Geomatics
2. In the algorithm Parameters table, click in the
appropriate box in the Values column and enter the
criteria that you want in the classification.
3. In the Classifications Options area, enable any of
the following check boxes:
• Show report
• Save signatures
• Create PCT
4. Choose a training site option from the Use bitmap
as mask list box.
If you choose an option other than None, choose a
mask region from the Classify region list box.
5. Click OK.
Note: It is recommended that you use many clusters (for
example, the full 255 allowed in an 8U channel) and then
perform aggregation to get the actual number of
information classes you want.
Note: To view the unclassified image, drag the
unclassified image file layer to the top of the Maps tree
above the Classification MetaLayer. The original image
appears in the view pane.
Reading a classification report
The classification report indicates the distribution of pixel
values across the number of classes set in the
Unsupervised Classification dialog box, a date stamp,
and the file path for the classified imagery. The
classification algorithm is also listed with the input
channels and the channel in the data file where the
results are stored.
176

Geomatica® Focus
The report also lists the number of clusters created by the
classification with the details for each cluster.
Clusters are groups of pixels with similar spectral
properties. The report tells you how many pixels make up
each cluster, the mean brightness value, and the
standard deviation for each of the input image channels.
Supervised classification
In supervised classification, you must rely on your own
pattern recognition skills and knowledge of the data in
determining the statistical criteria (signatures) for data
classification. To select reliable training sites, you should
have some information, either spatial or spectral, about
the pixels that you want to classify.
Carrying out effective supervised classification may take
practice. It requires you to develop the ability to recognize
your target features and visual patterns in your image
data. The process can be repetitive, depending on how
quickly you can produce satisfactory results.
The diagram below shows the task flow of the Supervised
Classification process.
The location of a specific characteristic, such as a land
cover type, may be known through reports on ground
truth. Ground truthing refers to the acquisition of
knowledge about the study area from field-work analysis,
aerial photography, or personal experience. Ground truth
data is considered to be the most accurate (true) data
available about the area you want to study and should be
collected at the same time as the remotely-sensed data,
so that the data corresponds as much as possible.
Sometimes, ground truth data may not be accurate, due
to errors, inaccuracies, and human error. Global
positioning system (GPS) receivers are useful in
conducting better ground truth studies and collecting
training sites.
The supervised classification process
PCI Geomatics
177

Geomatica® Focus
same files without re-initializing a new session each time.
Focus automatically assigns red, green, and blue (RGB)
values to the first three channels. You can select the
exact combination of channels by assigning the color
channels that define the reference image for collecting
your training sites and for doing any post-classification
analysis.
1. From the Analysis menu, click Image
Classification and then click Supervised.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select an
image file you want to classify.
3. Click Open.
4. In the Session Selection dialog box, click New
Session.
5. In the Session Configuration dialog box, type a
name for your classification in the Description box.
Note: When naming classification sessions, enter a
name in the Description text field that will distinguish
your current classification from others you create.
The Supervised Classification Process
Initializing a supervised classification
Like unsupervised classification, supervised classification
is initialized as a session. The initialization procedure
also helps you manage subsequent classifications on the
PCI Geomatics
Specifying the reference image
Focus automatically assigns red, green, and blue (RGB)
values to the first three channels. You can assign color
channels to define the reference image that will be used
during training site data collection and in any subsequent
post-classification analysis.
Because supervised classification requires you to rely on
your own pattern-recognition skills and a prior knowledge
of the scene, you may need to visually identify your
178

Geomatica® Focus
training areas from familiar colors in the ground cover. In
such cases, you must change the RGB values to match
the TM bands in the image data to produce a true
color-reference image.
The task of collecting training areas is made easier by
working with a reference image that simulates normal or
true color. However, personal preferences often guide the
choice of band - color combinations for interpretive
purposes. In some applications, you must use a different
combination of color channels; for example, channels that
fall outside the visible color range.
Whatever your preference, it is unlikely that the default
color assignment offered in the Session Configuration
dialog box will coincide with your choice. You can reset
the color assignments by clicking the corresponding cell
of the desired channel in each of the Red, Green, and
Blue columns. You can rearrange the color channels to
see a true color rendition of the image in the view pane.
Specifying the input channels
Spectral classes are groups of pixels that have uniform or
nearly similar brightness values in the different spectral
channels of the data. The spectral attributes of the
classes used to train the computer are determined by the
spectral channels that you choose to include in the
training and classification process. You can use Focus to
match the information classes you create with a spectral
class in the image data.
Note: To determine the optimal combination of bands for
PCI Geomatics
spectral discrimination in your training sites you can use
the channel select (CHNSEL) algorithm in the Algorithm
Librarian.
Once you have set the RGB values for true color, you
can define the spectral attributes for the ground cover
you want to classify. You must choose a set of data
channels that will define the spectral attributes or
signatures in your classes.
To select the input data set
1. In the Session Configuration dialog box, click in a
cell next to a spectral channel in the Input
Channels column.
A check mark indicates that the channel is selected.
2. Select a channel for collecting your training sites.
Note: You can use an empty channel, a channel
where the contents can be over written or you can
add a new working channel.
You can add empty channels to the Session
Configuration list and the Files tree.
To add a new channel
1. Click the Files tab and right-click the image file
folder.
2. Click New and then click Raster Layer.
3. In the Add Image Channels dialog box, choose the
179

Geomatica® Focus
bit depth and number of new channels you want to
add.
4. Click Add.
If you want to close the Add Image Channels
dialog box, click Close.
Once you have added channels, you must select
them in the Session Configuration dialog box so that
they receive the classification output. If you have
not added empty channels, you must select
channels that you intend to overwrite.
To select the output channel
1. In the Output Channel column, click a channel.
2. Click OK.
The details of the configuration setup are now
shown in the Maps tree and the reference image
opens in the view pane. The Training Site Editor
dialog box opens with a blank training channel.
The training channel is now write-enabled and
ready for you to begin collecting your training sites.
Training sites and ground cover
You designate training sites based on samples of
different surface cover types in your imagery by drawing
colored regions or areas over the parts of the image that
are likely to be the information classes you want to
extract.
You cannot know for certain what the actual ground cover
in an image is by referencing only the image; therefore,
samples (training sites) must be based on familiarity with
the geographical region and knowledge of the actual
surface cover types shown in the image.
Training sites are areas in an image that are
representative of each of the land cover classes that you
want to define. Focus examines the pixel values within
the training sites in order to compile a statistical signature
for each training site class. The training signatures serve
as the interpretation key for each pixel in the image. All
pixels in the image are compared to the signatures and
then classified.
You can use the Training Site Editor to create training
sites to supervise the classification.
1. From the Training Site Editor, click Class and then
click New.
2. Double-click Class-01 in the Name column and
type a name for the training site.
3. Click one of the following:
Drawing a class training site
Once you have created a class with the Training Site
Editor, you can draw training sites over the reference
image in the view pane.
PCI Geomatics
180

Geomatica® Focus
1. In the Maps tree, select the Training areas layer in
the Classification MetaLayer.
2. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow
and choose Polygon.
3. Click the reference image within the bounds of the
subject area where you want to start the training
area outline.
4. Trace the outline of the polygon by clicking at the
end of each line segment.
5. To complete the polygon, double-click near the first
point in the training site.
6. Identify similar areas from the imagery that match
your first polygon.
The more areas you identify as training sites, the
higher the accuracy of the classification.
Note: Overlapping your training area boundaries
reduces the reliability of your training sites.
Making corrections
1. On the Editing toolbar, click the Raster Erase
arrow and choose an erase option.
2. Trace over the training site you want to remove from
the image.
3. Double-click to erase. (See About the Erase
Settings dialog box on page 181 )
About the Erase Settings dialog box
The Erase Settings dialog box lets you choose a fill
PCI Geomatics
polygon option and adjust the line width of the Raster
Erase tool.
Fill Polygon:
Removes the inside of a polygon when using the Erase
Polygon option.
Line Width:
Lets you enter a line width, in pixels, for the Raster Erase
tool.
Changing training site colors
You can change the color of your training sites. Focus
automatically assigns colors to new training sites. Your
first class may be green and your second class may be
blue when they are drawn in the view pane. You can
change the color of the class sites to any color.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click the Classification
MetaLayer and click Open training sites.
2. In the Training Site Editor, click a color.
3. In the color dialog box, make any changes to the
color.
4. Choose a color model from the Model list box and
make any changes to the color channels in the
appropriate spin boxes.
5. Click OK.
Importing training sites
181

Geomatica® Focus
You can also import vectors, bitmaps, or signatures and
use them as training sites. The Import Vectors dialog box
uses rasterized vector polygons to define training sites.
1. In the Training Site Editor, right-click a class row.
2. Click Import and then clickVector(s).
Importing vectors
The Import Vectors dialog box lets you
• Import vector segments
• Choose which vector layer is to be rasterized
• Choose how a vector layer is rasterized
Vectors Table
The import table lists all the vector segments that are
present in the selected file. There are five columns:
• Segment: Lists the number associated with each
vector segment in the selected database.
• Interior Points: Identifies which vector segments
contain the point information that will be used to
define the rasterized value of the polygons. You can
select more than one interior point segment.
• Polygon Boundary: Indicates which vector
segments contain the polygon information that will
define the boundaries of the rasterized polygons.
You should select one or more of these segments.
• Field: For each selected vector segment, this
choice determines which field value is used to grid
the polygons. Numeric attributes are displayed.
Some vector segments may contain different
attributes.
PCI Geomatics
• Description: Displays the descriptions associated
with each vector segment.
Supported Vector Formats
When importing vectors into a training site editing
session, the following vector types are supported:
• ALL_POLYGONS
• GDBLTopoAreas
This information can be found in the MetaData tab for the
vector layer properties.
1. In the Import Vectors dialog, choose the file
containing the vectors you want to import from the
File list box.
2. If the file you want is not listed, click Browse, locate
and select the file you want in the File Selector
dialog box, and click Open.
3. Click in the Interior Points column next to the
rasterized value you want to define.
A check mark indicates the segment has been
selected and will override any entry in the Field
column.
4. Click in the Polygon Boundary column next to the
rasterized value you want to define.
A check mark indicates the segment has been
selected.
5. Click in the Field column for a segment and choose
a rasterization value to change the field used for
rasterization.
This column is ignored if the Interior Points column
has been enabled.
182

Geomatica® Focus
6. Click Rasterize.
Importing a vector does not overwrite existing
classes. The polygons are added to the image
where no classes exist. This occurs for pixels with a
value of zero.
Opening the Import Bitmaps dialog
box
The Import Bitmaps dialog box uses existing bitmaps to
define training sites.
• In the Training Site Editor, right-click in a row and
click Import and then click Bitmap(s).
About the Import Bitmaps dialog box
The Import Bitmaps dialog box lets you:
• Create a new class with the specified bitmap as its
training site
• Change a class training site that you choose in the
Training Site Editor
• Replace the class training site selected in the
Training Site Editor
By default, imported bitmaps do not overwrite existing
training sites. To overwrite training sites, enable the
Overwrite existing training areas check box.
PCI Geomatics
Importing a specified bitmap as its training
site
1. Enable one of the following options:
• New class: creates a new class with the
specified bitmap as its training site
• Current: augments the training site of an
existing class
2. Select a bitmap from the Bitmaps available list.
If you want to overwrite training sites, enable the
Overwrite existing training areas check box.
3. Click OK.
Importing signatures from the training
site editor
The Import Signature dialog box displays a list of the
signatures that are compatible with the currently selected
class. Compatibility is determined by the combination of
input channels used to generate the signature.
Compatible signatures must have the exact same set of
input channels as those being used for the current
classification.
Instead of calculating a signature segment from training
sites, you can import an existing signature from the
Import Signature dialog box.
1. In the Training Site Editor table, right-click a class
row and click Import and then click Signature.
2. In the Import Signature dialog box, select the
183

Geomatica® Focus
signature you want to import.
3. Click OK.
Filling polygons using the Raster
Seeding function
When your training sites need to be irregular shapes or
polygons made of homogeneous pixel groups, you can
use the Raster Seeding function to grow and fill a region
of similar pixels.
You can vary the tolerance of the growth in the Raster
Seeding dialog box to slowly adjust the size of the grown
region. Higher tolerance settings create large growth
regions and lower tolerance settings create smaller
growth regions. You can use the Raster Seeding function
to grow regions of various sizes.
The Raster Seeding dialog box opens from the New
Shapes list on the Editing toolbar. (See About the Raster
Seeding dialog box on page 184 )
About the Raster Seeding dialog box
The Raster Seeding dialog box allows you to select an
input file and layer, view the name and location of the
input files, and set the properties of the raster seeding
output.
Input Layer
The Input Layer area lets you read the location of the
input data and choose the layer on which to perform the
seeding operation.
PCI Geomatics
Selection Criteria (Layer):
Provides a list of files and lets you choose the input data
for a seeding operation.
Layers:
Opens the Select Seeding Layers dialog box. (See Filling
a polygon on page 185 )
Selection Layers:
Reports the name and location of your input data files.
Output Layer
The Output Layer area shows the name and location of
the output files.
Selected Layer:
Reports the name and location of the selected layers.
Properties
The Properties area lets you set the Input Pixel Value
tolerances and choose from either a four-connect or an
eight-connect option.
Input Pixel Value Tolerance:
Lets you enter a pixel value as a seeding tolerance and
choose an X value from a list.
184

Geomatica® Focus
Neighborhood:
Lets you choose either a four-connect or an
eight-connect option to set the kernel size for the raster
seeding operation.
Filling a polygon
The Select Seeding Layers dialog box lists all of the
available input layers and allows you to select the layers
you want to include in the seeding operation.
Clear:
Clears all selected layers from the list.
Select All:
Lets you select all of the listed layers.
Selected Layers:
Reports the layers you have selected.
1. In the view pane, click a polygon.
2. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow
and choose Raster Seeding.
3. In the Raster Seeding dialog box, select the layers
with which you want to fill the polygon.
4. Click OK.
Merging classes
The Merge command combines several classes into one.
Merge affects the portion that is opened and the entire
training channel.
1. From the Training Site Editor, click Class and then
click Merge.
2. In the Merge Classes dialog box, select the classes
you want to merge from the Source list.
If you want to select multiple classes, hold down the
Ctrl or Shift key and click the classes you want to
merge.
3. Select a destination class in the Destination list.
4. Click Merge.
Analyzing training sites
Often during classification, unique spectral classes
appear that do not correspond to any of the classes you
want to use. In other cases, a broad information class
may contain a number of spectral sub-classes with
unique variations. This can be caused by a mixture of
ground cover types appearing in the image at the time it
was recorded, or by shadows and variations in scene
illumination.
Focus offers several methods for insuring that your
training sites are both representative and complete.You
can work with training site data using the Training Site
Editor, the Signature Statistics dialog box, and the
Scatter Plot dialog box.
You can view and test the reliability of your training sites
PCI Geomatics
185

Geomatica® Focus
by creating a histogram in the Class Histogram Display
dialog box. The histogram shows the frequency of
training site pixels as a percentage of the number of
pixels in your training sites. A histogram should have a
uni-modal shape displaying a single peak. A multi-modal
histogram indicates the likelihood that the training sites
for that class are not pure, but contain more than one
distinct land-cover class.
• From the Training Site Editor, right-click in a class
and click Histogram.
In the Class Histogram Display dialog box, the
X-axis in the histogram represents the gray-level
value for the image channel with a range of 0 to
255. The Y-axis shows the frequency count as a
percentage of the total count of pixels in the training
area corresponding to the gray value.
Testing signature separability
Signature separability is calculated as the statistical
difference between pairs of spectral signatures. You can
use the Signature Separability dialog box to monitor the
quality of your training sites. Divergence is shown as both
Bhattacharrya Distance and Transformed Divergence,
with the Bhattacharrya Distance as the default
calculation.
Both Bhattacharrya Distance and Transformed
Divergence are shown as real values between zero and
two. A zero indicates complete overlap between the
signatures of two classes; two indicates a complete
separation between the two classes. These
measurements are monotonically related to classification
accuracies.
Note: Higher separability values indicate a good
classification result
• From the Training Site Editor, click Tools and then
click Signature Separability.
Testing separability with a scatter plot
You can use the Scatter Plot dialog box to show elliptical
graphs for all training sites. A class ellipse shows the
maximum likelihood equiprobability contour defined by
the class threshold value entered for the mean.
Threshold
is a relative measure used to control the radius of the
hyperellipse for each class. By changing the threshold
values, you can reduce the chances of pixels being
classified into more than one class.
Bias
is a value from 0 to one, where higher values weigh one
class in favour of another. It can also be used to resolve
overlap between classes. You can use both of these
measurements to test the training site separability.
PCI Geomatics
186

Geomatica® Focus
Creating a scatter plot
You can use the Plot Ellipses options in the Class List
Table to assess the separability of your spectral classes
and to refine and edit your training sites.
A scatter plot should display an ellipse for each of the
training classes. When there is overlap in several of the
band combinations, you must adjust the threshold values.
1. From the Training Site Editor, click Tools and then
click Scatter Plot.
2. In the Scatter Plot dialog box, click in the Plot
Ellipses column for each class that you want to
include in the scatter plot.
A check mark indicates a class has been selected.
If you want to magnify a section of the graph,
right-click on the area in the graph and click Zoom
In.
Adjusting scatter plot threshold values
1. From the Training Site Editor, double-click the
Threshold column for the class you want to adjust
and type a new value.
The class ellipse adjusts automatically to show the
change in the threshold value.
2. From the Tools menu, click Classification Preview
and click one of the following:
• Maximum Likelihood
PCI Geomatics
• Maximum Likelihood with NULL class
• Parallelepiped
• Parallelepiped with MLC Tiebreaker
• Maximum Distance
• Show Training Sites
3. Click Save&Close.
Altering the view range for the X and
Y axes
You can use the Graph Controls option in the Scatter Plot
dialog box to alter the view range for the X and Y axes.
1. In the Scatter Plot dialog box, click Graph
Controls.
2. Enter values in the Min and Max boxes in the X
View Range and Y View Range areas.
3. Click Close.
Exporting the scatter plot file
1. In the Scatter Plot dialog box, click Graph
Controls.
2. Click File in the Export area.
3. Locate and select a file in the File Selector dialog
box.
The default file format is PCIDSK. TIFF, BMP, and
PostScript formats are also available.
4. Click Save.
5. Click Export in the Graph Controls dialog box.
Displaying the color scale legend
187

Geomatica® Focus
You can display the color scale legend on the side of the
scatter plot in the Scatter Plot dialog box.
1. In the Scatter Plot dialog box, click Graph
Controls.
2. Enable the Show legend check box.
Printing the scatter plot
You can print the displayed histogram or its zoomed
version.
1. In the Scatter Plot dialog box, click Graph
Controls.
2. In the Options section, enable the Fix aspect ratio
check box, if required.
3. In the Background list box, select a background
color for the scatter plot. The selected color appears
behind the scatter plot in the Scatter Plot dialog box.
4. Click Print and specify printer settings.
5. Click Print.
Previewing the classification
You can preview a classification result using one of the
previewcommands in the Training Site Editor or from the
Utilities option from the classification metalayer in the
Maps tree.
The preview commands show how the input channels will
be classified using the training sites and class
PCI Geomatics
parameters contained in the training channel.
You can preview with the following commands:
• Maximum Likelihood
• Maximum Likelihood with NULL class
• Parallelepiped
• Parallelepiped with MLC Tiebreaker.
• Minimum Distance
• Show Training Sites
Setting the Maximum Likelihood
classification preview
Ensure that you have selected a session that has been
configured.
1. In the control pane, click the Maps tab.
2. Right-click the Classification MetaLayer and click
Open training sites.
3. In the Training Site Editor, click Tools and then click
Classification Preview and then click Maximum
Likelihood.
Removing the preview classification from
the metalayer
1. In the control pane, click the Maps tab.
2. Right-click the Classification Metalayer and click
Open training sites.
Creating a separability report
188

Geomatica® Focus
You can create reports for a signature separability and
save them to data files.
1. Click Save Report.
2. In the Save Separability Report dialog box, enter a
file name for the separability report in the File box.
3. Click Save.
Saving the separability report to an existing
file
1. Click Save Report.
2. In the Save Separability Report dialog box, click
Browse.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
the file.
4. Click Open.
5. In the Save Separability Report dialog box, click
Save.
Running a supervised classification
When you have analysed your training sites and tested
their separability, you are ready to run a supervised
classification.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click Classification
MetaLayer and click Run Classification.
2. In the Supervised Classification dialog box, enable
one of the following options in the Algorithm area
• Parallelepiped: forces every pixel in the
image to belong to one of the user-defined
class types. If you choose this option and want
to include Maximum Likelihood as a tie
PCI Geomatics
breaker, enable the With Maximum
Likelihood as tie breaker check box.
• Minimum Distance: forces every pixel in the
image to belong to one of the user-defined
class types.
• Maximum Likelihood: allows a null-class
parameter option. In some cases, you want to
extract classes, but there are many more land
cover classes represented in the imagery.
Therefore, you want a proportion of pixels left
unclassified, or null.
3. In the Classification Options area, enable any of
the following check boxes:
• Show Report: generates a report of the
classification data.
• Save signatures
• Create PCT: compares your classification with
another classification.
4. Click OK.
The report should show a high overall training site
accuracy. The information from each pixel in the training
areas is compared to the information determined by the
classifier algorithm. The overall accuracy represents the
percentage of training-area pixels that were correctly
classified. Your training areas are ideal examples of the
classes.
Testing accuracy with signature statistics
Focus lets you test the accuracy of a training site
collection.The Signature Statistics dialog box displays the
number of samples in the training area, indicating
whether you have collected enough pixels to accurately
189

Geomatica® Focus
represent the land cover. You can compare the statistics
for several classes at the same time.
1. From the Training Site Editor, right-click a class and
click Statistics.
2. In the Signature Statistics dialog box, click a class
in the table to display its statistics.
Note: Similarities cause errors during classification.
Consider removing a channel from the list of inputs if you
are not getting good results.
Viewing signature statistics
The Signature Statistics dialog box displays a table of
the classes included in the currently selected image. For
each class, the following columns are included:
• ID
• Value
• Name
• Color
• Threshold
• Bias
• Imported signature status
• Description
General Report
The General report lists the mean and standard deviation
for each input channel under the class's training area
mask.
• Click the General tab.
Viewing a matrix report
The Matrices report lists the following matrices for the
class signature:
• Class Correlation matrix
• Class Co-variance matrix
• Inverse Co-variance matrix
• Triangular Inverse Co-variance matrix
• Click the Matrices tab.
Comparing signature statistics
You can open a multiple Signature Statistics dialog boxes
to view and compare the statistics of several different
signatures at the same time.
• From the Signature Statistics dialog box, click
New Panel.
Editing Class Signatures
You can also edit any of the cells in the class table.
Saving the signature statistics report
You can save both the general and matrices statistics for
all of the classes to a text file.
1. In the Signature Statistics dialog box, click Save
Report.
The Save Statistics Report dialog box appears.
PCI Geomatics
190

Geomatica® Focus
2. Specify a file name and its directory path.
3. Click OK.
Post-classification editing
In most cases, a classifier algorithm does not produce
ideal results. There are often occurrences of single-pixel
misclassification. A field may contain a few pixels of
another class or there may be image data that falls
outside training sites that affects the classification results.
Class editing corrects errors by combining several
classes.
Improving classification results
To improve a classification, first assess the accuracy of
your results. The accuracy of a classification is measured
against a standard that is assumed to be correct. The
classification accuracy increases as it approaches the
standard.
Once you have assessed the classification accuracy, you
can combine classes through a process known as
aggregation. Combining classes creates a new aggregate
class. A maximum of 255 classes can be reassigned in a
single session. Aggregation is often performed on the
results of an unsupervised classification. A common
approach in unsupervised classification is to generate as
many cluster classes as possible. With the benefit of
reference data or first-hand knowledge of a scene, you
can aggregate the spectral clusters into meaningful
thematic classes.
PCI Geomatics
Initialize post-classification editing
You can combine several classes once you have edited
your classification. Like the aggregation process, class
editing combines several classes; however, instead of
combining classes throughout an image, you can
combine the classes for all pixels under a bitmap mask.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click Classification
MetaLayer and click Post-classification Analysis
and then click Class Editing.
2. In the Class Editing dialog box, click Image and
then click Select Classified Image.
3. In the Select Classified Image dialog box, choose
the output channel you selected when you initialized
the classification from the Channels available list.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Class Editing dialog box, click Image and
then click Select Reference Image.
6. In the Load Reference Image list, locate and select
the Red, Green, and Blue channels.
You must use the same reference image to perform
class editing.
As you select a channel, its number is added to the
R, G, and B boxes.
7. Click OK.
Once you have selected a reference image you can
prepare to draw your bitmap mask.
Setting up a bitmap mask
191

Geomatica® Focus
1. In the Class Editing dialog box, click Mask and
then click Create Mask from new Bitmap.
2. Ensure the Mask visible check box is enabled.
3. In the Visible Image area, enable the Classified
option.
4. In the Maps tree, click the bitmap layer.
5. On the Zoom toolbar, click the Zoom to 1:1 Image
Resolution button.
Note: Images must be displayed at 1:1 or higher to draw
a bitmap mask over the view pane. The drawing tools are
not available when images are zoomed to overview size.
Opening a bitmap mask
The Load Mask from Bitmap command produces a mask
with a bitmap that had been previously created. This is
useful if you want to replace the class of a particular
training site with a new bitmap mask.
1. From the Class Editing dialog box, click Mask and
then click Load Mask from Bitmap.
2. In the Load Mask from Bitmap dialog box, select a
bitmap segment in the Bitmap segments available
list.
3. Click OK.
Saving a bitmap mask
You can save the active mask as a bitmap.
1. From the Class Editing dialog box, click Mask and
then click Save Mask to Bitmap.
PCI Geomatics
2. In the Save Mask to Bitmap dialog box, select a
bitmap segment in the Bitmap segments available
list.
3. Click OK.
Masking an image area
The masked area combines classes. You can select a
region over the entire file to combine all of the classes in
the image.
Masking an image area is similar to creating a training
site. You can mask over a part of the image.
1. In the Maps tree, select the new bitmap layer below
the Classification MetaLayer.
2. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow
and choose Polygon.
3. In the view pane, draw a mask over the part of the
image you want to edit.
4. In the Class Editing dialog box, select a class in
the Source Classes area.
If you want to select all classes, click Select All.
5. Click the Merge Classes.
6. In the View Controls area of the Class Editing
dialog box, disable the Mask visible check box.
If you want to use more than one mask to cover all
of the image areas you want to edit, repeat the
procedure.
Opening an aggregation session
192

Geomatica® Focus
Aggregation is the process of combining classes in order
to create a new aggregate class. A maximum of 255
classes can be reassigned in a single session.
Aggregation is often performed on the results of an
unsupervised classification. A common approach in
unsupervised classification is to generate as many
cluster classes as possible. With the benefit of reference
data or first-hand knowledge of the scene, the analyst
aggregates the spectral clusters into meaningful thematic
classes.
1. From the Analysis menu, click Image
Classification and then click Post Classification
Analysis and then click Aggregation.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a
file.
3. Click Open.
Opening the Aggregate dialog box in an
unsupervised session
• In the Maps tree, right-click Classification
MetaLayer and click Post-classification Analysis
and then click Aggregation.
Setting up an aggregation
Channel Setup
Before you can perform an aggregation, you must specify
the database channels that serve as the input and output
PCI Geomatics
channels. This is done using the Channel Setup dialog
box.
Input Channel
This is the channel you want to aggregate and is typically
the result of an unsupervised classification.
Output Channel
This is an empty channel. You store the results of the
aggregation in this channel.
1. In the Channel Setup dialog box, select an
unsupervised classification channel from the
Channels available list.
2. Select an empty channel or an unfinished
aggregation result from the Output list.
3. Click OK.
Setting up a new aggregate class
Image classifiers do not always provide the desired level
of accuracy. As a result, a clean-up is often necessary
after a classification. Aggregation is one of the four
post-classification clean-up methods.
There are three main areas in the Aggregate dialog box.
View Controls
Use this area of the dialog box to choose different ways
to view the classes and aggregates.
193

Geomatica® Focus
Normal mode
Displays the aggregate classes along with the original, as
yet unassigned, classes.
Input classes
Displays all the original input classes.
Current classes
Displays the classes that are currently selected in the
Input Classes list.
Unassigned classes
Displays only the unassigned classes. Input classes that
have been assigned to an aggregate will be blacked out.
Aggregate classes
Displays all the current aggregates.
Current aggregate classes
Displays the aggregates that are currently selected in the
Aggregate Classes list.
Highlight color
Lets you choose a color for the class.
Input Classes
This table lists all of the classes in the selected input
channel. Use this table to locate and select the set of
classes to include in each of the aggregate classes. You
can select multiple classes by holding down Shift or Ctrl
while clicking a selection.
There are several tools available to assist you in the
selection process:
Select Class at Cursor
Locates the class at the current cursor location within the
view pane.
Highlight Classes
Displays the selected input classes in the chosen
highlight color, as selected in the View Controls area.
PCT
Changes the current pseudo-color table.
Aggregate Classes
This table contains a list of all the aggregate classes. In
addition, there are four tools available to assist you:
New
Creates a new aggregate class.
Delete
PCI Geomatics
194

Geomatica® Focus
Removes an aggregate class from the list.
Class Initialization
Save
Saves all the details of the aggregation session to a text
file.
The following example of a text file that describes three
aggregate classes:
1 | Water |0 |0 |255| Water class | 10,20
2 | Crop |0 |255 |0 | Crops |
3 | Other Class |255|0 |0 | Water class | 40
To help you to identify and locate classes, use the
Highlight color feature. The selected class(es) assume
the highlight color. Use the Highlight color palette to
change the color used for highlighting.
1. In the Aggregate Classes area, click New.
2. Double-click the Name column for the new class
and type a name.
3. Click the Color column for the new class and
choose a color.
The Add and Remove tasks are only active after
selections are made in both lists.
Creating an aggregate from a set of input
classes
PCI Geomatics
1. Select a row containing the class you want to add
from the Input Classes area.
If you want to select multiple rows, hold down the
Ctrl or Shift key while selecting rows.
2. Select the row containing the aggregate class that is
to receive the input class.
3. Click Add.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until the input classes are
assigned to the appropriate aggregate classes.
5. Click Apply to Output Channel.
Changing the input and output channel
assignments
1. From the Aggregate dialog box, click Setup.
2. In the Channel Setup dialog box, select a new
input channel from the Channels available list.
3. Select an empty channel from the Output list.
4. Click OK.
Assigning a new PCT to the current session
Use the Generate or Import PCT dialog box to change
the pseudo-color table assigned to the current aggregate
session. You assign a new PCT in two ways:
• Generate PCT: Creates a PCT that attempts to
simulate a reference RGB image. Duplicating the
look of an RGB image may assist you in identifying
and locating areas within the image to be
aggregated.
• Import PCT: Imports an existing PCT.
195

Geomatica® Focus
Generating a PCT
1. From the Aggregate dialog box, click PCT in the
Input Classes area.
2. In the PCT dialog box, click the Generate PCT tab.
3. For each of the red, green, or blue channel
designations, select a channel from the Channels
available list.
4. Click OK.
Importing a PCT
1. From the Aggregate dialog box, click PCT in the
Input Classes area.
2. In the PCT dialog box, click the Import PCT tab.
3. Click File.
4. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
the file containing the PCT segment you want to
import, and click Open.
5. Click Open.
6. n the PCT dialog box, select a segment in the list.
7. Click OK.
Saving the aggregate session
Aggregation is usually a lengthy process, especially if you
want to test and compare several different aggregation
scenarios. It is recommended that you use the Save
Aggregate Session feature periodically to save your work.
You must save the details of your aggregate session in
order to:
• Save intermediate results.
• Generate different aggregation scenarios.
1. From the Aggregate dialog box, click Save.
2. In the Save Aggregate Session dialog box, click
File.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, select a destination
folder.
4. Type a file name in the File name list box.
5. Choose a file extension from the Files of type list
box.
6. Click Open.
7. Click Accept.
Aggregate sessions are saved as .txt files by default. The
following example shows a typical line in a saved
aggregate text file.
1 | Rural | 0 | 204 | 0 | | 3, 4
This aggregate line shows the following information:
• Class value: 1
• Class name: Rural
• RGB color: Red-0 Green-204 Blue-0
• Description: None
• Input class codes: Classes 3 and 4 were combined
to create the aggregate.
Starting an aggregate session
Once an aggregate session file is saved, you can open it
using the Load command in the Aggregate Classes area.
1. From the Aggregate dialog box, click Class
Initialization in the Aggregate Classes area.
PCI Geomatics
196

Geomatica® Focus
2. In the Class Initialization dialog box, click the Text
File tab.
3. Click Text File.
4. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
the aggregate text file, and click Open.
If you want to overwrite the aggregate class, enable
the Overwrite existing classes check box.
5. Click OK.
Importing other classes
The Load command and the Class Initialization dialog
box can be used to:
• Import other channels from the same or a different
file. In this way, you can add new classes to the
aggregates list, which may include classes from
other classification results that you want to include
in the present classification.
• Initialize a new set of classes for an aggregation
session. You import entries for the Input Classes
table from either a classification channel or a .txt
file.
1. From the Aggregate dialog box, click Class
Initialization in the Aggregate Classes area.
2. In the Class Initialization dialog box, click the
Channel tab.
3. Click File.
4. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
the file containing the channel with the classes you
want to import, and click Open.
5. Select a classification channel from the Channels
available list.
PCI Geomatics
You can edit any of the following fields in the table
for the selected channel:
6. Value
7. Name
8. Color
9. Description
If you want to replace all current classes, enable the
Overwrite existing classes check box.
10. Click OK.
Setting up for class labelling
Class editing and aggregation both honour any session
information present, but work equally well without it. All
other tasks including class labelling and accuracy
assessment need an open session.
To open a session
1. From the Analysis menu, click Image
Classification and then click Post Classification
Analysis and then click Class Labelling.
2. From the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
a file, and click Open.
To open the Class Labelling dialog box in an
open session
1. From the Maps tree, right-click Classification
MetaLayer and click Post-classification Analysis
and then click Class Labelling.
197

Geomatica® Focus
To set up for labelling
1. From the Channel Setup dialog box, select a
classified channel from the Channels available list.
2. Click OK.
About the Class Labelling dialog box
The Class Labelling dialog box lets you examine and
modify the characteristics of any class within a thematic
channel. You can change the class information such as
the value, name, color, or description, but the image data
is not altered.
You can create a new class in the table of the Class
Labelling dialog box. For each new class, Focus
generates an ID, value, class name, and color.
File and Channel:
The file name and channel are listed at the top of the
dialog box.
Class Table:
All of the classes for the selected channel are listed in a
class table. For each class, the following is reported:
• Value
• Name
• Color
• Description
Unsupervised:
PCI Geomatics
Class labelling is normally done after an unsupervised
classification, since the class values, names, and colors
have not been previously assigned.
Supervised:
You can use the Class Labelling dialog box after a
supervised classification to:
• Re-label characteristics that were labelled
incorrectly in the Training Site Editor before
classification.
• Label items that were not labelled prior to the
classification step for whatever reason.
• Add a level of transparency.
• Add a more detailed description.
You can change any of the items in the table. To keep a
change, click Save.
To change a class name
1. Double-click class name you want to edit.
2. Type a name and press Enter.
To change a class color
1. Click a color in the Color column for a class.
2. In the Color dialog box, choose a color from the
Basic Colors palette.
3. Adjust the color as appropriate.
4. Click OK.
198

Geomatica® Focus
To change or add a class description
1. Click in the Description column for a class.
2. Type a description as appropriate.
To create a new class in the table
1. In the Class Labelling dialog box, click New.
The new class is displayed as the last entry in the
table.
To delete a class
1. In the Class Labelling dialog box, select a class.
2. Click Delete.
To initialize a class
1. In the Class Labelling dialog box, select a class.
2. Click Class Initialization.
Class Initialization dialog box appears.
To save changes
1. Click Save.
Initializing classes from a classification
channel
PCI Geomatics
Initializing a new set of classes for a class labelling
session is done using the Class Initialization dialog box.
You can import entries for the class table from a
classification channel.
1. From the Class Initialization dialog box, click the
Channel tab.
2. Click File.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
the file containing the channel whose classes you
want to import, and click Open.
4. In the Class Initialization dialog box, select a
classification channel in the Channels available
list.
If you want to replace all current classes, enable the
Overwrite existing classes check box.
5. Click OK.
Initializing classes from a text file
Initializing a new set of classes for a class labelling
session is done using the Class Initialization dialog box.
You can import entries for the class table from a text file.
Text file format
Class or aggregate details are stored as .txt files. To
import this information, it must conform to a single
recognizable format. The file is limited to one class per
line and has seven fields delimited by a | character:
Value | Name | Red | Green | Blue | Desc |
AssociatedDesc
199

Geomatica® Focus
• Value is an integer representing the class code.
• Name is a character string containing the class
name.
• Red is a number between 0-255 depicting the red
component of the RGB color.
• Green is a number between 0-255 representing the
green component of the RGB color.
• Blue is a number between 0-255 representing the
blue component of the RGB color.
• Desc is a character string that provides a
description for the class.
• AssociatedDesc is only used in an Aggregation
session. It contains the description of the original
input classes that are associated with the
aggregate.
The following is an example of a text file that contains
three classes:
1|Water|0 |0 |255| Water class| |
2|Crop |0 |255|0 |Crops| |
3|Other|255|0 |0 |Water class| |
1. From the Class Initialization dialog box, click the
Text File tab.
2. Click Text File.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
the file containing the classes you want to import,
and click Open.
If you want to replace all current classes, enable the
Overwrite existing classes check box.
4. Click OK.
Launching the Accuracy Assessment dialog
box
Accuracy assessments determine the correctness of the
classified image, which is based on pixel groupings.
Accuracy is a measure of the agreement between a
standard that is assumed to be correct and an image
classification of unknown quality. If the image
classification corresponds closely with the standard, it is
said to be accurate.
To launch the Accuracy Assessment dialog box
1. From the Analysis menu, click Image
Classification and then click Post Classification
Analysis and then click Accuracy Assessment.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
the file containing the classified channel you want to
check for accuracy, and click Open.
To open the Accuracy Assessment dialog box
during classification
1. From the Maps tree, right-click Classification
MetaLayer and click Post-classification Analysis
and then click Accuracy Assessment.
Using the Accuracy Assessment
dialog box
The Accuracy Assessment dialog box contains three
PCI Geomatics
200

Geomatica® Focus
areas:
Operations
• Select Classified Image
• Load Reference Image
• Generate Random Sample
• Samples from Vectors
• Accuracy Report
• Clear Sample List
Assign Reference Class to Sample
This area contains a table listing all the categories in the
selected classified image. The assignment of class and
name values to the test pixels is based upon the entries
in this table.
Random Sample List
This area contains an information table for all the
randomly generated test pixels.
Selecting a classified image
1. From the Accuracy Assessment dialog box, click
Select Classified Image.
2. In the Select Classified Image dialog box, select a
supervised classification channel from the
Channels available list.
3. Click OK.
Selecting a reference image
1. From the Accuracy Assessment dialog box, click
Load Reference Image.
2. In the Load Reference Image dialog box, select
either one or three image channels from the
Channels available list.
If you choose only one channel, select a PCT
segment from the PCTs availablelist.
3. Click OK.
Generating a random sample
The Generate Random Sample dialog box generates a
set of random test pixel locations within the classified
image. This dialog box consists of two areas:
Number of Samples
Provides a spin box for specifying the number of random
samples to generate.
Options
Sets the following sampling control options:
Stratify Samples to Class Percentages check box
• Enable this check box to randomly choose the
number of samples from each class that are
proportional to the percentage of the image
occupied by each class. In other words, larger
classes contain more samples than smaller classes.
PCI Geomatics
201

Geomatica® Focus
Include only existing classes check box
• Enable this check box to generate random samples
only for classes in the reference class list.
1. From the Accuracy Assessment dialog box, click
Generate Random Sample.
2. In the Generate Random Sample dialog box, enter
a value for the number of sample points from the
Number of samples spin box.
If you want to randomly choose the number of
samples from each class that are proportional to the
percentage of the image occupied by each class,
enable the Stratify Samples to class percentages
check box.
If you want to generate random samples only for
classes in the reference class list, enable the
Include only existing classes check box.
3. Click OK.
Assigning a reference class to a sample
1. From the Accuracy Assessment dialog box, select
the first sample in the Random Sample List.
The cursor automatically moves to the sample
location in the view pane. Compare this location to
the reference class table.
2. Select the class in the Assign Reference Class to
Sample table to which you think the random sample
belongs.
3. Click Transfer.
Opening samples from a vector segment
Imports your own random test points from a vector
segment. The random pixel locations are added to the
existing list of sample points displayed in the Random
Sample List. In this way, you can merge samples from
several sources.
1. From the Accuracy Assessment dialog box, click
Samples from Vectors.
2. In the Samples from Vectors dialog box, select a
vector segment from the Vector segments
available list.
3. Select a reference attribute from the Reference
attributes list.
4. Select a class attribute from the Class Attribute
list.
5. Click OK.
Launching the Accuracy Report dialog box
You can use the Accuracy Report dialog box once
reference classes are assigned to the random samples.
Accuracy is determined by comparing the assigned
reference value for each test pixel to the category in the
classification image.
To generate a report, it is not necessary to assign a
reference class to every random sample; however, a
classified image must be previously selected.
• From the Accuracy Assessment dialog box, click
Accuracy Report.
PCI Geomatics
202

Geomatica® Focus
The Accuracy Report dialog box creates three types of
accuracy reports:
• Sample Report Listing: Shows which samples are
correctly classified.
• Error (Confusion) Matrix: Displays the results of
the accuracy assessment process. Reference data
listed in the columns of the matrix represents the
number of correctly classified samples.
• Accuracy Statistics: Lists different statistical
measures of overall accuracy and accuracy for each
class.
Producing a random sample report
1. From the Accuracy Report dialog box, click the
Sample Report Listing tab.
2. Click Generate Report.
Producing an error report
1. From the Accuracy Report dialog box, click the
Error (Confusion) Matrix tab.
If you want to apply a 3 x 3 mode filter to each test
pixel location in the classified image, enable the
Apply Mode filter to classified values check box.
The result of the mode filter operation are compared
to the reference value in order to access its
accuracy.
2. Click Generate Report.
PCI Geomatics
Producing an accuracy statistics report
1. From the Accuracy Report dialog box, click the
Accuracy Statistics tab.
If you want to apply a 3 x 3 mode filter to each test
pixel location in the classified image, enable the
Apply Mode filter to classified values check box.
The result of the mode filter operation are compared
to the reference value in order to access its
accuracy.
2. Click Generate Report.
Saving an accuracy report
You can only save a report from the current tab. You can
append the reports to the same text file. A text file can
also be overwritten with the report from the current tab.
To save an accuracy report
1. From the Accuracy Report dialog box, click Save
Report.
2. In the Save Accuracy Report dialog box, click
Browse.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a
file, and click Open.
If you want to append the report to the selected file,
click Append.
If you want to overwrite the report in the selected
203

Geomatica® Focus
file, click OK.
To clear all the samples in the Random Sample
List
1. From the Accuracy Assessment dialog box, click
Clear Sample List.
To save a classification project
1. From the File menu, click Save Project.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a
folder where you want to save the project.
3. Enter a project name in the File name box.
4. Click Save.
PCI Geomatics
204

Geomatica® Focus
Chapter 6
Information tools
Information tools include histograms, image statistics,
digital number (DN) profiles or sections of an image, and
scatter plots. These tools do not change or process
images, but do allow you to get a better understanding of
the data you are using. Information tools, such as image
band correlation statistics and histogram statistics, help
you decide how you can further process image data.
Opening the Information report
You can display the individual attributes of selected
features for rasters, vectors, and charts using the
Information Report.
For raster files, the Information Report provides the digital
number (DN) values for the pixel identified by the cursor
position. If an RGB file is used, the report includes the
DN values for the red, green, and blue layers. The
Information Report can also be used for grayscale or
pseudo-color rasters. In these cases, only one DN value
is reported.
For vector files, the Information Report displays vector
attributes. The report provides all attributes for a selected
(under-the-pixel) vector.
PCI Geomatics
For charts, the Information Report displays attributes for
the record corresponding to selected data in a chart.
1. From the Tools toolbar, click the Information
button.
The Information Report appears.
You can use the Information Report with both raster and
vector data.
Viewing information for a selected
vector
1. From the Information Report, enable the Selected
shapes option in the Report on area.
2. On the Editing toolbar of the Focus window, click
the Selection Tools arrow and choose Individual.
3. In the view pane, click a vector.
The attribute information for the selected vector
displays in the Information Report.
You can also select several vectors at once. With several
vectors selected, you can change the vector displayed in
the Information Report. The cursor automatically moves
to the current vector in the view pane.
Viewing information for vectors under
the cursor
205

Geomatica® Focus
1. From the Information Report, enable the Entries
under cursor option in the Report on area.
2. In the view pane, click a vector.
3. On the Editing toolbar, click the Selection Tools
arrow and choose Individual.
4. In the view pane, click a vector shape or segment.
The Information Report shows the details of the
selected vector.
Showing information for raster data
1. Ensure that the raster data is opened in the view
pane.
2. From the Information Report, enable the Entries
under cursor option in the Report on area.
3. In the view pane, click a feature.
The Information Report shows the DN values for the pixel
of the selected feature for the top raster layer in the Maps
tree.
If multiple raster layers are open in the Maps tree, you
can scroll between the DN values for the specified pixel
in each of the layers by clicking the arrows in the Record
area of the Information Report.
All features, both visible and invisible, are reported by
clicking a location in the view pane. You can show
information for a new record in the current layer with the
Record arrow buttons in the Information Report.
PCI Geomatics
Displaying the attributes from a chart
1. In the Chart viewer, click the Identification button.
2. Click a piece of data in the chart.
The attributes for that record display under Values.
Specifying the units of measurement
The Measure tool reports length, area, and perimeter
measurements of areas within imagery in the view pane.
It allows you to draw areas and lines in several different
ways, while reporting in the units of measure you choose.
1. With a file open, click the Measure arrow and
choose one of the following menu options:
• Linear Units: displays units for a linear
measurement
• Area Units: displays units for an area
measurement
• Angle Units: displays units for an angle
2. Choose a unit of measurement from the
corresponding menu option.
A check mark next to a unit of measurement
indicates it has been selected.
Selecting a Measure tool
1. With a file open, click the Measure arrow and
choose one of the following menu options:
• Line: lets you measure a linear object
206

Geomatica® Focus
• Polygon: lets you measure a polygonal object
• Rectangle: lets you measure a rectangular
object
• Ellipse: lets you measure an elliptical object
Measuring a line
1. With a file open, click the Measure arrow and click
Linear Units.
2. Choose a unit of measurement.
3. Click the Measure arrow and choose Line.
4. In the view pane, click where you want to begin
measuring.
5. Move the cursor to the end of the measurement
area.
If you want to continue measuring in a different
direction, click where you want to change direction
and continue measuring.
The total length, segment length, and azimuth
appear at the bottom of the view pane.
If you want to stop measuring, double-click the view
pane.
Measuring a polygon
1. With a file open, click the Measure arrow and click
Area Units.
2. Choose a unit of measurement.
3. Click the Measure arrow and choose Polygon.
4. In the view pane, click where you want to begin
PCI Geomatics
measuring.
5. Click the next polygon vertex.
Repeat this as necessary until you have at least
three vertices in the polygon. The area and
perimeter of the polygon appear at the bottom of the
view pane.
If you want to stop measuring, double-click the view
pane.
Measuring a rectangle or ellipse
1. With a file open, click the Measure arrow and click
Area Units.
2. Choose a unit of measurement.
3. Click the Measure arrow and choose one of the
following options:
• Rectangle
• Ellipse
4. In the view pane, click where you want to begin
measuring.
For a rectangle, the starting point is a corner of the
measurement area. For an ellipse, start at the
center of the measurement area.
5. Drag the rectangle or ellipse to cover the area you
want to measure.
The area and perimeter of the rectangle or ellipse
appear at the bottom of the view pane.
If you want to stop measuring, double-click the view
pane.
207

Geomatica® Focus
Reading the Measure tool report
Focus provides a report to help you keep track of your
image measurements. You activate the Measurement
Tool Report from the Options dialog box in the Tools
menu. (See Measurement tools on page 112 ) When the
Measurement Tool Report is active, the report window
opens each time you take a measurement in the view
pane.
Information appearing in the Measurement Tool Report
depends on the measurement tool you are using.
Information is shown as either a linear or polygonal
measurement. (See Specifying the units of measurement
on page 206 )
Line Measure Reports:
Reports a measurement for each segment of a line that
includes the length, azimuth, and start and end
coordinates.
Polygon Measure Report:
Reports the area, perimeter, and coordinates for each
point in the polygon. For ellipse measurements, the
report shows the perimeter and the area only.
Viewing histograms and statistics
Histograms graphically represent the count of each pixel
value in an entire or a selected region of a raster. The
statistical information that you obtain from the pixel
PCI Geomatics
values can help you in your analysis of a geographical
area.
You can access both histograms and statistics from the
raster maps layer, and access the statistics from the file’s
raster.
1. In the Maps tree, select a raster map layer.
2. In the Focus view area, use the Zoom tools to select
the area for which you want to view a histogram.
3. From the main menu, click Layer and then click
Histograms.
The Multi Histogram Display window appears if an
RGB map layer is selected, otherwise, the
Histogram Display window appears.
4. Proceed to Viewing a histogram on page 208 .
Viewing a histogram
You can view a histogram of a grayscale, pseudo-color,
or an RGB map layer.
A histogram of the currently viewed area is first
displayed. For an RGB map layer, a histogram is
displayed for each RGB channel. At a glance, you can
view the distribution of pixels and then select a histogram
to view its statistics. For more information, refer to
Viewing histogram statistics on page 209 .
You can also view a histogram of a region that is under a
bitmap mask. For more information, refer to Viewing
histograms under a bitmap mask on page 210 .
1. In the Multi Histogram Display or Histogram
208

Geomatica® Focus
2. In the Histogram with Statistics window, select an
option from the Mask list box.
When accessed from the Maps tree, the Mask list
box displays the entire raster, current view, and any
bitmap layers that are in the current area. The
bitmap layers are listed whether they are saved or
not. When accessed from the Files tree, the Mask
list box displays the entire raster and the bitmap
layers that are saved in the same, active source file.
The saved bitmap layers are listed with their file and
layer names displayed. For more information about
viewing histograms for a bitmap layer, refer to
Viewing histograms under a bitmap mask on page 210
.
Viewing histograms under a bitmap mask
You can view histograms for regions that have been
defined by bitmap masks. You must first create bitmap
layers and then apply bitmap masks for the regions. For
more information, refer to Creating a new bitmap layer on
page 141 and Creating a mask on page 228 .
1. In the Histogram with Statistics window, select
the bitmap mask from the Mask list box.
When viewing from the Maps tree, bitmap layers for
which masks have not been applied are also listed
in the Mask list box. If you select one of these layers
and then apply a mask to a region in the Focus
viewer, the Histogram with Statistics window
refreshes with the relevant histogram.
Zooming into and out of a histogram
PCI Geomatics
You can zoom into an area of a histogram that is
displayed on the Histogram with Statistics window to view
more detailed pixel values.
1. In the Histogram with Statistics window, position
the cursor over the area of the histogram you want
to zoom into.
2. Right-click and select Zoom In or drag a rectangle.
You can click Zoom Out to revert to the previous
view of the histogram and Zoom to Overview to
revert to the original histogram.
Printing a histogram
You can print the displayed histogram or its zoomed
version.
1. In the Histogram with Statistics window, select
Fixed aspect ratio in the Options section, if
required.
2. In the Background list box, select a background
color for the histogram.
The selected color appears behind the histogram.
3. Click Print and specify the printer settings.
4. Click Print.
Exporting a histogram
You can export the displayed histogram or its zoomed
version to a file.
1. In the Histogram with Statistics window, click
210

Geomatica® Focus
Export.
The File Selector window appears.
2. Specify the file name, format, and location.
3. Click Save.
Working with numeric values
The Numeric Values dialog box is an information tool that
provides a numeric version of the digital number (DN)
values in an image. The DN values for each band in an
RGB image are displayed concurrently. The numeric
information lets you explore relationships between DN
values in different image bands at a specific pixel
location. (See Opening the Numeric Values dialog box on
page 211 )
Opening the Numeric Values dialog box
The Numeric Values dialog box allows you to work
directly with the pixel values in raster data. You can view
and edit the individual pixel values for grayscale and
RGB channels through individual tables. Each table
provides a sample of values that correspond to the cursor
coordinates in the view pane. You can change the
sample of values by moving the cursor across the view
pane. You can also switch the values to show either raw
or enhanced data. Red, green, and blue pixel values are
shown in separate tables.
Raw Data:
Switches numeric values to raw data values.
PCI Geomatics
Enhanced Data:
Switches numeric values to enhanced data values.
Line Numbers:
The gray column on the right of a numeric values table
shows the numbers for each line in an image.
Pixel Numbers:
The gray row at the top of a numeric values table shows
the numeric value for a single pixel.
Red Channel Value:
The red pixel value for a selected pixel in the view pane.
A red channel value is indicated by a red border in the
numeric values table.
Green Channel Value:
The green pixel value for a selected pixel in the view
pane. A green channel value is indicated by a green
border in the numeric values table.
Blue Channel Value:
The blue value for a selected pixel in the view pane. A
blue channel value is indicated by a blue border in the
numeric values table.
1. In the Maps tree, select an RGB layer.
2. From the Layer menu, click Numeric Values.
211

Geomatica® Focus
You can export digital number (DN) values to a text file
for further statistical analysis. You can also use the
Numeric Values dialog box to change the DN values in
an image.
Exporting the numeric values to a text file
1. From the Numeric Values dialog box, click Export.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a
file.
3. Click Save.
(See Interpreting the values on page 212 ).
Change a color channel DN value
The digital number (DN) values of an image channel can
be altered directly. Only the image channels that are
currently displayed can be altered.
1. In the Numeric Values dialog box, double-click the
cell for the image layer and pixel location that you
want to edit.
2. Type a value (between 0 and 255 for RGB) and
press Enter.
Note: You cannot alter enhanced values.
(See Interpreting the values on page 212 )
Interpreting the values
PCI Geomatics
The Numeric Values dialog can be expanded to display
more values. Each table displays one color-highlighted
cell containing the RGB value of a selected pixel/line
coordinate. The other cells contain the RGB values of the
surrounding pixel/line coordinates. RGB values show the
position of the cursor in the view pane.
Raw and Enhanced Data
The Numeric Values dialog box allows you to view the
digital number (DN) values for both raw and enhanced
DN values. The raw data values represent the DN values
that are read directly from the image file. The enhanced
data values represent the DN values as they are currently
displayed in the view pane. For more information on
enhanced data values. (See Changing a default
enhancement on page 244 )
To display the RGB values for raw or enhanced data,
enable the appropriate option.
Making an image profile
Image profiles show the spectral response of a selected
feature along a user-specified cross-section. You can
generate a spectral plot and a numeric values table from
RGB or grayscale input channels along a user-defined
vector.
There are several instances where you can use an image
profile. Your work will determine when and where you
should use one. Following are examples where profiles
have been used effectively.
212

Geomatica® Focus
Profiling can give you an idea of the spectral
homogeneity for a feature. If profiles taken across a
feature are all relatively flat, the feature is considered
homogeneous for the particular wavelength in which the
profile is taken. Relatively flat profiles indicate that a
particular wavelength channel is a good input for a
subsequent supervised classification where the extracted
features are being investigated.
As another example, you may want to establish a
potential correlation between a characteristic of a feature
in the scene and its spectral response. Such a correlation
could be used in an image from the Coastal Zone Color
Scanner (CZCS) satellite.
The CZCS satellite measures important ocean properties
from space. It was designed specifically to measure the
temperature and color of the coastal zones of the oceans.
The CZCS operates in six wavelength regions (bands),
including bands in the visible, near-infrared, and thermal
regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. The four visible
bands are used to map phytoplankton concentrations and
inorganic suspended matter, such as silt. The
near-infrared channel can be used to map surface
vegetation, while the thermal channel can be used to
measure sea surface temperatures.
You can use the Image Profile to examine changes in
ocean properties as a function of distance from the
coastline or along the perimeter of a coastline. You can
demonstrate graphically how chlorophyll, temperature,
suspended sediment, and gelbstoff (the yellow substance
of interest to marine researchers) vary along the coastal
waters in a CZCS image.
PCI Geomatics
Drawn across a DEM, a profile will give information on
how the elevation changes from one point to another,
giving a cross-sectional perspective of the terrain.
1. In the Maps tree, click an image layer.
2. From the Layer menu, click Profile.
The vector profile is normally interpreted from left to right;
however, if the end points of the vector occupy the same
X position, the profile is interpreted from top to bottom. In
the event of a closed shape, the profile is interpreted in a
clockwise direction from the start/end node of the closed
shape.
The graph is a profile of the image layer and shows the
input channels plotted with the gray values on the Y-axis,
and the distance along the vector on the X-axis. The
graph demonstrates how the gray values change with
distance.
Gray Values
In the case of an 8-bit RGB image layer, the range of the
Y-axis is 0 to 255 and represents the 256 possible
gray-level values for each pixel of the red, green, and
blue input channels.
Distance
The X-axis is measured in meters and represents the
distance between the end points of the vector. The range
of the X-axis depends on the length of the vector and the
scale of the area or the ground distance covered by the
image.
213

Geomatica® Focus
Using the mensuration bars
You can change the viewable range for both the X and Y
axes, export the plot to a graphic file, change the
background color for the plot, and print the plot.
1. From the Profile Table, click Options.
2. In the Profile Options dialog box, click in the
Current Channel column for a channel for which
you want use the measuring tools.
A red X indicates the channel is selected.
3. In the Profile Graph, drag the sliding bars to the
region you want to measure.
Selecting vector profiles
If a vector is not selected, a simple line is automatically
generated and used to calculate the profile. As an
alternative, you can create a vector or select an existing
vector for the profile. To modify the profile vector, use the
Line Color editor or Vector Editing toolbar.
1. Draw or select an existing vector layer.
2. With either the Selection Tool cursor or the Vector
Editing cursor, select the line in the view pane.
The values change in the Profile Table and the line
is updated in the Profile Graph.
Using the spectra extraction tools
You can extract spectra from image data using
multispectral or hyperspectral data. You begin spectra
PCI Geomatics
extraction by configuring your data with the Spectra
Extraction Configuration dialog box. Focus creates a
hyperspectral metalayer to hold the extracted spectra.
You must first specify the input file and channels you
want to work with. You can select an existing channel or
you can create a new one. (See About the Spectra
Extraction Configuration dialog box on page 215 )
When you begin with no open data, the Spectra
Extraction Configuration dialog box automatically creates
a new Map and Area for your work. If a Map and an Area
are already open in and the input file has the same
georeferencing as the Area, a new metalayer is added to
the Map and Area. When georeferencing is incompatible,
a new Area is added to the existing Map.
When you have configured a metalayer, you can access
both the Scatter Plot and Spectra Plot dialog boxes from
a menu in the Spectra Extraction dialog box. Scatter plots
and spectra plots are automatically linked to the data you
specify in the Spectra Extraction dialog box. (See
Extracting spectra from a region of interest on page 215 )
The Spectra Extraction tools let you:
• Collect regions of interest from a hyperspectral
image or a scatter plot.
• Review mean and ellipse information in a scatter
plot for your spectra.
• Create and review spectra plots from a region of
interest.
• Compare spectra signatures of regions with
reference spectra from either a spectra library or
another image.
• Save spectra to either an XLS or to an SPL library.
214

Geomatica® Focus
Extracting spectra from a region of interest
You can define regions of interest manually in the view
pane using the drawing tools and derive spectral
signatures for them. You can manually create regions of
interest using the New Shapes tool. The resulting
spectral end members can be used as input into spectral
processing algorithms for image classification and
spectral unmixing.
Hyperspectral spectra extraction provides linking
between image regions of interest, scatter plots, spectra
plots and spectral libraries. (See Configuring a
hyperspectral metalayer on page 215 )
About the Spectra Extraction Configuration
dialog box
The Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog box lets you
select input channel data and choose a bit depth for your
output data.
Input:
Lets you enter a file name and location or browse for the
data you want to use as input.
Browse:
Opens the File Selector dialog box, where you can locate
and select input data.
Region of Interest Channel:
PCI Geomatics
Lets you create a region of interest by either selecting a
layer from the input data or creating a new layer. You can
also set the bit-depth of a new layer.
Layer:
Lets you choose a layer from an input data file or create a
new layer.
Type:
Lets you choose a bit-depth for a new layer.
Accept:
Opens the Spectra Extraction dialog box and transfers
the settings you made in the Spectra Extraction
Configuration dialog box.
(See About the Spectra Extraction dialog box on page 216
).
Configuring a hyperspectral metalayer
During spectra extraction configuration, a metalayer is
created in the Files tree. When you right-click a new
metalayer in the Maps tree, you open a sub menu with
commands for the Spectra Extraction Configuration
dialog box, the Spectra Extraction dialog box, the Spectra
Plotting dialog box, and the Scatter Plot dialog box. You
can link between the image and a region of interest
defined by a mask layer and work with scatter plots and
spectra plots.
215

Geomatica® Focus
Metalayer analysis is based on wavelength metadata.
Files must be either .pix format or linked to a .pix file.
The region of interest channel must be added to a .pix
file when using compressed data.
1. From the Analysis menu, click Spectra Extraction.
2. In the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog
box, choose an input file from the Input list box.
If no file is available, click Browse, locate and
select a file in the File Selector dialog box, and
click Open.
3. In the Region of Interest Channel area, choose a
region of interest channel from the Layer list box.
If you want to change the bit depth of the layer,
choose one from the Type list box. You must select
a channel type if you are creating a new layer.
4. Click OK.
(See About the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog
box on page 215 ).
About the Spectra Extraction dialog box
The Spectra Extraction dialog box displays the channels
in the regions of interest in a table and is linked to the
Spectra Plotting dialog box. The spectra table lists the
channels used to generate endmember or sample
signatures from selected pixels within a region of interest.
You can either choose a channel as a region of interest
or create a new channel and draw a bitmap mask over
the region in the view pane.
PCI Geomatics
The Spectra Extraction dialog box lets you specify details
for a region of interest, edit the spectra list in the spectra
table, change spectra attributes, and adjust layer opacity.
(See Region menu on page 216 )
Region menu
The Region menu has options for adding spectra
channels, importing bitmap and vector layers, merging
channels, and exporting channels to create new files.
New:
Adds a new channel to the spectra table.
Import:
Lets you import vector or bitmap data to the spectra
table.
Vectors:
Allows you to import vector regions from an existing
vector segment for regions of interest and opens the
Import Vectors dialog box. (See About the Import Vectors
dialog box on page 218 )
Bitmaps:
Allows you to import bitmaps from an existing bitmap
layer for regions of interest and it opens the Import
Bitmaps dialog box. (See About the Import Bitmaps
216

Geomatica® Focus
dialog box on page 219 )
Merge:
Allows you to merge multiple regions of interest that you
select from a source region and opens the Merge
Classes dialog box. (See Merging a spectra channel on
page 220 )
Export Regions to Bitmaps:
Lets you export a region to a bitmap.
(See Edit menu on page 217 )
Edit menu
The Edit menu has options that let you clear and delete
the channels listed in the spectra table.
Clear Selected:
Clears a channel selected in the spectra table.
Clear All:
Clears all of the channels listed in the spectra table.
Delete Selected:
Deletes a channel selected in the spectra table.
Delete All:
PCI Geomatics
Deletes all of the channels listed in the spectra table.
(See Tools menu on page 217 )
Tools menu
The Tools menu lets you access the Scatter Plot dialog
box and the Spectra Plotting dialog box, and saves
spectra to a Spectra Library.
Scatter Plot:
Opens the Scatter Plot dialog box. (See Viewing the
scatter plot for a layer on page 232 )
Spectra Plot:
Opens the Spectra plotting dialog box. (See Plotting
spectra on page 221 )
Save Spectra Signatures:
Opens the Save Spectra to Library dialog box. (See
Saving a spectra plot on page 226 )
(See Spectra extraction table on page 217 )
Spectra extraction table
The Spectra Extraction table lists spectra and lets you
change several attributes in the table cells.
Value:
217

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you change the channel value for a channel listed in
the table.
Name:
Lets you enter a new name for a channel.
Color:
Shows the color of the bitmap layer for the channel
showing in the view pane.
Plot Mean:
Lets you include the plot mean information with the
spectra channel when you save the spectra extraction
information.
Plot Ellipse:
Lets you include plot ellipse information with the spectra
channel when you save the spectra extraction
information.
Description:
Lets you enter and edit a brief description for the spectra
channel.
Opacity:
Lets you set an opacity value for the spectra bitmap. An
opacity value of 100% makes the spectra bitmap
completely opaque. No underlying imagery is visible. An
opacity value of zero makes the bitmap invisible.
Underlying imagery is completely visible.
Apply:
Applies any changes you make with the Opacity slide
control to the image in the view pane.
Save and Close:
Closes the Spectra Extraction dialog box and saves the
changes you have made.
Save:
Saves the changes you have made but leaves the
Spectra Extraction dialog box open.
About the Import Vectors dialog box
The Import Vectors dialog box lets you select vectors and
choose the attributes you want to import to the Spectra
Extraction dialog box.
File:
Opens the File Selector dialog box, where you can
change the source files from which to import vector data.
Destination Class:
Reports the region you have selected in the Spectra
PCI Geomatics
218

Geomatica® Focus
Extraction dialog box to which you are importing vectors.
Segment:
Lists the ID for a segment in the source data.
Interior Points:
Lets you include interior point data with the imported
vectors.
Polygon Boundary:
Lets you include polygon boundary data with the
imported vectors.
Field:
Lets you choose the attribute you want to include with the
imported vectors.
Description:
Shows the descriptions for the vectors from the source
files.
Rasterize:
Uses the data and information you have set in the Import
Vector dialog box and imports it to the Spectra Extraction
dialog box as rasterized data.
About the Import Bitmaps dialog box
PCI Geomatics
The Import Bitmaps dialog box lets you choose bitmaps
from your source data and import them to the Spectra
Extraction dialog box.
Import As:
Lets you import a raster as a new channel in the Spectra
Extraction dialog box or import it as the channel you have
selected in the Spectra Extraction dialog box.
New Class:
Imports the raster and adds it to the Spectra Extraction
table.
Current:
Imports a raster as the channel you have selected in the
Spectra Extraction dialog box.
Bitmap List Window:
Lets you import the available bitmaps in the source data.
Overwrite existing training areas:
Lets you overwrite a selected channel in the Spectra
Extraction dialog box.
Import:
Imports the selected rasters to the Spectra Extraction
dialog box.
219

Geomatica® Focus
Merging a spectra channel
The Merge Classes dialog box lets you merge the
attributes of one channel listed in the Spectra Extraction
dialog box into another channel in the list.
Select Source Classes:
Reports the value, name, color, and description of the
available source channels.
Value:
Reports the channel value for a channel listed in the
source table.
Name:
Reports the name of a source channel.
Color:
Shows the color of the source bitmap.
Description:
Reports the description for the source spectra channel.
Select Destination Classes:
Reports the value, name, color, and description of the
available destination channels.
PCI Geomatics
Value:
Reports the channel value for a channel listed in the
destination table.
Name:
Reports the name of a destination channel.
Color:
Shows the color of the destination bitmap.
Description:
Reports the description for the destination spectra
channel.
1. In the Spectra Extraction dialog box, click Region
and then click Merge.
2. In the Merge Classes dialog box, choose a source
channel from the Select Source Classes table.
3. In the Select Destination Classes table, choose a
destination channel.
4. Click Merge.
Saving a spectral extraction
The Save Spectra Signatures dialog box lets you choose
the files and spectra you want to save to the Spectra
library.
1. Choose a file from the File list box.
If no file is listed, click Browse, locate and select a
220

Geomatica® Focus
file in the File Selector dialog box, and click Open.
2. Choose a mask to exclude any bitmap segment
from the Spectral Extraction file from the Mask list
box.
3. Enable one of the following Spectra Ranges
options:
• Channel # expresses spectra ranges in
channels (bands) 1, 2#100
• Wavelength # expresses the spectra ranges
in wavelengths (800um#12,000um)
4. Type a range based on the selected spectra range
type in the Range Value box.
For example, if a spectra range is for a channel, an
entered range of 5, -20, 30, -40 will yield spectrum
taken from channels 5 to 20 and channels 30 to 40;
if spectra range is for a wavelength, an entered
range of 800, -1200, 1400, -2000 will yield spectrum
taken from a wavelength of 800um to 1,200um and
a wavelength of 1,400um to 2,000um.
5. Enable any of the following check boxes:
• Save selected Spectra only # saves only the
spectra that you have selected
• Save ROIs to Bitmap layers # saves the
spectra as a bitmap layer
6. Click Save.
Plotting spectra
You can plot spectra with an interactive graph tool that
can be used independently or with the spectra extraction
tools allowing you to compare the signatures from a
spectra library with the spectra in your regions of interest.
1. From the Maps tree, select a layer.
2. From the Layer menu, click Spectra Plot.
(See About the Spectra Plotting dialog box on page 221 )
About the Spectra Plotting dialog box
The Spectra Plotting dialog box allows you to view and
configure a detailed graph that plots radiometric quantity
and wavelength.You can import spectra from several
sources that include the cursor position in the view pane,
a region of interest drawn in the view pane and listed in
the Spectra Extraction dialog box, and spectra signatures
from Spectra Library files.
There are several tools that let you control the data
display of the spectra you are plotting. You can show or
hide the controls and then work with the graph values by
zooming to any graph region along a plot line.
The Spectra Plotting dialog box controls include:
• Active Radiometric Quantity and Wavelength graph
• Active Displayed Spectra table
• Data controls
• Hyperspectral Image adjustments
• Plotting Range settings
• Reports
• Graph Options and settings
(See Radiometric quantity vs. wavelength graph on page 221
)
Radiometric quantity vs. wavelength graph
PCI Geomatics
221

Geomatica® Focus
The Radiometric Quantity vs. Wavelength graph allows
you to read radiometric and wavelength values for both
regions of interest and spectra library signatures in the
same graph. The X and Y scales can be adjusted using
the Plotting Ranges and Graph Option controls. You can
zoom to a region within the graph window by dragging
your mouse over the region you want to enlarge.
Library:
Measures radiometric quantities for spectra library
samples.
Band Number or Wavelength [nm]:
Measures the band number or wavelength of both the
library samples and your source data. The the graph
shows the unit of measure as Band Number or
Wavelength in nm depending on the presence of
radiometric transformation metadata in the sample data.
When no transformation metadata is present, the values
are shown as band numbers.
Image:
Measures radiometric quantities for the source data.
(See Displayed spectra on page 222 )
Displayed spectra
The Displayed Spectra table and controls lists the spectra
signatures available for viewing in the Spectra plot graph.
The table reports the spectra ID number, name, and
color. The Displayed Spectra controls allow you to show,
hide, and change the color of the spectra plot lines and to
choose new samples from a Spectra Library and new
areas of interest.
ID:
Assigns a number to spectra signatures in ascending
chronological order.
Name:
Lists the names of each spectra signature.
Color:
Lists the plot line colors for each spectra signature in the
table. You can change the color of a signature plot line in
the graph.
Show:
Lets you show or hide a signature plot line.
From Spectra File:
Opens the Select Spectra From Library dialog box. You
can change spectra libraries and choose more spectra
signatures. (See Selecting a spectra library on page 225 )
From Regions:
PCI Geomatics
222

Geomatica® Focus
Imports spectra listed in the Spectra Extraction dialog box
table and makes them available for viewing in the
Spectra Plotting dialog box.
From Image:
Imports spectra from the cursor position within the view
pane and adds the spectra values to the table, making
them available for viewing in the Spectra Plotting dialog
box.
Clear Spectrum:
Clears a selected spectrum from the Display Spectra
table.
Clear All:
Clears all of the spectra signatures listed in the Display
Spectra table.
Save Spectra:
Opens the Save Spectra to Library dialog box, where you
can add a spectra to a Spectra library. (See Saving a
spectra plot on page 226 )
Window Size Around Cursor:
Lets you choose a kernel size for the sample taken in the
view pane at your cursor location.
Spectra Quantity to Sample:
When your data contains radiometric transformation
metadata, the transformed spectra are listed in the
Spectra Quantity to Sample box. You can choose which
of the transformation quantities you want to sample from
the list.
The possible radiometric transformations are:
• Uncalibrated digital number (DN) values
• Non-physical adjustment
• At-sensor (apparent) radiance
• Scene radiance
• Scene irradiance
• Reflectance
Hyperspectral Image:
Let you work with hyperspectral image data.
Wavelength First:
Lets you adjust the starting wavelength value upward
from the default hyperspectral wavelength, read from the
file data.
Last:
Lets you adjust the last wavelength value downward from
the default hyperspectral wavelength, read from the file
data.
Mask:
Allows you to choose bitmap masks in your source files.
PCI Geomatics
223

Geomatica® Focus
(See Graph options on page 224 )
Graph options
The Graph options allow you to change the way the
graph lines for the Spectra plot are shown.
Overlay:
Lets you show numbered scales on the graph for library,
image, and wavelength values. Plot lines are
superimposed so that the values can be compared
directly.
Stack:
Shows a numbered scale for wavelength values only.
Plot lines are separated so that the plot shapes can be
compared.
Offset:
Lets you enter an offset for the graph plot lines.
(See Plotting ranges on page 224 )
Plotting ranges
The Plotting Ranges area lets you set several parameters
for a spectra plot.
Adjust Plot Range To Data:
Automatically adjusts the spectra plot to show all the
values in the data.
X-axis Min:
Lets you enter a minimum range for the graph X-axis.
Max:
Lets you enter a maximum range for the graph X-axis.
Image Min:
Lets you enter a minimum range value for data plotted
from the cursor position in the view pane.
Max:
Lets you enter a maximum range value for data plotted
from the cursor position in the view pane.
Library Min:
Lets you enter a minimum range value for data plotted
from a spectra library signature file.
Max:
Lets you enter a maximum range value for data plotted
from a spectra library signature file.
Same As Image:
PCI Geomatics
224

Geomatica® Focus
Matches the graph values to the cursor values from the
image in the view pane.
(See Report on page 225 )
Report
The report area reports information for spectra signatures
selected in the Displayed Spectra table based on both
the entire spectra and on specific pixel/line coordinates.
Current Spectrum:
Reports the ID for a spectra selected in the Displayed
Spectra table.
Wavelength:
Reports the wavelength of a spectra selected in the
Displayed Spectra table.
Intensity:
Reports the intensity of a spectra selected in the
Displayed Spectra table.
Current Pixel:
Reports the pixel location.
Current Line:
Reports the line location.
PCI Geomatics
Wavelength:
Reports the pixel wavelength value for the pixel/line
location.
Intensity:
Reports the pixel intensity value for the pixel/line location.
Hide Controls and Show Controls:
Hides or shows all controls for the Spectra Plot panel.
Zoom In:
Zooms into the plot lines in the spectra plot graph.
Zoom Out:
Zooms out of the plot lines in the spectra plot graph.
Zoom Overview:
Zooms the plot lines in the spectra plot graph to an
overview showing the extents of the plotted values.
Selecting a spectra library
The Select Spectra From File dialog box lets you open
spectra library files, choose spectra, and add them to the
table in the Spectra Plotting dialog box.
Spectra File:
225

Geomatica® Focus
Lets you enter a spectra file from which to choose
spectra signatures.
Browse:
Lets you find a spectra file from which you can select files
for export to the Spectra Plotting dialog box.
Library window:
Lists the spectra contained in an open spectra file.
Add to Plot:
Exports the selected spectra in the list in the Library
window to the Spectra Plotting dialog box.
1. From the Spectra Plotting dialog box, click From
Spectra File.
2. In the Select Spectra From Library, choose a
library file from the Spectral Library list box.
If no library file is listed, click Browse and locate
and open a different spectra library file or folder.
Spectra libraries use a .spl file name extension.
3. In the Spectra Library, select the spectra you want
to add to the Spectra Plotting table.
4. Click Add to Plot.
Changing the graph options
The Select Spectra From File dialog box lets you open
spectra library files, choose spectra, and add them to the
table in the Spectra Plotting dialog box.
PCI Geomatics
Spectra File:
Lets you enter a spectra file from which to choose
spectra signatures.
Browse:
Lets you find a spectra file from which you can select files
for export to the Spectra Plotting dialog box.
Library window:
Lists the spectra contained in an open spectra file.
Add to Plot:
Exports the selected spectra in the list in the Library
window to the Spectra Plotting dialog box.
1. Choose either Channel Number or Wavelength
from the X axis labelling list box.
2. Choose a wave record from the Wave record list
box.
3. Choose a number to represent the window size
from the Window size around cursor list box.
Saving a spectra plot
You can choose the files and spectra you want to save to
the spectra library.
1. Choose a file from the File list box.
If no file is listed, click Browse, locate and select a
file in the File Selector dialog box, and click Open.
226

Geomatica® Focus
2. Enable any of the following check boxes:
• Save selected Spectra only: saves only the
spectra that you have selected
• Save ROIs to Bitmap layers: saves the
spectra as a bitmap layer
3. Click Save.
Opening the DEM Editing dialog box
Digital elevation models (DEMs) may contain pixels with
failed or incorrect values. You can edit a DEM to smooth
out irregularities and create a more accurate model. For
example, areas such as lakes often contain misleading
elevation values; setting those areas to a constant value
improves the model.
For suggestions about how to correct common
irregularities, see Applying tool strategies for common
situations in digital elevation models on page 230 .
1. From the Analysis menu, click DEM Editing.
Editing a DEM
1. From the DEM Editing dialog box, choose a DEM
from the File list box.
If no DEM is available, click Browse and open a file
from the File Selector dialog box.
2. Choose a layer that contains the DEM from the
Layer list box.
PCI Geomatics
3. Type the value assigned to pixels that have no
elevation values because the image correlation
failed in the Failed box.
Some features are not accessible unless you enter
a failed value.
4. Type the value assigned to the area that lies outside
the DEM in the Background box.
The background value can be a maximum or
minimum value such as -150 or -999999. Some
features are not accessible unless you enter a
background value.
If you want to see the results without saving the new
layer, enable the Display option.
If you want to save the new layer in the project,
enable Save option and choose a file from the File
list box. Type a name for the new layer or select an
existing layer from the Layer list box.
If you want to display the results in the view pane,
enable the Display saved results check box.
5. If you want to apply the edits repeatedly and
achieve a cumulative effect on the data, enable the
Load results to input check box.
You can use a mask to identify specific areas that you
want to edit. The mask itself does not change the values
in the area that it covers, but you can use the tools in the
Area Fills Under Mask and Filtering and Interpolation
areas to edit the data under the mask.
Opening an existing mask
227

Geomatica® Focus
1. In the DEM Editing dialog box, click Open a Mask
Layer.
To create a mask, see Creating a mask on page 228 .
To modify the values under the mask, see
Replacing the elevation values under a mask on
page 228 .
To edit the DEM, see Filtering and interpolating
DEM values on page 229 .
2. In the Select Layer dialog box, click Browse.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, navigate to and
select the file.
4. Click Open.
The file and its available layers are displayed in the
Select Layer dialog box.
5. Select a layer and click OK.
Creating a mask
A mask is a vector shape that identifies specific areas
that you want to edit. The mask does not change the
values in the area that it covers.
1. From the DEM Editing dialog box, click the New
Mask Layer button.
2. In the Maps tree, select the new bitmap layer.
3. Use the New Shapes tools to draw a shape over
the area that you want to edit. For more information
PCI Geomatics
about the New Shapes tools, see Adding points to
an active layer on page 303 .
Replacing the elevation values under a mask
Once you have created a mask, you can replace the
unsatisfactory value.
To replace values with a failed value
1. Create a mask.
2. In the DEM Editing dialog box, click Fill.
To replace values with respective averages
1. Create a mask.
2. In the Area Fills Under Mask area, choose
Average of Each Shape from the Fill using list
box.
3. Click Fill.
To replace a value with global average
1. Create a mask.
2. In the Area Fills Under Mask area, choose
Average of All Shapes from the Fill using list box.
3. Click Fill.
To replace a value with a specific value
1. Create a mask.
2. In the Area Fills Under Mask area, choose
228

Geomatica® Focus
Specified Value from the Fill using list box.
3. Type a value in the Value box.
4. Click Fill.
To remove a mask
1. In the DEM Editing dialog box, click the Clear
Mask button.
To hide a mask
1. In the Maps tree, disable the new bitmap layer
check box.
To save a mask
1. In the DEM Editing dialog box, click Save the
Mask.
Filtering and interpolating DEM values
You can use the filters available under Filtering and
Interpolation to eliminate failed or incorrect values in a
DEM. You can apply each filter repeatedly and in
different combinations to achieve a cumulative effect.
You can also limit the effect of the selected filter to a
specific area by creating a mask.
Remove Noise Filter
Noise refers to pixels containing distorted or failed
values. Because pixels adjacent to failed pixels also tend
to contain incorrect values, the Remove Noise Filter
PCI Geomatics
uses two filters to identify failed pixel values and their
surrounding pixels:
• The first filter calculates the average and variance
of the eight elevation values immediately
surrounding each pixel, excluding failed and
background pixels. If the center pixel is more than
two standard deviations away from the average, it is
replaced with the failed value.
• The second filter counts the number of failed values
immediately surrounding each pixel. If five or more
failed pixels border the center pixel, the center pixel
is also set to a failed value.
Erode holes
Because pixels adjacent to failed pixels also tend to
contain incorrect values, the Erode holes filter replaces
the eight pixels around each failed pixel with the failed
value. When you apply the filter under a mask, the mask
enlarges to cover any additional pixels replaced by the
failed value.
Median Filter
Ranks the pixel values within a 5x5 pixel frame according
to brightness. The median is the middle value of those
image pixel values, which is then assigned to the pixel in
the center of the frame.
Smooth DEM
Is a Gaussian filter that calculates the weighted average
of all the pixels in a 3x3 pixel frame and assigns the value
to the center pixel in the frame. Failed and background
229

Geomatica® Focus
pixel values are not replaced by the filter and are not
used in the Gaussian calculation.
Interpolate
Replaces failed values with an estimate weighted by
distance calculated from the valid pixels surrounding the
failed pixel(s). The algorithm used to calculate the
estimate is adequate for small areas of less than 200
pixels, but is not recommended for larger areas.
To limit the filter to a specific area, you must create a
mask.
1. From the DEM Editing dialog box, choose a filter
from the list box in the Filtering and Interpolation
area.
2. Enable one of the following options:
3. Click Apply.
For more information, see Applying tool strategies for
common situations in digital elevation models on page 230
.
Applying tool strategies for common
situations in digital elevation models
Editing DEMs requires an understanding of the desired
results. Each DEM presents a variety of problematic
situations. The following examples present the most
common problems and provide some methods to handle
them.
Adjusting pixel values for a lake
PCI Geomatics
Because lakes have no features that can be used for
matching during DEM extraction, lakes in a DEM often
contain failed pixel values or incorrect elevation values.
1. Create a mask over the lake.
2. Identify the elevation of the lake.
3. In the DEM Editing dialog box, choose Specified
Value from the Fill using list box in the Area Fills
Under Mask area.
4. Type a value for the lake elevation in the Value box.
5. Click Fill.
6. Click the Clear Mask button.
Adjusting the pixel values for multiple lakes
1. Create a mask over each lake.
2. In the DEM Editing dialog box, choose Interpolate
from the list box in the Filtering and Interpolation
area.
3. Enable the Use Mask option.
4. Click Apply.
5. In the Area Fills Under Mask area, choose
Average of Each Shape from the Fill using list
box.
6. Click Fill.
7. Click the Clear Mask button.
Compensating for forests and urban areas
The repetitive textures of forests and urban areas often
cause those areas to contain a lot of failed values, noise,
and poorly correlated elevation values.
230

Geomatica® Focus
1. Create a mask over the area.
2. In the DEM Editing dialog box, click Fill Mask from
Failed.
3. Choose Interpolate from the list box in the Filtering
and Interpolation area.
4. Enable the Use Mask option.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click the Clear Mask button.
Neutralizing cloud-covered areas
When clouds obscure a large area over rugged or
mountainous terrain, the area may be too complex to
interpolate. To avoid confounding the data, you can set
the entire area to the background value.
1. Create a mask over the area.
2. In the DEM Editing dialog box, choose Specified
Value from the Fill using list box in the Area Fills
Under Mask area.
3. Type the background value in the Value box.
4. Click Fill.
5. Click the Clear Mask button.
Removing noise from a DEM
Noise is a random occurrence of irrelevant or
miscorrelated values distributed throughout a DEM that
reduces its accuracy. The following procedure usually
produces a satisfactory DEM, except for areas containing
large bodies of water, such as lakes.
1. Ensure all large bodies of water, such as lakes,
have been fixed. See Adjusting pixel values for a
lake on page 230
PCI Geomatics
2. In the DEM Editing dialog box, enable the Load
results to input check box.
3. Choose Remove Noise Filter from the list box in
the Filtering and Interpolation area.
4. Enable the Entire DEM option.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click Apply again.
7. Choose Interpolate from the list box in the Filtering
and Interpolation area.
8. Enable the Entire DEM option.
9. Click Apply.
10. Choose Smooth DEM from the list box in the
Filtering and Interpolation area.
11. Enable the Entire DEM option
12. Click Apply.
13. Click Apply again.
Selecting the DEM layer
The Layer Selection dialog box lets you specify the DEM
channel you want to edit.
Browse:
Opens the File Selector dialog box.
Files:
Lists the files selected from the File Selector dialog box.
Channels/Segments available:
Lets you select channels and segments for editing.
231

Geomatica® Focus
1. From the Layer Selection dialog box, click
Browse.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a
file, and click Open.
3. In the Files pane, select a file.
4. In the Channels/Segments available pane, choose
a DEM layer and click OK.
(See Editing a DEM on page 227 )
Viewing the scatter plot for a layer
Scatter plots are primarily used as data visualization
tools. Each plot shows the correlation between the
histograms for two channels.
Pixel distributions for the two specified image channels
display in the scatter plot using one channel as the X-axis
and the other as the Y-axis. They allow you to see where
the majority of data values (or pixels) are concentrated.
Frequency values at each point are color coded. Scatter
plots also calculate relevant statistics and display at the
bottom of the scatter plot.
Natural groupings of the spectral data are best illustrated
with a two-channel data set. For image data with more
than two channels, it is difficult to plot the values and
visually identify natural spectral groupings. Statistical
techniques can be used to automatically group an
n-dimensional set of observations into natural spectral
classes. This procedure is called cluster analysis.
A scatter plot can reduce the number of channels used
PCI Geomatics
for a classification. If two channels have a very high
correlation, you can omit one or the other as input for the
classification. You can also determine which portion of
the spectra a given bitmap or training area occupies, and
you can use a scatter plot to determine the homogeneity
of a bitmap or training area. If the scatter plot for the
bitmap is tightly clustered with few outlying pixels, the
spectral response for that area is homogenous in the
selected image layers.
You can open the Scatter Plot dialog box from the Layer
menu or from the training area collection window for a
supervised classification.
Plot Scale
For 8 bit imagery, the scatter plot axis are 256 pixels by
256 pixels. The top-left pixel represents the number of
pixels with a value of 255 for the input channel on the
Y-axis and zero for the input channel on the X-axis. The
bottom-right pixel represents the number of pixels with a
value of 255 for the input channel on the X-axis and zero
for the input channel on the Y-axis. When images are
outside the 0-255 range, the imagery is scaled to fit within
that range. When images are outside the 0-255 range,
the maximum digital number (DN) value is used for the
plot scale.
Pixel Brightness
Is determined by the frequency of pixels in the image with
a given gray-level value. Bright areas indicate common
combinations and black areas indicate combinations that
rarely occur.
232

Geomatica® Focus
1. From the Maps tree, select an image layer.
2. From the Layer menu, click Scatter Plot.
Scatter plots typically show a bright smear in one area of
the plot. By default, the plot appears with input channel 1
on the X-axis and input channel 2 on the Y-axis.
In the controls area of the Scatter Plot dialog box, you
can specify the channels you want to show as the X and
Y axes. A color scheme for the plot and a look-up table
(LUT) can be applied to either channel.
Changing the input channel for the X and Y
axes:
1. From the Scatter Plot dialog box, choose a channel
from the X axis and Y axis list boxes.
The frequency is displayed using a simple grayscale or a
pseudo-color table.
Mask:
The Mask option allows you to create a scatter plot of a
region under a bitmap mask. You can also create a
scatter plot of the entire raster. When creating a scatter
plot of the entire raster, you set the Mask option to None.
The Mask list box displays all of the bitmap layers that
are in the current area. The bitmap layers are listed
whether they are saved or not and for each saved
bitmap, both the file and layer names are displayed.
Statistics:
PCI Geomatics
The Statistics section displays the linear equation derived
from a linear regression calculation and the correlation
coefficient associated with the scatter plot. A value of
'N/A' (Not Applicable) is given if these statistics cannot be
calculated (usually if one of the selected channels is
empty). The correlation coefficient measures the
similarities of the two image channels. A value of one
indicates a complete correlation between two images,
whereas a value of zero indicates there is no correlation
between images. The A -1 value indicates a negative
correlation.
Using the Scatter Plot dialog box
(For the Hyperspectral Scatter Plot only) To
specify which values are compared
1. From the Hyperspectral Scatter Plot dialog box,
enable one of the following options:
• Entire file: plots all the values in the two
channels
• Selected classes: plots only the values in the
selected regions of the two channels (the
Mask list is disabled)
To change the color scheme of the display
1. From the Scatter Plot dialog box, enable one of the
following options:
• Gray: displays the plot with grayscale
representation
233

Geomatica® Focus
• Pseudo: displays the plot with pseudo-color
representation
Because the human eye can only detect approximately
16 shades of grey, the scatter plot is more easily
interpreted when displayed in pseudo-color with a white
background. You can apply an LUT to either input
channel.
To apply an LUT to the X or Y-axis input channel
1. From the Scatter Plot dialog box, enable the Apply
LUT check boxes for the X- and Y-axis channels.
To hide the controls
1. From the Scatter Plot dialog box, click Hide
Controls.
Zooming into and out of a scatter plot
You can zoom into an area of a scatter plot that is
displayed in the Scatter Plot dialog box.
1. In the Scatter Plot dialog box, position the cursor
over the area of the scatter plot you want to zoom
into.
2. Right-click and select Zoom In or drag a rectangle.
You can click Zoom Out to revert to the previous
view of the scatter plot and Zoom to Overview to
revert to the original scatter plot.
Using the graph controls
Click Graph Controls at the bottom of the Profile Graph
dialog box. You can also right-click in the profile and
select Graph Controls from the shortcut menu.
Use the Graphic Controls dialog box to
• Change the viewing range
• Export the plot to a graphic file
• Show and hide the plot legend.
• Fix the plot aspect ratio
• Change the plot background color
• Print a plot
You can ensure the image information is not distorted by
fixing the aspect ratio.
To open the Graph Controls dialog box
1. From the Scatter Plot dialog box, click Graph
Controls.
To fix the aspect ratio of a plot
1. From the Graph Controls dialog box, enable the
Fix aspect ratio check box.
To print a scatter plot
1. From the Graph Controls dialog box, click Print.
PCI Geomatics
Changing the x and y view ranges
234

Geomatica® Focus
You can control the range and hold the X and Y axes to
the original relationship.
1. In the X View Range and Y View Range areas,
enter a value in the Min and Max spin boxes.
The default range of values for 8-bit imagery is 0 to
255.
The range varies depending on the ground distance
covered by an image and the length of a vector.
Exporting a profile
You can change the file format before selecting an output
file.
1. In the Graph Controls dialog box, choose a file
format from the Format list box.
2. Click File.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, enter a file name in
the File name list box.
4. Click Save.
5. In the Graph Controls dialog box, click Export.
Working with legend and color controls
To show a legend for the color scale
• From the Graph Controls dialog box, enable the
Show legend check box.
PCI Geomatics
To change the background color for a scatter
plot
• From the Graph Controls dialog box, choose a
color from the Background palette.
Interpreting a profile table
In the case of an RGB layer, a Profile Table is a
numerical representation of the RGB input channels of an
active image.
Sample Points and Distances
The table lists numeric information for each sample point
along the current profile. A sample point is a pixel. The
spacing is determined by the pixel size. The range
depends on the length of the vector and the image scale.
A field is displayed for each of the channels that is
marked Visible in the Profile Options area.
1. From the Profile Table dialog box, click Options.
Profile Options:
Gives you control over various aspects of the profile
graph and table. You can control the following properties:
Color:
Displays the color used to represent each channel on the
profile graph. You can change any color by clicking on
the color chip you want to change. This opens the Line
235

Geomatica® Focus
Color editor based on the RGB color space. The color
representation of the channel's profile on the graph is
changed.
Visible:
A check mark in this field indicates that a particular
channel is visible in the profile graph and profile table.
Current Channel:
Indicates which plotted channel is associated with the
mensuration bars. There can be only one current
channel, which is indicated by an X. To select the current
channel, click the appropriate field under the Current
Channel column.
Profile View:
Sets the coordinates for the horizontal axis of the Profile
Graph. The sample point coordinates are based on the
image pixel size, in meters. Choose between
Georeferenced and Sample Point coordinates. If
Georeferenced is selected, the values in the X axis are
displayed in metres. If Sample Points are selected, the
values in the X axis represent pixel units. For example, if
a vector line is 8000 m long, the maximum value for the X
axis if georeferenced is selected in the Profile options is
8000. If the imagery has a resolution of 30 m, the
maximum value for the same line displayed using Sample
points is approximately 267 (8000/30).
Changing the color of a channel
PCI Geomatics
Color spaces have been developed as a means of
describing color. Two of the most common color spaces
are RGB (Red-Green-Blue) and CMY
(Cyan-Magenta-Yellow). The former is used by monitors
and the latter is usually used by printers. RGB and CMY
can be difficult to understand.
Another color space, IHS (Intensity-Hue-Saturation) give
a more accurate representation of how the eye interprets
color. IHS transformations are useful in digital image
processing, as they allow for greater control over the
components that make up color.
You can change the color of any channel by clicking on
its color chip. This opens the Line Color editor. The color
representation of a channel#s profile on the graph is
changed.
1. Click the color chip for the corresponding channel.
2. In the Line Color editor, move the Red, Green, or
Blue slide controls to the left or right to adjust your
colors.
3. Click Close.
To customize the color of the profile vector, use the Set
Line Color tool on the Display toolbar.
Changing the profile vector color
1. Click a line.
2. On the Display toolbar, click the Set Line Color
236

Geomatica® Focus
arrow and choose a color from the color palette.
(See About the Change Color dialog box on page 237 )
About the Change Color dialog box
The Change Color dialog box allows you to create a
custom color using one or a combination of the following
palettes:
Basic Colors:
Is a palette of basic colors that are preset and cannot be
modified.
Color Continuum:
Is a palette composed of all possible hue/saturation
combined values.
Intensity/Lightness Scale:
Controls the brightness of the color. It is the only palette
available if the chosen color model is Gray.
The color you create using the palettes is visually
displayed alongside the color that is being replaced.
These are referred to as the New and Old colors,
respectively.
The numeric representation of the new color opens in a
series of data entry fields. You can edit the entries in
these fields and the new color changes accordingly. The
number of fields present corresponds to the chosen color
PCI Geomatics
model.
RGB:
Is one of the additive color models and is based on the
light being emitted from computer monitors. The three
primary colors are red, green, and blue. Combining the
red, green, and blue colors in various proportions
produces all the colors on your screen.
CMYK:
Is one of the subtractive color models and is based on
the amount of light being absorbed and reflected by an
ink film. This model is often used in printing. The primary
colors are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
HLS/HIS:
Is a more intuitive model based upon the way we
perceive color. The primary components are hue (shade
of color), lightness/intensity (brightness of color), and
saturation (strength or purity of color).
Gray:
Is a continuum of gray values ranging from pure black to
pure white.
Printing without the mensuration bars
showing
237

Geomatica® Focus
You can print the profile graph by clicking Print at the
bottom of the Graph Controls dialog box.
1. Open the Profile Table dialog box.
2. Click Options.
3. In the Profile Options dialog box, click Close.
4. In the Graph Controls dialog box, click Print.
Using the profile statistics
You can open the Profile Statistics dialog box by clicking
the Statistics button in the Profile Table dialog box.
Statistics are shown for each RGB channel in the
selected layer. The dialog box calculates the minimum,
maximum, average, weighted average, and weighted
average summary statistics for the sample gray values
along the profile.
Weighted average is the most accurate measure of
central tendency among sample points. The weight of a
sample gray value is the ratio of the length of a sample
interval over the total distance of all the sample intervals.
Controlling the cursor
You can use the Cursor Control dialog box to specify or
determine the location of the cursor in the view pane. To
open the Cursor Control dialog box, click the Cursor
Control button on the Tools toolbar. The cursor control
information shows both the location on the map page and
to the georeferenced ground location represented in the
image.
PCI Geomatics
The Cursor Control dialog box has four areas that display
the cursor position in different coordinate systems. You
can move the cursor in any of the supported coordinate
schemes by changing the any of the coordinates.
The Paper area measures the paper size set for the Map.
It can be larger than the area view where imagery is
displayed. The paper size can be changed in the Maps
tree by right-clicking the Map layer and choosing
Properties. From the Map Properties dialog box, choose
Properties and then click the Page Setup tab. The cursor
control panel shows the location in millimetres with the
origin at the bottom right of the map.
If more than one file is opened in the view pane, the
coordinates are based on the selected database. You
can change the database file. The result is the pixel and
line that the cursor points to in the currently selected
database. The file origin, (0,0) is the top left of the image
or file. If the projection has not been set for a file, the
database coordinates are not displayed.
The Geocoded area displays the cursor coordinates in
geocoded coordinates (for example, Eastings and
Northings) according to the geocoding shown in the
Cursor Control dialog box. If opened data has no
associated geocoded locations, the geocoded location is
shown in pixels and lines. The units displayed indicate
the geocoding type.
The User Defined Projection area shows Lat/Long
coordinates as the default if sufficient geocoding
information is available for the viewed data. Typically,
UTM data with a valid zone number must be provided for
238

Geomatica® Focus
this transformation to occur. If a projection has not been
set, the User Defined Projection coordinates are not
displayed.
Opening the GPS tool
The GPS Tool provides two functions: you can use it to
update the position of the cursor within an Area layer and
as a data input device for a new vector layer. In either
case, you must have an Area layer that contains the
appropriate georeferencing information open.
Before the GPS Tool can be opened, the GPS
Receiver/Focus connection must be set. The GPS
receiver connection is made through the Focus Options
dialog box. (See Setting up a GPS receiver on page 111 )
1. Ensure a GPS receiver is connected to the system
according to manufacturer specifications and that it
is set up correctly.
2. From the Tools menu, click GPS Tool.
Using the GPS tool
1. Ensure a GPS connection has been established.
2. Open an Area layer containing appropriate
georeferencing information.
The georeferencing bounds should correspond to
the area where the GPS receiver is located. If the
GPS receiver is outside of these bounds, you
cannot update the cursor or collect vectors.
3. From the Tools menu, click GPS Tool.
PCI Geomatics
When the GPS Tool is active, you can use it to update
the cursor position or to add vector data to an Area in the
project.
Updating the cursor position using the GPS
receiver
1. Ensure the GPS Tool is open.
2. From the GPS Tool dialog box, click one of the
following buttons:
• Capture Stream: automatically updates the
cursor position at the specified stream interval.
For more on stream interval. (See Setting up a
GPS receiver on page 111 )
• If you want to stop the stream capture, click
Finish.
• Capture Point: moves the cursor only once.
To reset the cursor position using the GPS
Receiver, click the button again.
Inputting vector point data using the GPS
receiver
1. Ensure the GPS connection has been established.
2. In the Maps tree, right-click an Area layer and click
New Vector Layer.
3. In the New Vector Layer dialog box, enable the
Point option.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Maps tree, select New Point Layer.
6. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow
239

Geomatica® Focus
list and click Points.
7. In the GPS Tool dialog box, click one of the
following buttons:
• Capture Stream: adds new points to your
vector layer at the specified stream interval.
• If you want to stop the point capture, click
Finish.
• Capture Point: adds a new point to your
vector layer. You can continue to collect points
by repeatedly clicking the button.
Inputting vector line or polygon data using
the GPS receiver
1. Ensure the GPS Tool is open.
2. In the Maps tree, right-click an Area layer and click
New Vector Layer.
3. In the New Vector Layer dialog box, enable one of
the following options in the Layer Type area:
• Line
• Topological Line
• Polygon
• Topological Polygon
4. Click OK.
5. In the Maps tree, select the new layer.
6. In the GPS Tool dialog box, click one of the
following buttons:
• Capture Stream: adds a new vertex to the
vector layer at the specified stream interval.
New vertices are added to the line or polygon
until you click Finish.
• Capture Point: adds only the initial vertex to
the line or polygon layer. You can continue to
collect vertices for the line or polygon by
PCI Geomatics
repeatedly clicking the button.
Using the ADAPT algorithm
You can use a single channel with a pseudo-color table
(PCT) to represent data instead of a full three-channel
RGB image. This helps if you need to import data to
software that accepts only single-channel .tif files with
PCTs. It can also be used to reduce an RGB file to a third
of its original size. You can also change data from a
single-image channel with a PCT to full RGB
representation.
When preparing color images for export to third-party
software (for example, a GIS system with limited color
capability), the RGB2PCT compresses a 24-bit color
(RGB) image into a single 8-bit layer based on a PCT. A
PCT colors the compressed image to look similar to the
original 24-bit color image.
The input file (FILE) contains the input RGB layers
(DBIC) and the target layer where the compressed result
(DBOC) is saved. When enhancing image data with an
LUT, it should first be applied to the RGB layers using the
LUT PACE program.
The input RGB layers and the output-compressed layer
should be 8-bit. This restriction is due to the 8-bit nature
of a PCT. While any type of image layer can be used,
values are internally converted to 8-bit data. Using non
8-bit data may result in unexpected results.
1. Open and run the ADAPT program from the
Algorithm Library to generate a well-distributed PCT
to represent a particular image.
240

Geomatica® Focus
2. Choose RGB2PCT from the Algorithm Library.
3. Select three raster layers you want to use as your
RGB channels.
4. Select the PCT that was created using ADAPT.
5. Run RGB2PCT and save the results in the Maps
tree.
Also see PCTMAKE, CMPRSS8, and ERRDIFF in the
Algorithm Library.
Converting RGB to pseudo-color
1. From the Algorithm Library, run the algorithm
ADAPT.
ADAPT takes a 24-bit RGB image and compresses
it to a single 8-bit image, based on a user-supplied
PCT. For each pixel, the nearest color in the
supplied PCT is established and a corresponding
color index is placed in the output channel.
The results from ADAPT are used as input into the
RGB2PCT program. RGB2PCT takes a 24-bit RGB
image and compresses it to a single 8-bit image, based
on a user-supplied PCT. For each pixel, the nearest color
in the supplied PCT is established, and a corresponding
color index is placed in the output channel.
Converting RGB to pseudo-color
PCE encodes an input channel into three output
channels (such as red, green, and blue
components) using a PCT held in a database
segment.
Opening the PCT Editing dialog box
You can create and modify PCTs in the PCT Editing
dialog box. A pseudo-color layer appears in the Maps
tree as an icon with vertical color bars followed by layer
file information. A PCT is generated only for an image
layer that is designated as a PCT layer.
• From the Maps tree, right-click a pseudo-color layer
and click Edit PCT.
Adjusting the pseudo-color for single values
1. From the PCT Editing dialog box, click the Single
Value tab.
2. Click one of the following buttons:
• Smooth: creates a smooth color ramp from
dark blue to magenta
• Stepped: creates a series of short color ramps
• Random: creates a set of random colors
• Gray Ramp: creates a gray ramp with a black
value of 0 and a white value of 255
• From the Algorithm Library, run the PCE algorithm.
PCI Geomatics
Editing a value
241

Geomatica® Focus
The Current Pseudo-Color Table displays color values for
the current PCT. You can edit the breakpoint and RGB
values in the table cells.
1. In the PCT Editing dialog box, double-click the cell
you want to change and type a new value.
If you want to select multiple PCT entries, drag over
a series of list entries.
Selecting a basic color value
Color Selection lets you modify the output color of the
current PCT using the controls in the Color Selection
area. The following is a list of the controls in the color
selection area:
• Basic color sample table
• Basic color sample bar
• Color selection control
• Color Model list
• Old and New sample boxes
• Red, Green, and Blue boxes
• Gray Value box
• Apply command
1. Select a color model from the Model box.
2. Click a tile in the Basic Colors table.
The color range changes in the Color Continuum
and Intensity controls.
3. If required, use the Color Continuum, Instensity,
or color value boxes to adjust the selected color.
4. Click Apply.
PCI Geomatics
Customizing range-based
pseudo-color tables
You can edit PCT channels for range-based
pseudo-color. Standard and custom color selections are
available under the Range-based tab. You can maintain
existing PCT colors or replace them with predefined
standard PCT color values.
1. From the PCT Editing dialog box, click the
Range-based tab.
Using standard mode
1. From the PCT Editing dialog box, click the
Range-based tab.
2. Enable the Standard option in the Color Selection
area.
Keeping the original color values
You can maintain or revert to the original pseudo color
values.
1. Click Use Original PCT.
Selecting colors within the range
242

Geomatica® Focus
1. From the Range-based page, enable the Custom
option in the Color Selection area.
2. Drag the left and right markers to the positions you
want on the color bar in the Color Selection area.
Applying pseudo colors to pixel values in a
raster
You can render pseudo RGB color values to the pixel
values of the active raster. This allows you to distinctly
view specific areas of the raster.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click the pseudo-color layer
and select Edit PCT.
The PCT Editing window appears.
2. Click the Range-based tab.
3. In the Color Selection area, click Custom.
4. Double-click First Color.
The Select First Color in Range window appears.
5. Select a color from which you want the color range
to start.
6. Click OK.
7. Double-click Last Color.
8. The Select Last Color in Range window appears.
9. Select a color at which you want the color range to
end.
10. Click OK.
11. Click Interpolate.
The color bar below First Color and Last Color
displays the new color range.
PCI Geomatics
12. In the Histogram area, slide the markers or specify
the values in the Min X and Max X boxes to define
the section to which you want to apply the color
range.
13. If required, go back to the color bar and slide its
markers to narrow or widen the color range. You
can also specify the values of the range in the Left
Marker and Right Marker boxes.
The color tabs of the histogram left and right
markers change color accordingly.
14. Click one of the following options from the Values
Outside Range list in the Setup Preview of New
PCT section:
• Set to Black, which blackens the area of the
histogram that is outside the specified range
• Set to White, which whitens the area of the
histogram that is outside the specified range
• Ignore, which retains the original color of the
histogram outside the specified range
15. Click Compress.
The histogram reflects the new color range. The
color bar below Compress changes to reflect the
new color range and the option specified in the
Values Outside Range list. The specified pseudo
color range is rendered to the specified pixel values
of the active raster.
Opening the Raster Editing dialog box
You can replace the pixel values in an image with a value
of your choice. After you have set a value in the Raster
Editing dialog box, you can use the New Shapes tool to
243

Geomatica® Focus
edit the raster (see Adding points to an active layer on
page 303 ).
1. On the Editing toolbar, click the Raster Editing
tool.
Specifying a value
1. In the Pixel value box, type the value that you want
to use.
2. In the Pixel value box, type the value that you want
to use.
If you want to replace all the pixel values within the
polygon instead of just drawing the outline of the
polygon, select the Fill polygon check box.
3. In the Line width box, type a value that represents
the thickness of the line in pixels. Click OK.
Changing a default enhancement
Images can be processed at several levels, from
standard enhancements that filter images with a single
mouse click to fully customized enhancements using
LUTs and histograms. Original image files can be difficult
to visually understand. Enhancements make imagery
clear and easier to interpret. When you open an image
file in Focus, it is automatically enhanced in the view
pane. You can change the default enhancement. (See
Setting options and preferences on page 101 )
Changing Default Enhancements
PCI Geomatics
You can remove the default enhancement from the
Raster toolbar by clicking the Enhancements arrow and
choosing None. The enhancement is removed, and the
view pane shows the image with no enhancement. You
can also change the enhancement that is automatically
applied to imagery when you open new files.
1. From the Tools menu, click Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, select Layers.
3. In the Rasters area, choose a default enhancement
from the Default visual enhancement list box.
4. Click OK.
There are three methods for enhancing images with
Focus. For quick adjustments to your image data, you
can use the Raster toolbar command buttons or the
shortcut menu in the Focus Maps tree. For more detailed
custom enhancements you can use the LUT Editor. The
image enhancement is only applied through your system
memory and must be saved if you want to use a
particular LUT again or if you want to export the
enhanced image.
Applying a linear enhancement
There are several commands on the Raster toolbar for
enhancing and adjusting the appearance of your images
quickly. The Raster toolbar includes contrast and
brightness controls along with a list of standard
enhancements, such as Linear, Root, Adaptive,
Equalization, and Infrequency. The following
enhancements are available from the Raster toolbar:
None
244

Geomatica® Focus
Removes all enhancements and displays the original
uncorrected image.
Linear
Improves the overall contrast of an image by stretching
the minimum and maximum values in the image uniformly
over the entire available dynamic range. This
enhancement is best applied to images that have a
normal distribution of digital number (DN) values.
Root
Applies a square root enhancement, which compresses
higher DN values in an image and disproportionately
expands the darker values. Original darker values in the
image are given more contrast than the original bright
(high-DN) values.
Adaptive
Applies an optimal enhancement curve, which is an
adaptive derivative of an image histogram.
Equalization
Applies a histogram equalization enhancement.
Infrequency
Applies an infrequency enhancement, which maps gray
levels based on frequency of occurrence.
The Linear stretch enhancement improves the overall
PCI Geomatics
contrast of an image by stretching the minimum and
maximum values in the image over the entire available
dynamic range.
1. On the Raster toolbar, click the Enhancements
arrow and choose Linear.
Zooming an image feature with an
enhancement
1. In the view pane, click on or near the feature you
want to zoom.
2. On the Zoom toolbar, click the Zoom 1:1 Image
Resolution button.
Note: When an image overview is set in the view pane,
all image statistics are used to calculate the
enhancement. When an image is zoomed, apply the
enhancement again. Focus uses the statistics of the
zoomed image to calculate the new enhancement.
Image Enhancements and Image Statistics:
Digital numbers in images from the same sensor can vary
because of land cover or environmental changes in the
scene. Enhancements are based on statistics from each
image. Therefore, the effects of an enhancement can
vary in different images taken from the same sensor.
For example, RADARSAT images are stored in 16-bit
unsigned channels supporting a dynamic range from zero
to 65,535 digital numbers. The usable image values in
the radarsat.pix file are zero to 30,000 digital numbers.
The image appears dark, with no enhancement, because
245

Geomatica® Focus
it uses less than half of the available range.
When Focus collects statistics for applying an
enhancement, the Tail Trim option omits the upper and
lower 2% of the image histogram.
Adjusting toolbar enhancements
You can control how Focus computes each of the
standard enhancements before they are applied to an
image by adjusting the tail trim options from the Raster
toolbar.
Applying the Tail Trim option
The pixel values for the image are averaged out over the
dynamic range but the first 2% and the last 2% of values
are omitted from the enhancement computation. You can
also adjust the amount of tail trim from the enhancements
command list from 1% to 5%.
• On the Raster toolbar, click the Enhancements
arrow and click Tail Trim.
A check mark next to Tail Trim indicates the option
has been enabled.
Adjusting the amount of Tail Trim
1. On the Raster toolbar, click the Enhancements
arrow and click Set Trim%.
2. Choose a number that represents the percentage of
tail trim.
The enhancement must be re-applied to the new
view pane.
Exclude Min/Max
If this option is enabled, the minimum and maximum
values are not used as end points when applying the
enhancement.
The table below shows a simple pix file with only 7 pixels
and 1 line. When the Exclude Min/Max option is enabled,
the lowest and highest digital number (DN) values
(excluding the outliers 0 and 255) are stretched to 0 and
255. When the Exclude Min/Max option is disabled, the
original minimum and maximum values are used as
anchors. The remaining values are stretched with respect
to this range.
Table 10.
Pixel # of
line 1
Raw Data
DN
Enhanced
DN Exclude
Min/Max
Enhanced
DN Include
Min/Max
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 5 50 51 52 60 255
0 0 127 140 153 255 255
0 170 212 216 221 255 255
PCI Geomatics
246

Geomatica® Focus
Decreasing the image contrast
Interpreting image data is often simplified by adjusting the
image contrast and brightness. You can increase or
decrease the image contrast and brightness with the
Raster toolbar controls. To increase the image contrast,
click the Contrast button on the Raster toolbar.
1. On the Raster toolbar, click the Contrasts arrow
and choose Decrease.
You can see an approximate 10% change in the image
contrast each time you click the Contrast button. You can
also return the contrast level to the original enhancement
before the contrast was changed by choosing the Reset
option.
The Brightness tool lets you increase, decrease, or reset
the image brightness. To increase the image brightness,
click the Brightness button on the Raster toolbar. Each
click changes the image brightness by approximately
10%.
Decreasing the image brightness
1. On the Raster toolbar, click the Brightness arrow
and choose Decrease.
You can also choose Reset to return to the original
the brightness level.
Enhancing images from the shortcut menu
You can also apply image enhancements with the
shortcut menu in the Maps tree. The same image
enhancement commands in the Raster Toolbar are found
in the shortcut menu.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a data file layer and
click Enhance.
2. Choose an enhancement.
Opening the LUT editor
Focus allows you to create custom enhancements of
8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit rasters.
Using the LUT Editor, you can create enhancements by
directly tracing or editing the histogram of the active
raster. You can also compare the same histogram using
different enhancements, and change the minimum and
maximum values within the bit depth and x-axis ranges.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click the active layer.
2. Select Enhance and then select Edit LUTs.
The Multi Histogram Display window appears if an
RGB map layer is selected, otherwise, the
Histogram Display window appears.
3. Click a histogram.
The LUT Editor appears. The Min X and Max X
values mark the boundaries of the graph along the
x-axis. These values change accordingly when you
manually change them or slide the x-axis level
PCI Geomatics
247

Geomatica® Focus
markers. The Min LUT (X) and Max LUT (X) values
encompass the range that marks the bit depth of the
image. These values can change when you
manually change them or slide the y-axis level
markers.
Displaying a histogram in the LUT Editor
Focus allows you to display the input and output versions
of the histogram that you want to edit in the LUT Editor.
You can also display the breakpoints that can be used to
edit the histogram. The changes made to the breakpoints
are reflected in the ouput.
1. In the LUT Editor, select one of the following
options from the Mask list box:
• Entire raster: displays a histogram of the entire
raster.
• Current view area: displays a histogram of the
area that is displayed in the Focus viewer.
• Bitmap layer: displays a histogram of a region
under a bitmap mask. The bitmaps are listed
whether they are saved or not. Both the file
and layer names are displayed for the saved
bitmaps.
2. From the View menu, select or cancel the selection
of the following options:
• Input Histogram: displays the original version
of the histogram.
• Output Histogram: displays the resulting
histogram after enhancements
• Breakpoints: displays nodes, which facilitate
the enhancement process
Moving an entire histogram
You can move the entire histogram to the right or left of
the x-axis boundaries to change the range.
• In the graph area, right-click and drag the entire
graph to the left or to the right.
Using the LUT tools
You can undo edits and compare different versions of a
histogram for the same image data using the tools on the
LUT Editor.
When the LUT Editor is opened, Focus stores a copy of
the histogram as a smaller version and displays it to the
right of the LUT editor in the preview window. When you
make changes, you can switch between the previous and
the edited LUT using the Toggle option. You can also
copy the edited LUT and save it as a temporary backup.
Using the LUT enhancement options
Enhancements are applied to values within the bounds
defined by the x-axis and y-axis markers.
The vertical markers set the minimum and maximum
output grayscale values. The horizontal markers set the
range of input grayscale values for an enhancement.
PCI Geomatics
248

Geomatica® Focus
To allow tail trimming, enable the Tail Trim check box. In
the Tail Trimming list box, select the tail trim percent from
1 to 5. You can also enable the Exclude Min./Max check
box and enter values in the appropriate boxes. Once you
apply an enhancement, you can customize it.
The view with the changes in the histogram panel is
automatically updated.
Trace-editing a LUT histogram
You can use the LUT Editor to create custom
enhancements by directly editing the red histogram in the
LUT graph. You can trace the general contours of a
histogram. Focus redraws the image in the view pane.
1. In the LUT Editor, click the Manual Mode button in
the Graph editing tools area.
2. In the graph area, drag a contour.
Comparing custom enhancements
You can create different custom enhancements and
switch between the preview window and the LUT Editor
using the Copy and Toggle options on the LUT Editor.
1. In the LUT Editor, click the Manual Mode button in
the Graph editing tools area.
2. Create a custom enhancement by trace-editing the
histogram.
3. Click Copy.
4. Create a new trace-edit enhancement or click on
one of the enhancements to the right of the main
graph.
PCI Geomatics
5. Click Toggle.
You can also edit the LUT directly in a spreadsheet-style
dialog box by selecting Edit Table from the Graph editing
tools. To open the LUT for a histogram, click Edit Table in
the Graph editing tools area.
Some of the other graph editing tools include: Add
Breakpoint, Move Breakpoint, and Delete Breakpoint.
These options let you edit the LUT for a specific location
on the original image histogram. To show the breakpoints
on the curve from the view option list, choose
Breakpoints. The Thin Breakpoints option removes
excess breakpoints along straight stretches that are
associated with a LUT.
Applying a new look-up table to the
corresponding image plane
In the LUT, you can view both breakpoints and look-up
values.
1. In the Graph editing tools area, click the Edit
Table button.
2. In the Lookup Table dialog box, enable the View
Lookup Values check box.
3. View the breakpoints in the Breakpoints table.
The values for X and Y where Y = LUT (X). The
value of Y is a function of the value of X in terms of
both the position of X in the LUT graph and in terms
of the mathematical function that is currently
applied.
4. In the LUT Editor, click Close.
249

Geomatica® Focus
Working with spatial filters
Coherent signal scattering in SAR data often causes
image speckles or salt and pepper effects. Speckling is
inherent in most images and can inhibit accurate image
interpretation. There are several image filters in Focus to
help manage image speckling.
Filters can enhance or subdue the details of an image.
They can also be adjusted to sharpen, smooth, or detect
hidden edges that are present in an image but not
immediately visible. You can use the low-pass and
high-pass filters to reduce graininess and highlight edge
details in images. There are also specialized filters that
you can use to reduce sensor noise and to clean up radar
imagery.
Filter computations are based on pixel samples drawn
from a moving sample set, referred to as the kernel. The
Kernel samples the image pixels and applies the filter to
the center pixel in the sample. Once the filter is applied to
the first sample, the kernel moves one pixel to the right
and re-applies the filter until the entire image has been
sampled. The kernel dimensions, measured in pixels,
must always be an odd number; for example, 3x3 or
11x15. When the entire image has been sampled, Focus
applies the changes to the entire image in the view pane.
(See Opening the Filter dialog box on page 250 )
Opening the Filter dialog box
The Filter dialog box lets you apply high-pass, low-pass,
PCI Geomatics
and custom filters. You can control the X and Y
dimensions of the kernel in the Filter Size boxes. You can
work with different filter types.
1. Select an image layer in the Maps tree.
2. From the Layer menu, click Filter.
Filtering under a mask:
You can apply the filters to all the data in the layer or you
can create a bitmap mask to restrict the filtering process
to a particular area in the layer. See Filtering under a
mask on page 251 .
Low Pass Tab:
Low-pass filters pass only the low-frequency information
or the gradual gray-level changes. They produce images
that appear smooth or blurred when compared to the
original data. Click the Low Pass tab to work with
low-pass filters. See Using low-pass filters on page 251 .
Speckle Filters:
Also called adaptive filters, speckle filters are used with
radar imagery to provide low-pass filtering. Speckle filters
remove radar noise while maintaining high-pass
information, such as edges. You can work with speckle
filters under the Low Pass tab. (See Using low-pass
filters on page 251 )
High Pass Tab:
Pass only the high-frequency information or the abrupt
250

Geomatica® Focus
gray-level changes. The high-frequency image contains
all of the local details of the image, such as object edges.
Click the High Pass tab to work with high-pass filters.
(See Using high-pass filters on page 254 )
Custom Tab:
Lets you design your own filter. You can specify the
coefficients for a filter template, regardless of the actual
coefficients. Custom filters perform spatial filtering on
each pixel in an image using the gray-level values in
either a square or a rectangular kernel. You create
custom filters under the Custom tab.
(See Creating custom filters on page 256 )
Filtering under a mask
You can create a bitmap mask to restrict the filtering
process to a particular area in the layer.
1. In the Maps tree, create a bitmap layer. See
Creating a new bitmap layer on page 141 .
2. On the bitmap layer, use the New Shapes tool set
to draw shapes over the areas that you want to
filter. See Adding points to an active layer on page 303
.
3. From the main menu, click Layer and then click
Filter.
For more information, refer to Opening the Filter
dialog box on page 250 .
4. From the Mask list box in the Filter dialog box,
select the bitmap layer that contains the mask.
PCI Geomatics
The Mask list box displays all of the bitmap layers
that are in the current area. The bitmap layers are
listed whether they are saved or not. For each
saved bitmap, both the file and layer names are
displayed.
5. If you want to display or save the results for the
mask area only, enable the Output only mask area
check box.
The data that is not covered by the mask is set to
the No Data value and is not saved in the output
file.
Using low-pass filters
Low-pass filters pass only the low-frequency information
or the gradual gray-level changes. They produce images
that appear smooth or blurred when compared to the
original data. For non-radar image data, the following
low-pass filters are available:
Average Filter
smooths the image data to eliminate noise. A 3x3 filter
kernel computes the sum of all pixels in the filter kernel
and divides the sum by the total number of pixels in the
kernel.
Median Filter
also smooths your image data, but computes the median
values within a rectangular filter window surrounding
each pixel. This has the effect of smoothing the image
251

Geomatica® Focus
and preserving edges.
In a 3x3 kernel, the median filter finds the median pixel
value, the middle value in an ordered set, where an equal
number of values are below and above the median. For
example, 8 is the median value for the following 3x3
kernel in a gray-level values set:
Mode Filter
computes the mode of the gray-level values that occur
most frequently in the filter kernel. For example, in a 3x3
filter window with the following pixel values, the filtered
pixel value of 3 occurs five times.
The mode filter is calculated as follows:
Mode filters are typically used to clean up thematic maps
for presentation purposes. This filter replaces small island
themes with their larger surrounding themes. With the
mode filter, the maximum kernel size is 7x7. The filter
window can be rectangular.
Sometimes, two values can be equally distributed within
the kernel sample. In such cases, if the center value is
one of the competing values, it becomes the kernel
sample value. If not, the first instance of the competing
values becomes the sample value.
For example, in a 3x3 filter window with the following
pixel values, the pixel values 3 and 5 each occur three
times. In this case the Mode pixel of the filter kernel is
calculated as follows:
Neither 3 nor 5 is at the center of the kernel. The 5 in the
top row is encountered first and therefore becomes the
mode value.
1. In the Filter dialog box, enter an X- and Y-filter
kernel size in the Filter size spin boxes.
The larger the kernel size, the smoother (more
blurred) the image.
2. Click the Low Pass tab.
3. Enable one of the following filter options:
• Average
• Median
• Mode
4. Click Apply to View.
The filter is applied to the image in the view pane
only.
If you want to adjust a filter or change to a different
one, click Remove View Filter.
Note: Image filters are not cumulative. Each filter is
applied to the original data stored in the image file.
Using Gamma filters:
Most image files contain some type of high-frequency
PCI Geomatics
252

Geomatica® Focus
noise (speckling). While a low-pass filter reduces image
speckles, it can also degrade some of the finer detail in
the image. Special low-pass filters, called Gamma filters,
can preserve image details by filtering on individual pixels
in an image using the gray-level values in a square
window surrounding each pixel. You can apply a speckle
filter to preserve some of the linear features in the image.
Gamma filtering is primarily used on radar data to remove
high-frequency speckle, while preserving high-frequency
features (edges). The input for the number of looks of the
radar image is used to calculate the noise variance. You
can specify an intensity or amplitude formate for the radar
image.
The dimensions of a Gamma filter must be
odd-numbered and can be from 3x3 to 11x11 pixels.
Filter size greatly affects the quality of processed images.
If a filter is too small, the noise filtering algorithm is not
effective; if a filter is too large, subtle details of the image
will be lost in the filtering process. A 7x7 filter usually
gives the best result.
All pixels are filtered. In order to filter pixels located near
edges of an image, edge pixels are replicated to give
sufficient data.
For example:
Table 11.
a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9
In a 3x3 filter window
Algorithm:
The resulting gray-level value R for the smoothed pixel is:
R = I for Ci less than or equal to CuR = (B*I +
SQRT(D))/(2*ALFA) for Cu < Ci < CmaxR = CP for Ci
greater than or equal to Cmax
where:
NLOOK = number of looksVAR = variance in filter
windowCP = center pixel gray-level valueI = mean
gray-level in the filter windowCu = 1/SQRT(NLOOK)Ci =
SQRT(VAR)/ICmax = SQRT(2)*CuALFA = (1 +
Cu**2)/(Ci**2 - Cu**2)B = ALFA - NLOOK - 1D = I*I*B*B
+ 4*ALFA*NLOOK*I*CP
For the amplitude image, each gray level will be squared
before applying the algorithm, and the square root of the
calculated pixel is returned as the final result.
Applying a gamma filter
1. In the Filter dialog box, enter an X- and Y-filter
kernel size in the Filter size spin boxes.
Use the mode-value information for an image to set
up a Gamma filter.
2. Click the Low Pass tab.
3. Enable the Gamma filter option.
PCI Geomatics
253

Geomatica® Focus
4. In the Number of Looks box, enter a value that
represents the number of noise-variation
calculations of the radar image that you want to use.
5. In the Image Format list box, choose one of the
following:
• Amplitude
• Power
• DB
6. Click Apply to View.
If the filtered image is hard to see at your current
resolution, you can zoom the image to see the filter
effects. The Gamma filter suppresses the image
speckles, while the linear details are preserved.
Note: You must enter correct image mode values for the
image data files you are working with. The number of
looks and the image amplitude information is available in
the format definition included with your data.
(See Using high-pass filters on page 254 andSaving a
filtered image to a new file on page 257 )
Using high-pass filters
High-pass filters emphasize border pixels between
contrasting areas and are often referred to as edge
detectors. Like speckle filters, they highlight pixel
contrasts associated with linear features and edge
details. You can apply a high-pass filter to highlight pixel
contrasts associated with linear features and edge
details.
Gaussian Filter (SIGMSQ = 4)
PCI Geomatics
is used as a band-pass filter to blur an image. This filter
uses the following Gaussian function to compute the filter
weights:
G (i, j) = exp ( -((i-u)**2 + (j-v)**2) / (2 * SIGSMQ) )
where (i, j) is a pixel within the filter window, (u, v) is the
center for the filter window, and SIGMSQ is set to 4.
The filter weights W(i, j) are the normalized values of G(i,
j) over the entire filter window; therefore, the sum of all
weights is 1.
The gray level of a filtered pixel is the sum of W(i, j) *V(i,
j) over all pixels in the filter window, where V(i, j) is the
original value at location (i, j).
Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of
the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give
sufficient data.
Laplacian Edge Detector Filters
generate sharp edge definition of an image. These filters
can be used to highlight edges that have both positive
and negative brightness slopes.
The two Laplacian filters have different weight
arrangements, as shown below:
Table 12.
Type 1 Type 2
254

Geomatica® Focus
0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0 -1 -1 -1 -1 8 -1 -1 -1 -1
where the sum of all weights = 0
Example of 3x3 Laplacian filters
Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of
the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give
sufficient data.
Sobel Edge Detector Filter
creates an image where edges (sharp changes in
gray-level values) are shown. Only a 3x3 filter size can
be used with this filter.
This filter uses two 3x3 templates to calculate the Sobel
gradient as shown below:
Table 13.
-1 0 1 -2 0 2 -1 0 1 1 2 1 0 0 0 -1 -2 -1
X
Templates
Table 14.
Y
window
Apply the templates to a 3x3 filter window.
X = -1*a1 + 1*a3 - 2*a4 + 2*a6 - 1*a7 + 1*a9
Y = 1*a1 + 2*a2 + 1*a3 - 1*a7 - 2*a8 - 1*a9
Sobel Gradient = sqrt (X*X + Y*Y)
Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of
the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give
sufficient data.
Prewitt Edge Detector Filter
creates an image where edges (sharp changes in
gray-level values) are shown. Only a 3x3 filter size can
be used with this filter.
This filter uses two 3x3 templates to calculated the
Prewitt gradient value, as shown below:
Table 15.
-1 0 1 -1 0 1 -1 0 1 X
1 1 1 0 0 0 -1 -1 -1 Y
a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8
a9
3x3 filter window
where a1 - a9 are gray levels of each pixel in the filter
PCI Geomatics
Templates
Table 16.
255

Geomatica® Focus
a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8
a9
3x3 filter window
where a1 - a9 are gray levels of each pixel in the filter
window
Apply the templates to a 3x3 filter window.
X = -1*a1 + 1*a3 - 1*a4 + 1*a6 - 1*a7 + 1*a9
Y = 1*a1 + 1*a2 + 1*a3 - 1*a7 - 1*a8 - 1*a9
Prewitt Gradient = sqrt (X*X + Y*Y)
Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of
the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give
sufficient data.
Edge Sharpening Filter
uses a subtractive smoothing method to sharpen an
image. First, an average filter is applied to the image. The
averaged image retains all low-spatial frequency
information, but has its high-frequency features, such as
edges and lines, attenuated. Consequently, the averaged
image is subtracted from its original image and the
resultant difference image will primarily have the edges
and lines remaining. After the edges are deternimed in
this manner, the difference image is added back to the
original image to give an edge-enhanced image. The
resultant image will have clearer high-frequency detail;
however, there is a tendency for noise to be enhanced.
PCI Geomatics
Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of
the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give
sufficient data.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click an image layer and click
Filter.
2. In the Filter dialog box, enter an X- and Y-filter
kernel size in the Filter size spin boxes.
3. Click the High Pass tab.
4. Enable a filter option.
5. Click Apply to View.
The high-pass filter changes the image in the view
pane. You can save a filter view by clicking Apply
to File.
The Save New Filtered Image Layer dialog box
opens. You can either save the filtered image to a
new image layer, or overwrite the existing layer.
(See Creating custom filters on page 256 andSaving
a filtered image to a new file on page 257 )
Creating custom filters
You can design your own filter by specifying the
coefficients for a filter template. Custom filters perform
spatial filtering on each pixel in an image using the
gray-level values from either a square or a rectangular
kernel surrounding each pixel.
Some common custom filters are
• Weighted average
• Directional
• Center weighted
256

Geomatica® Focus
1. Click the Custom tab.
2. Enter your filter parameters in the matrix provided.
For example, for a 3x3 filter you can use a1 a2 a3,
a4 a5 a6, or a7 a8 a9, and so on.
When you enter a range of a1 - a9, the filter is
placed over the image so that the target pixel is
covered by a5. The neighbourhood pixels are then
multiplied by the corresponding values in the filter
and then summed. The pixel at a5 is replaced by
this sum.
3. To read a kernel from a specific file, click Import.
The number of entries in the first line of the file
determines the number of columns in the kernel. All
lines of data that follow have the same number of
entries. If there are more, they are ignored. If there
are less, then zeros are used to make up the
difference. Data entries should be separated by
spaces, tabs, or new lines.
4. To write a kernel to a file, click Export.
5. Click Normalize.
The Normalize button divides all entries by the sum
of the kernel entries. All other filtering algorithms
normalize their respective kernels before performing
the filtering operation.
You can reset kernel entries to zero by clicking
Reset.
(See Saving a filtered image to a new file on page 257 )
Saving a filtered image to a new file
PCI Geomatics
Save New Filtered Image is used to select where the
output of the applied filter should be saved. A file and
channel must be specified for each color element
composing the filtered layer: three for RGB layers and
one for grayscale and PCT layers.
1. From the Filter dialog box, click Apply to File.
2. In the Save New Filtered Image dialog box, choose
a file from the File list box.
If a file is not listed, click Browse, locate and select
it, and click Open.
3. Choose a layer from the Layer list box.
If you want to create a new layer, choose New
Layer and enable the Load filtered layer check
box.
4. Repeat steps step 2 and step 3 for the remaining
channels.
5. Click OK.
Scaling images
Remote sensing data is structured in 8-bit, 16-bit, and
32-bit formats. There are many instances where you may
need to scale data from a higher to a lower bit depth. For
example, you can prepare data for visual display by
scaling it from 16-bit or 32-bit to 8-bit. You can also scale
data to a lower bit depth before you export it to
applications that do not support data bits greater than 8.
Scaling will let you change 32-bit real data from a real
number to a whole number and you can scale to reduce
the size of your imagery. However, there is a risk of
losing information when you scale to reduce file size.
257

Geomatica® Focus
Image Data and Scaling
For 8-bit data, the digital numbers (DN) assigned to each
pixel are between zero and 255. For 16-bit data, DNs can
fall between zero and 65,535. Because eyes are not
sensitive to subtle differences in grayscale or color, we
cannot visually benefit from images composed of
thousands of shade variations.
Focus can also perform color and shade scaling to help
you control a large range of data values. Scaling an
image often makes the data easier to manage and
interpret.
Scaling output data using Save As
The Save As dialog box lets you scale data to a new bit
depth while letting you preserve the original version.
Scaling data is a two-part process. Once a destination
folder for your output is chosen, you can choose available
GDB options in the GDB Options Editor. You then select
the bit depth for the scaled output by applying new
properties.
Using the Output Layer Properties panel, you can choose
the layer you want to scale, set your output to 8- bit,
16-bit, or 32- bit, and choose a scaling method.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click the layer you want to
scale and click Save As.
2. In the Save As dialog box, choose a file from the
File list box.
If an output file is not listed, click Browse, locate
PCI Geomatics
and select it, and click Save.
3. Choose a format from the Format list box.
If you want to reconfigure a format, click Options
and make any changes in the GDB Options Editor.
4. Click Properties.
5. In the Output Layer Properties dialog box, choose
a bit-depth for your output from the Output type list
box.
6. Choose a scaling method for your output from the
Scaling list box.
7. Click OK.
Available scaling methods
LIN:
The linear function scales data values equally from the
input range to the output range. Other non-linear
functions also perform compression and/or stretching.
SQR:
The square function compresses the lower end of
spectrum and stretches the upper end. The image gray
levels are shifted towards the lower end so the image
appears darker in comparison to the linearly scaled
result.
ROOT, LOG:
The logarithmic and square root functions compress the
upper end. The square root is stronger than logarithmic,
so the image is made brighter.
258

Geomatica® Focus
NQ:
The automatic normalized quantization method
transforms a typical input image of a unimodal histogram
into a near-symmetric, Gaussian-like distribution with the
median input level transformed to the mid-point of the
output range. The algorithm applies a smooth nonlinear
function to gradually compress the extreme high or low
portions of input range. The middle portion of the data
range is mapped with little distortion. This method is
recommended for image quantization to a lower number
of gray levels. It is robust in handling 32-bit input images.
EQ:
The equal-area quantization method maps an image to
the output range with an equalized output histogram. For
example, each output level has approximately the same
number of pixels.
POW:
The general power function fine-tunes the amount of
compression and shifting each way with a user-supplied
exponent value. If the exponent is greater than 1, the
effect is shifting down; if the exponent is less than 1, the
effect is shifting up.
For both the input and output the entire range of digital
numbers (DN) is used in determining the range. Using
the Save As feature may be appropriate for scaling to
8-bit data, but situations may arise where you need
control of the input and output range. If this is the case,
you must use the SCALE algorithm in the Algorithm
PCI Geomatics
Library.
Scaling output data
A SCALE algorithm is available in the Algorithm Library.
In some cases, you may want to use the SCALE
algorithm instead of the Save As method, as it gives you
more control when scaling an image by allowing you to
specify your input minimum and maximum and your
output minimum and maximum values. Additionally, you
will be able to specify the left and right tail trimming, the
scaling function, and the bit depth for the output layer.
SCALE maps the gray levels of an input image to the
gray levels of an output image. The typical use of this
program is to scale/quantize imagery in a high-resolution
(32-bit or 16-bit) channel down to a fewer number of gray
levels to fit into a low-resolution (16-bit or 8-bit) channel.
SCALE can also be used to stretch or shift the dynamic
range of an input image for visual enhancement.
If you have a Geomatica Prime license, you can use the
SCALE program in the Algorithm Library.
Minimum and Maximum Input Gray Level Values:
If Minimum Input Gray Level Value and Maximum Input
Gray Level Value are set as the default, the SCALE
algorithm calculates the range from the image data based
on the tail-trimming levels.
If the number of input channels is greater than one and
both Minimum Input Gray Level Value and Maximum
259

Geomatica® Focus
Input Gray Level Value are specified, this range is used
for every input channel.
Tail Trimming:
Optionally specifies the amount of tail trimming of input
image histogram before scaling. If Minimum Input Gray
Level Value and Maximum Input Gray Level Value are
specified, the specified input range is used, while Left Tail
Trimming% and Right Tail Trimming% are ignored. If the
two trimming parameters are not specified, the minimum
and maximum of image data for every input channel is
used for input range.
The two trimming parameters are useful only for scaling
algorithms (LIN/SQR/LOG). The two quantization
algorithms squeeze tails automatically.
Minimum and Maximum Output Gray Level Value:
Specifies the minimum and maximum output gray-level
values after scaling. If the number of channels is greater
than one, the values are used for every output channel.
Scaling Function:
Specifies the scaling function or quantization algorithm.
The following scaling functions are available
• #d289e3_id on page 258 Linear.
• #d289e3_id on page 258 Square.
• #d289e3_id on page 258 Square root and
Logarithmic.
PCI Geomatics
• #d289e3_id on page 258 Power with a specified
exponent as defined by Exponent.
• #d289e3_id on page 258 Automatic normalized
quantization
• #d289e3_id on page 258 Equal-area quantization
Output Type:
Specifies the sub-data type of one or more resulting
images.
• 8-bit unsigned
• 16-bit signed
• 16-bit unsigned
• 32-bit real
1. Open SCALE from the Algorithm Library.
2. Select one or more raster layers for scaling.
3. Fill in the input parameters for the file.
4. Run SCALE.
5. Right-click the new layer and click Save.
Fusing image data
There are two algorithms you can run from the Algorithm
Library that can fuse different data files into a new file.
The Raster Calculator lets you work with raster data in
the spectral domain, while providing indices such as the
NDVI Leaf Area Index. This section provides information
on using the Raster Calculator tool, the IHS-FUSE, and
the PANSHARP algorithms.
Running the FUSE algorithm
Intensity/Hue/Saturation-FUSE performs data fusion of
an input RGB color image on an input file with a
260

Geomatica® Focus
black-and-white intensity image The result is an output
RGB color image with the same resolution as the
intensity image. If the input and output files are different,
the input RGB color image is resampled using the
specified resampling method. Either the Hexcone or
Cylinder IHS color model is used for data fusion.
IHS converts red, green, and blue image channels to
intensity, hue, and saturation image channels, which
enhances and controls the output colors for a given set of
input red/green/blue imagery.
CYLINDER was the original method used by the IHS and
RGB programs in previous PCI software releases
(Version 6.0.1 and earlier). The Hexcone model is used
by many commercial image processing software
programs. One model can produce more visually
pleasing results than the other, depending on the
circumstances. The Hexcone model runs about 15%
faster than the Cylinder model.
Running FUSE is similar to running IHS and RGB. IHS
separates an RGB channel into three color space
components (intensity, hue, and saturation) and places
each in a separate channel. The RGB program can then
be used to convert intensity, hue, and saturation channel
output by IHS back to red, green, and blue channels. The
IHS and RGB programs can enhance and control the
output colors more easily for any three channels in an
image database file.
In computer imaging, colors are produced as
combinations of the additive primary colors (red, green,
and blue). Another means of color definition is in terms of
PCI Geomatics
intensity, hue, and saturation.
Intensity is the lightness or darkness of a color. For
example, in an axis that is equidistant from the three
primary color axes, which are orthogonal or perpendicular
to each other, zero intensity represents black. As the
intensity is increased, the lightness increases and the
darkness decreases. Full intensity (for 8-bit data, this is
255) represents white.
Hue refers to an actual color and is defined as an angle
on a circle that is centered and perpendicular to the
intensity axis. For the Hexcone model, zero degrees
represents red and hue values cycle through
Red-Green-Blue-Red; whereas, in the Cylinder model,
zero degrees represents blue and hue values cycle in the
opposite direction through Blue-Green-Red-Blue. The
following table shows the unscaled and scaled hue
values for both IHS models:
Table 17.
Hue
Angle
Hexcone
Unscaled
Model
Scaled
Cylinder
Unscaled
Red 0 0 240 170
Yellow 60 42 180 128
Green 120 85 120 85
Cyan 180 127 60 42
Model
Scaled
Blue 240 170 0 or 360 0 or 255
Magenta 300 212 300 212
Red 360 255 240 170
261

Geomatica® Focus
Saturation is the amount of color present or the radius of
the circle described by the hue. Zero saturation
represents no color and would appear as a gray shade
depending on the associated intensity; full saturation (1.0
for unscaled Hexcone model or 208.2066 for 8-bit
unscaled Cylinder model) represents full color.
Full saturation accentuates the RGB components at the
expense of other hues, in that other hues peak in their
saturation at less than the maximum possible saturation.
IHS is an easier means of controlling the output color
than RGB. For example, it is easier to comprehend
lightening an image (increasing the intensity) or adding
more color (increasing the saturation) than it is to
comprehend the effects of increasing or decreasing the
RGB values. One possible application of IHS is to
produce channels from three input channels, stretch the
saturation channel, and then convert the IHS channel
data back to the equivalent RGB channels for video
display. The output image would have a better saturation
range without changing the colors of the original image.
The following diagram shows the geometric relationship
between the RGB and IHS coordinate systems for
representing color. The hexcone or cylinder is oriented so
that the angles between the Intensity axis and the
primary RGB color axes are the same. The Saturation
axis is perpendicular to the Intensity axis. Hue is the
angle between the radius of the circle defined by the
RGB value and the Saturation axis.
Geometric relationship between RGB and IHS
1. With a multispectral and panchromatic images
open, open the Algorithm Library, and locate and
double-click FUSE.
2. Select the panchromatic image layer as input to the
Intensity Layer.
3. Select the multispectral image layers as input into
the Red, Green, and Blue image layers.
4. Click the Input Params 1 tab and choose a type of
resampling you want to use from the Resample
Mode list box.
5. Choose a model from the IHS Model list box.
6. Click Run.
An advantage of running IHS and RGB instead of only
PCI Geomatics
262

Geomatica® Focus
running FUSE is that you can enhance the output from
IHS individually, and then use the enhanced output in
RGB.
Running IHS and RGB
1. With multispectral and panchromatic images open,
open the Algorithm Library, and locate and
double-click IHS.
2. Select three image layers from your multispectral
file for the red, green, and blue input layers.
3. Click the Input Params 1 tab and choose a type of
resampling you want to use from the Resample
Mode list box.
4. Click Run.
5. Open the Algorithm Library, and locate and
double-click RGB.
6. Select a high-resolution panchromatic image layer
as input for the intensity layer.
7. Select hue and saturation outputs from IHS as the
inputs for the hue and saturation input layers.
8. Click the Input Params 1 tab and choose a type of
resampling you want to use from the Resample
Mode list box.
9. Specify the output bit depth.
10. Click Run.
Using the PANSHARP algorithm
PANSHARP fuses high-resolution panchromatic imagery
with multispectral imagery, creating a high-resolution
color image. This technique is often referred to as
pan-sharpening. This program was designed to work with
8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit real data. Panchromatic data can
PCI Geomatics
be fused with multi-spectral imagery simultaneously
acquired by the same sensor or with images from
different sensors. The best results is achieved when the
imagery is collected simultaneously and the resolutions of
the panchromatic and multispectral data are closely
matched. The spectral characteristics of the original data
will be preserved in the resulting high resolution color
imagery. This means that analysis such as classification
can be done on the pan-sharpened imagery with the
added benefit of higher spatial resolution.
For more information, visit the PCI Web site at
http://www.pcigeomatics.com/support/
quickguide/pansharp.pdf.
For information about orthorectifying QuickBird and
IKONOS data for QuickGuides, go to:
http://www.pcigeomatics.com/support/
quickguide/QuickBird.pdf
http://www.pcigeomatics.com/support/
quickguide/IKONOS_Help_v2.pdf
Note: Landsat 7 pan and ms data is co-registered at the
satellite; therefore, the geocorrection step is not
necessary when using this data.
1. Ensure the panchromatic (PAN) channel and
multi-spectral (MS) channels are co-registered,
geo-corrected, or orthorectified.
2. Open the PAN and MS images.
3. Open the Algorithm Library, and locate and
double-click PANSHARP.
263

Geomatica® Focus
4. Choose the pan image channel from the InputPan
port.
The input reference image channels should be
selected so that the ms bands cover the frequency
range of the panchromatic channel as closely as
possible.
The channel number given in the above table is the
standard ordering on the sensor and may differ from
the order in an actual data file.
5. Select the MS channels to use in the Input port.
The best pan-sharpening results are obtained from
MS channels whose wavelengths lie within the
spectral frequency range of the pan data.
6. The output can either be sent to the viewer or can
be saved to a new .pix file.
Note: To avoid reducing the radiometric resolution of the
data, process and save all the image bands in signed 16
bits. Testing demonstrated that 16 bits for intermediate
data are enough; 32 bits are not necessary.
The following is a list of the reference bands for
some well-known satellite sensors:
Table 18.
Sensor
Landsat 7
(ETM+)
SPOT 1,
2, 3
PCI Geomatics
Reference Bands
Green 2 Red 3 Near IR:
4
Green 1 Red 2
Sensor
(HRV)
SPOT 5
(HRG)
IRS 1C,
1D
Blue 1 Green 2
Reference Bands
Green 1 Red 2
IKONOS Blue 1 Green 2 Red 3 Near IR:
4
QuickBird Blue 1 Green 2 Red 3 Near IR:
4
There is only one optional parameter in the InputParams
1 tab. For a description of the No data image value
parameter, see PANSHARP in the online Help.
The automatic image fusion algorithm was developed by
Dr. Yun Zhang from the University of New Brunswick. For
more information and comparative results, see the below
references:
• Zhang, Yun. Problems in the fusion of commercial
high-resolution satellite, Landsat 7 images, and
initial solutions. ISPRS, Vol. 34, Part 4, #Geospatial
Theory, Processing and Applications#, Ottawa,
2002.
• Zhang, Yun. A new automatic approach for
effectively fusing Landsat 7 and IKONOS images.
IEEE/IGARSS'02, Toronto, Canada, June 24-28,
2002.
264

Geomatica® Focus
Using the raster calculator
The Raster Calculator lets you formulate, write, and run
calculations based on data associated with raster files. It
provides a graphical interface where you can create
expressions for working with any raster data, such as
spectra data and digital elevation models (DEM).
When you build an expression, either type the expression
in the Expression box or build the expression by clicking
the buttons and items in the dialog box. Combining the
two methods may cause unwanted effects.
The Raster Calculator also provides indices, such as the
NDVI Leaf Area Index. You can calculate results for the
simplest raster arithmetic or the most complex equations
and your output can be a number, a 2D image, or both.
The following table shows a list of the Raster Calculator
categories and their associated functions.
Table 19.
Category
Attribute Statistics
Channel Statistics
Constants
Conversion
PCI Geomatics
Functions
FieldValue - min, max,
mean, sum, mode, std,
median, count, first, last,
wgtavg
Channel - min, max, mean,
sum, mode, std, median,
count
E, PI, 2*PI, PI/2, PI/4
Rad2Deg, Deg2Rad,
Division
Exponential
Extreme
Hyperbolic
Logarithmic
Random
Rational
Sign
Category
Trigonometric
Special Values
Variables
Functions
Feet2Meters, Meters2Feet
Div, Mod
Exp, Pow, Sq(a), Squr, Sq
(a,b), hyp
Min, max, round, floor, ceil
Cosh, Sinh, Tanh, ACosh,
ASinh, ATanh
Ln, Log, Alog
Rand, Seed
If a = b, If a b, If a > b, If
a < b, If a >= b, If a

Geomatica® Focus
advanced mode. Advanced mode provides more
category and function options and allows you to choose
from several attributes that can be used in your
calculations.When you use the Raster Calculator, new
output layers are added to the Focus window.
Expression
The Expression menu lets you start a new expression,
open a saved expressions, export an expression as and
EASI file (.eas), and run an expression on chosen data.
New:
Starts a new Expression sessions.
Open:
Opens saved expressions.
Save:
Opens the New Expression Name dialog box to save an
expression.
Save As:
Opens the New Expression Name dialog box to either
save an expression or save an expression with a new
name.
Export to EASI:
Opens the File to Save dialog box to save an expression
using the EASI file format (.eas)
Run:
Runs the expression you are working with on the data
you have selected in the Channels and Bitmaps list. (See
Channels and Bitmaps)
Run and Close:
Runs your expression and closes the Raster Calculator.
Close Window:
Closes the Raster Calculator.
Edit
The Edit menu lets you work with the text in the
Expression area. You can undo text edits, cut, copy,
paste, and delete text in your expression.
Undo:
Cancels the last action within the Expression area.
Cut:
Cuts selected text in the Expression area.
Copy:
PCI Geomatics
266

Geomatica® Focus
Copies the selected text in the Expression area.
Paste:
Pastes cut or copied text at the cursor location.
Delete:
Deletes selected text in the Expression area.
Select All:
Selects all the contents of the Expression area.
View
The View menu lets you choose either basic or advanced
mode for the Raster Calculator.
Basic:
Changes the Raster Calculator to Basic mode.
Advanced:
Changes the Raster Calculator to Advanced mode.
Raster Calculator toolbar
The Raster Calculator toolbar lets you start new
expressions, open saved expressions, save expressions,
run expressions, and stop expression operations.
New:
Starts a new expression.
Open:
Opens the Expression name dialog box, where you can
select a saved expression from a list.
Save:
Opens the New Expression Name box so that you can
enter name for a new expression.
Run:
Runs the expression you have selected.
Stop:
Stops an expression operation.
Expression
The Expression area shows the numeric values and the
expressions used in a calculation. You can add values
and, in Advanced mode, you can add expressions by
selecting a category and choosing a function.
Input:
Lets you choose file data and specify the layers of a file.
PCI Geomatics
267

Geomatica® Focus
Browse:
Opens the File Selector dialog box.
Channels and Bitmaps:
Lets you choose a channel or bitmap from the list for the
expression.
Attributes:
Lists the attributes in the data.
Calculator keys
The Raster Calculator Keys include most standard
calculator keys and numbers. In Advanced view,
additional functions are available. Advanced functions are
divided into 15 categories.
Categories:
Lets you choose a category of functions you can use in
your expression.
Functions:
Lists the functions for the category you have chosen.
Output parameters
The Output parameters area lets you set the parameters
for your Expression output data.
PCI Geomatics
Single Value:
Gives a numerical output value. When you disable the
check box, the Mask, Type, Display, and Save options
are available.
Mask:
Lets you choose a bitmap mask from within your source
data.
Type:
Lets you choose the bit depth of your output raster data.
Display:
Shows the output of your expression in the view pane.
Save:
saves the output to a selected file and layer.
Display Saved Results:
Opens your results in the view pane after you have run
an expression.
File:
Lets you choose a target output file.
Browse:
268

Geomatica® Focus
Opens a File Selector dialog box, where you can choose
a target output file.
Layer:
Lets you select a target output channel.
Status bar:
Reports single-value results and the status of an
expression.
Using the Raster Calculator to set output
parameters
The Single Value option gives you a single-number result
for a single-band computation in the status bar of the
calculator tool.
Display:
Is the result of a computation on one or more bands that
produces a band. This output field can be saved to disk
and can be shown in the Focus window.
1. From the Tools menu, click Raster Calculator.
2. Click in the Expression box.
3. Using the calculator buttons, enter an equation in
the Expression box and specify Add to existing
file.
4. Enter an equation in the Expression box and
specify Add to new file, channel description, and
channel type into the output parameters.
PCI Geomatics
5. Enter an equation in the Expression box that
results in a single integer value.
When no output parameters are specified, the
Raster Calculator checks for errors in the equation
(such as parentheses not closed), calculates the
result, and displays it in a new window.
Many of the same formatting rules for EASI Modeling
apply to the Raster Calculator. (See Opening the EASI
Modeling dialog box on page 269 )
Opening the EASI Modeling dialog
box
You can use the EASI scripting language to write scripts
and run them on data you have open in Focus. You can
also open the EASI Modeling dialog box to run EASI
scripts for data that is not open in Focus. Dozens of
pre-written scripts are available in the Geomatica V10.0
pro folder.
EASI Modeling uses a single input file. The model is
performed directly on the database file. It is
recommended that you keep a copy of the original input
file before running the model. You can also test the
model using bitmaps instead of image layers, where
applicable.
The Modeling window provides the option of displaying
the results to the view pane. It is not necessary to save
this new layer back to the database, as the modeling
program operates directly on the database file, rather
269

Geomatica® Focus
than the display. When you review the results on-screen,
you can delete the new layer by right-clicking the layer in
the Maps tree and clicking Remove.
For details on numeric, string, logical, and modeling
(channel, bitmap and special variable) expressions, see
the EASI topic in the Geomatica Help.
The online Help provides details on the entire EASI
scripting language. EASI Modeling is designed primarily
for simple image modeling. While all options are available
for PACE MODEL scripts run at the EASI prompt, only a
subset of these commands can be used in the EASI
Modeling window.
For more information on EASI Modeling with Geomatica,
go to http://www.pcigeomatics.com/support/
quickguide/EASIModelinginFocus.pdf on the PCI
Geomatics Web site.
1. From the File menu, click Open.
2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select
the file on which you want to run an EASI script, and
click Open.
The image and bitmap layers must exist in the
database .pix file prior to running the model.
3. From the Tools menu, click EASI Modeling.
About the EASI Modeling dialog box
The EASI Modeling dialog box allows you to view EASI
Models as text. You can load and edit previously written
scripts, select input data, run scripts, save scripts and
script changes, and have the results opened in the view
PCI Geomatics
pane.
Input File:
Lets you select an input file from the list box.
Browse:
Opens the File Selector dialog box.
Run:
Runs the EASI script loaded in the EASI Modeling dialog
box.
Clear:
Clears all text appearing in the EASI Modeling dialog box.
Load:
Opens a File Selector dialog box, where you can select
pre-written or saved EASI Modeling files.
Save:
Saves scripts opened in the EASI Modeling dialog box.
Save As:
Lets you save an EASI script using another file name.
Display Results:
270

Geomatica® Focus
Opens the output of the EASI script.
Close:
Closes the EASI Modeling dialog box.
Adding image and bitmap layers to a .pix file
1. From the Files tree, right-click a file and click New
and then click Image Layer (or Bitmap Layer).
2. From the Tools menu, click EASI Modeling.
3. In the EASI Modeling dialog box, from the Input
File list, choose an input file from the Input File list
box.
4. Click in the model box and type a model (for
example, %12=(%1-%2)/(%1+%2);).
If you want to display the model results in the view
pane, enable the Display Result check box.
5. Click one of the following buttons:
• Run: executes the model
• Clear: clears the model box
• Load: opens an existing model with files using
the .eas file name extension
• Save: saves the model to a text file using the
.eas file name extension
Using simple image models
Modeling equations, in their simplest form, are arithmetic
combinations of image layers assigned to other image
layers. Image layers are indicated by a percent sign
followed by the layer number. The following equation
PCI Geomatics
assigns the average numeric value of image layers 1 and
2 to image layer 3.
%3 = (%1 +%2)/2
The assignment is evaluated for every pixel in image
layer 3, using the corresponding pixel values from image
layers 1 and 2.
You can also assign a constant value to an entire image
layer.
%1 = 255
A standard set of arithmetic operations is available in
modeling expressions:
a + b Addition
a - b Subtraction
a * b Multiplication
a / b Division
a ^ b Exponentiation
(a) Parentheses, also square brackets [].
- a Unary negation
The following mathematical intrinsic functions are also
available:
271

Geomatica® Focus
sin(), cos(), tan(), asin(), acos(), atan(), ln(), log10(),
exp(), exp10(), rad(), deg(), abs(), int(), random() and
frac()
All the rules previously indicated for image layers also
apply to bitmap layers, except that the variables are
prefixed with two percent signs instead of one. A bitmap
layer can have a value of either 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF). For
example, if image layer 1 has a digital number greater
than 50, then set bitmap layer 15 to 1.
If %1 > 50 then
% %15 = 1
endif
Understanding the basic modeling logic
In addition to using simple assignment equations, you
can also construct simple logical operations in the EASI
Modeling dialog box. These operations take the form of
'IF' statements.
The following command sets the numeric value of image
layer 2 to 255 anywhere the value of image layer 1 is
between 32 and 64. Line breaks are significant; each
statement must be on its own line.
if (%1 >= 32 AND %1 b a greater than b
a < b a less than b
a = b a equals b
a b a not equal b
a = b a greater than or equal b
a OR b a is true or b is true
a AND b a is true and b is true
PCI Geomatics
272

Geomatica® Focus
!a a is not true
You can also use brackets to ensure operations take
place in the expected order.
Detailed Examples
In the following example, a 'Vegetative Index' calculation
using image layers 1 and 2 is performed and the results
are saved to image layer 13 of the same file. Next, a
32-bit real image layer is added to the sample data file
irvine.pix to store the results.
1. With irvine.pix open, click the File tab.
2. Right-click irvine.pix and click New and then click
Raster Layer.
3. In the Add Image Channels dialog box, enter a 1 in
the 32 bit real box and click Add.
4. From the Tools menu in the Focus window, click
EASI Modeling.
5. In the EASI Modeling dialog box, enter the
following model in the model box:
• %13=(%1-%2)/(%1+%2);
To output to an 8-bit image layer, some scaling and
adjustment is necessary.
6. Click Run.
Adding a bitmap layer to irvine.pix
• From the Files tree, right-click irvine.pix and click
New and then click Image Bitmap Layer.
To view the results in the view pane, enable the Display
PCI Geomatics
Results check box.
if (%1 < 55) and (%2 < 55) and (%3 < 55) then
%%33 = 1
else
%%33 = 0
endif
The demo file irvine.pix does not contain a black 'no
data' area outside the image. For the purpose of the
following example, a digital number of less than 55 in
image layers 1, 2, and 3 was used to create the bitmap
layer. If you are creating an actual mask for the 'no data'
area, you use (%1 = 0) and (%2 = 0) and (%3 = 0) in the
IF statement.
Change area under bitmap to white in image layers 1, 2,
and 3;
if %%33=1 then
%1=255
%2=255
%3=255
endif;
Create a white grid on an RGB image:
273

Geomatica® Focus
if (mod(@geox,1000)

Geomatica® Focus
%{ n } [(x_expr, y_expr)]
%{ file_spec, n } [(x_expr, y_expr)]
The first case is the image layer sign (%) followed by a
literal numeric value, such as 1, 2 or 3, indicating layer 1,
2, or 3 of the implicit database (such as the input file).
The second example is similar, but the image layer
number may be a numeric expression that is evaluated to
be the image layer number.
The third case is more general yet. The file_spec may be
a database file name or a file handle returned by
DBOpen(), and the image layer number is evaluated as
an expression(#n#).
For simple models, you cannot reference files other than
the input file selected from the list box. EASI Modeling
generally operates on a single file for both input and
output. For example, you cannot run the following model
if your input file is D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine.pix.
%13 = %{"D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\eltoro.pix", 1}
However, you can override this by using the DBOpen()
function to open any number of database files. To copy
image layer 1 from eltoro.pix to image layer 12 in
irvine.pix:
local integer fdinput, fdoutput
fdinput = DBOpen("D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\eltoro.pix",
"r")
fdoutput = DBOpen(
"D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine.pix", "r+")
%{fdoutput,13} = %{fdinput,1};
call DBClose(fdinput)
call DBClose(fdoutput)
The irvine.pix file is 512x512 and eltoro.pix is
1024x1024. The previous operation copies image layer 1
of eltoro.pix to image 13 of irvine.pix, but because
irvine.pix is the implicit database (such as the input file),
the area of operation is 0, 0, 512, 512; only the top left
quarter of eltoro.pix is copied into channel 13 of
irvine.pix.
The second part of the image layer specification is an
optional subscript specification. In the above case, the
default subscript specification used is x --> x, y --> y. The
subscript specification allows you to indicate the pixel that
should be operated on for the current value of X and Y,
and may be given as an expression.
The following example assigns a sampled copy of
eltoro.pix to irvine.pix. The @x and @y symbols are the
current pixel location when the expression is evaluated
for each pixel.
local integer fdinput, fdoutput
fdinput = DBOpen( "D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\eltoro.pix",
"r")
PCI Geomatics
275

Geomatica® Focus
fdoutput = DBOpen(
"D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine.pix", "r+")
%{fdoutput,13} = %{fdinput,1}(@x*2+1,@y*2+1);
call DBClose(fdinput)
call DBClose(fdoutput)
X and Y vary from 0 to 511 as the implicit window of
operation is 0, 0, 512, 512... the area of irvine.pix.
However, image layer 1 of eltoro.pix is sampled for
values of 1 to 1023. As @x and @y value from 0 to 511,
the expression @x*2+1 varies from 1 to 1023.
It is also legal for the subscript expressions to extend of
the source database. In this case image values from the
edge of the database are replicated out as far as is
needed to satisfy requests. Thus, a simple filter such as
example 6 above the following will work in a reasonable
manner, even on the edge of the database.
Bitmap Layer Variables
Bitmaps layers are basically one bit deep image layers,
used primarily to serve as masks for regions where
operations are to take place and may be specified in a
manner very similar to image layers. All the rules
previously indicated for image layers also apply to bitmap
layers, except that the variables are prefixed with two
percent characters instead of one. Also, the index
number is the segment number of the bitmap layer to be
used.
%%n [(x_expr, y_expr)]
%%{ n } [(x_expr, y_expr)]
%%{ file_spec, n } [(x_expr, y_expr)]
Bitmap layer variables will only assume values of zero or
one. Any non-zero value assigned to a bitmap layer will
be treated as one.
Creating an EASI bitmap mask
Create a bitmap mask (segment 2) which is true (1)
everywhere channels 1 and 2 are less than 25. Then this
mask and the mask in segment 3 are used to determine a
region that should be zeroed in image channels 1 and 2.
if
(%1 < 25 and %2 < 25)
then
%%2 = 1
else
%%2 = 0
endif
if (%%2 = 1 and %%3 = 0)
PCI Geomatics
276

Geomatica® Focus
then
%1 = 0
%2 = 0
endif
Special Variables
Allow access to information about the size and
georeferencing information of channels being operated
on and the position of the current pixel. The following
special variables may be treated as elements in modeling
expressions.
@x current x (pixel) processing location
@y current y (line) processing location
@dbx size of database in x (pixel) direction
@dby size of database in y (line) direction
@meterx size of a pixel in x direction in meters
@metery size of a pixel in y direction in meters
@geox x georeferenced centre of current pixel
@geoy y georeferenced centre of current pixel
@sizex x size of a pixel in georeferenced units
@sizey y size of a pixel in georeferenced units
Note that @x, @y, @geox and @geoy change value for
each pixel processed, while @dbx, @dby, @meterx,
@metery, @sizex and @sizey remain constant over the
whole image.
It is usually necessary to use the @x and @y special
variables when constructing subscript expressions for
channel expressions. For example, the following
assignment would mirror an image across a vertical
center line. The @dbx is used in computing the center
line.
%2 = %1[@dbx-@x+1,@y]
Numeric Expressions
Numeric expressions in EASI are normally operated on in
double precision floating point. Values with less precision
are promoted to double precision before operations are
performed.
A wide set of built-in operations are available in numeric
expressions and are listed below with a short description.
a + b Addition
a - b Subtraction
a * b Multiplication
a / b Division
PCI Geomatics
277

Geomatica® Focus
a ^ b Exponentiation
( a ) Parenthesis, also square brackets [].
- a Unary negation
A numeric element can be any of the following:
• A numeric constant.
• An EASI variable of type byte, int, float or double.
• An element of a numeric variable array.
• A numeric intrinsic function.
• A numeric user defined function.
• A subscripted numeric parameter.
Numeric constants can be entered as decimal or
scientific notation numbers with an optional negative sign.
Scientific notation is denoted with the #E# or #D#
character - for example 123000 can be written as 1.23e5,
1.23 * 10 ^ 5
Comparison and logical functions
a > b a greater than b
a < b a less than b
a = b a equals b
a b a not equal b
a = b a greater than or equal b
a OR b a is true or b is true
a AND b a is true and b is true
!a a is not true
Example
if (%1 = 255) and (%2 = 255) and (%3 = 255) then
%%2 = 1
else
%%2 = 0
endif
Logical
Logical expressions in EASI are used to compute
TRUE/FALSE results for use with the IF and WHILE
conditional statements. There is currently no way to store
a pure logical value in an EASI variable. Logical
expressions consist of comparisons between numeric
and string expressions combined with the use of the
logical operations AND, OR, and NOT.
The equality and inequality tests may be used with two
numeric expressions. The equal sign (#=#) is used to test
for equality, while inequality is tested with ## or #!=#.
PCI Geomatics
278

Geomatica® Focus
Examples
If( %1 = 0 ) then
...
while( flag 1 )
...
The ">", "=" and "

Geomatica® Focus
control will continue beyond the ENDIF. If none of the
logical expressions is true and an ELSE clause exists,
the associated statement_list will be executed.
The WHILE command provides a general purpose
looping construct.
WHILE( log_expr )
statement_list
ENDWHILE
log_expr - a logical expression which is evaluated before
each iteration of the loop.
The logical expression in the WHILE statement is
evaluated. If the result is true, the statement list is
executed; otherwise, control skips to the statement
following the ENDWHILE. Once the statement list has
been executed, control returns to the WHILE statement to
test the logical expression again.
It is possible to jump into, or out of, the WHILE loop using
the GOTO statement, but this is poor style and may not
work in future versions of EASI.
The FOR command provides a simple looping construct
over a series of numeric values.
FOR iter_var = start_val TO end_val [BY incr_val]
statement_list
ENDFOR
iter_var - the iteration variable. This may be any numeric
variable type, including a parameter.
start_val - this initial value to assign to the `iter_var'.
end_val - when `iter_var' passes this value, iteration
stops.
incr_val - a value by which to increment `iter_var' each
iteration. The default is 1.
The FOR statement initializes the iteration variable to the
initial value, checks it against the end value, and if the
end value is not exceeded it executes the statement list.
When the ENDFOR statement is reached, the iteration
variable is increased by the increment value and
compared to the end value. If the end value is not
exceeded, the statement list is executed again. The start
value may be greater than the end value and the
increment value may be negative, but if the increment
value does not take the iteration variable value closer to
the end value each iteration, the FOR loop will never
terminate.
It is possible to alter the value of the iteration variable
inside the FOR loop and also to use GOTO to escape or
enter the loop, but this is poor style and may cause
problems in future versions of EASI.
Example:
PCI Geomatics
280

Geomatica® Focus
The following example runs the PACE task CLR on the
first 128 channels of the PCIDSK file irvine128.pix in
groups of 16 channels at a time.
local i,j
valu = 0
File = "C:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine.pix"; run clr
Single Statements
You can split very long statements over multiple lines by
placing a back slash character, not a semi-colon, at the
end of each incomplete line.
file="C:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine128.pix"
for i = 1 to 128 by 16
for j = 1 to 16
dboc(j) = i + j - 1
endfor
run clr
endfor
Multiple statements
can be placed on the same line by separating the
statements with a statement separator. The back slash
and semi-colon characters can be used interchangeable
for this purpose. A line of input may be almost any length.
Examples
File = "C:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine.pix" \ run clr
PCI Geomatics
281

Geomatica® Focus
PCI Geomatics
282

Geomatica® Focus
Chapter 7
Understanding atmospheric
correction
The data obtained by optical satellite sensors with high
spatial resolution has become an invaluable tool for many
groups interested in studying, managing, developing, and
protecting our population, environment, and resources.
Unfortunately, satellite images are often obscured by
atmospheric effects like haze as a result of conditions in
the atmosphere at the time the image was captured.
Atmospheric correction is a process used to reduce or
eliminate atmospheric effects and reveal more accurate
surface reflectance values.
Two atmospheric correction processes are available:
ATCOR2, which is used for correcting satellite imagery
over flat terrain, and ATCOR3, which is used for
correcting satellite imagery over rugged terrain. Both are
algorithms that work with a database of atmospheric
correction functions, which are stored in lookup tables.
The algorithms have been developed mainly for satellite
sensors with a small swath angle such as Landsat and
SPOT, but some wide field-of-view (FOV) sensors such
as IRS-WiFS are supported as well.
For more information on the atmospheric correction,
please see the following articles:
R. Richter, 'A spatially adaptive fast atmospheric
correction algorithm' Int. J. Remote Sensing, Vol. 17,
1201-1214 (1996)
R. Richter, 'Atmospheric correction of satellite data with
haze removal including a haze/clear transition region',
Computers & Geosciences, Vol. 22, 675-681 (1996)
R. Richter, 'Correction of satellite imagery over
mountainous terrain', Applied Optics, Vol. 37, 4004-4015
(1998)
Preparing data
Before you begin setting up the atmospheric correction
process, the data must be in one PCIDSK (.pix) file with
all the channels in the same bit depth and resolution.
Focus supports 8-bit unsigned, 16-bit unsigned, 16-bit
signed, and 32-bit real bit depths.
1. Transfer the data from the CD to PCIDSK (.pix)
files, see Transfer data to PCIDSK on page 283 .
2. Reproject the thermal data, see Reprojecting data
on page 284 .
3. Assemble the data into one PCIDSK (.pix) file, see
Assembling data into a file on page 285 .
Transfer data to PCIDSK
You should import your images from the compact disk
(CD) using the appropriate CD read algorithm. Each
sensor has its own CD read algorithm. It creates a
PCIDSK file, imports the imagery channels from the CD,
PCI Geomatics
283

Geomatica® Focus
extracts the metadata, and saves the satellite path
information in a segment. By preparing your imagery this
way, Focus can automatically set or calculate several
parameters when you configure the atmospheric
correction.
The number and types of bands on the CD depends on
the sensor used to capture the data. Usually, the visible,
thermal, and panchromatic bands are in different
resolutions. Some sensors may not provide thermal or
panchromatic bands. Read the bands of the same
resolution at the same time into one file.
For example, Landsat 7 data usually has eight bands:
bands 1 to 5 and 7 are the visible wavelengths with a
30-meter resolution, band 6 contains two thermal
wavelengths with a 60-meter resolution, and band 8 is
the panchromatic with a 15-meter resolution. You would
use the CDLAND7 algorithm to read bands 1 to 5 and 7
into a file, then band 6 into a file, and then band 8 into a
file.
If you do not intend to use the thermal or panchromatic
bands in the atmospheric correction process, then you do
not need to read those bands into a file.
The CD read algorithms are available through EASI,
Modeler, OrthoEngine, and Focus.
1. In the main menu, click Tools and then click
Algorithm Librarian.
2. Under PCI Predefined in the Data Interchange
folder, open the CD Reading/Utilities folder.
3. Click the appropriate CD read algorithm for the
PCI Geomatics
data.
4. Click Open.
5. Enter the required information on the Files and
Input Params 1 tabs.
6. Click Run.
7. Repeat for each set of bands with the same
resolution.
Reprojecting data
If you intend to use a thermal band in the atmospheric
correction (ATCOR) process, you need to reproject it to
the same resolution as the visible bands. For Landsat 7
data you can use either the high gain or low gain thermal
channels with ATCOR. For ASTER data use band 13.
For example, Landsat 7 thermal bands have a 60-meter
resolution while its visible bands have 30-meter
resolution. Therefore, the thermal bands have to be
reprojected to a 30-meter resolution.
1. In the main menu, click Tools and then click
Reprojection.
2. Click the Browse button beside Source file and
select the file that you want to reproject.
3. In the Destination file box, type the path and file
name for the reprojected data.
4. In the Output format box, click PIX:PCIDSK.
5. Under Reprojection Bounds, click Use bounds
and resolution in the list.
6. In the Pixel Size boxes in the X and Y boxes, type
the new resolution.
7. In the Resampling list, click the resampling method
of your choice.
• Nearest: Nearest Neighbor resampling
284

Geomatica® Focus
identifies the gray level of the pixel closest to
the specified input coordinates and assigns
that value to the output coordinates. Although
this method is considered the most efficient in
terms of computation time, it introduces small
errors in the output image. The output image
may be offset spatially by up to half a pixel,
which may cause the image to have a jagged
appearance.
• Bi-Linear: Bi-linear resampling determines the
gray level from the weighted average of the
four closest pixels to the specified input
coordinates and assigns that value to the
output coordinates. This method generates an
image with a smoother appearance than
Nearest Neighbor resampling, but the gray
level values are altered in the process, which
results in blurring or loss of image resolution.
• Cubic: Cubic resampling determines the gray
level from the weighted average of the 16
closest pixels to the specified input
coordinates and assigns that value to the
output coordinates. The resulting image is
slightly sharper than one produced by Bi-linear
resampling, and it does not have the disjointed
appearance produced by Nearest Neighbor
resampling.
8. Under Source Layers, click Select All.
9. Click Add.
10. Click Reproject.
Assembling data into a file
If you intend to use a thermal band in the atmospheric
correction process, you need to add the thermal band to
the file containing the visible bands. The thermal band
must be in the same resolution as the visible bands. For
Landsat 7 data you can use either the high gain or low
gain thermal channel with ATCOR. For ASTER data use
band 13.
1. From the Files tree, right-click the thermal channel.
2. Click Export (Save As) and click To existing file.
3. Beside Destination file click the Browse button
and select the file containing the visible bands.
4. Under Source Layers, click Select All.
5. Click Add.
6. Click Transfer Layers.
Opening the Atmospheric Correction
Configuration dialog box
Before you begin setting up the process, you should
import your images from the compact disk (CD) using the
appropriate CD read algorithm. For example, if you have
IKONOS imagery, you would use CDIKONOS to import
your images. By preparing your imagery this way, Focus
can automatically set or calculate several parameters.
Also, the data must be in one PCIDSK (.pix) file with all
the channels in the same bit depth and resolution. For
more information, see Preparing data on page 283 .
Once your files are prepared, you can configure the
Atmospheric Correction parameters. These parameters
define the image to be corrected, the source of the
elevation, the sensor information, the atmospheric
conditions, and other required parameters.
PCI Geomatics
285

Geomatica® Focus
1. In the main menu, click Analysis.
2. Click Atmospheric Correction.
Setting up atmospheric correction
parameters
1. In the Image file list, type the path and file name of
the file that you you want to correct or click Browse
to select a file.
2. If the image represents an area of flat terrain or if
you do not have a digital elevation model (DEM) for
the image, click Constant(ATCOR2) and in the
Height box type a value representing a constant
elevation for the area covered by the image.
3. If you do have a DEM for the image, click DEM
(ATCOR3). In the File box click the file that contains
the DEM or click Browse to select a file. In the
Layer list select the layer containing the elevation
values.
4. To calculate Sky View and Shadow or to import
Slope and Aspect calculations, click Setup. For
more information, see Calculating slope, aspect, sky
view, and shadow on page 289 .
5. In the Units list, click the unit of measurement used
for the elevation values.
6. In the Sensor type list, click the type of sensor
used to collect the image.
7. If you did not use a CD read algorithm to import
your images, you may need to match the sensor
band numbers to the correct image channel
numbers. To set up the channels, click Band
Setup. For more information, see Matching band
numbers to channel numbers on page 290 .
8. In Pixel size list, type the pixel size of the input
PCI Geomatics
image.
9. If the date is included in the metadata, the Date
boxes are set automatically. If not, in the Date
boxes click the month, day, and year when the
image was taken.
10. The Tilt list is available only when the sensor
selected provides the tilt capability. If the sensor
was tilted when the image was taken, click the title
angle used in the Tilt list. If the metadata describes
the tilt angle in terms of left and right, right means
West and left means East.
11. In the Calibration file list click the calibration file for
the image and sensor type or click Browse to select
a file. In most cases you can use the file with
#standard# (or std) in the file name. For more
information, see Editing an existing calibration file to
create a new file on page 292 .
12. In the Atmospheric definition area list, click the
aerosol type for the image. For more information
see About aerosol types on page 287 .
13. In the Condition list, click the standard atmosphere
present when the image was taken. For more
information see About standard atmospheres on
page 287 .
14. If you also selected a thermal band to correct, in the
Thermal atmospheric definition list click the
standard atmosphere present when the image was
taken. For more information see About standard
atmospheres on page 287 .
15. If the date, time, and position are included in the
metadata, the solar zenith value will be calculated
automatically. If they are not, in the Solar zenith
box type the solar zenith value or click Calculate to
calculate the value (see Calculating the solar zenith
and azimuth on page 290 ).
286

Geomatica® Focus
16. (Available for ATCOR3 only) If the date, time, and
position are included in the metadata, the solar
azimuth value will be calculated automatically. If
they are not, in the Solar azimuth box type the
solar azimuth value or click Calculate to calculate
the value (see Calculating the solar zenith and
azimuth on page 290 ).
17. In the Visibility box type the visibility value. For
more information, see About visibility on page 291 .
18. In the Adjacency box type the adjacency value. For
more information, see About adjacency on page 291 .
19. (Available for thermal bands only) In the Offset to
surface temperature list, type the value used to
compensate for a systematic error in the conversion
of radiance values to temperature values. For more
information, see Determining the offset to surface
temperature value on page 291 .
20. Click OK.
About aerosol types
The Atmospheric definition area list on the Atmospheric
Correction Configuration dialog box (see Opening the
Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box on page
285 ) contains the possible aerosol types for the image.
The aerosol type is determined by the predominant
particles present in the area at the time the image was
captured, which usually can be inferred its geographic
location. Wind direction and weather conditions in the
area in the days before the image was taken can affect
the aerosol type present.
The aerosol types are:
• Rural: The rural aerosol type is composed mostly of
PCI Geomatics
dust-like and organic particles. It is predominant in
continental areas whose atmosphere is not strongly
influenced by urban or industrial centers. It is
recommended for areas such as forested,
agricultural, or snow-covered areas.
• Urban: The urban aerosol type is composed mostly
of particles such as sulfate aerosols resulting from
combustion and industrial activities. If you do not
know the composition of the atmosphere, the rural
aerosol type is recommended.
• Desert: The desert aerosol type is composed
mostly of large dust-like particles. If you do not
know the composition of the atmosphere, the rural
aerosol type is recommended.
• Maritime: The maritime aerosol type is composed
mostly of sea-salt, dust-like and organic particles. If
you do not know the composition of the
atmosphere, the rural aerosol type is
recommended.
About standard atmospheres
The Condition list and the Thermal atmospheric definition
list on the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog
box (see Opening the Atmospheric Correction
Configuration dialog box on page 285 ) contain the
standard atmospheres used in Atmospheric Correction.
Standard atmospheres are vertical profiles of pressure,
temperature, water vapor, and ozone density.
The water vapor content present in the area plays a key
role in determining which standard atmosphere to select
when performing an atmospheric correction. For sensors
that do not include water vapor bands, you can estimate
the water vapor content based on the season when the
287

Geomatica® Focus
image was captured and the location.
The standard atmospheres are:
• Dry or Dry Desert: A dry atmosphere has a total
water vapor content of 0.41 (g cm-2).
• Fall (spring): A fall (autumn) atmosphere has a
total water vapor content of 1.14 (g cm-2).
• Humid: A humid atmosphere has a total water
vapor content of 4.94 (g cm-2).
• Mid-latitude summer: A midlatitude summer
atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 2.92
(g cm-2).
• Mid-latitude winter: A midlatitude winter
atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 0.85
(g cm-2).
• Sub-Arctic summer: A sub-arctic summer
atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 2.08
(g cm-2).
• Sub-Arctic winter: A sub-arctic winter atmosphere
has a total water vapor content of 0.42 (g cm-2).
• Tropical: A tropical atmosphere has a total water
vapor content of 4.11 (cm or g cm-2).
• Arid: An arid atmosphere has a total water vapor
content of 2.15 (g cm-2).
• US standard: The 1976 US Standard atmosphere
has a total water vapor content of 1.42 (g cm-2).
Opening the elevation information
setup dialog box
In ATCOR3 a digital elevation model (DEM) is used to
calculate the effect of radiance and transmittance over
rugged terrain. The Slope and Aspect calculations are
PCI Geomatics
mandatory for ATCOR3. The Sky View and Shadow
calculations are optional. These calculations can be
automatically calculated from the DEM or you can import
them in the Elevation Information Setup dialog box if you
have already created a file containing these values.
If you click Calculate for Slope, Aspect, Sky View, or
Shadow, PCIDSK files are automatically created in the
user folder where you installed Geomatica when you
perform the atmospheric correction. By default each file
name is the original input file name prefixed with 'slope_',
'aspect_', 'skyview_', or 'shadow_'.
The Slope algorithm measures the angle of the incline for
each pixel, which is expressed as a value between 0 and
90 degrees. The value is calculated from the plane
formed by the vector connecting the left and right
neighbours of the pixel and the vector connecting the
upper and lower neighbours of the pixel.
The Aspect algorithm measures the orientation of the
slope of each pixel, which is expressed as a value
between 0 and 360 degrees relative to the top of the
image. The value is calculated from the orientation of the
plane formed by the vector connecting the left and right
neighbours of a pixel and the vector connecting the upper
and lower neighbours of the pixel. The angle is measured
between north (top of image) and the projection of the
normal vector of this plane onto the horizontal plane.
The Sky View algorithm uses a ray tracing program to
determine the proportion of the sky hemisphere visible for
each pixel of the terrain.
288

Geomatica® Focus
The Shadow algorithm uses a ray tracing program and
the solar zenith and azimuth angles to calculate the cast
shadows.
1. Open the Atmospheric Correction Configuration
dialog box, see Opening the Atmospheric
Correction Configuration dialog box on page 285 .
2. Under Elevation Information Setup, click the
Setup button.
Calculating slope, aspect, sky view, and
shadow
1. In the File list under Elevation, click the file that
contains the DEM or click Browse to select a file. In
the Layer list select the layer containing the
elevation values.
2. In a DEM each change in gray level represents a
change in elevation value. In the Elevation step
box, type the value that represents the change of
one level of gray.
3. Under Slope, either:
• Click Calculate to calculate the slope values
automatically.
• Click From file to import the slope values from
a file. In the From file list, click the file that
contains the slope values or click Browse to
select the file. In the Layer list, click the layer
of slope values.
4. Under Aspect, either:
• Click Calculate to calculate the aspect values
automatically.
• Click From file to import the aspect values
from a file. In the From file list, click the file
PCI Geomatics
that contains the aspect values or click
Browse to select the file. In the Layer list,
click the layer of aspect values.
5. Under Sky View, either:
• Click None if you do not want to include sky
view factor in the atmospheric correction.
• Click Calculate to calculate the sky view factor
automatically.
• Click From file to import the sky view factor
from a file. In the From file list, click the file
that contains the sky view factor or click
Browse to select the file. In the Layer list,
click the layer with the sky view factor.
6. Under Shadow, either:
• Click None if you do not want to include
shadow data in the atmospheric correction.
• Click Calculate to calculate the shadow data
automatically.
• Click From file to import the shadow data from
a file. In the From file list, click the file that
contains the shadow data or click Browse to
select the file. In the Layer list, click the layer
of shadow data.
7. Click OK.
Opening the band setup dialog box
When you prepared the PCIDSK (.pix) file for
atmospheric correction, the band numbers may not
match the channel numbers. For example, band 1 from
the sensor may not necessarily be in channel 1 in your
file. You may need to match the sensor band numbers to
the correct image channel numbers.
1. Open the Atmospheric Correction Configuration
289

Geomatica® Focus
dialog box, see Opening the Atmospheric
Correction Configuration dialog box on page 285 .
2. Under Sensor Information, click the Band Setup
button.
Matching band numbers to channel
numbers
1. For each row under the Input Channel column,
type the channel number that contains the sensor
band corresponding to the band number under the
Sensor Band# column.
2. In the Output Corrected column, click to select the
rows corresponding to the channels that you want to
correct. Rows identified by a check mark will be
corrected.
3. If the NoData value is included in the metadata, it
will be entered automatically. If it is not, in the
NoData Value column type the NoData value for
each channel in its corresponding row.
4. In the Gain Setting column, type the gain setting
value from the header file.
The gain setting is only needed for the MOMS and
Aster sensors. It represents the offset between the
image and the calibration.
5. Click OK.
using a CD read algorithm, the values can be extracted
from the metadata.
1. Open the Atmospheric Correction Configuration
dialog box, see Opening the Atmospheric
Correction Configuration dialog box on page 285 .
2. Under Correction Parameter, click the Calculate
button.
About Solar Zenith and Azimuth
The Solar Azimuth and Solar Zenith express the position
of the sun. The Solar Azimuth is the angle of the direction
of the sun measured clockwise from the North along the
horizon. If the solar azimuth is measured from the South,
usually referred to as the bearing, it will have to be
adjusted since Focus assumes that North is the origin.
The Solar Zenith is the angle measured between the
local zenith and the line of sight of the sun.
Illustrating Solar Zenith and Solar Azimuth
Opening the Solar Calculations dialog
box
The solar zenith and azimuth are important values used
in the atmospheric correction. If you imported you images
PCI Geomatics
Calculating the solar zenith and azimuth
290

Geomatica® Focus
1. In the Date boxes click the month, day, and year
when the image was taken.
2. In the Time boxes, type hours, minutes, and
seconds when the image was taken.
3. In the Latitude box, type the y-coordinate of the
center of the image.
4. In the Longitude box, type the x-coordinate of the
center of the image.
5. Click Calculate.
6. Click OK.
About visibility
Visibility, or optical depth, is a meteorological statistic that
calculates the opacity of the atmosphere at a certain time
and place. It measures the furthest distance that a person
can see a prominent object. In Focus the range is
between 5 and 180 kilometers.
Focus uses the value set in the Visibility box. For more
information, see Opening the Atmospheric Correction
Configuration dialog box on page 285 for the Spatially
Varying Conditions, and for Constant Conditions options,
see Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box
on page 294 . When you use the Spatially Varying
Conditions option, Focus calculates the visibility for each
pixel in the image using the Visibility value as a starting
point for the calculation. When you use the Constant
Conditions option, Focus uses the Visibility value as a
constant for each pixel in the image. The calculation
results in a Visibility layer that is a temporary PCIDSK
(.pix) file with its default file name being the the original
file name prefixed with 'hot_level_'.
PCI Geomatics
Visibility is used to more accurately specify the
atmospheric conditions at the time the image was taken.
If the metadata that came with the image does not
include the visibility values, you can obtain it from the
following sources:
USA: http://www.noaa.gov/wx.htmlCanada:
http://www.weatheroffice.ec.gc.ca/canada_e.html
About adjacency
Adjacency is the effect of backscattering on neighboring
pixels. It is used to more accurately specify the
atmospheric conditions at the time the image was taken.
The adjacency effect is calculated for an area around
each pixel up to a maximum of 200 pixels. For example,
an image with 30-meter resolution like Landsat will have
a maximum Adjacency value of 6, because 200 multiplied
by 30 meters is 6000 meters, which is 6 kilometers.
Therefore, an Adjacency value of 0 would not take the
adjacency effect into consideration while 6 would
calculate the maximum effect. The default is 1 and is
suitable for most cases.
Determining the offset to surface
temperature value
Occasionally there may be a consistent difference in
temperature between actual temperatures measured on
the ground and those reported in the Spectral Plot. To
verify if you need to compensate for this difference, you
need to collect the temperature of identifiable points in
291

Geomatica® Focus
the region at the time the image was captured. These
temperature samples are sometimes referred to as
'ground truths'.
If you compare the ground truths to the results from the
same points collected on a temperature layer using the
Spectral Plot, the temperature for each point in both
should be the same. If you observe a consistent
difference in temperature, you can enter the value in the
Offset to surface temperature box.
For example, you compare the actual water temperatures
of three lakes to their temperatures reported in the
Spectral Plot and discover that there is a difference of 2
degrees between the ground truths and the Spectral Plot.
Therefore, you type 2 in the Offset to surface temperature
box.
1. Configure and run the atmospheric correction. For
more information, see Opening the Atmospheric
Correction Configuration dialog box on page 285
and Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction
dialog box on page 294 .
2. Position the cursor precisely on the feature that you
can clearly identify in the image for which you have
a known ground temperature.
3. In the Maps tree, right-click the ATCOR MetaLayer.
4. Click Spectra Plot.
5. On the Atcor Spectra Plotting dialog box, click
From Image.
6. Compare the actual temperature of the feature to
the temperature displayed under Report.
7. Repeat step 2 to step 6 for each ground truth.
Editing an existing calibration file to
create a new file
The standard calibration files are in the cal folder under
the atcor folder where you installed Geomatica (for
example, C:\Program Files\Geomatica_V100\atcor\cal).
Each sensor has a set of calibration files created by Dr.
Richter.
When you complete the Atmospheric Correction
Configuration dialog box, you can use one of the
standard calibration files since they are sufficient in most
cases. If you are not obtaining expected results, compare
the calibration coefficients (gain and bias values) in your
data#s metadata file to those in the calibration file. If the
values are significantly different, you can create you own
calibration file specific to your data.
The calibration file contains a table of the bands, the gain
value for each band, and the bias for each band. ATCOR
uses mW/cm-2 sr-1 micron-1 as the radiance unit for
each band, except the thermal band which uses mW m-2
sr-1 micron-1. Since the sensors may use a different
radiance unit, you may need to convert the values. For
more information, visit
http://www.op.dlr.de/atcor/atcor2+3_faq.html.
For example, some calibration coefficients are measured
in W m-2 sr-1 micron-1. To convert it to the ATCOR
radiance value, you multiply the values in the metadata
file by 0.1.
Example of a calibration file
PCI Geomatics
292

Geomatica® Focus
comparing the water reflectance values in the NIR band
to the reflectance values in the snow band (1.6 um band).
In most cases the default values for reflectance
thresholds will identify water and snow in image.
However, you may have to iteratively adjust the threshold
values and recreate the mask to achieve the desired
results.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click the ATCOR MetaLayer.
2. Click Define Haze and Cloud.
Automatically creating a mask
.
1. Open a standard calibration file for the sensor
appropriate for your data.
2. Open the metadata file that came with your data.
3. If required, convert the values from the metadata file
to ATCOR radiance units: mW/cm-2 sr-1 micron-1
(or mW m-2 sr-1 micron-1 for thermal bands).
4. Replace the bias and gain values for each band
with the converted values from the metadata file.
5. Save as a new file with the .cal extension in the cal
folder in the folder for the appropriate sensor.
Opening the Define Haze and Cloud
dialog box
After configuring the parameters for atmospheric
correction, you must create a mask over the hazy and
cloudy areas in the image while excluding areas covered
by water or snow. Water and snow are identified by
PCI Geomatics
1. Click Automatically Calculate Haze and Cloud.
2. Under Mask Size, click either:
• Large area haze mask to create a mask over
all the areas that may contain haze. This
option also includes areas where haze is
suspected, but may not be obvious upon
visual inspection.
• Smaller area haze mask to create a mask
only over the areas where the haze is obvious.
3. Under Haze Thickness, click either:
• Correct thin haze to thick haze if you want to
include the thick haze (cloud cover) when you
perform the correction.
• Correct thin to medium haze if you want to
ignore the thick haze (cloud cover) when you
perform the correction.
4. In the Water Refl. Threshold in NIR (%) box, type
the value in percent representing the limit below
which is considered water reflectance values in the
NIR sensor band.
293

Geomatica® Focus
5. In the Water Refl. Threshold in Snow (1.6um) (%)
box, type the value in percent representing the limit
below which is considered water reflectance values
in the 1.6 um sensor band.
6. In the Cloud Refl. Threshold in Blue (

Geomatica® Focus
To use the Spatially Varying Conditions option, you must
have the Red, near-infrared (NIR), and Short Wavelength
Infrared (SWIR) bands, and you must have reference
areas of known reflectance such as a section of dense
vegetation or a body of water present outside the haze to
use as a reference target. When you use the Spatially
Varying Conditions option, Focus calculates the visibility
for each pixel in the image using the value set in the
Visibility box on the Atmospheric Correction Configuration
dialog box as a starting point for the calculation.
Use the Constant Conditions option when you are
missing one of the bands, the image does not contain a
reference target, or you are sure that the image
represents an area with constant atmospheric conditions
such as an area without rugged terrain, large bodies of
water, or mountains. When you use the Constant
Conditions option, Focus uses the value set in the
Visibility box on the Atmospheric Correction Configuration
dialog box as the visibility for each pixel in the image.
The result of the atmospheric correction is a scaled
surface reflectance image with a range of 0 to 255 for
8-bit data and 0 to 65535 for 16-bit data. If you want
unscaled values or percent reflectance values, divide the
scaled values by 4 for 8-bit data and by 10 for 16-bit data.
For example, 150 divided by 10 equals 15% reflectance
for a 16-bit image.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click the ATCOR MetaLayer.
2. Click Run Atmospheric Correction.
Running the correction
PCI Geomatics
1. Click Constant Conditions if you want to perform
the correction assuming relatively uniform
atmospheric conditions over the image.
2. Click Spatially Varying Conditions if you want to
perform the correction assuming differing
atmospheric conditions throughout the image.
3. Under Corrected Output, in the File box click the
file where you want to save the corrected data or
click Browse to select a file.
Deriving additional data from the corrected
imagery
1. Under Value-added Data Output, in the File box
click the file where you want to save the additional
data or click Browse to select a file.
2. To perform a transformation that minimizes the
influence of soil brightness, select the Soil
Adjusted Vegetation Index check box.
3. To calculate the green leaf density, select the Leaf
Area Index check box.
If you want to change the equation used for the LAI
calculation, click LAI Options. For more
information, see Opening the Leaf Area Index
Model dialog box on page 296 .
4. To calculate the calculate the amount of
photosynthetically active radiation absorbed by a
plant canopy, select the Fraction of Absorbed
Radiation check box.
If you want to change the values used in the FPAR
calculation, click FPAR Options. For more
information, see Changing the values for the
295

Geomatica® Focus
fraction of photosynthetically active radiation
(FPAR) equation on page 297 .
5. To calculate ground reflectance, select the Surface
Albedo check box.
6. To calculate the difference between the emitted
atmospheric radiation and the emitted surface
radiation, select the Thermal Flux Difference
check box.
7. To calculate the exchange rate of energy between
the earth#s surface and the underground, select the
Ground Heat Flux check box.
8. To calculate the shortwave solar radiation absorbed
by the surface, select the Absorbed Solar
Radiation check box.
9. To calculate the exchange rate of stored heat
energy between the air and the earth#s surface,
select the Latent Heat check box. Latent heat flux
is measures the amount of energy needed to
change matter from one state to another (from solid
to liquid to gas).
10. To calculate the exchange rate of excess heat
energy between the air and the earth#s surface,
select the Sensible Heat check box. Sensible heat
flux measures the amount of energy needed to
change air temperature.
11. To calculate the difference between absorbed and
emitted shortwave and longwave radiations, select
the Net Radiation check box.
12. Click Run Correction.
Opening the Leaf Area Index Model
dialog box
The leaf area index (LAI) is the density of the green
leaves in an area. It is a measure of the green leaf area
(one-side) per unit of surface area.
You can choose one of two equations to calculate the
density: the Soil Adjusted Vegetation Index or the
Normalized Difference Vegetation Index. Both equations
contain three parameters whose values depend on the
type of vegetation being measured and on the season in
which they are being measured.
The LAI can only approximate typical trends in the
vegetation. It should not be used to replace or confirm
field measurements of other types of vegetation in
different seasons. The defaults provided for the equations
are typical for soybean crops (Choudury et al. 1994). By
using a constant set of values, either custom or default,
to calculate the LAI for images of the same area over
time, you can uncover trends in the vegetation.
SAVI uses the red and near-infrared bands to measure
the density and vigor of green vegetation by attempting to
eliminate the reflectivity of the ground beneath the
canopy.
NDVI uses the visible and near-infrared bands to
measure the density and vigor of green vegetation by
comparing the amount of visible light reflected to the
amount of near-infrared light reflected.
1. Open the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog
box, see Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction
dialog box on page 294 .
2. Under Value-Added Data Output, select the Leaf
PCI Geomatics
296

Geomatica® Focus
Area Index check box.
3. Click the LAI Options button.
Selecting the equation for calculating the
Leaf Area Index
1. Select one of the following:
• SAVI for the Soil Adjusted Vegetation Index
equation.
• NDVI for the Normalized Difference Vegetation
Index equation.
Changing the values for the fraction
of photosynthetically active radiation
(FPAR) equation
The Fraction of Photosynthetically Active Radiation
(FPAR) equation uses the red and near-infrared bands to
calculate the fraction of radiation between 400 and 700
nm absorbed by green vegetation.
The FPAR equation contains three parameters whose
values depend on the type of vegetation being measured
and on the season in which they are being measured.
The equation also includes the result from the leaf area
index (LAI) equation that you selected (see Opening the
Leaf Area Index Model dialog box on page 296 ).
The FPAR equation can only approximate typical trends
in the vegetation. It should not be used to replace or
confirm field measurements of other types of vegetation
PCI Geomatics
in different seasons. The defaults provided for the
equations are typical values based on several studies
(Asrar et al. 1984, Asrar 1989, Wiegand et al, 1990,
1991). By using a constant set of values, either custom or
default, to calculate the FPAR for images of the same
area over time, you can uncover trends in the vegetation.
1. Open the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog
box, see Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction
dialog box on page 294 .
2. Under Value-Added Data Output, select the
Fraction of Absorbed Radiation check box.
3. Click the FPAR Options button.
Opening the Advanced Option dialog
box
The Advanced Options are parameters used in producing
the data in the Value-Added Data Output section on the
Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box. The availability
of the parameters depends on the presence or absence
of data:
• The Visibility data, BRDF Correction, and Terrain
Reflectance sections are only available in ATCOR3.
• The Emissivity and Radiation and heat flux sections
are only available if your data includes a thermal
band.
• The Reference pixels section is only available if
your data does not include a Short Wavelength
Infrared (SWIR) band. If your data does include
one, Focus automatically calculates the reference
pixels.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click the ATCOR MetaLayer.
297

Geomatica® Focus
2. Click Advanced Options.
Setting the parameters
1. Under Visibility data, click Calculate to calculate
the visibility values when you perform the
atmospheric correction or click Use Existing to
select a visibility layer calculated previously.
If you selected Use Existing, in the File list click the
file that contains the visibility layer or click Browse
to select a file. In the Layer list, click the layer
containing visibility values.
2. (Available only if your data includes a thermal band)
Under Emissivity, click Constant to use 0.98 as
the emissivity constant for all the pixels in the image
or click Surface cover dependant to calculate the
emissivity for each pixel using specific values
depending on whether the pixel represents water,
vegetation, or another material.
3. (Available for ATCOR2 only and only if your data
includes a thermal band) In the Scene air
temperature box, type the overall temperature
present in the area at the time the image was taken.
Select the temperature scale used to measure the
air temperature.
4. (Available for ATCOR3 only and only if your data
includes a thermal band) In the Air temperature
box, type the temperature of the air at a specified
elevation. Select the temperature scale used to
measure the air temperature. In the Elevation box,
type the elevation at which the air temperature was
measured.
5. (Available for ATCOR3 only and only if your data
PCI Geomatics
includes a thermal band) In the Temperature
gradient box, type a value representing the number
of degrees Celsius at which the temperature will
change per 100 meters of elevation.
6. (Available for ATCOR3 only and only if your data
includes a thermal band) In the Water vapor partial
pressure box, type a value representing the rate at
which the pressure will change per 100 meters of
elevation.
7. In Threshold T1 box, type the value representing
the limit below which is considered bare soil or other
nongreen materials. For more information, see
Setting the thresholds for the reference pixels on
page 299 .
8. In Threshold T2 box, type the value representing
the limit below which is considered high NIR
reflectance. For more information, see Setting the
thresholds for the reference pixels on page 299 .
9. In the Reflectance % in RED band box, type the
value in percent representing the limit below which
is considered vegetation. For more information, see
Setting the thresholds for the reference pixels on
page 299 .
10. (Available for ATCOR3 only) Under BRDF
Correction, click Empirical Correction if you want
to correct view and illumination angle effects or click
No Correction if you do not.
To specify which empirical correction function you
want to use, click BRDF Options. For more
information about the Bidirectional Reflectance
Distribution Function (BRDF), see Opening the
Empirical BRDF Correction dialog box on page 299 .
11. (Available for ATCOR3 only) Under Terrain
Reflectance, you select the method that you want
298

Geomatica® Focus
to use to calculate the terrain reflectance for each
pixel, which is used to calculate the adjacency
correction and the spherical albedo effect. You can
click either:
3 iterations to calculate the average terrain
reflectance. The equation is computed iteratively
with the terrain view factor and sky view factor
calculated from the digital elevation model (DEM) to
achieve convergence.
No iterations to calculate the terrain reflectance
without iterative calculations to improve the
accuracy.
12. Click OK.
Setting the thresholds for the
reference pixels
If the data contains a Short Wavelength Infrared (SWIR)
1.6 m or 2.2 m band, Focus automatically calculates the
reference pixels when you run the atmospheric correction
using the Spatially Varying Conditions option.
Reference pixels are target areas of known reflectance in
one band present outside the haze. In Focus the target
areas are areas of dense, dark vegetation. The reference
pixels are used to develop a spatial map of the visibility
(optical depth) of the pixels in the image.
Threshold T1 identifies areas with dense vegetation by
calculating the Ratio Vegetation Index using both the red
and near-infrared sensor (NIR) bands. The threshold
marks the value representing the limit below which is
PCI Geomatics
considered bare soil or other nongreen materials.
Threshold T2 identifies pixels with low reflectance in the
NIR band. The threshold marks the value representing
the limit below which is considered materials with high
reflectance. It is used to exclude vegetation with high
reflectance, therefore identifying dark vegetation.
Reflectance % in RED band identifies the value in
percent representing the limit below which is considered
vegetation. The reflectance values for dark vegetation are
typically between 1 to 3% in the RED band. Dr. Richter
recommends that you begin with a value of 2% and
compare the result to the original image to determine if
the identified targets are acceptable reference pixels.
• See Opening the Advanced Option dialog box on
page 297 .
Opening the Empirical BRDF
Correction dialog box
Bidirectional Reflectance Distribution Function (BRDF),
available only in ATCOR3, corrects the reflectance
effects resulting from the view angle and illumination
angle when the image is taken. The reflectance can
appear very different depending on the position of the
sensor and the position of the light source. The texture
and composition of the surface also affect reflectance.
BRDF compensates for these effects by computing a
factor (G) used to reduce the reflectance of pixels with
299

Geomatica® Focus
extreme incident angles so that they more closely
resemble the reflectance values of pixels with moderate
incident angles. In the BRDF equation:
• t represents the threshold angle
• i represents the incidence angle
• e represents the exitance angle (for sensors with
the tilt capability)
The lower boundary value (g) is a value less than 1 that
constrains the factor G to prevent over-reducing the
reflectance of pixels with extreme incident angles:
. By default the lower boundary value is
in a larger off-nadir viewing angle, 20 to 30
degrees for example.
• (4) G = sqrt[cos(i)*cos(e)/cos(t)] the sensor
was tilted when the image was taken resulting
in a larger off-nadir viewing angle, 20 to 30
degrees for example.
2. In the Threshold angle box, type the value that
results from adding 20 degrees to the solar zenith
value.
3. In the Lower boundry box, type a value to raise or
lower the boundary.
4. Click OK.
0.25. If the corrected reflectance values appear too low
(dark), decrease the lower boundary value and repeat the
correction.
1. Open the Advanced Options dialog box, see
Opening the Advanced Option dialog box on page
297 .
2. Under BRDF Correction, click Empirical
Correction.
3. Click the BRDF Options button.
Selecting the BRDF equation
1. Select one of the following. Click:
• (1) G = cos(i)/cos(t) when the incidence angle
is between 60 to 90 degrees. This equation is
recommended for most cases.
• (2) G = sqrt[cos(i)/cos(t)] when the incidence
angle is between 60 to 90 degrees.
• (3) G = cos(i)*cos(e)/cos(t) when the sensor
was tilted when the image was taken resulting
PCI Geomatics
300

Geomatica® Focus
Chapter 8
Understanding vector layer types
Vectors are a way of presenting spatial information.
Instead of representing that information in pixels, vectors
represent the information as points, lines, and polygons.
Focus provides two main methods for presenting the
vectors: Unstructured and Topological. Each method
contains several vector layer types.
Vector layers contain a number of default attributes that
can be viewed with the Attribute Manager. For more
information, see Understanding vector layer type default
fields on page 307 .
Unstructured vector layers
An unstructured layer can contain a combination of
shapes. You can limit the layer to a particular type. The
following describes the shapes available on an
unstructured layer.
Point:
A shape that contains only one vertex.
Line:
A shape that contains two or more vertices, where the
first and last vertices do not conjoin.
Whole Polygon:
A shape that contains three or more vertices, where the
first and last vertices conjoin.
Unconnected Table:
A layer that contains attributes but is not associated to a
geographical component. (See Creating an unconnected
table on page 306 )
About topological layers
Topology is a mathematical representation of the surface
features of a location. Topology involves not only building
a relationship between the shape and the attributes, but
also a relationship between the shapes themselves.
Topological Line:
Contains lines that use topological conventions. A
topological line can contain several vertices, but only two
nodes. A node is the start point or the end point of a line.
A topological line layer is composed of two layers. One
layer stores the lines and the other stores the nodes.
Focus generates and manipulates nodes in the node
layer as you edit and create the topological lines.
Understanding topological lines
PCI Geomatics
301

Geomatica® Focus
Topological Polygon
Contains polygons that use topological conventions. A
topological polygon is a closed figure formed by one or
more topological lines that define the boundary of a
specific location.
When a topological polygon overlaps another, the
intersecting points become nodes; the lines are split,
resulting in a new polygon in the overlap. That is, two
topological polygons become three.
A topological polygon layer is composed of three layers.
When you create a topological polygon layer, Focus also
generates a line layer and a node layer. As you create
and edit polygons, Focus manipulates the lines and
nodes that form the polygon.
The line layer includes attributes that identify which
polygons lie on either side of each line. The region
outside the boundary of the digitized areas on the layer
are represented by a global polygon. This global polygon,
called Outside Area, appears as -1 in the Attribute Table
for topological line layers. These attributes describe the
relationship between the shapes.
Understanding topological polygons
PCI Geomatics
Thematic rasters
A thematic raster is a raster with associated attributes.
Normally, rasters present spatial information as pixel
values. The numeric value of the pixel represents the
attribute for that pixel. Neighboring pixels with the same
pixel value collectively represent a surface feature. In
thematic rasters, the pixel values are associated to any
number of attributes, which can be viewed using the
Attribute Manager. In Focus, the attributes for a thematic
raster are stored in a vector segment in its file.
Understanding vector editing in a
math model area
A Math Model Area is similar to an Area, except the
projection is determined by a math model segment
contained in the image file. The image is displayed
302

Geomatica® Focus
without correction in the viewer, but accurate ground
coordinates are calculated for each pixel using the pixel
and line coordinates, the math model, and the digital
elevation model (DEM) or an approximate elevation value
that you provide. For more information, see Using a math
model with images on page 40 .
In the Math Model Area, you can digitize geocoded
three-dimensional vectors on a raw image, instead of
going through the potentially time-consuming,
labor-intensive process of orthorectifying the imagery.
Vectors are saved in the projection of the layer without
the effects of the math model. As such, the vectors have
accurate X, Y, and Z coordinates.
You can open vectors digitized in the Math Model Area in
an Area containing an orthorectified or geometrically
corrected image and the vectors will display correctly.
However, if you open vectors without elevation in a Math
Model Area, the vectors may be offset from the correct
position, as it uses elevation values to calculate the
correct position.
When you edit vectors in a Math Model Area, you are
essentially moving objects in three-dimensional space
using two-dimensional vision. You cannot modify the X
and Y coordinates of the vector without affecting the Z
coordinate. To edit only the X and Y vector coordinates,
open the vectors in a planimetric layer instead.
Adding a new vector layer
1. In the Maps tree, right-click an Area and click New
Vector Layer.
2. In the New Vector Layer dialog box, enable the
type of layer that you want in the Layer Type area.
For more information about layer types, see
Understanding vector layer types on page 301 .
3. In the Georeferencing area, enable one of the
following options:
• Use Area Georeferencing: uses the same
georeferencing as defined in the New Area.
• Use Layer Georeferencing: uses the same
georeferencing as defined in an existing layer.
Choose a layer that has the desired
georeferencing form the list box.
• User-entered: defines the georeferencing.
Enter the projection , bounds, and extents as
required.
4. Click OK.
Adding points to an active layer
1. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow
and choose Points.
2. Click in the view pane where you want to add a
point.
3. Repeat step 2 for all points that you want digitized.
Adding a line or a polygon to an
active layer
1. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow
and choose Line or Polygon.
PCI Geomatics
303

Geomatica® Focus
2. Click in the view pane where you want to add the
first point of the line or polygon.
3. Repeat step 2 until you have digitized the shape
that you want.
4. Double-click the last vertex to complete the shape.
Adding a rectangle or ellipse to an
active layer
1. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow
and choose Rectangle or Ellipse.
2. Click in the view pane where you want to add a
rectangle or ellipse.
For a rectangle, start at a corner of the area where
you want to draw a rectangle; for an ellipse, start in
the center of the area.
3. Drag to form a shape.
If you want to create a square or a circle, press and
hold the Shift key while dragging.
Tracing a line on an active layer
1. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow
and choose Trace.
2. Click in the view pane where you want to start
tracing.
3. Trace over the line.
4. Double-click to complete the trace.
Digitizing 3-D vectors
PCI Geomatics
Using the mono-restitution process, you can digitize
vectors with accurate X, Y, and Z coordinates with the
New Shapes tools. To set up mono-restitution, you need
a raw image with a math model segment and a digital
elevation model (DEM), or an estimate of the elevation.
The math model and DEM are used to set the
georeferencing for the Math Model Area, in which the
image is displayed without correction in the viewer.
Accurate ground coordinates are calculated for each pixel
using the pixel and line coordinates, the math model, and
the DEM or approximate elevation value. For more
information, see Using a math model with images on
page 40 and Understanding vector editing in a math
model area on page 302 .
1. In the Focus window, open a raw image with a math
model segment. Click Math Model.
2. Set up the Math Model Area (see Using the math
model for georeferencing on page 41 ).
3. Use the New Shapes tools on the Editing toolbar to
digitize vectors (see Adding points to an active layer
on page 303 ).
Performing tasks in the Attribute
Manager
The Attribute Manager is another way of visualizing data.
Each record in the Attribute Manager represents a shape
on the layer. Each shape is described by a number of
attributes. You can view the records individually or in a
table. In the table, each row records all attributes for a
shape. Each column holds values for an attribute.
304

Geomatica® Focus
See:
Viewing records on page 307
Selecting and clearing records and fields on page 307
Understanding vector layer type default fields on page 307
Adding records to the Attribute Manager on page 309
Adding new fields on page 309
Setting the field definitions on page 309
Changing an existing field to a geometry field on page 310
Updating the geometry on page 311
Using find and replace in the Attribute Manager on page 311
Selecting all records that match a value in the current cell
on page 312
Using the compute function on page 314
Creating a relational database on page 312
Opening the Aggregate Attributes dialog box on page 315
Opening the Area Neighbors dialog box on page 315
Opening the Z-value Transfer dialog box on page 317
PCI Geomatics
Exporting layer attributes to a file on page 318
About the Preferences dialog box
The Preferences dialog box contains options that control
the cursor#s behavior in the Attribute Manager and
controls what statistics are displayed in the Attribute
Manager.
Select the topic that interests you:
Controlling the Attribute Manager cursor on page 305
Setting a selected record statistics display on page 306
Controlling the Attribute Manager
cursor
You can control the cursor movement and behavior in the
Attribute Manager through the Attribute Manager
Preferences dialog box.
1. In the Attribute Manager, click Edit and then click
Preferences.
2. In the Preferences dialog box, choose one of the
following options from the After pressing #Enter#
list box:
• Moves To Next Record: moves the cursor
from record to record as you press Enter
• Moves To Next Field: moves the cursor from
field to field as you press Enter
• Does Not Move: keeps the cursor in a cell
when you press Enter
305

Geomatica® Focus
3. Choose one of the following options from the When
entering cell list box:
• Select Entire Cell: highlights the contents of
the cell
• Go To Start Of Cell: places the cursor before
the contents in a cell
• Go To End Of Cell: places the cursor after the
contents in a cell
4. Click OK.
Setting a selected record statistics
display
When you select a record, its statistics are displayed in
the Attribute Manager. You can choose the statistics you
want to display.
1. In the Attribute Manager, click Edit and then click
Preferences.
2. In the Preferences dialog box, enable any of the
following check boxes in the Field Statistics area:
• Count: displays the number of selected
records
• Sum: calculates the sum of the values for the
selected records for each numeric field
• Mode: calculates the value that occurs the
most frequently among the selected records
for each field
• Mean: calculates the average value of the
selected records for each numeric field. The
average is obtained by adding values of the
selected records and dividing that value by the
number of records used in the sum.
• Minimum: displays the lowest value in the
numeric field from the selected records
• Median: ranks for each numeric field the
values of the selected records in numerical
order. The median is the middle value of the
selected records.
• Maximum: displays the highest value in the
field from the selected records
• Standard Deviation: measures the variation
in the distribution of values, which is calculated
from square root of the variance
3. Click OK.
Creating an unconnected table
An unconnected table is a layer that contains attributes
that are not directly associated to a vector representing a
geographical location.
1. Create an unstructured layer. For more information,
see Adding a new vector layer on page 303 .
2. Right-click the layer and click Attribute Manager.
3. Design the table as you require. (See Adding new
fields on page 309 )
4. From the Record menu, click Add New.
5. Enter data.
Restricting the layer so you cannot
add shapes to it
1. In the Focus window, save the layer.
2. Click the Files tab.
3. Right-click the layer and click Properties.
4. In the File Properties dialog box, click the
PCI Geomatics
306

Geomatica® Focus
MetaData tab.
5. Click the Add button.
6. In the Value column next to LAYER_TYPE, type
TABLE in upper case letters.
7. Click OK.
Viewing records
When you view individual records, the fields appear in the
first column followed by the values for that record.
When you view all records in a table, each row is a
record that contains all the attributes for the shape. Each
column is a field that contains the values for each
attribute.
To view an individual record
• From the View menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Record Display.
To view a record in a table
• From the View menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Table Display.
Opening a file saved as an attribute
If a file name and a path are saved as an attribute, you
can open the file from the Attribute Manager.
1. In the Attribute Manager, click the cell containing
the file name and path of the file that you want to
PCI Geomatics
open.
2. From the View menu in the Attribute Manager, click
File.
The file will open using the operating system's
default application for that file type.
Selecting and clearing records and
fields
To select a record, click the lead cell next to it. You can
press and hold Shift and click a range of records or
fields, or press and hold Ctrl and click multiple records or
fields. Statistics for selected records display at the bottom
of the Attribute Manager. The lead cell in the current
record is highlighted in yellow.
To select a field, click the heading of the field. The
heading in the current field is highlighted in yellow.
• On the Attribute Manager toolbar, click the Clear
selected records or Clear selected fields button.
Understanding vector layer type
default fields
When you create a new vector layer, it automatically
contains a set of default fields that Focus maintains. You
can modify definitions of some default fields; however,
most are restricted by the system. (See Setting the field
definitions on page 309 ) The following table lists the fields
maintained by Focus.
307

Geomatica® Focus
Table 20. Default Fields
Field Name Description Layer Type
REPCode
Angle
TextString
GroupID
PCI Geomatics
Contains the key
to define the
appearance of
the shapes
according to the
Representation
Editor. (See
Using the GPS
tool on page 351 )
Controls the slant
of the text string
or point.
Measured in
radians by
default, but you
can change it to
display in
degrees,
gradians, or mils.
Defines the field
to accept
characters, such
as text. You can
type directly on
the layer or in the
TextString field.
Identifies a set of
shapes that you
grouped
together. (See
Unstructured
Point
Unstructured
Point
Unstructured
Point Line
Unstructured
Whole Polygon
Area
Field Name Description Layer Type
Perimeter
ArcIdList
RightAreaId
Grouping shapes
on page 321 ) The
identification
number is
generated by
Focus and
cannot be
changed.
Displays the
computed area
enclosed by the
polygon.
Displays the
computed
circumference of
the polygon.
Identifies the
lines that
compose a
polygon in a
topological layer.
(See About
topological layers
on page 301 )
Identifies the
polygon on a
topological layer
which is on the
right of the line.
(See About
topological layers
on page 301 )
Whole Polygon
Topological
Polygon
Whole Polygon
Topological
Polygon
Topological
Polygon
Topological Line
308

Geomatica® Focus
Field Name Description Layer Type
LeftAreaId
StartNodeId
EndNodeId
Length
Identifies the
polygon on a
topological layer
which is on the
left of the line.
(See About
topological layers
on page 301 )
Identifies the
point (node) that
begins a
topological line.
(See About
topological layers
on page 301 )
Identifies the
point (node) that
ends a
topological line.
(See About
topological layers
on page 301 )
Displays the
computed
distance covered
by the line.
Topological Line
Topological Line
Topological Line
Line Topological
Line
• From the Field menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Show All.
PCI Geomatics
Adding records to the Attribute
Manager
As you add shapes in the view pane, a record is
automatically created in the Attribute Manager. Each
record contains the default fields or the fields that were
set when the table was created. You can add a record to
the table not associated with a shape. (See Creating an
unconnected table on page 306 )
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click
Attribute Manager.
2. From the Record menu in the Attribute Manager,
click Add New.
Adding new fields
Records in the Attribute Manager contain default fields
and fields that were set when the table was created. You
can add new fields or modify the existing ones. To modify
the fields, see Setting the field definitions on page 309 You
can also add new fields directly from the Table
Definitions dialog box.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click
Attribute Manager.
2. From the Field menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Add New.
For information on how to modify the fields, see
Setting the field definitions on page 309 .
Setting the field definitions
309

Geomatica® Focus
You can define the contents of the Attribute Manager
table by choosing attributes in the table and by adding or
removing records using the Table Definition dialog box.
You can also set the field properties for new and existing
records.
1. From the Edit menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Table Definition.
2. In the Table Definition dialog box, do any of the
following:
• To hide a field, disable the appropriate check
box in the Shown column.
• To change a field name, double-click the field
in the Name column and type a new name.
• To add a field, click the Add button.
• To remove a field, select it and click the
Remove button.
3. Type or choose data that will appear by default from
the Default Value list box.
4. Type a value that will appear in fields that do not
contain real data from the NoData Value list box.
NoData values are not included in computations.
5. Choose one of the following options from the Read
only list box:
• No: lets you change values in a field
• Yes: restricts changes to a field
6. Choose how you want to align data in a field from
the Justification list box.
7. Type or choose the width of a field in characters in
the Field size list box.
8. Type or choose a number of decimal places
displayed in a field in the Decimal places list box.
PCI Geomatics
9. Choose one of the following options from the
Scientific notation list box:
• Yes: displays values in a field as scientific
notations
• No: displays values in a field as regular
numbers
• Auto: displays values as either regular
numbers or scientific notations, depending on
which is shorter
10. Choose one of the following unit types for a field
from the Angular units list box:
• Radians: expresses angles in radians, where
2 pi radians equals the 360 degrees in a circle
(one radian equals approximately
57.29577951 degrees)
• Degrees: expresses angles in degrees, which
is the angle between two adjacent radii
measured at the center of the circle tht is
divided along its radius into 360 equal parts
• Mils: expresses angles in mils, which measure
angles where 1 mil equals 1/6,400 of a circle
(1 mil equals approximately 0.05625 degrees)
• Grads: expresses angles in grads, which
measure angles where 400 grads equals the
360 degrees in a circle (a 90-degree right
angle equals 100 grads)
11. Choose a conversion type from the Conversion list
box.
If you choose New, type a factor in the Conversion
Factor box.
12. Click OK.
Changing an existing field to a
310

Geomatica® Focus
geometry field
Geometry fields are system fields that display the
measurements of lines or polygons on a layer. Focus
automatically calculates and updates these
measurements as you modify the respective shapes.
Three Geometry Field types are available:
• Length: calculates the length of a line
• Perimeter: calculates the circumference of a
polygon
• Area: calculates the area of a polygon
When you create a new vector layer, Focus automatically
creates Length, Area, and/or Perimeter fields in the
Attribute Manager according to the selected layer type.
You can modify some properties, but most remain
unavailable.
1. From the Edit menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Table Definition.
2. In the Table Definition dialog box, enable the
check box in the System column for the field that
you want to change into a Geometry Field.
3. In the Geometry Field Properties area, choose the
type of field that you want from the Type list box.
4. Choose a unit of measurement for the field from the
Display units list box.
5. Click OK.
Adding all appropriate geometry
fields
1. From the Edit menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Table Definition.
2. In the Geometry Field Properties area, click
Create.
3. Select each new field and define as necessary
using the available properties. (See Setting the field
definitions on page 309 )
Updating the geometry
If you edit a layer outside of Focus, the Geometry Fields
may no longer be up-to-date when you reopen them in
Focus.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click
Attribute Manager.
2. From the Field menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Update Geometry.
Using find and replace in the Attribute
Manager
1. From the Edit menu of the Attribute Manager, click
Find or Replace.
2. In the Find and Replace dialog box, type the
characters that you want to find in the Find what
box.
3. Enable any of the following check boxes:
• Match case: searches for the examples with
the same capitalization as the characters in
the Find what box only
• Match entire cell: searches for the examples
that contain only the characters in the Find
PCI Geomatics
311

Geomatica® Focus
what box. For example, if you type 123 in the
Find what box, you will only receive matches
for cells that contain only 123. You will not
receive matches for other numbers such as
12345 or 9123.
• Limit search to selected fields: searches
only in a field selected in the Attribute
Manager
• Limit search to selected records: searches
only in a record selected in the Attribute
Manager
4. Click Find next.
5. If you want to replace text, click the Replace tab
and type the characters that you want to use as the
replacement in the Replace with box.
6. Click Replace.
If you want to replace all the examples with the
replacement characters, click Replace all.
Creating a relational database
You can join layers to form a relational database. One
layer serves as the source of the data. This layer, called
the Secondary Table, usually contains an Unconnected
Table (See Creating an unconnected table on page 306 ),
but you can also use another layer in your project as the
source. The layer that receives the attributes from the
Secondary Table is called the Primary Table.
When you join layers, you select one field in Primary
Table and a corresponding field in the Secondary Table
to serve as the key. The key is the common link between
the layers. The attributes from the Secondary Table
PCI Geomatics
appear in the Primary Table.
The Secondary Table acts like a look-up table for the
attributes. If you change the values in the Secondary
Table, the Primary Table is automatically updated with
the new values, as long as the tables are joined.
1. Right-click the layer that you want to use as the
Primary Table and click Attribute Manager.
2. From the Tools menu in the Attribute Manager,
click Table Join.
3. In the Define Table Join dialog box, click Browse.
4. In the Select Layer dialog box, choose the layer
that you want to use as the Secondary Table.
5. In the Primary Table#s Attribute box, select an
attribute.
6. Select the attribute from the Secondary Table#s
Attributes box that you want to join with the
attribute from the Primary Table#s Attribute box.
7. Click the Add button.
8. Click OK.
Selecting all records that match a
value in the current cell
A query searches and selects records that correspond to
a set of criteria that you define.
Match Current Cell:
All records that contain the same value as the current cell
are selected. The statistics of the selected records
display at the bottom of the Attribute Manager. (See
Setting a selected record statistics display on page 306 )
312

Geomatica® Focus
1. Select a value that you want to match.
2. From the Record menu in the Attribute Manager,
click Query by and then click Current.
Exclude Current Cell:
All records that do not contain the same value as the
current cell are selected. The statistics of a selected
record is displayed at the bottom of the Attribute
Manager. (See Setting a selected record statistics display
on page 306 )
Selecting all records that do not
match a value in a selected field
1. Select a value that you want to exclude from the
search.
2. From the Record menu in the Attribute Manager,
click Query by and then click Excluding Current.
Query by Example:
You can create an expression that selects all
corresponding records. An expression can be a
statement where two attributes are connected by a
relational operator to produce a result. It can also be two
or more statements joined by an AND or OR operator.
For example, if you have an attribute called Length that
describes the length of rivers on a layer, you can query
'Length > 10.# The result shows all records that contain a
value greater than 10 in the Length field.
Making a query by example
1. From the Record menu in the Attribute Manager,
click Query by and then click Example.
2. In Query by Example dialog box, choose New from
the Equation list box.
3. In the Attributes list, select the attribute you want to
use in the query.
4. Select a relational operator (such as =, >,

Geomatica® Focus
query is limited to the selected records only instead of
performing the query on all the records.
Limiting the query to selected records
1. Select records in the Attribute Manager.
2. From the Edit menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Query By Subset.
3. Perform a query.
Using the compute function
Compute creates a field containing the results of an
equation or expression involving the attributes in a layer.
You can build equations using the calculator or you can
create more complex expressions with the Advanced
Compute features and EASI scripts. For more information
about EASI scripts, see the EASI User Guide.
When you build an expression, either type the expression
in the Expression box or build the expression by clicking
the buttons and items in the dialog box. Combining the
two methods may cause unwanted effects.
1. From the Field menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Compute.
2. From the View menu in the Compute dialog box,
click one of the following options:
• Basic: creates an equation using the attributes
and the calculator
• Advanced: creates an expression using the
attributes, the calculator, and functions
3. Build an expression. You can use any combination
PCI Geomatics
of the following to create the expression that you
want:
• Type all or part of the expression in the
Expression box. Text should be placed in
double quotes (for example, #text#).
• Double-click an attribute in the Attributes list
to add it to the expression.
• Use the calculator to include integers and the
basic mathematic operators in the expression.
• Select a category of functions from the
Categories list box to display the available
functions in that category. In the Functions
list, select the function that you want to use in
the expression. (Available only on the
Advanced Compute)
4. If you want to display the result on the screen
without adding it to the Attribute Manager, enable
the Single Value check box and proceed to step 8.
5. If you want to include the result in the Attribute
Manager, select a field in the Field Name box that
will receive the results of the computation or type
the name of a new field.
6. In the Field Description box, type a description of
the contents of the field.
7. Choose one of the following types of field from the
Field Type list:
• Text: defines the field as a text string
• Integer: defines the field for positive or
negative whole numbers
• Float: defines the field for single-precision real
numbers
• Double: defines the field for double-precision
real numbers
8. Click the Run button.
314

Geomatica® Focus
If you want to save the equation with the layer, click
Save.
Opening the Aggregate Attributes
dialog box
The Aggregate Attributes dialog box is used as a
reporting tool or to quickly recombine data for analysis. It
combines records based on selected attributes. The
output is an unconnected table that contains the results
of a specified function or statistical calculation.
The Based On criteria is comparable to the Group By
clause in an SQL select statement.
• From the Tools menu in the Attribute Manager,
click Aggregate Attributes.
• From the Layer menu in the Focus main menu,
click Aggregate Attributes.
Performing a calculation
1. In the Aggregate Attributes dialog box, do any of
the following:
• To use only the selected records in the
operation, enable the Aggregate selected
shapes only check box.
• To compute the results based on the shapes
that contain the same style in the
Representation Editor, enable the
Representation values option and select an
attribute and function that you want to use.
PCI Geomatics
• To compute the results based on the records
that contain the same attribute values, enable
the Attributes option and enable the chck box
next to the attribute in the Based On column.
Add any function or statistic fields to the output
Attribute Manager. For more information, see
Adding function fields to output layers on page 320
.
• To add a field containing the number of
records used in the calculation, enable the
Add a count field check box.
2. Click Aggregate.
Opening the Area Neighbors dialog
box
Area Neighbors is a reporting tool for whole polygon
layers, topological polygon layers, and thematic rasters. It
generates an unconnected table containing attributes that
you can analyse.
1. From the Tools menu in the Attribute Manager,
click Area Neighbors.
2. From the Layer menu in the Focus main menu,
click Area Neighbors.
Reporting bordering areas
1. In the Area Neighbors dialog box, do any of the
following:
• To perform an analysis using only the selected
records, enable the Find neighbors to
selected input areas only check box.
315

Geomatica® Focus
• To report which shapes border the selected
shapes, enable the Adjacent to the input
areas option.
• To include a region outside the boundary of
the digitized areas on the layer, enable the
Report outside area in result check box.
This represents the global polygon or outside
area, which appears as -1 in the Attribute
Manager.
• To report in separate records the results of a
shape that borders another shape in different
places (not available for thematic rasters),
enable the Report neighbor B as two
records in result check box. For example, the
perimeter of shape B touches shape A in two
places so you obtain two records for shape B.
• To report only the shapes that completely
surround another shape (for example, lakes
containing islands), enable the Input areas
surround option.
• To report shapes that are surrounded by other
shapes (for example, islands), click Input
areas are surrounded by option.
2. In the Input Areas column, enable the check mark
next to the layer attributes that you want to add to
the Area Neighbors table.
3. In the Neighbors column, enable the check box
next to the layer attributes that you want to add to
the Area Neighbors table.
If you want to select the records in the Attribute
Manager that correspond to the results, enable the
Select found neighbors option.
4. Click OK.
Creating a chart from the Attribute
Manager
You can generate a chart from vector, grayscale, and
pseudo-color layers in the Maps tree, but not from bitmap
(1-bit) or RGB layers. Charts are also available from the
Files tree on raster channels or vector segments.
When you create a chart, it compares the values of the
selected records and fields in the layer attributes, or
graphs the pixel value counts from a raster without
attributes.
For more information about charts, see Viewing data as a
chart on page 337 .
1. Right-click a layer that contains the data that you
want to chart and click Attribute Manager.
If you want to chart the pixel value counts from a
raster without attributes, you will have to create
default attributes. When the message displays, click
OK to create the attributes.
2. In the Attribute Manager, select the fields and
records that you want to chart.
3. In the main menu of the Attribute Manager, click
Tools.
4. Click Charts and choose a chart type.
For more information about the Chart viewer, see Using
the Chart Viewer on page 343 .
PCI Geomatics
316

Geomatica® Focus
Opening the Z-value Transfer dialog
box
If you have a Z-value as an attribute for a shape on an
Unstructured, Line, Point, Whole Polygon, or Topological
Line vector layer, you can transfer that value to the
shape#s vertices. Conversely, you can also convert the
Z-values from the shape#s vertices into an attribute.
The values for the vertices are not directly associated to
the attributes. If you change the Z-values for the
attributes, it will not automatically update the vertices,
and vice versa. If you want to update either the vertices
or the attributes, you must repeat the Z-value transfer.
You can view the vertices of a shape with the Vertices
tool available in the Vector Editing toolbar (see Adding
and removing: vertices on page 329 ).
• From the Edit menu in the Attribute Manager, click
Z-value Transfer.
Transferring Z-values from the
vertices to a field
1. If you want to transfer the Z-value for the selected
records only, enable the Transfer Z-value of
selected shapes only check box.
2. Click Shape to attribute.
3. In the Destination field list, click the field that you
PCI Geomatics
want to receive the Z-value.
If you want to create a new field in the Attribute
Manager, click New Field. A default label called
Z-value is displayed in the Destination field list.
You can rename the label to one of your choice.
The field properties, except the data type, are set by
default. You set the data type in step 4. To modify
the field properties, see Setting the field definitions
on page 309 .
4. If you create a new field for the Z-value, the Type
list becomes available. In the Type list, click one of
the following data types:
• Integer: defines the field for positive or
negative whole numbers
• Float: defines the field for single-precision real
numbers
• Double: defines the field for double-precision
real numbers
5. In the Z-value aggregation list, click the method
that you want to use to combine the Z-values from
the vertices into an attribute for the shape. Click one
of the following methods:
• First: for each selected shape it uses the
Z-value from the first vertex as the attribute.
• Last: for each selected shape it uses the
Z-value from the last vertex as the attribute.
• Sum: for each selected shape it calculates the
sum of the Z-values from the vertices and
uses that value as the attribute.
• Mean: for each selected shape it calculates
the average Z-value from the vertices and
uses that value as the attribute. The average
is obtained by adding values from the vertices
and dividing that value by the number of
317

Geomatica® Focus
vertices used in the sum.
• Minimum: for each selected shape it uses the
lowest Z-value from the vertices as the
attribute.
• Maximum: for each selected shape it uses the
highest Z-value from the vertices as the
attribute.
• Mode: for each selected shape it calculates
the Z-value that occurs the most frequently
among the vertices and uses that value as the
attribute.
• Median: for each selected shape it ranks the
Z-values from the vertices in numerical order.
The median is the middle value and it uses
that value as the attribute.
• Standard Deviation: for each selected shape
it measures the variation in the distribution of
Z-values, which is calculated from square root
of the variance, and uses that value as the
attribute.
6. Click Transfer.
Transferring Z-values from a field to
the vertices
1. If you want to transfer the Z-value for the selected
records only, enable the Transfer Z-value of
selected shapes only check box.
2. Click Attribute to shape.
3. In the Z-value field list, click the field that contains
the Z-values that you want to copy to the vertices.
4. Click Transfer.
Exporting layer attributes to a file
1. From the Layer menu in the Attribute Manager,
click Export Attributes.
2. In the Export Attributes dialog box, enable any of
the following check boxes:
Save selected shapes only - saves only selected
records in the layer
Save selected fields only - saves only selected
fields in the layer
3. In the Output area, choose a file from the File list
box.
If a file is not listed, click Browse, locate and select
a file, and click Save.
4. Choose a file format from the Format list box.
If you want to modify the file format, click Options
and make any changes in the GDB Options Editor.
5. Choose a layer from the Layer list box.
6. Click Save.
Exporting the attributes to a text file
You can convert data in the Attribute Manager to an
ASCII delineated text file using the Export to Text dialog
box.
1. From the Layer menu in the Attribute Manager,
click Export to Text.
PCI Geomatics
318

Geomatica® Focus
2. In the Export to Text dialog box, enable one of the
following options:
• Entire Table: exports the whole Attribute
Table
• Visible Region: exports only the displayed
records and fields
• If you want to export specific records and
fields, choose a range of records next to Row
and choose a range of fields next to Column.
3. Click OK.
Opening GeoRasters from the
Attribute Manager
A table in Oracle 10g Spatial can contain a large number
of records of geospatial data. Images stored in Oracle
10g Spatial are called GeoRasters. Since opening a large
number of GeoRasters can take a significant amount of
time, it may be more efficient for you to open only their
footprints. A footprint is a vector representation of the
spatial extents of the GeoRaster. By viewing the
footprints, you can make a more informed decision on
which GeoRasters to open and, therefore, save you
some time.
GeoRasters are represented by a camera icon in the
Attribute Manager. If a red cross appears on the camera
icon, it means that the GeoRaster is not available.
1. From the GeoRaster column in the Attribute
Manager, right-click a camera icon.
2. Click Add to Area.
Dissolving a boundary
PCI Geomatics
Dissolve combines shapes that contain the same value
for a selected attribute. The resulting output is a layer that
contains the newly combined shapes with each shape
represented as a layer record.
1. From the Analysis menu in the Focus window, click
Dissolve.
2. In the Dissolve dialog box, choose a file from the
File list in the Input area.
If a file is not listed, click Browse, locate and select
a file, and click Open. If you choose Active Layer,
the dissolve is performed on the current layer.
3. In the Output area, enable one of the following
options:
• Display: displays the results without saving
the new layer
• Save: saves the new layer in the project.
Choose a file from the File list box and choose
a layer from the Layer list box.
• If you want to display the results in the view
pane, enable the Display saved results
check box.
• If you want to use only the selected records,
enable the Dissolve selected shapes only
check box.
4. In the Dissolve Option dialog box, enable one of
the following options:
• Only adjacent shapes: combines all shapes
that share a common border and contain the
same value for the selected attribute or RST
style
• All shapes: forms one record for all the
319

Geomatica® Focus
shapes on the layer that contain the same
value for the selected attribute or RST style
• If you want to combine the adjacent pixels that
are diagonal to each other and that contain the
same value for the selected attribute or RST
style for thematic rasters, enable the Pixels
that meet at a diagonal check box.
5. In the Dissolve Method area, enable one of the
following options:
• Representation Values: removes boundaries
between shapes that contain the same key for
the representation of the layer
• Attributes: removes boundaries between
shapes that contain the same attribute values
6. In the Based on column, enable the check box next
to the attributes you want to include.
If you want to add a field containing the number of
shapes combined to form each record in the output,
enable the Add a count field check box.
7. Click OK.
For information about adding function or statistic fields to
the output Attribute Manager, see Adding function fields
to output layers on page 320 .
Adding function fields to output
layers
When you use Aggregate Attributes, Dissolve, or
Statistical Overlay, you can add statistic and function
fields to the output layer Attribute Table, or both. For
more information, see Opening the Aggregate Attributes
PCI Geomatics
dialog box on page 315 , Dissolving a boundary on page
319 , and Using a statistical overlay on page 333 .
You can add fields using the simple or advanced
methods. With the simple method, you can add only one
new field per attribute. With the advanced method, you
can add several fields per attribute.
The statistic fields, Mean, Minimum, Maximum, Mode,
Median, and Standard Deviation, are described in Setting
a selected record statistics display on page 306 .
To add fields using the simple method
• From the Function column, click in an attribute cell
and choose a function or statistic.
To add fields using the advanced method
1. Click Advanced.
2. Click in a column for the attribute.
A check mark indicates the selected functions and
statistics.
If you want to calculate the weighted average, click
in the Weighted Avg column next to the attribute
that you want to use in the calculation and choose
an attribute.
Working with shapes
You can use the Selection tools in the view pane and in
320

Geomatica® Focus
the Symbol Editor to select, group, and attach shapes.
Selecting a single shape
When you select a shape in the view pane, its record is
also selected in the Attribute Manager. To select a record
in the Attribute Manager, see Selecting and clearing
records and fields on page 307 .
1. From the Editing toolbar in the Focus window, click
the Selection Tools arrow and choose Individual.
2. Click the shape that you want.
If you want to select another shape, press Shift and
click a shape.
Selecting shapes within or partially
within a circle
1. From the Editing toolbar in the Focus window, click
the Selection Tools arrow and choose Circular.
2. Drag a circle over a location in the view pane.
If you want to add more shapes to your selection,
press Shift and drag another circle.
Selecting shapes within or partially
within a polygon
1. From the Editing toolbar in the Focus window, click
the Selection Tools arrow and choose Area.
PCI Geomatics
2. Click in the view pane for each vertex you want
included in the area.
3. Double-click the last vertex.
All the shapes that are inside or that touch the
polygon are selected.
If you want to add more shapes to your selection,
press Shift and digitize another polygon.
Grouping shapes
Grouping ties shapes from the same layer to act as a
single unit. Each shape in a group maintains its original
representation and attributes. You cannot select or
modify grouped shapes individually; however, you can
change individual attribute values in the Attribute
Manager.
When you group shapes, a new field labeled GroupId is
added to the Attribute Manager. Focus assigns each
record in the group the same GroupId number.
1. Select the shapes you want to group.
2. From the Edit menu in the Focus window, click
Group.
Ungrouping shapes
1. Select the grouped shapes that you want to
separate.
2. From the Edit menu in the Focus window, click
Ungroup.
321

Geomatica® Focus
Attaching shapes
Attaching combines shapes from the same layer into one
record. The shapes appear as grouped in the view pane,
but the records for the attached shapes are unified in a
record in the Attribute Manager. You can attach adjacent
shapes, non-adjacent shapes, and shapes that are
contained within other shapes. Attached shapes are
referred to as rings.
You can use rings when separate shapes form a single
entity, such as a collection of islands forming one county,
or when shapes are contained within other shapes, such
as an island in a lake.
1. Make sure the items are on the same layer.
2. Select the items you want to attach.
3. From the Edit menu, click Attach.
Separating shapes
1. Select the attached items.
This can be accomplished using the Attribute
Manager, by clicking on a group member, through a
window selector, or a query.
2. From the Edit menu, click Detach.
Creating buffers
A buffer is a margin created at a specific distance around
shapes on a layer. You can create margins of different
PCI Geomatics
sizes, each referred to as a buffer level.You use buffer
levels to analyse suitability or risk around the input
shapes, which is referred to as a proximity analysis.
For example, you can create a buffer around domestic
wells to analyse the risk of contamination from pesticide
use.
• From the Analysis menu, click Buffer.
Creating buffers - step 1
1. In the Input area, choose a file from the File list
box.
If a file is not listed, click Browse, locate and select
a file from the File Selector dialog box, and click
Open.
2. Choose a layer from the Layer list box.
3. In the Output area, enable one of the following
options:
• Display: shows the results without saving the
new layer
• Save: saves the new layer to the project.
Choose a file from the File list box and choose
a layer from the Layer list box.
• If you want to display the results in the view
pane, enable the Display saved results
check box.
• If you want to include only the selected
records in the layer, enable the Buffer
selected shapes only check box.
322

Geomatica® Focus
4. In the Buffer Distances area, enable one of the
following options:
• Simple: buffers all the selected shapes
• Representation Values: buffers the selected
shapes according to their representation
values
• Field: buffers the selected shapes according
to an attribute. Choose an attribute from the
list box.
5. Enter a number of levels that you want in the Buffer
levels spin box.
6. Choose a unit of measurement from the Units list
box.
7. In the Buffer distances table, type a number in
each Level column to determine the width of a
buffer.
8. Click Next.
Creating buffers - step 2
1. In the Vertex Options area, enable a cornering
type.
2. In the Line Options area, enable an option for the
side you want the buffer to appear.
3. Enable an End style option for the style you want to
use at the end of lines.
4. In the Polygon Options area, enable a style option.
5. In the Fields to Add area, enable the
SourceShapeId check box.
6. Enable any of the following check boxes:
• [attribute name]Value: includes the attribute
values in the output layer if the buffer is based
on an attribute and if overlapping buffers are
kept separate
PCI Geomatics
• BufferDistance: lists the width of the buffer for
each level in the output layer
• BufferLevel: lists the levels in the output layer
7. In the Output Areas area, enable one of the
following options:
• Combine: combines the shapes where the
buffers overlap
• Keep Separate: keeps each buffer separate
8. Click Finish.
Editing vectors using the vector
editing tools
You can access the vector editing tools and the Vector
Editing Tools toolbar from the Edit menu. A variety of
tools are provided for editing vectors. Some of the
changes that you can make using the vector editing tools
can affect the attributes of the shape you are editing. For
example, the Merge Line/Polygon tool combines two
shapes, including their attributes.
When you edit vectors in a Math Model Area (see
Understanding vector editing in a math model area on
page 302 ), the vertices are shown in the correct position
according to the math model and DEM, or the
approximate elevation value that you provided when you
created the Area. Lines connecting the vertices are
straight and do not reflect the effects of the math model
and elevation.
1. Click a shape with the Individual Selection tool.
2. From the Edit menu, click Vector Editing.
The vector editing tools on the Edit menu become
323

Geomatica® Focus
available and the Vector Editing Tools toolbar are
displayed.
About the Vector Editing tool bar
The following table shows the available tools.
Table 21. Vector Editing tools
PCI Geomatics
Tool Name Action
Find
Reverse Vertices
Add Vertices
Merge
Line/Polygon
Split
Line/Polygon
Selects the
shape and
Identifies the
start and end
vertices.
Changes line
direction (not
available for
whole polygons).
Creates new
vertices within a
shape.
Connects ends of
lines together or
combines
polygons by
removing
common
boundaries.
Breaks lines and
polygons into
Tool Name Action
Extend Line
Auto Merge Line
Close Shape
Mirror Tools
Rotation Tools
Break
Line/Polygon
Start Vertex
separate shapes.
Extends the
length of a vertex
in a straight line.
Removes the
start or end
vertices shared
between lines
(pseudo-nodes)
Automatically
connects the
start and end
vertices of a line
to form a
polygon.
Flips a shape
horizontally or
vertically to make
a mirror image.
Rotates a shape
around an
anchor.
Separates
overlapping
shapes at their
intersecting
points.
Moves the cursor
to the start vertex
in a selected
324

Geomatica® Focus
PCI Geomatics
Tool Name Action
Previous Vertex
Midpoint
Next Vertex
End Vertex
Show Vertex
Vertices
shape.
Moves the cursor
from one vertex
to the previous
vertex in a
selected shape.
Moves the cursor
halfway between
two vertices in
the direction of
the line.
Moves the cursor
from one vertex
to the previous
vertex in a
selected shape.
Moves the cursor
to the end vertex
in a selected
shape.
Makes the
vertices in a
shape more
prominent for
better visibility.
Opens the
Vertices dialog
box and displays
the vertex
coordinates of a
selected shape.
Selecting a shape
The Find tool selects a shape and identifies the start and
end vertices.
1. On the Vector Editing Tools toolbar, click the Find
button.
2. Click a shape.
Moving a vertex
The Find tool selects a shape and identifies the start and
end vertices.
1. On the Vector Editing toolbar, click the Find button
and click a shape.
2. Click the Show Vertices button.
3. Drag a vertex to a new location.
Moving several vertices together
while maintaining their form
The Find tool selects a shape and identifies the start and
end vertices.
1. On the Vector Editing Tools toolbar, click the Find
button and click a shape.
2. Click the Show Vertices button.
3. Press and hold the Ctrl key and select several
vertices
4. Drag a selected vertex to a new location.
325

Geomatica® Focus
Reversing vector direction
The Reverse Vertices tool changes the direction of the
line (not available for whole polygons).
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the Reverse Vertices button.
Adding vertices
The Add Vertices tool creates new vertices within a
shape.
When you use this tool in a Math Model Area (see
Understanding vector editing in a math model area on
page 302 ), the elevation for the new vertex is derived
from the DEM or the approximate elevation value that
you provided when you created the Area.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the Add Vertices button.
3. Click on the line where you want the vertex.
If you want to continue a line, click the start or end
vertex of the line and click a series of vertices.
Connecting lines
The Merge Line/Polygon tool connects ends of lines
together or combines polygons by removing common
boundaries. This tool may affect the attributes of the
PCI Geomatics
shape you are editing.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a line.
2. Click the Merge Line/Polygon button.
3. Click the start or end vertex of the line.
4. Click the start or end vertex of a line with which you
want to merge the first line.
Connecting polygons
1. Click the Find button and click a polygon.
2. Click the Merge Line/Polygon button.
3. Click a polygon with which you want to merge the
first polygon.
Cutting a line
The Split Line/Polygon tool cuts lines and polygons into
separate shapes. This tool may affect the attributes of the
shape you are editing.
When you use this tool in a Math Model Area (see
Understanding vector editing in a math model area on
page 302 ), the elevation for the new vertex created at
the cut point is derived from the DEM or the approximate
elevation value that you provided when you created the
Area.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a line.
2. Click the Split Line/Polygon button.
3. Click where you want to split the line.
326

Geomatica® Focus
When you split a polygon, you draw a line through the
shape where you want the polygon to split.
Cutting a polygon
1. Click the Find button and click a polygon.
2. Click the Split Line/Polygon button.
3. Click a point on the outline of the polygon where
you want to begin a line.
4. Click in the polygon to form the line.
5. Double-click a point on the outline of the polygon to
end the line.
Extending a line
You can move a start or end vertex simply by selecting
the vertex with the Find tool and moving it. However, if
you want to extend the line without changing its angle,
the Extend Line tool forces the vertex to move in a
straight line.
When you use this tool in a Math Model Area (see
Understanding vector editing in a math model area on
page 302 ), the elevation for the new vertex is derived
from the DEM or the approximate elevation value that
you provided when you created the Area.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a line.
2. Click the Extend Line button.
3. Click a start or end vertex.
4. Click where you want to end the extension.
PCI Geomatics
Merging segmented lines
The Auto Merge Line tool removes the start or end
vertices shared between lines (pseudo-nodes). If a line#s
start and end vertices connect, it automatically forms a
polygon. This tool may affect the attributes of the shape
you are editing.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a line.
2. Click the Auto Merge Line button.
3. Click the start or end vertex where you want to
begin merging the line.
If it reaches a fork in the line, you must choose
which line to follow. Click the line that you want to
merge.
Changing a line into a polygon
The Close Shape tool automatically connects the start
and end vertices of a line to form a polygon.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a line.
2. Click the Close Shape button.
Flipping a shape to its mirror image
The Mirror tools flip the shape horizontally or vertically
resulting in the mirror image of the shape.
When you use this tool in a Math Model Area (see
327

Geomatica® Focus
Understanding vector editing in a math model area on
page 302 ), the shape is flipped according to the ground
coordinates and may be mirrored about oblique axes,
which may cause the it to appear distorted.
To flip a shape
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the Mirror Tools button.
To switch the Mirror tools from horizontal to
vertical
1. Click the Mirror Tools arrow and choose one of the
following:
• Mirror X: flips a shape vertically
• Mirror Y: flips a shape horizontally
Spinning a shape free hand
The Rotation tools revolve a shape around an anchor. By
default, the start vertex is the anchor when a Rotation
tool is selected. To move the anchor, click it and move it.
When you use this tool in a Math Model Area (see
Understanding vector editing in a math model area on
page 302 ), the elevation for each vertex in the shape is
derived from the DEM or the approximate elevation value
that you provided when you created the Area.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the Rotation Tools arrow and click Free
Rotate.
3. Drag the shape to the angle you want.
Spinning the shape precisely
1. Click the Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the Rotation Tools arrow and click Rotate by
Angle.
3. In the Rotate by Angle dialog box, enter a value for
the angle by which you want to rotate the shape in
the spin box.
4. Choose an angle unit from the list box.
5. Click OK.
Separating overlapping shapes
The Break Line/Polygon tool separates overlapping
shapes at their intersecting points. For example, if you
have two overlapping polygons, the Break Line/Polygon
tool separates the two polygons into three with the
overlap area becoming the third polygon. This feature is
not available for a topological layer, because overlapping
shapes are automatically separated. This tool may affect
the attributes of the shape you are editing.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the Break Line/Polygon button.
3. Click the overlapping shape outside of the overlap
area.
Moving the cursor to the start vertex
PCI Geomatics
328

Geomatica® Focus
You can select a vertex by clicking it or you can use one
of the navigation tools.
Start Vertex and End Vertex
Moves the cursor to the start vertex or end vertex of a
selected shape.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the Start Vertex button.
Moving the cursor to the end vertex:
1. Click the Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the End Vertex button.
Previous Vertex and Next Vertex
Moves the cursor from one vertex to another in a
selected shape. The Previous Vertex tool moves the
cursor toward the start vertex; the Next Vertex tool moves
the cursor toward the end vertex.
Moving the cursor along vertices
1. Click the Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the Previous Vertex button or the Next
Vertex button.
Midpoint
TMoves the cursor halfway between two vertices in the
direction of a line.
Moving the cursor to a vertex
1. Click the Find button and click a shape.
2. Select a vertex.
3. Click the Midpoint button.
Displaying vertices
The Show Vertices tool makes the vertices in the shape
more prominent so they more easily seen.
1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the
Find button and click a shape.
2. Click the Show Vertices button.
Adding and removing: vertices
To display coordinates, select a shape with the Find tool
and click the Vertices button. The Vertices dialog box
displays the coordinates of the vertices contained in the
selected shape.
If you select a vertex in the view pane and move it, the
coordinates are automatically updated. You can also add
or subtract vertices from the Vertices dialog box. When
you add a vertex, it is inserted halfway between the
selected vertex and the next according to the direction of
the line.
PCI Geomatics
329

Geomatica® Focus
1. Select a vertex in the Vertices dialog box and do
the following:
• To add vertices, click the Add button.
• To delete a vertex, click it and click the
Remove button.
The coordinate system for the Area in the Maps tree is
determined by the first layer opened in the Area. When
you add layers to the Maps tree, you have the choice of
using the same coordinate system or a different one. If
the coordinate system for the layer is different than that of
the Area, you can display the coordinates of the vertices
in either systems.
Switching between coordinate
systems
1. To view the vertices using the coordinate system of
the Area in the Maps tree, click Area under
Coordinate System.
2. To view the vertices using the coordinate system of
the layer, click Layer under Coordinate System.
Selecting vectors using spatial query
tools
Spatial Query tools search through all visible layers to
select the shapes that correspond to your criteria.
Including an original selection in a
spatial query
PCI Geomatics
When you use any of the Spatial Query tools, you can
include or exclude your original selection from the
resulting selection. When you enable the Add to
Selection option, the results of the Spatial Query are
selected along with your original selection. When you
clear Add to Selection, only the results of the Spatial
Query are selected.
• From the Editing toolbar, click the Spatial Query
arrow and choose Add to Selection.
A check mark next to the option indicates it is
enabled.
Selecting fully contained shapes
The Fully Within tool selects all other shapes that fall
completely within a selected shape or area. Any shape
that touches or overlaps a shape other than the one you
selected will not be included.
1. From the Editing toolbar, click the Selection Tools
arrow and choose a tool.
2. Click a shape or select an area.
3. From the Editing toolbar, click the Spatial Query
arrow and choose Fully Within.
Selecting partially contained shapes
The Partially Within tool selects the shapes that have at
least one vertex in common with a selected shape or
area, including overlapping and neighboring shapes.
330

Geomatica® Focus
1. From the Editing toolbar, click the Selection Tools
arrow and choose a tool.
2. Click a shape or select an area.
3. From the Editing toolbar, click the Spatial Query
arrow and choose Partially Within.
Selecting all shapes within a specified
distance
The Within Distance tool selects shapes that fall
completely or partially within a specified distance of a
select shape or area. If you do not select a shape or
area, the distance is calculated from the location of the
cursor.
1. From the Editing toolbar, click the Selection Tools
arrow and choose a tool.
2. Click a shape or select an area.
3. From the Editing toolbar, click the Spatial Query
arrow and choose Within Distance.
4. In the Within Distance dialog box, type a number in
the Distance box.
5. Choose a unit of measurement from the list box.
6. Click OK.
Selecting all shapes fully within a
distance
The Fully Within Distance tool selects only shapes that
fall completely within a specified distance of a selected
shape. If you do not select a shape, the distance is
calculated from the location of the cursor.
1. From the Editing toolbar, click the Selection Tools
PCI Geomatics
arrow and choose a tool.
2. Click a shape or select an area.
3. From the Editing toolbar, click the Spatial Query
arrow and choose Fully Within Distance.
4. In the Within Distance dialog box, type a number in
the Distance box.
5. Choose a unit of measurement from the list box.
6. Click OK.
Selecting intersecting shapes
The Crosses tool selects all of the shapes that intersect
selected shapes.
1. From the Editing toolbar, click the Selection Tools
arrow and choose a tool.
2. Click a shape or select an area.
3. From the Editing toolbar, click the Spatial Query
arrow and choose Crosses.
About the Overlay wizard
An overlay derives information from two or more input
layers. The Overlay Wizard contains three overlay types:
Spatial Overlay, Statistical Overlay, and Suitability
Overlay.
Spatial Overlay forms a new layer containing the
attributes from two or more layers. For more information,
see Combining layers with a spatial overlay on page 332 .
Statistical Overlay transfers the selected attributes from
layer to another. For more information, see Using a
statistical overlay on page 333 .
331

Geomatica® Focus
Suitability Overlay analyses the relative importance of
input layers and attributes to identify the areas that
produce the most positive result. For more information,
see Using a suitability overlay on page 334 .
Combining layers with a spatial
overlay
Spatial Overlay forms a new layer containing the
attributes from two or more layers. For example, you can
overlay a layer containing land-ownership polygons and a
layer containing vegetation polygons to analyse where
the types of vegetation are located on each property. If
you want to overlay specific shapes from the layers,
select them before you begin the Spatial Overlay.
1. From the Analysis menu, click Overlay.
2. In the Overlay Wizard, enable the Spatial option
and click Next.
3. In the Available Files/Layers list, enable the check
mark next to the layers that you want to combine.
• If you want to select layers from another file,
click Browse, locate and select a file from the
File Selector dialog box, and click Open.
• If you want to overlay only the selected shapes
in each layer, enable the Overlay only the
selected shapes of the input layers check
box.
4. Click Next.
5. Choose a layer from the Layer list box.
6. Select an attribute that you want to include in the
new layer from the Input Attribute list.
7. Click Add.
PCI Geomatics
8. Repeat step 5 to step 7 for each layer.
If you want to change the order of an attribute,
select it in the Attribute table and click the up or
down arrow buttons.
9. If you want to change the names of an attribute,
double-click it and type a new name.
10. Click Next.
11. In the Output Options area, enable one of the
following options:
• Union: includes all shapes in their entirety
from all the input layers
• Intersection: includes only the overlapping
areas of the shapes from the input layers
12. Enable any of the following check boxes:
• Use a Mask to Limit Output: uses a layer to
limit the area. Choose a layer from the list box.
• Using Only Selected Shapes: includes only
the selected shapes as the mask
• Use a Named Region to Limit Output: uses
an existing named region as the mask. For
more information about Named Regions, see
Creating named regions on page 79 .
13. In the Output Layer area, select a layer type for the
new layer from the Type list box.
14. Enable one of the following options:
• Display: shows the results without saving the
new layer
• Save: saves the new layer in the project.
Choose a file from the File list box and choose
a layer from the Layer list box.
• If you want to display the results in the view
pane, enable the Display saved results
check box.
15. Click Finish.
332

Geomatica® Focus
Using a statistical overlay
Statistical Overlay transfers the selected attributes from
one layer to another. One layer, called the Primary Input,
receives the attributes from another layer, called the
Secondary Input.
There are two possible results when you transfer
attributes between the layers:
• Each shape in the Primary Input can receive the
attributes from one shape in the Secondary Input.
For example, you can transfer the county attributes
from a county layer to a cities layer. Each city in the
Primary Input receives the attributes from the
county that contains the city.
• Each shape in the Primary Input can receive the
attributes from many shapes in the Secondary
Input. You must specify a function to aggregate the
attributes from the Secondary Input. For example,
you can transfer the city attributes from a cities layer
to a county layer. Each county in the Primary Input
receives the sum of the population of the cities
contained within that county.
1. From the Analysis menu, click Overlay.
2. In the Overlay Wizard, enable the Statistical option
and click Next.
3. In the Primary Input area, choose a file from the
File list box.
If a file is not listed, click Browse, locate and select
a file from the File Selector dialog box, and click
Open.
4. Choose a layer that will receive the attributes from
PCI Geomatics
the Layer list box.
If you want to include only the selected records in
the layer, enable the Use selected shapes only
check box.
5. In the Secondary Input area, choose a file from the
File list box.
6. Choose a layer that contains the attributes you want
to add to the Primary Input layer from the Layer list
box.
If you want to include only the selected records in
the layer, enable the Use selected shapes only
check box.
7. Click Next.
8. Click Finish.
You can add function fields to the output Attribute
Manager. (See Adding function fields to output layers on
page 320 )
You can also add fields containing other attributes. (See
Adding attributes to the statistical overlay output on page 333
)
Adding attributes to the statistical
overlay output
The Primary and Secondary Input layers that you choose
for the Statistical Overlay determine the availability of the
Grouping Criteria options and the options available
under Additional Attributes.
Count
333

Geomatica® Focus
is available when:
• The Primary Input is a line layer and the Secondary
Input is a line, polygon, thematic raster, or raster.
• The Primary Input is a polygon layer and the
Secondary Input is a point, line, polygon, thematic
raster, or raster.
• The Primary Input is a thematic raster layer and the
Secondary Input is a point, line, polygon, thematic
raster, or raster.
When you enable the Count check box, Focus calculates
the number of shapes combined to form each record and
adds that attribute the output layer.
Surface Length
is available when the Primary Input is a line layer and the
Secondary Input is a raster. This option is useful if the
raster is a DEM. When you enable the Surface Length
check box, Focus calculates the three-dimensional
surface length of the line and adds that attribute the
output layer.
Distance
is available when:
• The Primary Input is a point layer and the
Secondary Input is a point, line, or polygon layer.
• The Primary Input is a line layer and the Secondary
Input is a points layer.
When you enable the Distance check box, Focus
identifies the shape from the Secondary Input that is the
closest to each shape in the Primary Input and calculates
PCI Geomatics
the distance between them. The distance is added to
each record in the output layer. When points are
contained within the polygon, the distance equals zero in
the output.
Counting Specific Pixel Values:
You can count specific pixel values when the Primary
Input is a line, polygon, or thematic raster layer and the
Secondary Input is a raster. For each line in the Primary
Input, Focus identifies corresponding pixels in the
Secondary Input and adds that attribute the output layer.
Grouping Criteria:
The Grouping Criteria options are available when the
Primary Input is a polygon layer and the Secondary Input
is a line or polygon layer.
To combine all shapes from the Secondary Input that
touch or overlap the boundaries of each shape in the
Primary Input, enable the Partially Within option. The
resulting attribute is added to the output layer.
To combine only the shapes from the Secondary Input
that lie entirely within the boundaries of each shape in the
Primary Input, enable the Wholly Contained option. The
resulting attribute is added to the output layer.
Using a suitability overlay
Suitability Overlay analyses the relative importance of
various data to identify areas that produce the most
334

Geomatica® Focus
positive result. For example, analysing data in a project to
identify the best location for a school or the most likely
location for a forest fire.
To perform the analysis, you must build a project
containing layers of data that you want to use in the
calculation. Each layer should contain one type of data
representing a factor in the calculation. For example, if
you are trying to determine the best location for a winery,
your project could contain a layer with rainfall levels for
an area, a layer of soil types found in the area, a layer
containing the road network, and so on.
To calculate a combination that produces the best result,
you must decide on a scale to rank the importance the
layers and a scale to rank the data in the layers. The
scales measure the relative importance of each input into
the equation; the most important factors affect the results
the most. The value from the scale that you assign to the
layer and to the data is called a weight. For more
information about how to determine the scales, see
Understanding weights in the suitability overlay on page 336
.
For example, you have a scale of 1 to 100 for the layers.
Because the soil type layer is more important than the
road network layer, you can assign a weight of 75 to the
soil type layer and a weight of 25 to the road network
layer; the soil type layer is three times more influential in
the calculation than the road network layer.
You do not need to use the same scale for the layers and
the data in the layers, but you should use one scale for
the layers themselves and one scale for the data in the
PCI Geomatics
layers. Weighting the data in one layer according to a
vastly different scale from the data in the other layers can
skew the results.
To add weights to data, add a field in the Attribute
Manager for each layer and enter the numeric value
expressing the weight for the data in each record. A
negative weight for a record will force an unfavorable
result in the output for that record.
For example, you have a scale of 1 to 10 for the data in
the layers. In the soil type layer, you assign the
well-drained soils an 8, the poor and shallow soils a 2,
and the polluted soils a -1. Any sites containing polluted
soils will automatically receive a negative result.
You must also assign a weight to the'No Data' value in
the layers. The'No Data' value represents the null values
or the pixels without data. The'No Data' value is usually
set in the metadata of the layer so it may not appear in
the Attribute Manager. When you assign a weight to
the'No Data' value in step 7, you should use the same
scale as the rest of the data in the layers.
When setting up a Suitability Overlay, you must
determine the weight of each layer, the weight of the
NoData value, and select the field that contains the
weights for the data in each layer. The result is displayed
in a layer indicating the most positive correlation between
all the factors in the equation.
1. From the Attribute Manager, add a field to each
layer containing the numeric value expressing the
weight of the records. For more information, see
335

Geomatica® Focus
Adding new fields on page 309 .
2. From the Analysis menu in the Focus window, click
Overlay.
3. In the Overlay Wizard, enable the Suitability option
and click Next.
4. In the Available Files/Layers list, enable the check
mark next to the layers that you want to combine.
If you want to select layers from another file, click
Browse, locate and select a file from the File
Selector dialog box, and click Open.
5. Click Next.
6. Type a number to determine the weight of each
layer in the Layer Weight column.
7. Type a number to determine the weight of NoData
value for each layer in the NoData Weight column.
Use the same weight scale as you used for the
attributes.
8. In the Attribute Weight column, click a cell and
choose the weight values for the attributes.
9. Click Next.
10. In the Output Options area, enable one of the
following options:
• Union: includes all the shapes in their entirety
from all input layers
• Intersection: includes only the overlapping
areas of shapes from the input layers
11. Enable any of the following check boxes:
• Use a Mask to Limit Output - uses a layer to
limit the area. You can use an existing a
bitmap, raster, or polygon layer. Choose a
layer from the list box.
• Using Only Selected Shapes - includes only
the selected shapes as the mask
PCI Geomatics
• Use a Named Region to Limit Output - se an
existing named region as the mask. For more
information about Named Regions, see
Creating named regions on page 79 .
12. In the Output Layer area, enable one of the
following options:
• Display - shows the results without saving the
new layer
• Save - saves the new layer in the project.
Choose a file from the File list box and choose
a layer from the Layer list box.
• If you want to display the results in the view
pane, enable the Display saved results
check box.
13. Click Finish.
Understanding weights in the
suitability overlay
The range of numbers that you select for a scale does
not have an inherent value; it is the degree of value in the
scale that gives them their value.
For example, if you use a scale of 1 to 10 and assign a
weight of 2 to the Road Network layer and a weight of 5
to the Rainfall layer, it has the same effect as using a
scale of 1 to 100 and giving Road Network layer a weight
of 20 and the Rainfall layer a weight of 50. In each case,
the Rainfall layer has more weight and is considered
better or more desirable in the calculation.
The scale for the layers is usually based on a scale of 1
to 100, but the sum of the layer weights does not need to
equal 100. The point is to identify the relative importance
336

Geomatica® Focus
of each layer in comparison with the others.
The scale of the data in the layers does not have to be
the same as that used for the layers, but the scale should
be consistently applied for all the data. Using different
scales for the data in different layers may cause
unwanted results.
For example, if you used a scale of 1 to 1000 to rank the
data in the Soil Types layer and a scale of 1 to 10 for the
data in the other layers, the soil types might nullify the
importance of other data like rainfall even if the Rainfall
layer itself has a higher weight than the Soil Type layer.
Viewing data as a chart
Charts are a way to visualize your data. A chart is a table
of attributes displayed as a graphic where the values of
selected records and fields are compared. It displays
quantitative data so you can see how the numbers relate
to each other, which helps you to interpret the information
more easily. Trends or anomalies may become evident
when displayed using the right chart type. For example, it
may be difficult to identify trends by looking at a table
filled with population statistics, but with the right chart the
pattern become easily discernable.
For column, bar, line, area, and pie chart types, you must
select at least one field and one record before the chart is
displayed in the viewer. For the scatter chart type, the
minimum number of selected records and fields depends
on the Series in setting. When Series in is set to Records,
you must select at least two fields and at least one record
before the chart is displayed. When Series in is set to
PCI Geomatics
Fields, at least one field and at least two records must be
selected. If the minimum number of selected records and
fields for any chart type is not satisfied, the chart displays
a message reminding you to select data.
You can create more than one chart per layer. Each chart
is connected to the attributes in the layer so if the
attribute values change, the chart changes to reflect the
new values. Each chart that you create is remembered in
the Chart Manager. For more information, see Opening
and deleting a chart on page 348 .
About chart types
The trick with charts is to use the right chart type to
display your data. One chart type can make your data
instantly understandable while another can completely
confound it.
Column:
The column chart type displays the selected data as
vertical stripes of different colors or patterns. The
categories are organized along the x-axis (horizontally)
and the values are measured along the y-axis (vertically).
Column charts are often used to compare data or to
emphasize how data changed over time.
Three options are available for the column chart:
• The Clustered Column type forms separate bands
for each kind of data and groups the bands
side-by-side by category.
• The Stacked Column type forms bands for each
337

Geomatica® Focus
kind of data and piles the bands on top of one
another to form one column per category.
• The 100% Stacked Column type is similar to the
Stacked columns type, except each band is
expressed as a percentage and each column totals
100%. The Stacked columns and Percent columns
illustrate the contribution of each band to the whole
category.
Bar:
The bar chart type displays the selected data as
horizontal stripes of different colors or patterns. In
contrast with the column chart type, the values are
organized along the x-axis (horizontally) and the
categories are measured along the y-axis (vertically). Bar
charts are often used to compare data while reducing the
emphasis on the passage of time.
Three options are available for the bar chart:
• The Clustered Bar type forms separate bands for
each kind of data and groups the bands
side-by-side by category.
• The Stacked Bar type forms bands for each kind of
data and lines up the bands end to end to form one
column per category.
• The 100% Stacked Bar type is similar to the
Stacked bar type, except each band is expressed
as a percentage and each column totals 100%. The
Stacked bar and Percent bar charts illustrate the
contribution of each band to the whole category.
Line:
The line chart displays the selected data as lines of
PCI Geomatics
different colors or patterns connecting points at equal
intervals. The categories are organized along the x-axis
(horizontally) and the values are measured along the
y-axis (vertically). The vertices represent the values for
each category and the angles formed by the lines
connecting the vertices emphasize the trends.
Three options are available for the line chart:
• The Line type creates a line for each kind of data
where each vertex represents the actual value for
each category.
• The Stacked Line type creates a line for each kind
of data where each vertex represents the value of
each category added to the value of the vertex
beneath it. Therefore, the topmost vertex in each
category reflects the sum total of all the data in that
category.
• The 100% Stacked Line type is similar to the
Stacked line type, except each line is expressed as
a percentage and each category totals 100%. The
Stacked line and Percent line types illustrate the
contribution of each line to the whole category.
Area:
The area chart displays the selected data as polygons of
different colors or patterns connecting points at equal
intervals. It is similar to the line chart, except the area
below the line is shaded to form a polygon. The
categories are organized along the x-axis (horizontally)
and the values are measured along the y-axis (vertically).
The points represent the values for each category and
the angles formed by the lines connecting the points
emphasize the trends.
338

Geomatica® Focus
Three options are available for the area chart:
Pie:
• The Area type creates a polygon for each kind of
data where the points represent the actual value for
each category.
• The Stacked Area type creates a polygon for each
kind of data where each point represents the value
of each category added to the value of the point
beneath it. Therefore, the topmost point in each
category reflects the sum total of all the data in that
category.
• The 100% Stacked Area type is similar to the
Stacked Area type, except each polygon is
expressed as a percentage and each category
totals 100%. The Stacked Area and 100% Stacked
Area types illustrate the contribution of each
polygon to the whole category.
The pie chart is a circular graphic which displays the data
as wedges representing their portion of the whole. It can
only show the portions or ratios of one kind of data at a
time.
Two options are available for the pie chart:
• The Pie type creates a circle divided into slices
proportional to the whole.
• The Exploded Pie type creates a circle broken into
slices proportional to the whole.
Scatter:
The scatter chart is a graph of points comparing two sets
of data. One set is plotted along the x-axis and the other
PCI Geomatics
along the y-axis. It is used to uncover a possible
correlation between the data sets.
The appearance of a discernable pattern or clustering of
the points indicates a correlation between the data sets.
An indicator of a high correlation between the data sets is
that you are able to draw a straight line through the
points. The more points that cluster about the implied
line, the stronger the possibility of a correlation. If the
points appear randomly distributed over the chart, it is
unlikely that a correlation exists.
It is important to note, however, that although a scatter
chart may indicate a correlation between the data sets it
does not mean that one data set is causing an affect on
the other. The correlation can be the result of a third
factor affecting both sets or can be simply a coincidence.
Creating a chart from the layer
You can generate a chart from vector, grayscale, and
pseudocolor layers on the Maps tab, but not from bitmap
(1-bit) or RGB layers. Charts are also available from the
Files tab on raster channels or vector segments.
When you create a chart, it compares the values of the
selected records and fields in a layer#s attributes or
graphs the pixel value counts from a raster without
attributes.
1. In the Maps tree, select the layer that contains the
data that you want to chart.
2. If you want to select specific shapes to chart from a
339

Geomatica® Focus
vector or thematic raster layer, click the Selection
Tools arrow on the Editing toolbar and select a
tool. In the view pane, click or drag to select the
shapes that you want included in the chart.
3. In the Focus main menu, click Layer.
4. Click Charts and select a chart type from the list.
5. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Chart
Definition button.
6. Select the fields, see Defining the data to chart on
page 340 .
7. Click OK.
Defining the data to chart
Depending on which chart type you choose, you need to
select a minimum number of records and fields (see
About chart types on page 337 ). If the minimum number
of selected records and fields for any chart type is not
satisfied, the chart displays a message reminding you to
select data.
1. In the Type list, select the chart type that you want
to use to display your data. For more information on
the chart types, see About chart types on page 337
.
2. Under Fields, click to select the fields that you want
to include in the chart. Only the fields with a black
check mark are included in the chart.
3. For Series in, select Fields to display the data from
the selected Fields or select Records to display the
data from the selected records. For more
information, see About Series In on page 340 .
4. To customize the look of chart, click the Options
tab. For more information, see Designing the chart
surround on page 341 .
PCI Geomatics
5. Click OK.
About Series In
The Series In option on the Chart Definitions dialog box
defines what is displayed in the graph. Depending on
what you want the data to be interpreted, you may want
to emphasize either the records or the fields. When you
select Records, the data in each record is represented in
the chart. When you select Fields, the data is displayed
by field in the chart.
For example, when you choose Fields for the chart
shown in the following figure, the fields are displayed as
bars (Pop2000 and Pop2002). When you choose
Records, the records (Alaska, California, and Florida) are
displayed as bars.
340

Geomatica® Focus
meaning of the data displayed in a chart. It puts the data
into context so we can analyse, organize, and
communicate the information effectively.
Understanding Series In:
Designing the chart surround
A chart's purpose is to display data so that we can quickly
grasp its meaning. The chart surround is a collection of
graphical elements that gives meaning or clarifies the
PCI Geomatics
The chart surround elements include:
• Title and subtitle
• The x-axis and its ticks, labels and headings
• The y-axis and its ticks, labels and headings
• The legend
• The background
• The data labels
Each chart surround element helps to present the data as
clearly as possible. You do not need to include every
element in every chart. Select the ones that most
effectively convey the chart's meaning.
1. On the Chart Definition dialog box, click the
Options tab.
2. In the Title box, type a word or phrase that you
want as a title for your chart.
3. In the Subtitle box, type a word or phrase that you
want as a subtitle for your chart.
4. In the Category field list, select the field that most
clearly describes the records used in the chart. For
more information, see About the category field on
page 342 .
5. In the X-axis heading box, type a word or phrase
that you want to display along the bottom of the
chart.
6. Select Show X-axis values to display the data
values along the x-axis of the chart.
7. In the Y-axis heading box, type a word or phrase
that you want to display along the y-axis of the
chart.
341

Geomatica® Focus
8. Select Show Y-axis values to display the data
values along the y-axis of the chart.
9. Select Show legend to display the legend for the
data in the chart.
10. Select Show data labels to display labels on the
data in the chart.
11. In the Background style list, click to select a style
for the area behind the chart. You can create a
frame around the chart or color the background. For
more information about creating styles, see
Selecting a style on page 354 .
12. Click OK.
NOTE: The Restore to Defaults button clears the
preference file for the chart, not just the settings on the
Options tab. For more information, see Resetting the
chart to defaults on page 343 .
About the category field
The Category field list on the Chart Definition dialog box
determines which field is used to identify the records
used in the chart. It affects what is displayed on the
x-axis, the legend, or the y-axis depending on the chart
type and the Series in setting.
Table 22.
Chart Type Series in: Fields Series in:
Records
Category field
displays on:
Bar y-axis legend
Line x-axis legend
Area x-axis legend
Category field
displays on:
Pie legend not displayed
Scatter not displayed legend
The field that you select depends on what you want to
emphasize or what attribute most clearly represents the
data in your chart. For example, in the following figure the
chart displays the same data: the number of houses and
apartments for each newspaper route. If you have new
customers to add on Second Avenue which falls along
both route 15 and 22, Chart A is going to be less helpful
unless you have memorized the names of the couriers
responsible for the routes. Chart B, on the other hand,
gives you the route number immediately.
Understanding the Use of the Category Field
Chart Type Series in: Fields Series in:
Records
Category field
displays on:
Column x-axis legend
Category field
displays on:
PCI Geomatics
342

Geomatica® Focus
Definition button.
2. On the Chart Definition dialog box, click the
Options tab.
3. Click Restore to Defaults.
4. Click Apply.
Using the Chart Viewer
The Chart Viewer consists of a view pane and a toolbar.
The view pane contains the chart and the chart surround
items. It serves as your workspace for creating your
chart. The toolbar provides quick access to various tools
and dialog boxes that you can use to design your chart.
To select a chart surround element or part of the
chart
1. Click the Selection Tool button.
2. Click the item in the viewer.
Resetting the chart to defaults
When you create your first chart, the look of the chart is
set by default. As you select the colors, fonts, and other
design options, Focus retains your choices in a
preference file so the next time you create a chart, the
last used styles are applied to your current data. If you
click the Restore to Defaults button on the Chart
Definition dialog box, it clears the preference file for the
chart, not just the settings on the Options tab.
1. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Chart
PCI Geomatics
To lock the record and field selection in the
chart
1. Click the Lock Chart button.
When you lock the chart, it only prevents changes
to which records and fields are used by the chart.
You can continue to modify the chart surround
elements and attribute values. Once the chart is
unlocked, the chart is automatically updated with
the currently selected records and fields.
343

Geomatica® Focus
To switch from chart type to another
1. Click the arrow next to Chart Type.
2. Click the type that you want to use.
For more control over the chart settings, see
Defining the data to chart on page 340 .
To show or hide the chart legend
• In the Chart dialog box, click the Legend button.
For more control over the legend settings, see
Designing the chart legend on page 345 .
To export the chart as a file
1. In the Chart dialog box, click Export Chart.
For more information, see Opening the Export Map
dialog box on page 407 .
To zoom in or out of the chart
1. Click the Zoom to Overview button to decrease the
magnification so the whole chart appears in the
viewer.
2. Click the Zoom Interactive button and drag a
rectangle over an area to magnify a specific part of
the chart.
3. Click the Zoom In button to increase the
magnification by increments and centers the chart in
PCI Geomatics
the viewer.
4. Click the Zoom Out button to decrease the
magnification by increments and centers the chart in
the viewer.
To move the magnified chart around with the
pointer
1. In the Chart dialog box, click Pan and drag the
pointer in the chart viewer.
To display the attributes from a chart
1. In the Chart viewer, click the Information button.
2. Click a piece of data in the chart.
The clicked data flashes in the viewer and the
attributes from that record are displayed under
Values on the Information Report dialog box.
When used from the Chart toolbar, the Information tool
displays all the attributes from the record corresponding
to the data clicked in the chart. The Information tool is
also used in other places in Focus. For more information,
see Using the information report on page 205 .
To change the color of the a part of the chart or
chart surround elements
1. In the Chart viewer, click the Selection Tool button.
2. Click the item in the viewer.
3. On the Chart viewer toolbar, click the arrow next to
the Color button.
344

Geomatica® Focus
4. Click a color from the palette or click More Colors
to create a color.
To change the look of a part of the chart or a
chart surround element
1. Click the Selection Tool button.
2. Click the item in the viewer.
3. Click the arrow next to the Style button.
4. Click the style that you want. Different styles are
available depending on the item that you chose. To
create a new style, select Style Selector. For more
information about the Style Selector, see Selecting
a style on page 354 .
To customize the chart
1. In the Chart dialog box, click the Chart Definition
button.
For more information, see Defining the data to chart
on page 340 .
To edit or position the chart surround elements
1. Click the Selection Tool button.
2. Click the item in the viewer.
3. Click the Properties button.
Designing the chart legend
The chart legend is a table listing and describing the
representation of the data in the chart. If you deleted the
PCI Geomatics
legend from the chart viewer, you can enable it from the
Options tab on the Chart Definition dialog box (see
Designing the chart surround on page 341 ).
To open the Legend Properties dialog box
1. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Selection Tool
button.
2. Click the legend.
3. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Properties
button.
To design the legend
1. In the Field list (if available), select the field that
most clearly describes the records used in the chart.
For more information, see About the Category field
on page 342 .
2. In the Size list, type or select the size of the font
used to identify the data in the chart.
3. In the Color list, select the color that you want to
use for the font. To modify the color, click More. To
change the font, click Selector. For more
information about the Selector, see Selecting a style
on page 354 .
4. Under Placement, click to select the position of the
legend in reference to the chart or drag the legend
into position.
5. Click OK.
Opening the X-axis or Y-axis
Properties dialog box
345

Geomatica® Focus
The labels identify the values along the x-axis and y-axis.
1. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Selection Tool
button.
2. Click either the axis, the axis heading, or the axis
values.
3. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Properties
button.
Customizing the axis heading
1. On the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box,
click the Labels tab.
2. In the Axis heading box, type a word or phrase that
you want to display along the axis of the chart.
3. In the Size list, type or select the size of the font
used for the axis heading.
4. In the Color list, select the color that you want to
use for the font. To modify the color, click More. To
change the font, click Selector. For more
information about the Selector, see Selecting a style
on page 354 .
5. In the Angle box, type a value between +90
degrees and -90 degrees representing the rotation
that you want to apply to the axis heading. In the list
select the unit of angular measurement.
6. To keep the characters in the heading parallel to the
x-axis, select Keep characters horizontal.
7. Click OK.
Customizing the axis tick labels
1. On the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box,
click the Labels tab.
2. To display labels for the ticks along the axis, click to
select Show Values.
3. In the Field list (if available), select the field that you
want to use to identify the ticks on the x-axis.
Choose the field that most clearly describes the
records used in the chart. For more information, see
About the category field on page 342 .
4. In the Size list, type or select the size of the font
used for the labels.
5. In the Color list, select the color that you want to
use for the font. To modify the color, click More. To
change the font, click Selector. For more
information about the Selector, see Selecting a style
on page 354 .
6. In the Angle box, type the value representing the
counterclockwise rotation that you want to apply to
the label. In the list select the unit of angular
measurement.
7. Click OK.
Opening the X-axis or Y-axis
Properties dialog box
Dividers are used to mark the axis values.
1. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Selection Tool
button.
2. Click either the axis, the axis heading, or the axis
values.k
3. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Properties
button.
PCI Geomatics
346

Geomatica® Focus
Displaying grid lines along the axis
1. On the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box,
click the Dividers tab.
2. Select Gridlines.
3. To change the look of the line, select a style in the
Style box. If you want to create a style, click Style
Selector in the list (see Selecting a style on page 354
).
4. Click Apply.
Displaying ticks
1. On the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box,
click the Dividers tab.
2. To display the ticks on the background, select
Inside ticks.
3. To display the ticks on the axis but not on the
background, select Outside ticks.
4. Click Apply.
Opening the Title or Subtitle
Properties dialog box
You can design and position your title or subtitle in Title
or Subtitle Properties dialog boxes or you can modify
them directly in the Chart Viewer. As you make changes
in the Chart Viewer, Focus updates the Title or Subtitle
Properties dialog boxes.
1. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Selection Tool
PCI Geomatics
button.
2. Click the title or subtitle.
3. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Properties
button.
Customizing the title or subtitle of the
chart
1. In the Title box, type a word or phrase that you
want as a title or subtitle for your chart.
2. In the Size list, type or select the size of the font.
3. In the Color list, select the color that you want to
use for the font. To modify the color, click More. To
change the font, click Selector. For more
information about the Selector, see Selecting a style
on page 354 .
4. Under Placement, click to select the position of the
title or subtitle in reference to the chart. To place the
it manually in the viewer, drag the title or subtitle
where you want it. The setting under Placement will
automatically change to Custom.
5. Click OK.
Opening the data labels properties
In the chart, the data is represented by a graphic such as
a column or a line. In some cases it may be useful to
label the graphic with one or several attribute values from
the record. These labels that appear on the data in the
chart are called data labels.
To display the data labels on the chart, see Designing the
chart surround on page 341 .
347

Geomatica® Focus
1. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Selection Tool
button.
2. Click a data label.
3. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Properties
button.
Customizing the data labels
1. If you want to include the description from the
legend in the label, select the Legend items box.
2. If you want to include the x-axis values in the label,
select the X-data values box.
3. If you want to include the y-axis values in the label,
select Y-data values box.
4. If you want to display the percent value of the data,
select the Percentages box (only available for
100% Stacked Column, 100% Stacked Bar, 100%
Stacked Line, 100% Stacked Area, and Pie charts).
5. If you want to draw lines from the percent values to
the corresponding data, select Show leader lines
(only available for 100% Stacked Column, 100%
Stacked Bar, 100% Stacked Line, 100% Stacked
Area, and Pie charts).
6. In the Size list, type or select the size of the font
used for the labels.
7. In the Color list, select the color that you want to
use for the font. To modify the color, click More. To
change the font, click Selector. For more
information about the Selector, see Selecting a style
on page 354 .
8. Click OK.
Saving a chart
PCI Geomatics
Charts are kept in memory as long as the project remains
open, even if you close the Chart viewer. You can reopen
an existing chart by using the Chart Manager (see
Opening or deleting a chart on page 348 ).
The settings for each chart that you create while the
project is open are saved in the project file (.gpr) when
you save the project. The data itself, however, is not
saved with the chart. The chart only contains a reference
to the data. If you make changes to the layer#s attributes,
the chart will reflect the changes in the data the next time
you open it, but the design of the chart will remain
unchanged. If you close the project without saving it, the
charts in memory are discarded along with any other
changes in the project file.
You can also export your chart as a graphic in one of
several file formats. For more information, see Opening
the Export Map dialog box on page 407 .
Opening and deleting a chart
The settings for the charts that you create while the
project is open are kept in memory as long as the project
remains open, even if you close the Chart viewer. By
default the charts are listed in the Chart Manager in the
order that they were created.
When you save the project, only the settings for each
chart are saved in the project file (.gpr), not the data
itself. The chart only contains a reference to the data. If
you make changes to the layer#s attributes, the chart will
reflect the changes in the data the next time you open it,
348

Geomatica® Focus
but the design of the chart will remain unchanged. If you
close the project without saving it, the charts in memory
are deleted along with any other changes in the project
file.
To display an existing chart
1. In the main menu of the Attribute Manager (see
Performing tasks in the Attribute Manager on page
304 ), click Tools.
You can also click Layer in the main menu.
2. Click Charts, and then click Manage.
3. Click the chart that you want to see.
4. Click the View button.
5. Click Close.
To sort the list in ascending or descending order
1. In the Chart Manager, click any of the table
headings.
To delete a chart
1. In the main menu of the Attribute Manager (see
Performing tasks in the Attribute Manager on page
304 ), click Tools.
or
In the Focus main menu, click Layer.
2. Click Charts, and then click Manage.
PCI Geomatics
3. Click the chart that you want to delete.
4. Click the Delete button.
5. Click Close.
Digitizing vectors with peripheral
devices
Focus allows you to connect and use digitizing tablets
and GPS tools to create new data.
You can use a GPS tool to provide two services within
the Focus environment: you can update the position of
the cursor within an Area and you can use it as a data
input device for a vector layer. In either case, you must
have an Area layer that contains the appropriate
georeferencing information and you must have a working
connection between your computer and your GPS
receiver. (See Setting up a GPS receiver on page 111 )
When a digitizing tablet is connected to the computer,
you can digitize features from a paper map and use the
resulting vector data in your projects. A digitizing tablet
consists of a electronic platform (a tablet) and a pointing
device (a puck). To set up the tablet to work with Focus,
see Setting up a digitizing tablet using Wintab on page
110 .
Registering a digitizing tablet
Once you connect a digitizing tablet to the computer and
tape the map to the tablet, you are ready to register a
map. Registering the map means that you establish a
reference frame between the tablet, the paper map, and
349

Geomatica® Focus
your project.
The reference frame is established by collecting points on
the tablet and collecting the same points in the view pane
so that Focus can correlate the positions. You can collect
the points on each of the four corners of the map or on
easily identified features as long as the points are well
distributed over the map.
With a minimum of four points, Focus can estimate the
difference between the coordinates that you entered in
the view pane and the coordinates from the tablet. The
difference, called an error estimate, reflects the accuracy
of the registration between the tablet and Focus.
1. From the Maps tree, click a layer.
2. From the Tools menu, click Digitizing Tablet and
then click Register.
3. In the Register Tablet dialog box, click one of the
following buttons:
• Active Area: uses the same georeferencing
as the one defined in New Area
• Active Layer: uses the same georeferencing
as one defined in the current layer
4. In the Tie Coordinate Type list box, choose one of
the following options:
• Geocoded: enters the coordinates in
georeferenced units
• Geographic: uses Longitude/Latitude units
5. On the tablet, move the crosshairs of the puck to a
feature and press the button to transfer the tablet
coordinates to the Tie-Down table.
6. In the Register Tablet dialog box, type the
coordinates of the same feature in the Tie
Coordinate X and Tie Coordinate Y columns, or
PCI Geomatics
you can click to select the feature in the view pane
and press Enter to transfer the coordinates to the
Tie-Down table.
7. Repeat step 5 and step 6 to complete the
registration.
If you want to add more points to the table, click the
Add button. To remove a point from the table, click
the point, and click the Remove button. To remove
all the points in the table, click Clear All.
8. Click OK.
Importing and exporting tablet
registration
Once you register the map on the tablet, you can save
the registration. The registration remains valid as long as
the map is not moved or removed from the tablet. (See
Registering a digitizing tablet on page 349 )
To export a registration
• From the Register Tablet dialog box, click Export.
To import a registration
• From the Register Tablet dialog box, click Import.
Using a digitizing tablet
Once you register the map on the tablet, you can use the
puck to digitize features from the map. (See Registering a
350

Geomatica® Focus
digitizing tablet on page 349 )
You can assign the puck buttons to perform a variety of
actions. (See Assigning text actions and modifiers on
page 111 )
You can use the puck with the following tools:
• Adding points to an active layer on page 303
• Selecting a single shape on page 321
• Editing vectors using the vector editing tools on
page 323
To start digitizing
1. From the Maps tree, click the layer that you want to
contain the vectors.
2. From the Tools menu, click Digitizing Tablet and
then click Start Digitizing.
3. Click the tool that you want to use or press the puck
button assigned to the action that you want to
perform.
For example, if you want to digitize a line, you can
click Line in the New Shapes list on the toolbar or
click the puck button that you assigned to NewLine.
4. Use the puck to perform the action that you want.
For example, use the puck to digitize a road on the
map.
To stop digitizing
• From the Tools menu, click Digitizing Tablet and
then click Stop Digitizing.
PCI Geomatics
Using the GPS tool
Before a GPS tool can be accessed, a connection must
be set. A GPS receiver connection is made through the
Focus Options dialog box.
With a Focus Area open and the GPS receiver
connection set, a GPS tool can be used. The GPS tool is
launched through the GPS Tool dialog box.
1. Ensure a GPS connection has been established.
2. Open an Area containing appropriate
georeferencing information.
The Area georeferencing bounds should correspond
to the area where a GPS receiver is located. If a
GPS receiver is outside of these bounds you cannot
update the cursor or collect vectors. In such a case,
the vector segment ends and a new segment must
be started.
3. From the Tools menu, click GPS Tool.
When the GPS tool is active, you can update the view
pane cursor position or add vector data to an Area in a
project.
Inputting vector point data using a
GPS receiver
1. Ensure a GPS connection has been established.
2. From the Maps tree, right-click the Area and click
New Vector Layer.
351

Geomatica® Focus
3. In the New Vector Layer dialog box, enable the
Point option and click OK.
4. In the Maps tree, select the new point layer.
5. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow
and choose Points.
6. From the Tools menu, click GPS Tool.
7. In the GPS Tool dialog box, click one of the
following buttons:
• Capture Stream: updates the new point layer
with a point determined by the location of the
GPS receiver
• Capture Point: adds new points to the vector
layer at a specified stream interval. You can
continue to collect points by repeatedly
clicking the button.
8. Click Finish.
Inputting vector line or polygon data
using the GPS receiver
1. Ensure the GPS Tool dialog box is open.
2. From the Maps tree, right-click the Area layer and
click New Vector Layer.
3. In the New Vector Layer dialog box, enable one of
the following options in the Layer Type area:
• Line
• Topological Line
• Polygon
• Topological Polygon
4. Click OK.
5. In the Maps tree, select the new layer.
6. In the GPS Tool dialog box, click one of the
following buttons:
PCI Geomatics
• Capture Stream: adds a new vertex to the
vector layer at the specified stream interval.
New vertices are added to the line or polygon
until you click Finish.
• Capture Point: adds only the initial vertex to
the line or polygon layer. You can continue to
collect vertices for the line or polygon with
each click of the button.
Understanding representation
Representation determines the appearance of shapes.
Focus applies a default representation to shapes on a
vector layer that is not linked to a Representation Style
Table (RST). You can continue using the default, create a
new RST, or import an existing RST.
An RST is a look-up table (LUT) that contains a key and
the style associated to that key. The key or the style can
also be referred to as a REPCode. The key links the style
in the RST to the shape on the layer. Each layer can link
to only one RST, but you can link an RST to many layers.
Keys can be added as attributes for shapes, such as in
the REPCode field, or you can use an existing attribute
as the key. When an RST is linked to a layer, Focus
identifies the attributes used as keys in the layer and
searches for the corresponding keys in the RST. When a
match is found, the associated style is applied to the
shape in the layer.
For example, you can associate an RST to the attributes
in a field called roadtype. In the roadtype field, you have
a variety of road types such as interstates, highways, and
streets. In the RST, the key is the road type with which
352

Geomatica® Focus
you have styles associated. When a layer is linked to the
RST, the shapes are assigned the style according to their
key.
A style is composed of one or more parts. Each part has
a primitive with a priority. Primitives are the building
blocks of the style. Each primitive is based on a point,
line, or polygon pattern that is designed according to a
number of parameters, such as color. The priority
determines which part is placed in front of the other parts
in the style. You can control the order by assigning the
part a priority number. Parts with a higher number appear
in front of parts with lower numbered priority.
Types of representation style tables
Focus uses three types of RSTs: Default, Direct, and
Indirect.
Default RST:
Is controlled by Focus and is applied to vector layers in
the absence of any other RST.
Direct RSTs:
Is also called Embedded Representation, because the
style is contained in a layer itself. You can create a Direct
RST when you change the appearance of the shapes
directly in the view pane using tools in the Display
toolbar. Direct RSTs are only available for .pix vector
layers.
When you change the appearance of shapes in the view
pane, Focus creates an RST using the ShapeIds as the
keys. The Direct RST is saved directly in a .pix file.
Indirect RST:
Is a separate file (.rst) that contains an RST. You can link
an Indirect RST to one or more layers. In previous
versions of Focus, the Indirect RST could also have a
.gtd extension. The .gtd file is still compatible and can be
edited and resaved as a .gtd file. You can also convert an
Indirect RST into a Direct RST by embedding it in the
layer through its Properties dialog box.
You can build an Indirect RST as System-linked or
User-linked.
System-linked RST:
Is based on an attribute in a layer. To generate the RST,
select an attribute from the layer to become the key;
Focus creates styles for each key based on the style that
you design. Focus automatically links the System-linked
RST through the key.
User-linked RST:
Often called a master RST, is built independently from a
layer. To build the RST, you define the keys and
manually create styles associated to the keys. Once you
build the RST, you link the layers to the RST. The keys in
the RST can match an existing attribute in the layer or
you can add the keys in a field in the layer.
PCI Geomatics
353

Geomatica® Focus
Generating an indirect representation
style table
To generate a System-linked RST, you select an attribute
from the layer to become the key, and Focus creates
styles for each key, based on the style that you design.
Focus automatically links the System-linked RST through
the key.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click
Representation Editor.
2. Choose an attribute that you want associated with a
style from the Attribute list box.
3. Click the Generating tab and choose one of the
following options from the Method list box
• Unique Values: assigns a style to each shape
according to its value. Each value receives its
own style.
• Ranged Values: assigns a style to all the
shapes within a range of numeric values. Each
range receives its own style. Choose the type
of range that you want to use from the Type
list. Shapes containing a NoData value are
displayed using the Default RST. Enter a
number of ranges by which you want to divide
the values in the Number of classes spin box.
• The minimum and maximum values for the
attribute automatically display. If you want to
restrict the range available for division, enter a
minimum and maximum values in the Min and
Max spin boxes.
4. Enable one of the following options:
• Copy styles from: uses existing styles as the
PCI Geomatics
basis for the representation. Choose an RST
from the File list box.
• Generate new styles # creates new styles.
Choose a style from the Based on list box.
For more information about defining a new
style, see Selecting a style on page 354 .
• If you want to assign various colors to the
styles, enable the Vary color check box and
choose a color scheme.
• If you want to assign various sizes to the
points or lines, enable the Vary size check
box. Enter the size in the From and By spin
boxes. By default, the units is in millimeters.
5. Click Update Styles.
6. Click OK.
Editing the representation styles
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click
Representation Editor.
2. Under the Style column, select a style.
3. Click the Edit Style tab.
4. Make changes to the color and outline width of the
style. (See Changing style appearance on page 355 )
5. Make any changes to the parts of the style. (See
Changing style parts on page 355 )
Selecting a style
1. From the Files list in the Style Selector dialog box,
select a representation.
If a file is not available, click Browse and select a
354

Geomatica® Focus
file.
2. Click a tab containing the style type that you want.
3. Select a style.
4. Click More.
5. Make any changes to the color and outline width of
the style. (See Changing style appearance on page 355
)
6. Make any changes to the parts of the style. (See
Changing style parts on page 355 )
7. Click OK.
Changing style appearance
1. From the Style Selector dialog box, click Simple.
2. Click the Color arrow next to the part you want to
change and choose a color from the palette.
3. For the following elements, do the following:
• Points: enter the factor that you want to use in
the Scale box. Scale increases the proportion
of the original symbol.
• Lines: enter a thickness and choose a unit of
measurement from the Width list box.
• Polygons: enter a thickness and choose a
unit of measurement from the Outline Width
list box.
• Text: enter a font size and choose a unit of
measurement from the Size list box.
4. Click OK.
Changing style parts
1. From the Style Selector dialog box, click
PCI Geomatics
Advanced.
2. Choose a part that you want to change from the
Part list.
If you want to add or remove a part, click the Add or
Remove button.
3. Enter a number that determines the priority order of
the part from the Priority spin box. The highest
number appears in front.
4. Choose a type from the Primitive list box. Each
Primitive type contains a list of parameters.
5. For each parameter, change any changes to values
in the Values column.
6. Click OK.
Using an attribute as part of the style
An attribute is usually selected from a layer to become
the key, and Focus creates styles for each key based on
the style that you design. You can, however, use other
attributes from a layer to be part of the style for the
shapes.
To use an attribute as part of the style, you must create a
multi-part style (see Editing the representation styles on
page 354 ). You assign one of the parts of the style to an
attribute through the Advanced Attributes dialog box.
1. Create a multi-part style.
2. From the Style Selector dialog box, choose a part
from the Part list box.
3. Choose Vector - Text from the Primitive list box.
4. Set any other parameters.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Representation Editor dialog box, click
355

Geomatica® Focus
Advanced Attributes.
7. In the Text Attribute list, select a field containing
the text that you want to incorporate into the style.
8. Click OK.
Opening the Set Style Attribute dialog
box
1. Use a Selection tool to select a shape.
2. From the Edit menu, click Set Style Attribute.
3. Click a style.
4. Click OK.
Setting the style attribute
1. In the Set Style Attribute box, type the code or
name of the style.
2. Click the Find First button.
3. If the result is not the style that you are looking for,
click Find Next until you find the style.
4. To limit the styles to a particular type, choose a type
in the Graphical Representation list.
5. When the style is selected, click OK.
Selecting a symbol
1. From the Symbol Selector dialog box, choose a
symbol file from the Files list box.
2. In the gallery, select a symbol.
If you want to preview the symbol and the preview
window is not displayed, click More.
PCI Geomatics
3. Click OK.
Labelling shapes
A label is a string of characters placed in close proximity
to a shape. You can use labels to display information
about the shapes and clarify the subject of the layer. The
Label Tool uses an attribute from the layer as a label for
the shape. You can create labels for vector, grayscale,
and pseudocolor layers that contain attributes.
Because the automatic placement of labels may be
inadequate, you can make individual changes to the
labels by using the Selection Tools in the Editing toolbar.
You can change the style of the labels individually using
the tools in the Display toolbar. Any changes to the
characters used in the label are updated automatically in
the view pane and the Attribute table.
If you make specific changes to individual labels with the
Selection Tools or the Display tools and then use the
Label Tool for more changes, specific changes may be
replaced by the options set in the Label Tool.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click
Properties.
2. In the Properties dialog box, click the Labels tab.
3. See Managing the labels on page 356 .
Managing the labels
The Label tab on the layer#s Properties dialog box
contains the label sets associated with that layer. For
more information about labels see Labelling Shapes on
356

Geomatica® Focus
page 356 and Managing data properties on page 35 .
If you are making modifications to individual labels with
the intention of printing a map, switch Focus to Map View
mode before beginning your edits. To switch to Map View
mode, in the main menu click View and then Map View
Mode.
1. To display the labels in the View Pane, click in the
Visible column beside the label set that you want to
show. To hide the labels, click to clear the check
mark.
2. To make the labels selectable in the View Pane,
click in the Selectable column beside the label set
that you want.
3. To add a new label set, click Add New. For more
information, see Adding labels to a layer on page 357
.
4. To modify existing labels, click Modify. For more
information, see Changing labels on page 357 .
5. To remove a label set, select the layer under Label
Name and click Delete.
6. Click OK.
Adding labels to a layer
1. From the Properties dialog box, click the Label tab
and click Add New.
2. Set options for the labels. (See Defining the design
and layout for labels on page 358 )
3. Design the look for the labels. (See Setting label
representation on page 357 )
4. Click OK.
PCI Geomatics
Setting label representation
Representation controls the appearance of all labels on a
layer.
1. From the Label Tool dialog box, click the Style
button and create a style for the text (see Selecting
a style on page 354 ).
2. In the Color box, you can change the color of the
font that you selected in the Style Selector.
3. In the Size box, you can change the size of the font
and select the unit of measure that you want.
4. Click OK.
Changing labels
If you are making modifications to individual labels with
the intention of printing a map, switch the Focus view
pane to Map View mode by clicking the Map View Mode
button before begining your edits.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click
Properties.
2. From the Properties dialog box, click the Labels
tab.
3. Select the label you want to change and click
Modify.
If you want to change the representation for the
labels, see Setting label representation on page 357
.
If you want to change the options for the labels, see
Defining the design and layout for labels on page 358
357

Geomatica® Focus
.
4. Click OK.
Defining the design and layout for
labels
The Label Tool provides the general look and layout for
labels. It also follows some of the formatting options
determined for the field in the Attribute Manager. For
example, if the field in the attribute table used for the
labels is defined as having two decimal places, the labels
will have two decimal places.
You can make individual changes to the labels by using
the Selection Tools in the Editing toolbar. You can
change the style of the labels individually using the tools
in the Display toolbar.
If you are making modifications to individual labels with
the intention of printing a map, switch the focus view
pane to Map View mode by clicking the Map View Mode
button before begining your edits.
The layer type determines which options are available for
labels. For example, an unstructured layer can contain
points, lines, and polygons, and all options are available.
See also:
Defining which attribute to use for the label on page 358
Setting the position for point layer labels on page 359
PCI Geomatics
Setting the position for line layer labels on page 359
Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels on
page 360
Defining which attribute to use for the
label
1. From the Label Tool dialog box, click the General
tab.
2. Choose an attribute from the Attribute list box.
3. Type a name for the labels in the Label set name
box.
4. To label only the shapes that you have selected in
the layer, select Label selected shapes only.
Clear the check mark to label all the shapes in the
layer.
5. To clear existing labels and relabel the shapes in
the layer, select Overwrite existing labels. Clear
the check mark to label only the unlabelled shapes.
If you selected Label selected shapes only in the
previous step, only the shapes that you have
selected are relabeled.
6. To display #NoData# as a label for records
containing null values or lacking data, select
Include NoData. Clear the check mark to hide the
NoData labels.
7. Click OK.
See also
Setting label representation on page 357
358

Geomatica® Focus
Setting the position for point layer labels on page 359
Setting the position for line layer labels on page 359
Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels on
page 360
Setting the position for point layer
labels
The Offset determines the location of the label's anchor
relative to the point, not the alignment of the label's text
relative to the label's anchor. To change the alignment of
the text, change its style (see Setting label representation
on page 357 ).
1. In the Label Tool dialog box, click the Point
Options tab.
2. In the Vertical list, type or select the value
representing the vertical position of the label relative
to the point. In the list, select the measurement unit.
3. In the Horizontal list, type or select the value
representing the horizontal position of the label
relative to the point.
4. Select Keep equal to keep the vertical and
horizontal offset the same distance. Clear the check
mark to keep the offsets independent of each other.
See also
Setting label representation on page 357
Defining which attribute to use for the label on page 358
PCI Geomatics
Setting the position for line layer labels on page 359
Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels on
page 360
Setting the position for line layer
labels
The Position and Offset determine the location of the
label's anchor relative to the line, not the alignment of the
label's text relative to the label's anchor. To change the
alignment of the text, change its style (see Setting label
representation on page 357 ).
1. In the Label Tool dialog box, click the Line
Options tab.
2. Under Vertical in the Position list, select whether
you want the label to appear above or below the
line.
3. In the Offset list, type or select the value
representing the space between the line and the
label. In the list, select the measurement unit.
4. Under Horizontal in the Position list, select
whether you want the label to appear to the left,
right, or in the middle of the line.
5. In the Offset list, type or select a value to adjust the
position of the label. In the list, select the
measurement unit.
See also
Setting label representation on page 357
359

Geomatica® Focus
Defining which attribute to use for the label on page 358
Setting the position for point layer labels on page 359
Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels on
page 360
Setting the position for polygon and
raster layer labels
The Offset determines the location of the label's anchor
relative to the centroid, not the alignment of the label's
text relative to the label's anchor. To change the
alignment of the text, change its style (see Setting label
representation on page 357 ).
1. In the Label Tool dialog box, click the Area
Options tab.
2. In the Vertical list, type or select the value
representing the vertical offset of the label relative
to the centroid of the area. In the list, select the
measurement unit.
3. In the Horizontal list, type or select the value
representing the horizontal offset of the label
relative to the centroid of the area.
4. Select Keep equal to keep the vertical and
horizontal offset the same distance. Clear the check
mark to keep the offsets independent of each other.
See also:
Setting label representation on page 357
Defining which attribute to use for the label on page 358
Setting the position for point layer labels on page 359
Setting the position for line layer labels on page 359
Designing a symbol
The Symbol Editor contains tools to create or edit
symbols. A symbol is composed of one or more parts. A
symbol can be a single design or a compilation of
overlapping designs and are stored in files with a .sym
extension. Symbol files can be used in one or more
RSTs.
See also:
Understanding the symbol working area on page 360
Creating a symbol on page 361
Creating a multi-part symbol on page 361
Selecting a symbol from the symbol file on page 362
Setting symbol representation on page 362
Editing the symbol RST on page 362
Understanding the symbol working
area
PCI Geomatics
360

Geomatica® Focus
The working area of the Symbol Editor equals four units
square in the map. If you draw a symbol that occupies
the whole working area, it will be two units high on the
map. The bounding box is the blue box that appears
inside the working area. This box is one unit square on
the map. The measurement unit is defined in the RST
Properties dialog box.
Creating a symbol
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click
Representation Editor.
2. In the tree, right-click Symbol Files and click
NewSymbol.
3. Double-click NewSymbol.sym.
4. In Symbol Editor, click Symbol and then click
Create Symbol.
5. In the Attributes dialog box, type a number that will
represent the symbol in the New box below Current
SymbolId.
6. Type a label for the symbol in the New box below
Description.
7. Click OK.
8. Draw a symbol. Use the tools explained in Adding
points to an active layer on page 303 , Selecting a
single shape on page 321 , and Editing vectors
using the vector editing tools on page 323 .
9. From the File menu, click Save Symbol.
Creating a multi-part symbol
If you want your symbol to contain different colors, you
PCI Geomatics
must divide your design into parts. Each part of the
symbol contains the design elements of one color. You
can use the Symbol Editor to determine the form and
structure of the symbol, but the parameters of the
symbol, such as color and scale, are determined in the
Representation Editor. (See Editing the representation
styles on page 354 )
You can rename and save a symbol file to a new location
with the symbol file Save As dialog box. To open the
symbol file Save As dialog box, right-click a symbol layer
in the Maps tree and click Save As. (See About the
symbol file Save As dialog box on page 362 )
1. Create a design. (See Designing a symbol on page
360 )
2. From the Symbol menu in the Symbol Editor, click
Duplicate Symbol.
3. In the Attributes dialog box, type a number that will
represent the symbol in the New box below Current
SymbolId.
4. Type a label for the symbol in the New box below
Description.
5. Click OK.
6. Keep the shapes that you want and use the
Selection tools to delete all the other shapes that
are destined for another color.
7. Change the style of the remaining shapes. (See
Setting symbol representation on page 362 )
8. Select the source symbol (See Selecting a symbol
from the symbol file on page 362 ) and repeat for
each part of the symbol.
9. From the File menu, click Save Symbol.
361

Geomatica® Focus
Selecting a symbol from the symbol
file
The Select Symbol dialog box lists all the symbols in the
symbol file. You can select individual symbols from the
symbol file.
1. From the Symbol menu in the Symbol Editor, click
Select Symbol.
2. Click a symbol.
3. Click OK.
Setting symbol representation
1. Use a Selection tool to select a shape.
2. From the Edit menu in the Symbol Editor, click Set
Style Attribute.
3. Click a style.
4. Click OK.
Editing the symbol RST
The Symbol RST controls the width of the lines, the size
of the text, and the font.
• From the Tools menu in the Symbol Editor, click
Edit RST.
If you want to change a style, select it and make
any modifications.
About the symbol file Save As dialog
box
The symbol file Save As panel lets you rename and save
a symbol file in the Maps tree to a new location.
Input
The Input area shows the name and location of the
current symbol file.
Symbols:
Reports the name and location of a symbol file.
Output
Lets you choose a different symbol file, select a format
for the output, and rename a symbol file.
File:
Lets you choose a symbol file from the current data.
Browse:
Opens a File Selector dialog box, where you can select a
different location for the output.
Format:
Lets you select a format for your output.
PCI Geomatics
362

Geomatica® Focus
Description:
Lets you enter a new name for the output symbol file.
PCI Geomatics
363

Geomatica® Focus
PCI Geomatics
364

Geomatica® Focus
Chapter 9
Saving a project file
When you prepare data for a publication, it is
recommended that you organize the information in a
Focus project file. (See Working with project files on page
31 )
• From the File menu, click Save Project.
Renaming a map
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a map and click
Rename.
2. Type a name for the map and press Enter.
Starting a new map
Focus must be in Map View mode in order to work on
Map projects. By default, when you open data files,
Focus is in Area View mode.
1. From the View menu, click Map View Mode.
2. In the Maps tree, click a map element to select and
change it.
If you want to open the Properties dialog box for a
selected item, double-click it in the Maps tree.
You can create a Map by either clicking the New Map
button on the Maps toolbar or by right-clicking the area
under the Maps tree and clicking New Map.
When you create a new Map, Focus automatically places
an empty frame in the view pane that represents the
paper on which the Map is printed. Maps have several
properties that you can change with the Map Properties
dialog box.
Working with map properties
• From the Maps tree, right-click a map and click
Properties.
You can change the Map description by typing in the
Name box. When you click Apply, the text appears in the
Maps tree as the Map name.
You can name Maps, Areas, and layers the same way
you would rename a file in other Windows applications.
Click the file name in the Maps tree and type a name for
the Map or layer. You can also right-click a file name, and
click Rename.
Changing the paper size by dragging
a resize handle
PCI Geomatics
365

Geomatica® Focus
By default, new Maps have a paper size of 215.9 x 279.4
millimetres (8.5 x 11 inches). You can change the paper
size to several standard sizes in the Map Properties
dialog box. You can also set a custom paper size by
dragging the Map handles in the view pane.
1. On the ViewMap toolbar, click the Map View
button.
2. In the Maps tree, select a Map.
3. In the view pane, drag a resize handle.
Drag a map handle in the view pane to resize a map
sheet.
Changing the paper size from the Map
Properties dialog box
1. Double-click a Map.
2. In the Map Properties dialog box, click the Page
Setup tab.
3. Enable an orientation option.
4. Select a standard paper size from the Page Size list
box.
If you want to use a custom paper size, choose
Custom and enter the dimensions in the Width and
Height spin boxes. Choose a unit of measurement
from the list box.
5. Click OK.
Working with areas
Areas hold the file boundaries for image (raster) and
vector layers. They can contain several layers for the
same geographical region, and you can have as many
Areas in a project as you want. Each Area has a unique
georeferencing system. When you add a layer, it is
automatically georeferenced and scaled to the Area.
You can add an Area to a Map and place layers within it.
The new layers hold vector and raster data, such as
polygons, points, and segments that you need for the
Map. Surrounds and indices are held in similar areas, but
you can work with these elements independently. (See
Working with surrounds on page 371 )
You can adjust the bounds of an Area independently from
a Map. When you add an Area, files are shown below the
Map in the Maps tree. Vector and raster layers contained
within the Area are shown below it. If you resize or move
an Area so that part of it lies outside the extents of the
Map (paper), the Area appears red in the Maps tree.
• From the Maps tree, right-click a Map and click
New Area.
PCI Geomatics
366

Geomatica® Focus
Scaling an area
In cartography, scale is the ratio of the distance between
two points on a Map, and the actual distance between the
same two points on the Earth#s surface.
Scales can be represented as a
• Ratio or representative fraction (RF), such as
1:50,000 or 1/50,000, which means that one unit of
measurement on the Map equals 50,000 of the
same units on the Earth's surface.
• Graphic scale, usually a straight line on which
distances (most often in kilometers or miles) have
been marked off.
• Scale statement, such as 1 cm = 100 km. This
scale statement means one centimetre on the Map
represents 100 kilometers on the Earth's surface.
New Areas are automatically scaled to the best fit for the
dimensions of a Map. For example, Focus sets the area
scale for a standard 8.5 x 11 page to a scale factor of
1:20000 by default. A new Area contains no raster or
vector data. When you add new data, Focus
automatically scales it to the area scale.
When Focus is in Map mode, you can click on an area in
the Maps tree. you can modify the area in the view pane
by dragging one of the eight handles in the viewer.
Note: With an area, the middle handles crop the image.
The corner handles rescale it.
PCI Geomatics
Use the area handles in the view pane to rescale, crop,
or enlarge an Area.
1. From the Maps tree, double-click an Area.
2. In the Area Properties dialog box, click the
General tab.
3. Choose a scale from the Scale list box.
If you want to create a different scale, choose
Custom and enter a value in the Scale box.
4. Click OK.
When you change the scale in the Area or Math Model
Area Properties dialog boxes, it becomes the scale for all
new layers added to that Area.
Rescaling an area
When you rescale data in the view pane, you extend or
compress both the horizontal and vertical planes of the
data. The aspect ratio stays the same. All features in a
selected Area are enlarged or reduced by a factor
corresponding to the ratio of rescaling. You can change
the Scale Factor.
367

Geomatica® Focus
You can perform rescaling operations in both Map or
Area view mode.
1. Ensure Focus is in Map view mode.
2. In in the Maps tree, select an Area.
3. Drag a corner of the Area to a new position.
georeferencing information.
Understanding Areas
Note: Surround areas can be resized and rescaled.
However, scale bars and neatline will not be affected by
rescaling.
The paper range and the scale factor are adjusted
automatically when you rescale a selected area, but the
georeferenced information remains the same. To view
the new scale values, open the Area Properties dialog
box.
The paper range and the geographic range are adjusted
automatically when you resize a selected area but the
appearance of the existing layers does not change.
Setting area properties
An Area is a rectangular frame that holds layers of data
and serves as a window into a location on the Earth. Its
properties determine how the layers of data are
displayed.
The features available on the Layout tab on the Area
Properties dialog box determine the position of the Area
on the Map. The Map represents the sheet of paper on
which the project is printed. You can have several Areas
on a Map and each Area retains its own projection and
• From the Maps tree, right-click a New Area and
click Properties.
Setting area properties
1. From the Area Properties dialog box, click the
General tab.
PCI Geomatics
368

Geomatica® Focus
2. Type a name for the Area in the Name box.
If you want to have a border around the Area,
enable the Show Outline check box.
3. Choose a scale to determine the ratio of the
distance between two points from the Scale list box.
If you want to use a custom scale, choose Custom
and type the ratio value. (See also Scaling an area
on page 367 )
4. Click the Layout tab.
5. Enter a value used to rescale the representation
displayed on the Map in the Scale Factor spin box.
For example, if the symbol is 1 millimeter wide, a
scale factor of 5 will display the symbol as 5
millimeters wide on the Map.
6. Enter a value representing the priority of the Area
relative to other Areas in the Priority spin box.
Areas with higher priority levels (larger numbers)
mask overlapping Areas with lower priorities. (See
Changing the layer priority on page 28 )
7. In the Position area, enter a value representing the
horizontal distance from the left edge of the Map in
the Left spin box and choose a unit of
measurement for the position and size.
8. Enter a value representing the vertical distance from
the bottom edge of the Map in the Bottom box.
9. In the Size area, enter a value for the Area as it
appears on the Map in the Width and Height spin
boxes.
If you want to automatically adjust the extents of the
Area to accommodate the data, enable the
PCI Geomatics
Automatic Resize check box.
10. Click the Projection/Extents tab.
11. Enable one of the following options in the Bounds
list box:
• Geocoded: displays the bounds in
georeferenced units
• Geographic: displays Longitude/Latitude units
12. Enter the coordinates of the upper-left corner and
lower-right corner of the Area in the appropriate
boxes.
13. Enter a value for an angle of rotation in the
Rotation box and choose a unit of measurement.
If you want to limit processes to a subset of the
data, click Define Clip Region. Enable the Enable
check box to activate the clip region.
14. Click OK.
Opening the Math Model Area
Properties dialog box
A Math Model Area is similar to an Area, except the
projection is determined by a math model segment
contained in the image file. A Math Model Area is a
rectangular frame that holds a layer containing a raw
image displayed without correction, but accurate ground
coordinates are calculated for each pixel using the pixel
and line coordinates, the math model, and the digital
elevation model (DEM) or an approximate elevation value
that you provide. For more information, see Using a math
model with images on page 40 .
You cannot open other images in a Math Model Area,
369

Geomatica® Focus
because the math model is computed for a specific
image. You can, however, add geocoded vector layers to
the Math Model Area. Due to the special nature of a Math
Model Area, surround elements, such as grids and north
arrows are disabled, and the extents are determined by
the file.
• From the Maps tree, right-click a Math Model Area
and click Properties.
Setting Math Model Area properties
A Math Model Area is similar to an Area, except the
projection is determined by a math model segment
contained in the image file. A Math Model Area is a
rectangular frame that holds a layer containing a raw
image displayed without correction, but accurate ground
coordinates are calculated for each pixel using the pixel
and line coordinates, the math model, and the digital
elevation model (DEM) or an approximate elevation value
that you provide. For more information, see Using a math
model with images on page 40 .
1. From the Math Model Area Properties dialog box,
click the General tab.
2. Type a name for the Math Model Area in the Name
box.
If you want to have a border around the Math Model
Area, enable the Show Outline check box.
3. Choose a scale to determine the ratio of the
distance between two points in the Math Model
Area from the Scale list box.
PCI Geomatics
If you want to use a custom scale, choose Custom
and type a value ratio. (See also Scaling an area on
page 367 )
4. Click the Layout tab.
5. Enter a value used to rescale the representation
displayed on the Map in the Scale Factor spin box.
For example, if the symbol is 1 millimeter wide, a
scale factor of 5 will display the symbol as 5
millimeters wide on the Map.
6. Enter a value representing the priority of the Math
Model Area relative to other Areas in the Priority
spin box.
Areas with higher priority levels (larger numbers)
mask overlapping Areas with lower priorities. (See
Changing the layer priority on page 28 )
7. In the Position area, enter a value representing the
horizontal distance from the left edge of the Map in
the Left spin box and choose a unit of
measurement for the position and size.
8. Enter a value representing the vertical distance from
the bottom edge of the Map in the Bottom box.
9. Click the Projection/Extents tab.
10. Enable one of the following options in the Bounds
list box:
Geocoded: displays the bounds in georeferenced
units
Geographic: displays Longitude/Latitude units
If you want to limit processes to a subset of the
data, click Define Clip Region. Enable the Enable
370

Geomatica® Focus
check box to activate the clip region.
11. Click OK.
Working with surrounds
A surround is a collection of graphical elements that gives
meaning or clarifies the meaning of geographical
information displayed in a Map. It puts the data into
context that can be analysed, organized, and
communicated effectively.
Focus provides the following surround elements:
• Neatline: a visible or invisible line marking the
boundary around the Area beyond which no data is
displayed.
• Border: a decorative frame around the Area. It is
drawn behind the Area and can be used as a
background.
• Grid: a pattern of regularly-spaced lines, usually
used to indicate coordinates or used as dividers.
• Legend: a table listing and describing the symbols
and elements in the Area.
• Picture: a graphic such as an image or logo that
you place on a Map.
• North Arrow: a graphic used to indicate the
direction of True North, Magnetic North, or Grid
North in relation to an Area.
• Scale bar: a graphical representation of the ratio
between a distance in the Area and the actual
distance on the ground.
• Title: a name or phrase given to identify the Area.
• Paragraph: a block of text, such as an explanatory
paragraph, that is placed on the Map.
Surround elements are positioned relative to the neatline
of the Area. If an Area does not contain a neatline, the
positioning is based on the Area extents. Any surround
element, except for the neatline, can appear more than
once in an Area. For example, if you want to show two
different scales in your map, such as one in kilometers
and the other in miles, you can create two scale bars.
You can modify the look of the surround elements and
save those settings as a Quick Style, which can be
applied to the same type of surround element in the
project. For more information, see Selecting an existing
quick style on page 397 .
Creating a surround
The surround elements are displayed in the Maps tree for
the Area to which they are associated. If you place a
surround element so that part of it lies outside the
boundaries of the Map, it appears red in the Maps tree.
For more information about surrounds, see Working with
surrounds on page 371 .
1. From the View menu, click Map View Mode.
2. In the Maps tree, right-click an Area and click
Surround.
3. In the Surround dialog box, click a box next to any
element you want to use in the Map.
A check mark next to an element indicates it is
selected.
4. Choose a style for a selected element from the
Select a QuickStyle list.
PCI Geomatics
371

Geomatica® Focus
If you want to create a new style, click Properties
and follow Creating a custom quick style on page 397
.
5. Click OK.
Setting a default surround element
1. From the Surround dialog box, click a box next to
any element you want to use in the Map.
A check mark next to an element indicates it is
selected.
2. Click Preferred surround.
Setting a default quick style
1. From the Surround dialog box, click a box next to
any element you want to use in the Map.
A check mark next to an element indicates it is
selected.
2. Choose a style for a selected element from the
Select a QuickStyle list.
3. Click Set as Default.
Setting surround element properties
You can change the look and position of a surround
element through the Properties dialog box.
• From the Maps tree, right-click a surround element
PCI Geomatics
and click Properties.
About neatlines
A neatline is a line around an Area that separates data
from the rest of the surround. It is a line marking the
boundary around the Area beyond which no data is
displayed. Unlike the other surround elements, the
neatline can only be used once in each Area. The
neatline also serves as the frame of reference for
positioning other surround elements.
To add a neatline to an Area, see Creating a surround on
page 371 . To open the Neatline Properties dialog box,
see Setting surround element properties on page 372 .
The look of a neatline is determined by its:
• General properties (see Setting the position of a
neatline in relation to an area on page 372 )
• Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395
)
• Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on
page 397 )
Setting the position of a neatline in
relation to an area
A neatline separates data from the rest of the surround.
For more information, see About neatlines on page 372 .
You can set the position of the neatline in relation to the
boundary of the Area or according to specific
measurements.
372

Geomatica® Focus
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a neatline and click
Properties.
2. In the Neatline Properties dialog box, click the
General tab.
3. Click the Style button and create a style for the line
(see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
4. In the Distance From Area area, enter a value
representing the distance from the left neatline to
the Area in the Left spin box and choose a unit of
measurement from the list box.
If you want to keep the distance between the
neatline and the Area the same on all sides, enable
the Keep equal check box and go to step 8.
5. Enter a value representing the distance from the
right neatline to the Area in the Right spin box.
6. Enter a value representing the distance from the top
neatline to the Area in the Top spin box.
7. Enter a value representing the distance from the
bottom neatline to the Area in the Bottom spin box.
8. Click OK.
Setting specific extents for a neatline
Instead of using the extents of an Area as the basis of a
neatline position, you can define specific coordinates.
The X values are measured from left side of the Map
(paper) and the Y values are measured from the bottom
of the Map.
1. In the Neatline Properties window, click Advanced
(see Setting specific extents for a neatline on page
373 ).
2. In the Neatline Advanced Properties dialog box,
enable one of the following options:
PCI Geomatics
• Paper: bases extents on paper measurements
• Georeferenced: bases extents on a
geographic coordinate system
3. Enter a value measured from the left edge of the
Map to the lower left corner of the neatline in the X
min spin box and choose a unit of measurement
from the list box.
4. Enter a value measured from the left edge of the
Map to the lower right corner of the neatline in the X
max spin box.
5. Enter a value measured from the bottom edge of
the Map to the lower left corner of the neatline in the
Y min spin box.
6. Enter a value measured from the bottom edge of
the Map to the upper left corner of the neatline in
the Y max spin box.
7. Click OK.
About borders
A border is a decorative frame that surrounds a Map. You
can build a border as simple or as complex as you want.
To add a border to an area, see Creating a surround on
page 371 . To open the Border Properties dialog box, see
Setting surround element properties on page 372 .
The look of a border is determined by its:
• General properties (see Changing border style and
proximity to neatline on page 374 )
• Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395
)
• Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on
page 397 )
373

Geomatica® Focus
Changing border style and proximity
to neatline
A border is a decorative frame around a Map. For more
information, see About borders on page 373 . The
position of a border is based on the position of a neatline
or on the Area if the neatline is not set.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a border and click
Properties.
2. In the Border Properties dialog box, click the
General tab.
3. Click the Style button and create a style for the
border (see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
4. In the Distance To Neatline area, enter a value
representing the distance from the left border to the
left neatline (or Area) in the Left spin box and
choose a unit of measurement from the list box.
If you want to keep the distance between the border
and the neatline (or Area) the same on all sides,
enable the Keep equal check box and go to step 8.
5. Enter a value representing the distance from the
right border to the neatline (or Area) in the Right
spin box.
6. Enter a value representing the distance from the top
border to the neatline (or Area) in the Top spin box.
7. Enter a value representing the distance from the
bottom border to the neatline (or Area) in the
Bottom spin box.
8. Click OK.
A grid is an array of regularly-spaced parallel and
perpendicular lines arranged over an Area. Each cell is
used as a reference point for determining locations or
coordinates. For example, they can be used in
conjunction with street indexes.
A grid
A graticule is drawn along latitude and longitude lines or
a representation that relates points in an Area to
locations on the ground.
A georeferenced graticule
About grids
PCI Geomatics
374

Geomatica® Focus
Georeferenced grids are linked to Area data. They can be
used to locate and reference Map features with the Earth
through georeferenced coordinate systems.
Georeferenced grids are not always rectilinear. For
example, latitude/longitude grids have curved grid lines,
while UTM grids have both curved and straight lines.
The position of a grid is based on the position of a
neatline or on an Area if a neatline is not set.
To add a grid to an area, see Creating a surround on
page 371 . You cannot create a grid in a rotated Area
(Raster Up). For more information, see About rotated
rasters on page 34 .
To open the Grid Properties dialog box, see Setting
surround element properties on page 372 .
The look of a grid (or graticule) is determined by its:
• General properties (see Changing grid pacing and
proximity to neatline on page 375 )
• Layout properties (see Changing the style and
layout of the grid on page 376 )
• Headings properties (see Changing the location and
style of the grid headings on page 377 )
• Label properties (see Changing the location and
style of the grid labels on page 377 )
• Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395
)
• Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on
page 397 )
Changing grid pacing and proximity
PCI Geomatics
to neatline
The position of a grid is based on the position of the
neatline or on an Area if the neatline is not set.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a grid and click
Properties.
2. In the Grid Properties dialog box, click the General
tab.
3. In the Distance To Neatline area, enter a value
representing the distance from the left border to the
left neatline (or Area) in the Left spin box and
choose a unit of measurement from the list box.
If you want to keep the distance between the border
and the neatline (or Area) the same on all sides,
enable the Keep equal check box and go to step 7.
4. Enter a value representing the distance from the
right border to the neatline (or Area) in the Right
spin box.
5. Enter a value representing the distance from the top
border to the neatline (or Area) in the Top spin box.
6. Enter a value representing the distance from the
bottom border to the neatline (or Area) in the
Bottom spin box.
7. Enable one of the following options:
Fixed Interval: sets the grid spacing according to a
fixed distance between the lines. Follow step 8 to
step 10.
Fixed count: sets grid line spacing according to a
fixed number of lines. Follow step 11 and step 12.
8. In the Fixed Interval area, enable one of the
375

Geomatica® Focus
following options:
• Paper: bases a grid on paper measurements
• Georeferenced: bases a grid on an Area
projection
• Latitude/Longitude: bases a grid on latitude
and longitude coordinates
9. Enter a value representing the horizontal width of
the column in the Column Width spin box and
choose a unit of measurement from the list box.
10. Enter a value representing the vertical width of the
row in the Row Height spin box.
If you want to keep the column width and row height
the same size, enable the Keep equal check box.
See also
Changing the style and layout of the grid on page 376
Changing the location and style of the grid headings on
page 377
Changing the location and style of the grid labels on page 377
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Changing the style and layout of the
grid
11. In the Fixed Interval area, enter a value
representing the number of columns that you want
to cover the Area in the Column spin box.
12. Enter a value representing the number of rows that
you want to cover the Area in the Row spin box.
If you want to keep the number of columns and
rows the same, enable the Keep equal check box.
13. Click OK.
PCI Geomatics
You can change the look of a grid.
1. In the Grid Properties dialog box, click the Layout
tab.
2. In the Border area, enable the Show border check
box and click the Style button.
3. Create a style for the line (see Selecting a style on
page 354 ).
4. In the Display area, enable one of the following
options:
• Lines: forms the grid using solid lines
• Crosses: displays only parts of the grid where
the lines intersect. Enter a value representing
the measurement for the crosses in the Size
spin box and choose a unit of measurement.
• None: hides the grid lines
5. Click the Style button and create a style for the
376

Geomatica® Focus
lines or crosses (see Selecting a style on page 354
).
6. Click OK.
See also
Changing grid pacing and proximity to neatline on page
375
Changing the location and style of the grid headings on
page 377
Changing the location and style of the grid labels on page 377
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Changing the location and style of the
grid headings
Headings are numbers or letters (or both) positioned on
the edges of the grid that identify the lines or sections on
the grid.
1. In the Grid Properties dialog box, click the
Headings tab.
2. In the Location and Appearance area, enable any
of the check boxes to indicate where you want the
headings to appear.
3. Click the Style button and create a style for the text
(see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
4. Enter a measurement representing the space that
you want between the grid border and the headings
in the Distance from grid spin box.
5. In the Type area, enable one of the following
options:
• Geo style: aligns the headings with the grid
lines.Choose a format representing how you
want the headings to appear in the Format list
box.
• Paper style: center the headings between the
grid lines. Choose an alphabetic or numeric
format from the Rows and Columns list
boxes.
By default, headings are ordered from the top down
and from left to right. If you want to reverse the
order, enable the Reverse check box for the row or
column, or both.
6. Click OK.
See also
Changing grid pacing and proximity to neatline on page
375
Changing the style and layout of the grid on page 376
Changing the location and style of the grid labels on page 377
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Changing the location and style of the
PCI Geomatics
377

Geomatica® Focus
grid labels
Labels are the numbers positioned on the grid lines that
show the Northings and Eastings for a grid. You can
change the look of the numbers and adjust the position of
Northings and Eastings relative to the grid lines.
1. In the Grid Properties dialog box, click the Label
tab.
2. In the Easting Placement area, enable any of the
check boxes to indicate where you want the label to
be positioned in reference to the lines on the X-axis.
UR represents upper right, UL represents upper left,
LR represents lower right, and LL represents lower
left.
3. Enter a value representing the space between the
label and the Y-axis as the label moves along the
X-axis in the Horizontal Offset spin box.
5. In the Northing Placement area, enable any of the
check boxes to indicate where you want the label to
be positioned in reference to the lines on the Y-axis.
UR represents upper right, UL represents upper left,
LR represents lower right, and LL represents lower
left.
6. Enter a value representing the space between the
label and the Y-axis as the label moves along the
X-axis in the Horizontal Offset spin box.
If you want to have both the horizontal offset and
vertical offset the same distance from the lines,
enable the Keep equal check box and skip step 7.
7. Enter a value representing the space between the
label and the X-axis as the label moves along the
Y-axis in the Vertical Offset spin box.
If you want to have both the horizontal offset and
vertical offset the same distance from the lines,
enable the Keep equal check box and skip step 4.
4. Enter a value representing the space between the
label and the X-axis as the label moves along the
Y-axis in the Vertical Offset spin box.
8. In the Appearance area, click the Style button and
create a left-aligned style for the text (see Selecting
a style on page 354 ).
9. Choose a format that represents how you want the
labels to appear from the Format list box.
10. Click OK.
See also
Changing grid pacing and proximity to neatline on page
PCI Geomatics
378

Geomatica® Focus
375
Changing the style and layout of the grid on page 376
Changing the location and style of the grid headings on
page 377
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
About legends
A legend is a list of colors, symbols, and patterns
displayed in an Area with a description or label explaining
what each means. Each color, symbol, and pattern is
represented in the legend by a small sample or example
of itself. The legend is anchored to the neatline or to an
Area if a neatline is not set and is positioned in reference
to that anchor.
Example of a legend
To add a legend to an Area, see Creating a surround on
page 371 . To open the Legend Properties dialog box,
see Setting surround element properties on page 372 .
The look of a legend is determined by its:
PCI Geomatics
379

Geomatica® Focus
• General properties (see Setting the number of
columns and designing a border for a legend on
page 380 )
• Title properties (see Adding a title to the legend on
page 380 )
• Filter properties (see Adding styles to a legend on
page 381 )
• Structure properties (see Organizing sections in a
legend on page 382 andCreating a design for
sections in a legend on page 383 )
• Columns properties (see Organizing legend
columns on page 384 )
• Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395
)
• Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on
page 397 )
Setting the number of columns and
designing a border for a legend
The General properties of a legend control the number of
columns into which it is divided, the alignment of the
columns, and the style of the borders.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a legend and click
Properties.
2. In the Legend Properties dialog box, the General
tab.
3. In the Columns area, enter a value for the number
of columns that you want in the Number of
columns box.
4. Enable one of the following Column alignment
options:
• Top: aligns the columns along their top edges
• Bottom: aligns the columns along their bottom
edges
5. In the Borders area, enable any of the following
check boxes:
• Show legend border: creates a border
around the legend. Click the Style button and
create a style (See Selecting a style on page
354 ).
• Show sample border: draws an outline
around each sample in the legend. Click the
Style button and create a style (see Selecting
a style on page 354 ).
6. Click OK.
See also
Adding a title to the legend on page 380
Adding styles to a legend on page 381
Organizing sections in a legend on page 382
Creating a design for sections in a legend on page 383
Organizing legend columns on page 384
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Adding a title to the legend
A title is the main heading for a legend. It identifies the
PCI Geomatics
380

Geomatica® Focus
information included in the legend. Subtitles inside a
legend are controlled on the Structure tab (See
Organizing sections in a legend on page 382 ).
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the Title
tab.
2. Enable the Show title check box.
3. Type the legend title in the Title box.
4. Click the Style button and create a style (see
Selecting a style on page 354 ).
5. Enable one of the following Title placement
options:
• Top: places the title at the top of the legend
• Bottom: places the title at the bottom of the
legend
6. Enter a value representing the distance between the
title and the legend in the Spacing from columns
spin box and choose a unit of measurement from
the list box.
7. Enable one of the following Alignment options:
• Left: aligns the title along the left edge of the
legend
• Center: centers the title over or under the
legend
• Right: aligns the title along the right edge of
the legend
8. Click OK.
See also
Setting the number of columns and designing a border for
a legend on page 380
Adding styles to a legend on page 381
Organizing sections in a legend on page 382
Creating a design for sections in a legend on page 383
Organizing legend columns on page 384
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Adding styles to a legend
You can make a first draft of the legend in a filter table.
The table contains all layers in an Area. You can select
layer styles or whether you want the legend to contain all
the styles in the Representation Style Table (RST) linked
to the selected layers or only the styles that are used in
the Area. Once you have made an initial selection, you
can refine the legend.
Cells that appear gray under the All Repcode column in
the filter table indicate the layer is not associated to an
indirect RST and cannot be used in the legend. For more
information about RSTs, see Understanding
representation on page 352 .
If a style in the RST contains a text attribute, you can
include it in the legend. The style associated to a text
attribute is represented in the legend by a capital letter T
in the corresponding style. For more information about
text attributes, see Using an attribute as part of the style
on page 355 .
PCI Geomatics
381

Geomatica® Focus
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the
Filter tab.
2. Click a layer in the Generate column.
A check mark indicates a layer is included in the
legend.
3. Click a layer in the All Repcode column that you
want in the legend.
A check mark indicates a layer is included in the
legend.
If you want to include styles associated to the text
attributes in the legend, enable the Add text to RST
hierarchy check box.
4. Click OK.
See also
Organizing sections in a legend
You can refine a legend and design its look. The RST
hierarchy list contains all RSTs associated with layers,
even those not uses in the Area. Items listed in the
Legend hierarchy box appear in the legend.
You can group items under sections and subsections to
make the information more easily found in an Area. In the
following figure, the items are separated in two sections:
Transportation and Sports Facilities. The Sports Facilities
section is divided into two subsections, making it easier
to find the Indoor Pool.
Example of the organization of a legend
Setting the number of columns and designing a border for
a legend on page 380
Adding a title to the legend on page 380
Organizing sections in a legend on page 382
Creating a design for sections in a legend on page 383
Organizing legend columns on page 384
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
PCI Geomatics
382

Geomatica® Focus
To add sections
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the
Structure tab.
2. In the Legend hierarchy list, select the section
under which you want to add a subsection.
3. Click the Add button.
To remove sections
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the
Structure tab.
2. In the Legend hierarchy list, select a section.
3. Click the Remove button.
To move an item to a section
• Drag an item to a section.
To add an item from an RST to a legend
1. In the Legend hierarchy list, select a section.
2. In the RST hierarchy box, select an item.
3. Click the button between the lists. For more
information, see:
• Setting the number of columns and designing
a border for a legend on page 380
• Adding a title to the legend on page 380
• Adding styles to a legend on page 381
• Creating a design for sections in a legend on
page 383
• Organizing legend columns on page 384
PCI Geomatics
• Setting the updating behavior on page 395
• Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Creating a design for sections in a
legend
Once you have decided the groupings that you want in
the legend (see Organizing sections in a legend on page
382 ), you can define the font for the titles and the design
for the delimiters.
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the
Structure tab.
2. Select a section title in the Legend hierarchy box.
The default section titles are Base Section, New
Group, and Default Section.
3. Enable the Show section title check box.
4. Click the Title style button and create a title style
(see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
5. Click the Item text style button and create an item
text style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
6. Click the Delimiter style button and create a
delimiter style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
7. Enable one of the following Sample placement
options to determine which side the samples appear
in the legend:
• Left: places the samples on the left followed
by their descriptions
• Right: places the descriptions followed by
samples on the right
8. Click Advanced and determine the position of
descriptions, the size of samples, the position of
section titles, and the length of delimiters. For more
383

Geomatica® Focus
information, see Customizing a section layout on
page 384 .
If you want to change the selected section or
subsection title, click it and type a new title.
9. Click OK.
See also
Setting the number of columns and designing a border for
a legend on page 380
Adding a title to the legend on page 380
Adding styles to a legend on page 381
Organizing sections in a legend on page 382
Organizing legend columns on page 384
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Customizing a section layout
Using the legend advanced properties, you can
customize the alignment and spacing of the legend titles,
subtitles, and delimiters, and determine the size of the
color, symbol, and pattern samples.
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the
Structure tab and click Advanced.
2. Enable one of the following Description alignment
PCI Geomatics
options:
• Left: aligns the description or label for the
sample to the left
• Right: aligns the description or label to the
right
3. Enter a value that represents the indent between
the left border and the left side of the legend in the
Left spin box and choose a unit of measurement
from the list box.
4. Enter a value that represents the indent between
the right border and the right side of the legend in
the Right spin box.
If you want to have both the left and right sides the
same distance from the border, enable the Keep
equal check box.
5. Enter a value that represents the space between
each item in the list in the Inter-item spacing spin
box.
6. In the Sample size area, enter a value representing
the width and height of the box in the Width and
Height spin boxes.
7. In the Section title area, enable an Alignment
option.
8. Enter a value that represents the spacing above
and below the title in the Above and Below spin
boxes.
9. Enable the Delimiters check box.
10. Enter a value for the Minimum length, Lead, and
Tail spin boxes for the delimiters.
11. Click OK.
Organizing legend columns
384

Geomatica® Focus
You can specify the list item that appears at the top of
each column, customize the width and margins of the
individual columns, and define a style for a border.
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the
Columns tab.
2. Choose the number for the column you want to edit
in the Edit column list box.
3. Choose the legend item that you want listed as the
first item in the selected column in the Select start
item for this column list box.
If you want to reinstate the default, click Reset start
items.
4. Enter a value that represents the width of the
selected column in the Width spin box and choose
a unit of measurement from the list box.
5. If you want all columns to be of equal width, enable
the Keep all columns same width check box.
6. Enter a value that represents the distance between
the left border and the left side of the legend items
in the Left spin box.
7. Enter a value that represents the distance between
the right border and the right side of the legend
items in the Right spin box.
If you want to keep the margin sizes equal, enable
the Keep equal check box.
8. Enable the Show column border check box.
9. Click the Style button and create a style (see
Selecting a style on page 354 ).
10. Click OK.
See also
Setting the number of columns and designing a border for
a legend on page 380
Adding a title to the legend on page 380
Adding styles to a legend on page 381
Organizing sections in a legend on page 382
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Adding a picture to a map
You can add a picture, such as an image, a graphic, or a
logo to a Map. The picture is anchored to the neatline or
to the Area if a neatline is not set and is positioned in
reference to that anchor.
To add a picture to an Area, see Creating a surround on
page 371 . To open the Picture Properties panel, see
Setting surround element properties on page 372 .
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a picture element
and click Properties.
2. Click the General tab and click Browse.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a
file, and click Open.
4. In the Picture Properties dialog box, enter a value
that represents the horizontal size of the picture in
the Width spin box and select a unit of
measurement from the list box.
PCI Geomatics
385

Geomatica® Focus
5. Enter a value that represents the vertical size of the
picture in the Height spin box.
6. Click OK.
See also
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
About north arrows
North arrows are graphical representations indicating
where north is in the Area. By default, north arrows are
placed vertically in the Area, which usually points north,
except in a rotated Area (Raster Up). When you create a
north arrow in a rotated Area, the north arrow is rotated
by the amount set in the Area properties. For more
information, see About Rotated Rasters on page 34 .
North arrows are anchored to a neatline or to an Area if a
neatline is not set, and are positioned in reference to that
anchor.
Focus offers three arrow types:
• True North: the arrow points to geographic north
pole where the lines of longitude converge.
• Magnetic North: the arrow points to the magnetic
north pole, which is the direction indicated by a
magnetic compass.
• Grid North: the arrow points in a northerly direction
along a grid line parallel to the central meridian of
the Area projection. This arrow is most often used in
topographic maps.
PCI Geomatics
You can add more than one north arrow to an Area and
set each arrow property separately. Several default
symbols are available; you can also use the Symbol
Editor (see Designing a symbol on page 360 ) to design
your own.
To add a north arrow to an Area, see Creating a surround
on page 371 . To open the North Arrow Properties dialog
box, see Setting surround element properties on page
372 .
To define a North Arrow, see:
• True North (see Setting the angle and style for a
true North arrow on page 386 )
• Magnetic North (see Setting the angle and style for
the magnetic north arrow on page 387 )
• Grid North (see Setting the angle and style for the
grid north arrow on page 388 )
• Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395
)
• Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on
page 397 )
Setting the angle and style for a true
North arrow
A True North arrow is a symbol that indicates the
direction of the geographic north pole in an Area. For
more information, see About north arrows on page 386 .
1. From the Maps tree, right-click an arrow element
and click Properties.
2. In the North Arrow Properties dialog box, click the
386

Geomatica® Focus
True North tab and enable the Show true north
arrow check box.
3. Enter a value that represents the counterclockwise
rotation that you want to apply so that the arrow
points north in the Angle spin box and choose a
unit of angular measurement from the list box.
4. Click the Style button and create an arrow style
(see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
5. Enable the Show arrow label check box and
choose a label from the list box.
If you want to customize the position of the label,
click Advanced.
6. Click the Style button and create a font style (see
Selecting a style on page 354 ).
7. Click OK.
See also
Setting the angle and style for the magnetic north arrow
on page 387
Setting the angle and style for the grid north arrow on
page 388
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Adjusting the position of a north
arrow label
1. In the North Arrow Properties dialog box, click the
True North tab and click Advanced.
2. In the North arrow heading - Advanced dialog
box, enter a value that represents the space
between the arrow and the label in the Distance
from arrow spin box and choose a unit of
measurement from the list box.
3. Enable one of the following Angle options:
• Custom: adjusts the angle of the label. Enter
a value that represents the rotation that you
want in the spin box and choose a unit of
measurement from the list box.
• Perpendicular: changes the angle of the label
so it is vertical to the baseline of the map
• Parallel: changes the angle of the label so it
coincides with the baseline of the map
4. Enable one of the following Alignment options:
• Left: places the label to the left of the arrow
• Center: centers the label over the arrow
• Right: places the label to the right of the arrow
5. Click OK.
Setting the angle and style for the
magnetic north arrow
1. In the North Arrow Properties dialog box, click the
Magnetic North tab and enable the Show
magnetic north arrow check box.
2. Enter a value that represents the counterclockwise
rotation that you want to apply so that the arrow
points north in the Angle box and choose a unit of
angular measurement from the list box.
3. Click the Style button and create an arrow style
PCI Geomatics
387

Geomatica® Focus
(see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
4. Enable the Show arrow label check box and
choose a label from the list box.
If you want to customize the position of the label,
click Advanced.
5. Click the Style button and create a font style (see
Selecting a style on page 354 ).
6. Click OK.
See also
Setting the angle and style for a true North arrow on page
386
Setting the angle and style for the grid north arrow on
page 388
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Setting the angle and style for the grid
north arrow
1. In the North Arrow Properties dialog box, click the
Grid North tab and enable the Show grid north
arrow check box.
2. Enter a value that represents the counterclockwise
rotation that you want to apply so that the arrow
points north in the Angle box and choose a unit of
angular measurement from the list box.
3. Click the Style button and create an arrow style
(see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
4. Enable the Show arrow label check box and
choose a label from the list box.
If you want to customize the position of the label,
click Advanced.
5. Click the Style button and create a font style (see
Selecting a style on page 354 ).
6. Click OK.
See also
Setting the angle and style for a true North arrow on page
386
Setting the angle and style for the magnetic north arrow
on page 387
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
About scale bars
A scale bar is a visual aid to help you measure actual
ground distances in an Area. It is marked with
measurement units in proportion to the scale of the Area.
Scale bars are anchored to a neatline or to an Area if a
neatline is not set and are positioned in reference to that
anchor.
You can create two types of scale bars:
PCI Geomatics
388

Geomatica® Focus
• Line and Tick
• Bar
If you want to show two different scales, such as
kilometers and miles, you must create two separate scale
bars. If you want both scale bars lined up at zero, you
must align them manually.
To add a scale bar to an Area, see Creating a surround
on page 371 . To open the Scale Bar Properties panel,
see Setting surround element properties on page 372 .
The look of a scale bar is determined by its:
• General properties (see Determining the style and
position of the title for the scale bar on page 389 )
• Scale bar type (see Selecting a scale bar type on
page 390 )
• Division (see Setting the divisions for the scale bar
on page 390 )
• Subdivision (see Setting subdivisions for a scale bar
on page 392 )
• Style (see Designing a Line and Tick scale bar on
page 393 )
• Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395
)
• Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on
page 397 )
PCI Geomatics
Determining the style and position of
the title for the scale bar
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a scale bar and click
Properties.
2. In the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the
General tab and enable the Show title check box.
3. Type a title for the scale bar in the Show title box.
By default, the title is the current scale in the Area.
4. Click the Style button and create a font style of the
scale bar title (see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
5. Enable one of the following options for the title
placement:
• Above: displays the title on top of the scale
bar
• Below: displays the title under the scale bar
6. Enable a title Alignment option.
7. Enter a value that represents the space between
the title and the scale bar in the Distance from
scale bar box, and choose a unit of measurement
from the list box.
8. Click OK.
See also
Selecting a scale bar type on page 390
Setting the divisions for the scale bar on page 390
Setting subdivisions for a scale bar on page 392
389

Geomatica® Focus
Designing a Line and Tick scale bar on page 393
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Selecting a scale bar type
1. From the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the
Scale bar type tab.
2. Enable one of the following options:
• Line and Tick : uses a Line and Tick scale
bar.
• Single bar: uses a scale bar type with one row
• Double bar: uses a scale bar type with two
rows
• Triple bar: use a scale bar type with three
rows
3. Click OK.
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Setting the divisions for the scale bar
A scale bar is separated into sections called divisions.
Divisions represent the actual ground distances as
displayed in an Area. To provide a greater degree of
accuracy, you can provide smaller increments by
subdividing a division, as shown in the following example.
Divisions and subdivisions can display headings that
indicate the distance in the selected measurement unit.
See also
Determining the style and position of the title for the scale
bar on page 389
Setting the divisions for the scale bar on page 390
Setting subdivisions for a scale bar on page 392
Designing a Line and Tick scale bar on page 393
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
PCI Geomatics
1. From the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the
Division tab and enable the Automatic divisions
check box.
If you want to manually set the number of divisions,
disable the Automatic divisions check box, enter
the number of divisions that you want in the
Number of divisions spin box, enter a value that
represents the real distances on the ground that the
division covers in the Division size spin box, and
390

Geomatica® Focus
choose a unit of measurement.
If you want to display a unit of measurement on the
scale bar and set which tick represents zero, click
Advanced.
2. Enable the Show headings check box.
3. Click the Style button and create a heading font
style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
4. Enable one of the following Placement options:
• Top: places the headings on top of the
divisions
• Bottom: places the headings under the
divisions
• For the Line and Tick scale bar type, ticks are
placed on the same side as the headings.
5. Enter a value that represents the space between
the headings and scale bar in the Distance from
scale bar spin box and choose a unit of
measurement from the list box.
6. Click OK.
See also
Determining the style and position of the title for the scale
bar on page 389
Selecting a scale bar type on page 390
Setting subdivisions for a scale bar on page 392
Designing a Line and Tick scale bar on page 393
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Labeling a scale bar with a unit of
measurement and setting a zero tick
You can specify where a unit of measurement is
displayed on a scale bar and which tick represents zero.
1. From the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the
Division tab, disable the Automatic divisions
check box, and click Advanced.
2. In the Scalebar Divisions - Advanced dialog box,
enable any of the following check boxes:
• Place units label at the start of scale bar:
displays a unit of measurement to the left of
the scale bar. Choose a unit of measurement
from the Label list box.
• Place units label at the end of scale bar:
displays a unit of measurement to the right of
the scale bar. Choose a unit of measurement
from the Label list box.
3. Click the Style button and create a label font style
(see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
4. Enter a number of the tick on your scale bar where
PCI Geomatics
391

Geomatica® Focus
you want the zero mark to appear in the Zero is at
tick spin box.
5. Click OK.
Setting subdivisions for a scale bar
To provide a greater degree of accuracy, you can provide
smaller increments by subdividing a division.
the headings and scale bar in the Distance from
scale bar spin box and choose a unit of
measurement from the list box.
7. Click OK.
See also
Determining the style and position of the title for the scale
bar on page 389
Selecting a scale bar type on page 390
Setting the divisions for the scale bar on page 390
Designing a Line and Tick scale bar on page 393
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
1. From the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the
Subdivisions tab and enable the Show
subdivisions check box.
2. Enter the number of subdivisions you want in the
scale bar in the Number of subdivisions spin box.
If you want to specify how many and which divisions
to subdivide, click Advanced.
3. Enable the Show headings check box.
4. Click the Style button and create a font heading
style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ).
5. Enable a heading Placement option.
6. Enter a value that represents the space between
Specifying which divisions to
subdivide
You can choose the number of subdivisions you want in a
scale bar and where to show the subdivisions.
For example, one subdivision in the scale bar can be
displayed in the second division, as shown in the
following illustration.
PCI Geomatics
392

Geomatica® Focus
You can also choose the colors for a scale bar pattern:
1. From the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the
Subdivision tab and click Advanced.
2. In Scalebar Subdivisions Advanced dialog box,
enter the number of divisions you want to subdivide
in the Divisions to subdivide spin box.
3. Enter the number of the division where you want to
begin showing the subdivisions in the Starting at
division spin box.
4. Click OK.
Designing a Line and Tick scale bar
For a Line and Tick scale bar, you can determine the
color, thickness, and height of the ticks. For a Single,
Double, or Triple scale bar, you can determine the color
and pattern of the divisions and subdivisions, and the
height and the outline.
For example, in a Line and Tick scale bar, the ticks can
overlap the scale bar as shown:
1. In the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the
Scale Bar Type tab and enable the Tick and Line
option.
2. Click the Style tab.
3. In the Scalebar area, click the Style button and
create a style for the bar (see Selecting a style on
page 354 ).
If you want the ticks to overlap the scale bar, enable
the Center ticks vertically on scale bar check box.
4. In the Division Ticks area, click the Style button
and create a division ticks style (see Selecting a
style on page 354 ).
5. Enter a value that represents the length of a division
tick in the Tick height spin box.
6. In the Subdivision Ticks area, click the Style
button and create a subdivision ticks style (see
Selecting a style on page 354 ).
7. Enter a value that represents the length of the
subdivision tick in the Tick height spin box.
8. Click OK.
Designing a single, double, or triple
PCI Geomatics
393

Geomatica® Focus
scale bar
1. In the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the
Scale Bar Type tab, enable the Single bar, Double
bar, or Triple bar option, and click the Style tab.
2. In the Colors area, click any section box and
choose a color from the color palette.
3. Enter a value that represents the total height of all
sections in the scale bar in the Scale bar height
spin box and choose a unit of measurement from
the list box.
For a triple-bar style, you can set the height of the
middle row differently than the top and bottom rows
by entering a value representing the height of the
middle row of the scale bar in the Middle section
height spin box.
4. Enable the Show outline check box and click the
Style button to create an outline style (see
Selecting a style on page 354 ).
5. Click OK.
See also
Determining the style and position of the title for the scale
bar on page 389
Selecting a scale bar type on page 390
Setting the divisions for the scale bar on page 390
Setting subdivisions for a scale bar on page 392
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Adding a map title to an area
You can add a title and subtitle to an Area, adjust their
positions, and change their font styles. The title and
subtitle are anchored to a neatline or to the Area if a
neatline is not set and positioned in reference to that
anchor.
To add a title and subtitle to an Area, see Creating a
surround on page 371 . To open the Title Properties
panel, see Setting surround element properties on page
372 .
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a title element and
click Properties.
2. Click the General tab and type a title for the Area in
the Title box.
3. Click the Style button and create a font style (see
Selecting a style on page 354 ).
4. Enable the Subtitle check box and type a subtitle in
the box.
If you want to change the font of the subtitle, click
the Style button and create a style (see Selecting a
style on page 354 ).
5. Enter a value that represents the space between
the title and subtitle in the Spacing from title spin
box and choose a unit of measurement from the list
box.
PCI Geomatics
394

Geomatica® Focus
6. Enable one of the following Alignment options:
• Left: aligns the title and subtitle to the left
• Center: centers the title and subtitle
• Right: aligns the title and subtitle to the right
7. Click OK.
See also
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Adding text to a surround
You can include a paragraph of text with the other Map
surround elements. You can set a text style, import text
from another file, set the position of a paragraph, and
change the Quick Style format of the paragraph text. A
paragraph element is anchored to a neatline or to the
Area if a neatline is not set and positioned in reference to
that anchor. Multiple styles are not allowed in individual
text elements.
You can also rotate a paragraph. Text remains
perpendicular to the baseline of the element.
To add a text to an Area, see Creating a surround on
page 371 . To open the Paragraph Properties panel, see
Setting surround element properties on page 372 .
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a paragraph element
and click Properties.
2. Click the General tab and type in the Text box.
If you want to change the font of the text, click the
Style button and create a style (see Selecting a
style on page 354 ).
3. Enter a value that represents the angle of rotation
you want to apply to the text in the Angle spin box
and choose a unit of angular measurement from the
list box.
If you want to import text from a text file, click
Import Text, locate and select a file in the File
Selector dialog box, and click Save.
4. Click OK.
See also
Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Setting the updating behavior
Depending on the type of surround element, the
positioning method differs:
For Neatline: The position of a neatline is calculated
relative to the extents of the Area.
For Border and Grid: The position of a border and grid
is calculated relative to the extents of a neatline. If no
neatline is used, the positions are calculated relative to
the extents of the Area.
PCI Geomatics
395

Geomatica® Focus
For Legend, Picture, North Arrow, Scale bar, Title,
and Paragraph: Elements are anchored to a neatline
and are positioned in reference to that anchor. If no
neatline is used, the surround element positions are
calculated relative to the extents of the Area. The location
of a surround element is determined by the Offset, which
is the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) coordinates
measured from the anchor. You can see the neatline or
the Area represented by a rectangle with white handles.
The surround element is represented by a rectangle with
gray handles. You can anchor any one of the surround
element handles to any one of the neatline or Area
handles. To change the location of a surround element,
you can drag the surround element by its handle, or you
can enter new values.
If you want to modify the neatline or Area after you have
set the properties for the surround elements, you can set
how they behave:
• Reposition: the surround element automatically
adjust its position in correlation with a neatline (or
Area), but retains its original settings.
• Regenerate: the surround element is recalculated
and positioned based on new settings for a neatline
(or Area). This behavior is useful for the neatline,
border, grid, and scale bar elements.
• Do nothing: the surround element does not adjust
to the new settings and remains as originally
positioned.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a surround element
and click Properties.
2. In the surround element Properties dialog box, click
the Position tab.
3. In the Updating area, choose how you want the
PCI Geomatics
surround element to react when a neatline (or Area)
changes position from the When neatline/area
moves list box.
4. Choose how you want the surround element to
react when the scale of a neatline (or Area)
changes from the When area/neatline is rescaled
list box.
5. In the When area/neatline is resized list box,
choose how you want the surround element to react
when a neatline (or Area) is enlarged or reduced in
size.
6. Click Apply.
Setting the offset (not available for
neatline, border, and grid)
1. In the Offset area, enter a value for the horizontal
position in the X spin box and a value for the vertical
position in the Y spin box.
You can also click a gray handle and drag the
surround element into position.
2. In the preview area, click a gray handle.
3. Click a white handle to determine the anchor point.
By default, the origin of a starting point of a grid is the
lower-left corner of a neatline.
Setting a grid starting point
1. Enable the Use starting point check box.
2. Enter an X-coordinate for the new starting point in
the X spin box.
3. Enter a Y-coordinate for the new starting point in the
396

Geomatica® Focus
Y spin box.
2. In the surround element Properties dialog box, click
the Quick Style tab.
3. Select a custom Quick Style and click the Remove
QS button.
Creating a custom quick style
As you set the properties for surround items, you build a
Current Working Style. You can save the settings for a
surround element in a Quick Style.
Understanding Grids
Selecting an existing quick style
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a surround element
and click Properties.
2. In the surround element Properties dialog box, click
the Quick Style tab.
3. Select a Quick Style.
4. Click OK.
Removing a custom quick style from
the list
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a surround element
and click Properties.
PCI Geomatics
When you select a Quick Style, the settings are copied to
the Current Working Style and are applied to the
surround item. If you change the properties, the changes
are applied to the Current Working Style, not to the Quick
Style.
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a surround element
and click Properties.
2. In the surround element Properties dialog box,
make changes to the properties of the surround
element.
3. Click the Quick Style tab and click the Add QS
button.
If you want to rename the new Quick Style,
double-click it, type a name, and press Enter.
Creating an index for a project, you
must provide
Indexing a Map means you extract information, sort it as
text information, and present it as part of a surround. For
example, you can create an index of streets, cities,
397

Geomatica® Focus
buildings, or parks, or a combination of these.
An index lists the Map locations and features. The names
of the items are usually listed in alphabetical order. You
can use combinations of letters and numbers that
correspond to grid locations on the Map.
1. Index Information: All content used in the index
matching specified conditions. You can compose a
list of these items.
2. Information: A reference that identifies a location
for each item in the index, information matches
specified conditions. You can specify grid
information.
Adding a default index to a map
1. On the toolbar, click Map View Mode.
Note: The image must be in Map View Mode for the
Indexation dialog box to be accessible.
2. From the Maps tree, right-click an Area and click
Indexation.
3. In the Indexation dialog box, click OK.
Indexation properties
You can set the properties for an index, including filters
and lists.
and building names. You can also edit redundant words,
such as #street# from appearing in the index.
Index List:
Generates an alphabetical listing of index entries with
grid locations. You can add, delete, and modify list
entries. Verification Mode, when enabled, is used to
interactively locate a list entry within the current Map.
An index is generated in its own area on a Map, which is
designated as Indexation. There is only one layer in an
index area.
A grid created by the index is also generated in its own
area on the Map and is designated as Index. There is
only one layer in a grid area.
Setting general parameters for an
index
You can set the number of columns, column spacing, and
RepCode for an index.
Filtering:
Specifies the type of information you want to include in an
index. For example, you may want to include only road
PCI Geomatics
398

Geomatica® Focus
Changing headings, entries, and delimiters in the
RepCodes area of the General page.
1. On the toolbar, click Map View Mode.
Note: The image must be in Map View Mode for the
Indexation dialog box to be accessible.
2. From the Maps tree, right-click an Area and click
Indexation.
3. In the Indexation dialog box, click the General tab.
4. Enter a value that represents the number of index
columns in the Number of columns spin box.
5. Enter a value that represents the width of the index
columns in the Column width spin box.
6. Enter a value that represents the spacing between
columns in the Inter-column spin box and choose a
unit of measurement from the list box.
7. Enter a value that represents the spacing between
items in the index in the Inter item spin box.
8. In the Repcode area, enter a code in any of the
following boxes:
• Index Item
• Headings
• Delimiter
• Index Border
You can also click Browse for the corresponding
box and select a RepCode.
If you want to include a border, enable the Show
index border check box.
9. Click OK.
Change these parts of an index with the Indexation
properties dialog box
Adding or change the index title
1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Title tab.
2. Enable the Show index title check box and type a
title in the box.
3. Type a RepCode in the Index title RepCode box.
You can also find a title code by clicking Browse
and selecting a RepCodes in the Browse
RepCodes dialog box.
4. Click OK.
Opening an indexation parameter file
PCI Geomatics
399

Geomatica® Focus
1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Title tab.
2. In the Parameter File area, click Load.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a
file, and click Open.
When accessing an existing parameter file, it must be
used with the same Area for which it was originally
created. If you select another Area, the settings are reset
to the default.
Setting up an index
The Indexation process requires a grid to properly
reference the location of text. The grid defines the
location of the text that is to be extracted.
1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Grid tab.
2. In the Extents section, do one of the following:
a. Accept the default values in the X min, X max,
Y min, and Y max boxes.
b. Type a value in one or more of the following
boxes:
• X min
• X max
• Y min
• Y max
3. Click the Display Grid check box.
Setting the spacing for rows and
columns
PCI Geomatics
You can set the spacing of columns and rows; the
spacings correspond to the height of the rows and to the
width of the columns.
1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Grid tab.
2. In the Settings section, do one of the following:
a. Accept the default values in the
Spacing/Rows and the Spacing/Columns
boxes.
b. Type a value in one or both of the following
boxes:
• Spacing/Rows
• Spacing/Columns
The row and the column counts are automatically
determined by the spacing.
3. Click one of the following:
• Lock Spacing to lock the spacing values.
• Lock Count to lock the count values.
• No Lock.
Setting the count for rows and
columns
You can set the number of rows and columns.
1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Grid tab.
2. In the Settings section, do one of the following:
a. Accept the default values in the Count/Rows
and the Count/Column boxes.
b. Type a value in one or both of the following
boxes:
• Count/Rows
• Count/Columns
400

Geomatica® Focus
The row and the column spacings are automatically
determined by the count.
3. Click one of the following:
• Lock Spacing to lock the spacing values.
• Lock Count to lock the count values.
• No Lock.
Setting headings for rows and
columns
1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Grid tab.
2. In the Settings section, do the following:
• In the Headings/Rows cell, choose Alphabetic
or Numeric.
• In the Headings/Columns cell, choose
Alphabetic or Numeric.
Setting a RepCode for a grid heading
1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Grid tab.
2. Click Browse to the right of the Headings
RepCode box, select a RepCode from the Browse
RepCodes dialog box, and click OK.
Setting a RepCode for grid lines
1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Grid tab.
2. Click Browse to the right of the Line RepCode box,
select a RepCode from the Browse RepCodes
dialog box, and click OK.
PCI Geomatics
Filtering an index
You can specify the type of information you want to
include in an index. For example, you may only want road
and building names to appear in the index. You can also
exclude redundant words from the index.
1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Filtering
tab.
2. Select any of the following from the left-hand list:
• RST
• Group
• RepCode
3. Click the right-arrow button.
Making a word exclusion list
A word exclusion list defines words, numbers, or a
combination of words and numbers that you do not want
in the index. When building an index, all lines of text on a
Map are scanned. Lines matching specified words in the
word exclusion list are ignored.
The word exclusion list is not case-sensitive or
space-sensitive. It does, however, pay attention to accent
marks. A word cannot be duplicated in the list.
1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Filtering
tab.
2. Enable the Word exclusion list check box.
3. Click the Add button.
4. Click in the text box, type a word, and press Enter.
If you want to remove a word from the exclusion list,
401

Geomatica® Focus
click the word and click the Remove button.
5. Click OK.
Generating an index list
You can generate an alphabetical listing of index entries
with grid locations. You can also add, delete, and modify
list entries. Verification Mode, when enabled, interactively
locates a list entry within the current Map.
Note: If you are using a grid element in the project, only
the text inside a grid is added to the index.
1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Index
List tab.
2. Click Build.
The Item count box shows the number of index
entries listed. If you want to add an item to the index
list, click Add Selection , click in the new row, type
an index entry, and press Enter.
Once you have generated an index list, you can edit the
information.
To...
Sort an index
alphabetically
Delete an item from the
index list
Add alphabetical headings
to the index items
PCI Geomatics
Do the following:
Click Sort.
Select a row and click
Delete Row.
Click Add Headings.
To...
Delete index headings
Rename an item in the list
Re-generate an index list
Verification Mode
Do the following:
Click Delete Headings.
Click in a row, type a new
name, and press Enter.
Click OK.
You can verify an index list by selecting an entry. Focus
displays the precise location on the Map where the text is
located. If a location is not within the view pane, the
Indexation module shifts to where the text is located. The
layer where text is located must be active for the
Verification tool to work properly.
Using the Verification Mode option
1. In the view pane, set a zoom factor that will make
the text easy to see.
2. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Index List
tab.
3. Enable the Verification mode check box.
4. Select the row for the index entry you want to verify.
Setting advanced indexation
properties
You can set attribute and prefix list properties for an
index.
Attributes
402

Geomatica® Focus
You can add attribute information to the entries in an
index. For example, you can define a RepCode for cities
with a population attribute, and include the population
values in the index, as follows:
Ottawa (300,000)..................................D4
1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Index List
tab.
2. Click Advanced.
3. In the Indexation Advanced dialog box, enable the
Show Attributes check box.
4. Select an attribute from the Select attribute to use
list.
5. Select one of the following formats from the
Attribute display format list:
• Keep format : displays a value as 5, 12
• Integer : displays this value as 5 if a value of
5, 12 is displayed in the index
6. Click OK.
7. Click in the Attributes column for the cell where
you want to add the attribute information and type
the attribute information in parentheses.
8. Press Enter.
9. Click OK.
Prefixes List
The prefix list words are entered in an index in reverse
order. For example, if the word "Lake" appears in the
Swap prefixes list, then "Lake Rice" appears in the index
as "Rice, Lake." Index entries are sorted according to the
most meaningful names.
PCI Geomatics
The prefixes list follows a set of rules
1. Words to be swapped must be specified in the list.
The Indexation module looks for text lines beginning
with the specified words.
2. If a word is specified in the prefixes list, then the
Indexation module looks for text lines in the view
pane beginning with that word. Lines containing
only the specified word cannot be swapped.
3. When two or more words are swapped, they must
be specified in the prefixes list if you want them to
appear in the index.
4. If the prefixes list contains a repeated word, the
Indexation process considers only the longest
prefix. For example, when "Township of" and
"Township" are in the same list, only "Township of"
is used. A word cannot be duplicated in the list.
5. If the prefixes list is empty, the Swap Prefixes option
has no effect.
6. The prefixes list is not case-sensitive or
space-sensitive, but it is aware of accent marks.
Creating or editing a prefixes list
1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Index
List tab.
2. Click Advanced.
3. In the Indexation Advanced dialog box, click the
Add button, type a word, and press Enter.
If you want to delete a word from the list, select the
word and click the Remove button.
403

Geomatica® Focus
If you want to copy the word exclusion list to the
prefixes list, click the Filtering tab and click Copy
exclusion list.
4. Click OK.
Using the Swap Prefixes option
1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Index
List tab.
2. Click Swap Prefixes.
3. Click OK.
Saving an indexation file
You can save your index settings.
1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Title tab.
2. In the Parameter File area, click Save.
3. In the File Selector dialog box, select a folder.
4. Type a name in the File name box.
If you want to overwrite an existing indexation file,
select it.
5. Click Save.
Adding text to an index
You can add text to an index and set the color and font.
The text exists as an overlay on top of an image or vector
layer. The text is different than a title; a title is a surround
element on a Map, which is associated with a single area.
This area is called the application area.
PCI Geomatics
Setting the text color
1. On the Focus Display toolbar, click the Set Text
Color arrow and choose a color from the palette.
2. If you want to choose a custom color, click More
Colors and create a color in the Change Color
dialog box.
Setting the text style
1. On the Display toolbar, click the Set Text Style
arrow and choose a style.
If you want to choose a custom style, click More
Styles and create a style in the Style Selector
dialog box.
Using the New Text tool
1. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Text button.
2. In the Text Editing Tools dialog box, enter a value
that represents the text angle in the Angle spin box,
and choose a unit of measurement from the list box.
3. Select a font style from the list.
4. Click OK.
Printing a map
404

Geomatica® Focus
You can print a Map. The Print Setup dialog box specifies
the options for printing your publication.
Vector layers placed below a raster transparency in the
Maps tree appear in the view pane but are not supported
for printing. To print all layers as they appear in the view
pane, you can export the map to a file with Export Map
and print that file separately. For more information about
exporting a map, see Opening the Export Map dialog box
on page 407 .
• From the File menu, click Print Map.
Selecting printer options
If you have more than one printer available, use the
Name list to choose a printer. If you want to use a printer
driver that is not on the list, you must add it.
The Print to File option saves the project data as a .prn
file. This is useful if you want to print a Map to a remote
printer. For more export options when printing to a file,
see Opening the Export Map dialog box on page 407 )
Note: Other printer and paper properties can be set using
the corresponding Map Properties dialog box.
To choose how your printer handles a print document,
click Properties. Use the Document Properties dialog
box to set paper size, orientation, print duplexing, and
color appearance.
PCI Geomatics
Selecting page layout options
When you print a Map, the entire publication is printed by
default. You can also print large maps on more than one
page, and assemble the parts after they are printed.
1. From the Print Setup dialog box, click Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, choose an overlap option
from the Overlap list box.
The overlap margin for each page is 6.25 mm (1/4
inch).
3. Choose one of the following options from the
Scaling list box:
• Actual Size : automatically prints the number
of pages required for the entire publication
• Fit to Page : scales the Map to fit on a single
sheet of paper
• Print Screen : prints only what is currently
displayed in the view pane
4. Choose one of the following options from the
Wysiwyg list box:
• As Screen : prints the Map according to
selected Wysiwyg options
• Full Wysiwyg : prints the Map with full
representation of lines, patterns, and text
5. Choose an image quality from the Print Quality list
box.
6. Click OK.
Printing color separations
You can separate the colors in a publication for
405

Geomatica® Focus
commercial printing. Most color separation processes are
based on the colors cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
(CMYK).
You can define spot (individual) colors in the Change
Color dialog box color palette. In color separations, one
plate or film is produced for each color. The information
for each plate is stored in a .ps file.
• From the Print Setup dialog box, click Color
Separation.
Even if spot colors are defined in a color palette, only the
colors actually applied to features in the RST are listed in
the color list box.
Separate Color:
Enables all other items in the dialog box.
Negative Image
Inverts the colors in an image. By default, the color
separations process produces a normal image. Negative
printing is useful if you want to produce films for the Map.
Mirror:
Specifies that the film emulsion faces down. Emulsion is
the coating of light-sensitive material on a piece of film.
Convert to CMYK:
Separates all spot colors of a color palette into CMYK
PCI Geomatics
colors. Separating colors in only four plates avoids
producing an unnecessary number of plates.
Reg Marks and/or Crop Marks:
Prints registration marks or crop marks on plates, or both.
Registration marks serve as guides to perfectly align
different color separation plates. Crop marks are useful
when trimming the page to the proper size. Both marks
are displayed slightly outside the graphics page extent.
Space for these marks is added to the extents of the
map, even if they are disabled.
Label Marks:
Prints a label containing the names of the colors used in
the separation process. This label is displayed outside
the Crop Marks.
Color column:
All spot colors listed in the color list box are removed
from the list, since they are all converted to CMYK colors.
Frequency:
For each color in the list box, define the Frequency of the
grid.
Process color separations are printed using grids of black
dots for each color. The frequency in lines per inch
defines how close the dots appear. The higher the
frequency, the closer the dots and the darker the color.
406

Geomatica® Focus
Angle:
Defines the orientation of the grid screen or the dots. For
each color in the list box, define the angle of the grid in
degrees.
Overprint:
Enables the Overprint color option for each color in the
list box.
Overprinting is used when two overlapping objects of
different color are printed on two different plates. For
example, when creating color separations for a
magenta-colored circle on a cyan background, the cyan
plate would have a white circle knocked out where the
magenta circle prints. The cyan and magenta do not mix;
however, you can set the magenta to print over the cyan.
This results in the circle not being knocked out of the
cyan. The two colors overprint in that area, resulting in a
purple circle on a cyan background.
When a color is selected to overprint, an X appears in the
Overprint column of the color list box beside the color and
the color is printed on a corresponding plate. No holes
corresponding to an overlapping color will be knocked
out.
If you set color frequency, angle, and overprint options
individually, you must select all the colors you want to
process. However, if you click on the Convert to CMYK
option, all four basic colors are automatically selected.
You can interrupt a print job at any time by clicking
PCI Geomatics
Cancel.
Note: For UNIX systems, select the PostScript Level 2
driver. Color separations on UNIX are available for this
driver only. The color separations information is printed to
a single PostScript (.ps) file, which can be printed by
most commercial shops.
Opening the Export Map dialog box
Maps (see Starting a new map on page 365 ) and for
charts (see Viewing data as a chart on page 337 ) can be
saved as a file.
To open the Export Map dialog box
• From the File menu, click Export Map.
To lock the record and field selection in the
chart
1. See Creating a chart from the layer on page 339 .
2. In the Chart dialog box, click Export Chart.
To open the Export Chart dialog box
1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box, type
a path and file name for the file to export in the File
box.
You can also click Browse to locate and select a
407

Geomatica® Focus
location.
2. Choose a file format from the Save as type list box.
3. In the Options area, set the parameters, depending
on the following format types:
Adobe Illustrator:
JPEG:
JPEG 2000:
PCIDSK:
TIFF:
BMP:
HP RTL:
EMF:
4. Click OK.
see Exporting a map or
chart as an Adobe
Illustrator file on page 408
see Exporting a map or
chart as a JPEG on page 408
see Exporting a map or
chart to a JPEG 2000 file on
page 409
see Exporting a map or
chart to PCIDSK on page 409
see Exporting a map or
chart to TIFF on page 409
see Exporting a map or
chart to BMP on page 410
see Exporting a map or
chart to an HP RTL file on
page 410
see Exporting a map or
chart to EMF on page 411
Exporting a map or chart as an Adobe
Illustrator file
PCI Geomatics
The .ai file format is the native format for Adobe Illustrator
and is used primarily for vectors.
Exporting a map or chart as a JPEG
The .jpg format is best used for continuous tone images,
such as photographs. It uses lossy compression, which
means that some data is discarded to reduce the file size.
Once a file is compressed with lossy compression, the
original data cannot be recovered.
The Quality measure is the used to control the balance
between the quality of the image and the reduction in the
file size. The higher the Quality value, the less data is
discarded. You must decide a balance between file size
and image quality, which usually falls between 0 and 80.
Values over 80 usually produce an increased file size
with little visible improvement in image quality.
1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box,
choose JPEG (.jpg) from the Save as type list box.
2. Enter a value that represents the resolution
produced by the display or printer in the DPI spin
box.
The closer the match between the resolution of the
file and the display or printer, the better the quality
of the results.
3. Enter a value that represents the image quality in
the Quality box.
The lower the number, the lower the quality of the
image (more data discarded) and the smaller the file
408

Geomatica® Focus
size.
4. Click OK.
Exporting a map or chart to a JPEG
2000 file
The .jp2 format reduces a file size of extremely large
images. It uses wavelet compression that produces
highly compressed files, while retaining better image
quality.
Lossless compression reduces the file size by reducing
data redundancies. With lossless compression, the
original data is restored when a file is decompressed.
With lossy compression, some data is discarded to
reduce the file size, which means that the original data
cannot be recovered when the file is decompressed.
The Quality measure is used to control the balance
between the quality of the image and the reduction in the
file size. The higher the Quality value, the less data is
discarded. Lossy compression with a Quality value of 100
is virtually the same as choosing lossless compression.
You must decide a balance between file size and image
quality, which usually falls between 0 and 20. Values over
20 produce an increased file size with little visible
improvement in image quality.
1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box,
choose JPEG 2000 (.jp2) from the Save as type list
box.
2. Enter a value that represents the resolution
produced by the display or printer in the DPI spin
PCI Geomatics
box.
The closer the match between the resolution of the
file and the display or printer, the better the quality
of the results.
3. Enable one of the following options:
• Lossless: uses lossless compression
• Lossy: uses lossy compression. Enter a value
that represents the image quality in the
Quality box.
4. Click OK.
Exporting a map or chart to PCIDSK
The .pix format is the native file format for the PCI
Geomatics Geomatica product line.
1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box,
choose PCIDSK (.pix) from the Save as type list
box.
2. Enter a value that represents the resolution
produced by the display or printer in the DPI spin
box.
The closer the match between the resolution of the
file and the display or printer, the better the quality
of the results.
3. Click OK.
Exporting a map or chart to TIFF
A .tif is the standard image exchange format. It is a
platform-independent file format used for bitmap
graphics. It offers lossless and lossy compression
409

Geomatica® Focus
options.
PackBits is a lossless compression method. It reduces a
file size by reducing data redundancies. With lossless
compression, the original data is restored when a file is
decompressed.
JPEG is a lossy compression method. It reduces the file
size by discarding some data. Once a file is compressed
using lossy compression, the original data cannot be
recovered. In any lossy compression method, you trade
the quality of the image for a reduction in the file size.
More compression means a lower quality image. You
must decide a balance between file size and image
quality.
1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box,
choose TIFF (*.tif) from the Save as type list box.
2. Enter a value that represents the resolution
produced by the display or printer in the DPI spin
box.
The closer the match between the resolution of the
file and the display or printer, the better the quality
of the results.
3. Choose one of the following options from the
Compression list box:
• PACKBITS : uses lossless compression
• JPEG : uses lossy compression. Enter a value
that represents the image quality in the
Quality box.
4. Click OK.
Exporting a map or chart to BMP
PCI Geomatics
The .bmp file format is the native bitmap file format for
the Microsoft Windows operating system.
1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box,
choose BMP (*.bmp) from the Save as type list
box.
2. Enter a value that represents the resolution
produced by the display or printer in the DPI spin
box.
The closer the match between the resolution of the
file and the display or printer, the better the quality
of the results.
3. Click OK.
Exporting a map or chart to an HP
RTL file
The .rtl format is used with printing devices that support
RTL, such as HP DesignJet printers. Using the .rtl format
can speed printing by saving the data in the printer
processing language. Because a printer does not have to
process an .rtl file, it can print the file upon receipt.
1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box,
choose HP RTL (.rtl) from the Save as type list
box.
2. Enter a value that represents the resolution
produced by the display or printer in the DPI spin
box.
The closer the match between the resolution of the
file and the display or printer, the better the quality
of the results.
410

Geomatica® Focus
3. Choose a printer type from the HP RTL Options list
box.
4. Choose a color or black-and-white option from the
Color list box.
5. Choose a dithering method from the Dither list box.
Dithering is a process that places pixels of different
colours together to create the illusion of a color that
is not available in the palette.
Editor.
2. Under the Style column, click the white style.
3. Click the Edit Style tab.
4. In the Values column beside Opacity, enter the
value 0.
5. Click OK.
If you want to save paper when using roll-fed
printers, enable the Print long edge first check
box. This option positions the file to make the
optimum use of the paper and generate the least
amount of waste.
6. Click OK.
Exporting a map or chart to EMF
The Microsoft Enhanced Metafile (.emf) is a vector
format that can also support bitmaps. It is compatible with
Microsoft Windows operating systems and is a good
format to use if you want to import the Map into a
Microsoft application.
Viewing overlapping layers from a
Web mapping service
When you open maps from a Web mapping service, the
data in the topmost layer in the Maps tree may obscure
all other maps. To view the map layers simultaneously,
you must edit the Opacity of the layers.
1. Right-click the map layer and select Representation
PCI Geomatics
411